You are on page 1of 370

ATP

INDEX
COPYRIGHT

2006

COPYRIGHT IS NOT CLAIMED AS TO ANY PART OF AN ORIGINAL WORK


PREPARED BY A UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT OFFICER OR EMPLOYEE AS
PART OF THAT PERSONS OFFICIAL DUTIES OR BY ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY
OFFICER OR EMPLOYEE AS PART OF THAT PERSONS DUTIES.
"ATP" is a registered trademark of Aircraft Technical Publishers. All original
authorship of ATP is protected under U.S. and foreign copyrights and is subject
to written license agreements between ATP and its Subscribers.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE
REPRODUCED, STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM, OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY
FORM BY ANY MEANS, ELECTRONIC, MECHANICAL, PHOTOCOPYING,
RECORDING OR OTHERWISE, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE
PUBLISHER.

rp~
NOTE
Please be

aware

that the material in this manual does not

follow the ATA code

standards, ATP has

strictly
format. In order to catalog them according to ATA
recoded them. Please see the example(s) below.

EXAM PLE
Man ufactu rers

ATP

Coding

Topic

Coding
20-95-00

20-95-00

00

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
AND APPROVED SUPPLIERS

20-95-11

20-95.00

11

GREASE AND LUBRICANTS

20-95-101

20.95.00

101

FLUIDS AND OILS

Customer Service

Aircraft Technical Publishers

6AM-5PM PST M-F

101 South Hill Drive

(800)227-4610

Brisbane, CA 94005

ATP Grid Index to Manufacturers Publications:

Raytheon Aircraft

Co.

125 Series 1-1000, Hawker 800,1000,800XP


Standard Practices Manual
Section

General

Topic
Information

Title Page
List of

Chapters (Table

of Contents)

Manufacturers Introduction
Record of Revisions
Record of

Temporary

Revisions

List of Effective

(Highlights of Changes)
Pages

Existing/Previous

ATA Numbers

Letter of Transmittal

Airframe

20.00.00

Systems
Airframe

Standard Practices

20.09.00

20

Torque Loading

Maintenance Practices

20.09.00

21

Retention of W

S Retaining Rings-Maint Practices

20.09.00

23

20.09.00

41

20.09.00

91

Self-Locking Nuts-Maintenance Practices


Maintenance Practices
Component Locking
Maint Practices
Flaring of Stainless Steel Tubes

20.09.00

141

Countersunk Head Bolts-Maintenance Practices

20.10.00

08

Application

20.10.00

31

Epoxide Primer
Control Cables (Examination
Rejection Criteria)

20.10.00

32

Control Cables (Corrosion Protection)

20.10.00

33

Stripping

20.10.00

34

Chemical Removal of

20.10.00

40

20.10.00

50

Vacu-Blasting with Dry Alumina Grit


Wiring Procedures and Repair
Temporary Revision No. 20-3
Application of Sodium Alginate Release Agent
Application of Urethane Finish to External Surface

20.10.00
20.10.00

75

20.10.00

228

06/22/2006

Reuse of

of Alorcom 1200

of Pain

Copyright

Maintenance Practices

Polysulphide (PRC)

Sealants

Aircraft Technical Publishers


BS

0900

ZP

Page

1 of

Section

Topic

20.10.00

354

Leak Testing Fluid

20.10.00

447

20.10.00

481

20.10.00

482

20.10.00

499

20.10.00

560

Flexible Seal Applications


Sealing Compound
Electrically Conducting Jointing Compounds
Application of Acid Resisting Paint
Pnls
Sealing of Perspex, Laminated Glass Windows
Renovation of Furnishing Materials

20.10.00

811

Polish Aircraft Skins (External)

20.10.00

1001

20.10.00

1002

20.10.00

1009

20.10.00

3003

20.10.00

3005

20.10.00

3008

20.10.00

3527

20.10.00

3528

20.10.00

3534

20.10.00

3537

20.10.00

4005

20.10.00

4007

20.10.00

4011

20.10.00

4012

20.10.00

4014

20.10.00

4016

Sealing Intgrl Fuel Tnks with Polysulfide Cmpnds


Areas Outside Intgrl Fuel Tnks
Sealing Prsr Cbns
Form-in-Place Seals for Weatherproofing
Aerodynamic Smoothing Sealant
High Temperature Sealants (Silcoset and Silastic)
Metal Filled Epoxies for Gap Filling
Ext Srfcs
Appl of Cold Curing Epxy Primer to Int
Application Flexible/Permeable Finish Intrnl Srfcs
App of Polyurthne Fin Enml for Overcoating Sealnts
Applctn of Antistatic Paint to Composite Materials
Bonding Silicone Rubbers
Bonding Rubber and P.T.F.E. to Perspex or Metal
Bonding w/Epoxy Adhesives for Non Structural Parts
Rubber Bonding Adhesive
Bonding with Contact Adhesive
Bonding with Scotch-Seal Metal Sealant 2084

20.10.00

4501

Shrink Fitting of Bolts. Bushes,

20.10.00

4507

20.10;.00

4553

20.10.00

5016

20.10.00

9053

20.101.00

9070

20.11..00

1040

20.11..00

1041

20.95.00

00

Locking of Threads with Anaerobic Adhesive


Retention of Bushes
Bearings by Liquid Sealant
Electrical Bonding
Degreasing of Metallic Materials
Preparation of Rubber Surfaces for Bonding
Very High Temperature Sealants
Precipitation Static (P-Static) Test
Consumable Materials-Approved Suppliers

20.95.00

11

Consumable Materials-Grease and Lubricants

20.95.00

101

Consumable Materials-Fluids and Oils

20.95.00

201

20.95.00

301

20.95.00

401

Release Agents
Cleaning Agents, Paint Strippers
Adhesives, Jointing and Sealing Compounds
Enamels, Lacquers, Paint, Primers and Varnishes

20.95.00

501

Chemical and Electro-Chemical Surface Finishes

20.95.00

601

Consumable Materials-Miscell

06/22/2006

Copyright

Pins, etc.

aneous

Materials

Aircraft Technical Publishers


BS

0900

ZP

Page

2 of

Secti on

Topi c
End of Index

06/22/2006

Copyright

Aircraft Technical Publishers


BS

0900

ZP

Page

3 of

NI FG.

INTRO

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

111)1,

25 Series

000,

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

850XP

Aircraft Maintenance Manual


20
Standard Practices Airframe

Chapter

Copyright
PIN: AMM 125/H-20
Issued:

April 1999

O 2006

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company. All rights

reserved.

Rev: 7
Dated: March 2006

Published

by

RAYTH EON AIRCRAFT COMPANY

P.O. Box 85

Wichita, Kansas
67201 -0085 USA

commodities, technology or software are subject to the US Export


Regulations. Diversion contrary to US law is prohibited. For guidance on export
control requirements, contact the Commerce Departments Bureau of Export Administration at 202482-4811 or visit the VS Department of Commerce website.
The

export

of these

Administration

RlyWKon
Aircraft Company

~mhr.tWUL

GAMA

General Aviation
Manufacturers Assoclatlon

RECORD OF REVISIONS

MFG REV
NO

DESCRIPTION

See

Highlights

See

Highlights

See

Highlights

See

ISSUEDATE
1211/99

ATPREVDA~

INSERTED BY

5/11100

ATP/MG

6/7/01

ATP/IB

6/02

10/24/02

ATP/MB

Highlights

6/03

8114/03

ATPIJB

See

Highlights

6/04

8/4104

ATP/JSF

See

Highlights

6/05

7/15/05

ATP/JSF

See

Highlights

3/06

4/26/06

ATP/RCL

Rayrheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

RECORD OP REVISIONS (NORMAL)


Revisions embodied in this manual, which have been issued by an approval authorization other than
Raytheon Aircraft Company must be recorded on separate record sheets.

Revision No.

RevisionDate

Inserted

\nsertionDate

ATP/MG

12/99

01/01/01

06/07/01

ATP/IB

10/24/02

ATP

6/03

8/14/03

6/04

8/4/04

ATP/JSF

6/05

7/15/05

I~rPIJSF

3/06

5-11-00

4/26/06

By

ATP/JB

ATP/RCL

10
11

12
13

14
15

16
17

18
19
20
21

22
23
24

25
26
27

Record of Revisions

Page
Apr.

99

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Revision No

Revision Date

Insertion Date

AIRFRAME

Inserted

By

28
29
30
31
32

33
34

35
36

37
38
39

40
41

42
43

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

52
53
54
55

Record of Revisions

Page
Apr.

99

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

ATP REV

INSERT

DATE

REV

REMOVE

ISSUE DATE

DATE

BY

REMOVED

INCOR

BY

3/1100

5/11/00

ATP/MG

6/7/01

ATPIIB

4/26/06

ATP/RCL

TEMP
REV NO

DESCRIPTION

20-1

20-95-301:10 &16

20-2

20-95-00.15, 20-95-11:7

5105

7/1 5/05

ATP/JSF

20-3

20-1 0-50:201

5106

7/5106

ATP/VP

Rayrheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

RECORD OF TEMPOAARYREVISIONS

Revisions embodied in this manual, which have been issued by an approved authorization other than
Raytheon Aircraft Company, must be recorded on separate record sheets.

LOT No.

TR No.

Part

Page

Inserted

Date

20.95.301

10

to-2
zo-~

20-10-50

201

16

ATP/MG

Cancelled

Date

by

by
20-1

Removed

Inserted

Affecting

5-11-00

Z~TP/JTjF

7/! 5/1)5

ATP/VP

7/5/0h

Record of

ATP/IR

6/07/01

ATP/RCT

4-/2(j/06

Temporary Revisions
Page
Apr.

99

Ralrheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

LOT No.

TR No.

Page

Removed

Inserted

Affecting
Part

AIRFRAME

Inserted

Date

Cancelled

Date

by

by

Record of

Temporary Revisions
Page
Apr.

99

RBYtheOn

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

(P/N: AMM 125/H-20)

TEMPORARY REVISION TR 20-3


LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL No.03

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

RO. Box 85
Wichita
Kansas 67201

U.S.A

1.

Reasonfor issue

Lugs
2.

on

UAM100 fuses

Instructions

(1)
(2)

Insert

are

breaking

due to incorrect installation.

Holders of Printed Manuals

Temporary Revision

Record the

incorporation

as

detailed below.

of this

Temporary

Revision

on

the RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

sheet at the front of the manual.

(3) Retain

this Letter of Transmittal and file

immediately following

RECORD OF TEMPORARY

REVISIONS sheet.

3.

Position

20-3

Facing Chapter 20-10-50,

Instructions
page block 201

INSERT

Action

In

4.

TR No.

place

of 20-10-50 page block 201 read this TR.

List Of Current

NOTE:

Temporary

Revisions

Temporary Revisions
given

in

are

only

(Manual

at Revision

7).

to be removed from the manual when

Letter of Transmittal issued with

NORMAL

TR No.

Position

20-3

Facing Chapter 20-10-50, page block 201

or

specific instructions

are

TEMPORARY Revision.

Issued with Transmittal No.


03

Letter of Transmittal
Page

1 of 1

May. 05

RBytheOn

Airrraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Raytheon Aircraft Company


P.O. Box 85
Wichita

Kansas 67201
USA

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 800XP, 850XP

1000

P/N: AMM 125/H-20

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL

1.

REVISION 7

HOLDERS OF PRINTED MANUALS


that Revision 6 has been

(1)

Make

(2)

Remove and

sure

destroy Temporary

incorporated.

Revisions detailed for removal at

cancel any entries for these temporary revisions

on

Paragraph

4 of this transmittal and

the RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

sheet at the front of this manual.

(3)

(4)

Insert the revision pages in numerical sequence, removing and destroying the
replaced by the revised pages as instructed in Paragraph 3 of this transmittal.
Record the

incorporation of this revision

on

the RECORD OF REVISION

existing

(NORMAL)

pages

sheet at the

front of this manual.

(5)
2.

Retain this Letter of Transmittal and file at the front of this manual.

HIGHLIGHTS
NOTE:

All

topics

Ch-Se-Su
TITLE PAGE

included in this revision have been re-issued and dated Mar.OG

Description of change
Model 850XP added to Series header. Date and Revision No. revised.

Area code revised to add -0085.

Export

statement revised.

Dates revised.

INTRO-LOEP

Page

INTRODUCTION

Reissued. New format and content added.

20-LOEP

Reformatted and revised.

Letter of Transmittal
Page 1 of

Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Ch-Se-Su

Description of change

CHAPTERS:
20-10-5016

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
InSormation

Chapter 24,

20-95-00

(was General).

Topic

reformatted.

Paragraph

1. revised to read

NOTE added reference 20-10-50, 201 and AMM

Electrical Power.

APPROVED SUPPLIERS

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Paragraph

1.

Information revised, reference to website for Manufacturers and Federal Codes

added.

Page 16,

NA.117 and NA.118,

new

suppliers

20-95-11

20-95-301

new

material introduced

(TR

NA.9

20-2

(transferred

GREASES AND LUBRICANTS

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
new

(TR

added

added.

incorporated).
supplier
Page 18, UK.12, format revised, "Obsolete" replaced by
Suppliers column).
NA.119

20-2

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Page 7,

from

Item 092,

incorporated).

ADHESIVES, JOINTING AND SEALING

Paragraph 1. Information heading added


Topic
subsequent headings re-numbered.
Page 9, Item 361, alternative sealants introduced.
Page 10, Item 367, suppliers code revised to UK.10 (was NA.10), Item 369,
suppliers code revised to UK.106 (was UK.25) and Item 371(a), specification
reformatted.

COMPOUNDS

and

MIL

spec. revised.

Page 16, Item 330A, specification MIL spec. revised. Item 331A, specification
MIL spec. revised and alternative introduced.
Page 18, Item 350A, Item 351A and Item 352A, new materials introduced.

20-95-401

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
VARNISHES

ENAMELS, LACQUERS, PAINTS, PRIMERS AND

Topic reformatted. Paragraph

1. Information

heading

added and

subsequent headings re-numbered.

Page 3,
Page 4,

20-95-601

Item 440, material and

specification revised,

statement added to remarks.

Item 466, NOTE revised.

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS, MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Page 4,
Page 8,

Item 643,

specification

revised.

Item 606A and Item 607A,

new

material introduced.

Letter of Transmittal
Page

2 of 3

Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft

tompany

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES


3.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INCORPORATING THIS REVISION

Ch-Se-Su

Title

Remove

Insert

Remove

Page(s)

Page(s)

TR

1/2

1/2

Intro- LOEP

Introduction

1 thru 4

1 thru 5

LOEP

1 thru 4

1/2

20-1 0-5016

201 thru

201 thru

231

229

20-95-00

1 thru 29

1 thru 30

20-2

20-95-11

1 thru 7

1 thru 7

20-2

20-95-301

1 thru 19

1 thru 18

20-95-401

1 thru 8

1 thru 8

20-95-601

1 thru 8

1 thru 8

4.

AIRFRAME

Page

TEMPORARY REVISIONDATA
TR 20-2

incorporated

at this revision.

Letter of Transmittal
Page 3 of 3
Mar.OG

RgJaPleOn

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Raytheon Aircraft Company


P.O. Box 85
Wichita

Kansas 67201
USA

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800XP
P/N: AMM 125/H-20

LETTER OF TRANSNIITTAL

1.

REVISION 6

HOLDERSOFPRINTED MANUALS

(1)
(2)

Make

sure

that Revision 5 has been

Remove and

destroy Temporary

incorporated.

Revisions detailed for removal at

cancel any entries for these temporary revisions


sheet at the front of this manual.
NOTE:

Do not

remove

TR 20-2

tissued May 05)

on

Paragraph

4 of this transmittal and

the RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

at this time. TR 20-2 will be

incorporated at

Permanent Revision No. 7

(3)

(4)

Insert the revision pages in numerical sequence, removing and destroying the
replaced by the revised pages as instructed in Paragraph 3 of this transmittal.
Record the

incorporation

of this revision

on

the RECORD OF REVISION

existing

pages

(NORMAL) sheet

at the

front of this manual.

(5)
2.

Retain this Letter of Transmittal and file at the front of this manual.

HIGHLIGHTS
NOTE:

All

topics included in this

revision have been re-issued and dated Jun.D5.

of

change

Ch-Se-Su

Description

TITLE PAGE

Revision No. and Date revised.

INTRO-LOEP

Page

INTRODUCTION

Paragraph

LOEP

Page

CONTENTS

New

dates revised.

1.A and 1.C. website addresses revised.

dates revised.

topics 20-09-41 (Component locking)


(P-Static)) added.

and 20-11-1041

(Precipitation Static

Letter of Transmittal
Page

1 of 3

Jun.05

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125lHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES


of

change

Ch-Se-Su

Description

Existing/previous

New

topics

20-09-41

New

topic

20-10-50

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

20-09-41 and 20-11-1041 added.

ATA numbers

CHAPTERS

Paragraph

topic

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.

introduced

Paragraph 1.title revised to INFORMATION.


(2) (a) (requirement to check splices after a set period) deleted.

2.B.

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.

introduced

20-11-1041

New

20-95-00

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS, APPROVED SUPPLIERS

suppliers NA.114,

20-95-11

List revised. New

NA.115 and NA.116 added.

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

GREASES AND LUBRICANTS

Item 054, MIL SPEC. revised.

Items 089 and 090, material

(was

Rust

Item 091

20-95-101

name

revised to Corrosion Preventive

Compound

inhibitor).

(Petrolatum, Lubricant) introduced.

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Item 101, TKS Fluid.

FLUIDS AND OILS

Specifications

revised and

new

suppliers

code NA. 114

added.

Item 139,

Fluid, refrigerant, mixing details added.

Item 140, Oil,

refrigerant, supplier

Item 147, Fuel,


AMM

Chapter 12,

Item 148, Fuel,


AMM

engine.

Chapter

Item 151, Oil,

Material

name

FUEL SYSTEM

engine.

Material

Item 152, Fuel,

purpose

engine

and

mixing details added.

specification

revised. Reference to

SERVICING added to remarks column.

name

12, FUEL SYSTEM

general

details revised and

and

specification

revised. Reference to

SERVICING added to remarks column.

light lubricating.

New oil added.

Jet A introduced.

Letter of Transmittal
Page

2 of 3

Jun.05

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES


3.

AIRFRAME

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INCORPORATING THIS REVISION

Ch-Se-Su

Remove

Insert

Remove

Page(s)

Page(s)

TR

1/2

1/2

Intro-LOEP

Introduction

1 thru 4

1 thru 4

LOEP

1 thru 4

1 thru 4

CONTENTS

1 thru 4

1 thru 4

20 ATA-REF

1 thru 3

1 thru 4

Title

Page

201 thru

20-09-41

204

20-1 0-50

201 thru

201 thru

204

204

201 thru

20-11-1041

204

20-95-00

NOTE:

20-95-11

NOTE:

25-95-101

4.

1 thru 29

1 thru 29

Do notremove TR20-2,

1 thru 7

i.

1 thru 7

Donotremove TR20-~

1 thru 5

Page

PageP.

1 thru 5

TEMPORARY REVISION DATA


TR 20-2

tissued May 05).

NOTE:

Donotremove TR20-2atthistime

Letter of Transmittal
Page

3 of 3

Jun.05

Ilaylheon

Aircraft Company

I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

(P/N: AMM 125/H-20)

TEMPORARY REVISION TR 20-2


LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL No.02

Raytheon Aircraft Company


P.O. Box 85,
Wichita
Kansas 67201

U.S.A

1.

Reasonfor issue

TR 20-2 introduces two

new US suppliers (NA.117 and NA.118)


(Item 092) to Chapter 20-95-11.

Preventative Lubricant
2.

Instructions

(1)
(2)

Insert

Chapter

to

20-95-00 and

a new

Corrosion

Holders of Printed Manuals

Temporary

Record the

Revision

incorporation

as

detailed below.

of this

Temporary

Revision

on

the RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

sheet at the front of the manual.

(3)

Retain this Letter of Transmittal and file

immediately following

RECORD OF TEMPORARY

REVISIONS sheet.

3.

TR No.

Position

20-2

TR page 1,
TR page 2,

facing Chapter 20-95-00,


facing Chapter 20-95-11,

page 15.

INSERT

page 7.

INSERT

Action

In addition to page 15
In

4.

Instructions

place of page

List Of Current

NOTE:

(20-95-00)

(20-95-11)

read page 2 of this TR.

Temporary Revisions (Manual

Temporary Revisions
given

read page 1 of this TR.

in

are

only to

at Revision

be removed from the manual when

Letter of Transmittal issued with

TR No.

Position

20-2

TR page 1,
TR page 2,

5).

NORMAL

or

specific instructions

are

TEMPORARY Revision.

Issued with Transmittal No.

facing Chapter 20-95-00, page


facing Chapter 20-95-11, page

15.

02

7.

Letter of Transmittal
Page 1 of 1
May 05

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH-SE-SU

PAGE

DATE

CH-SE-SU

PAGE

DATE

CONTENTS

1 thru 4

Jun.05

20-10-560

201 thru 209

Jun.03

20 ATA-REF.

1 thru 4

Jun.05

20-10-811

201/202

Jun.04

20-00-00

Jun.02

20-10-1001

201 thru 211

Jun.03

20-09-20

201 thru 207

Jun.04

20-10-1002

201 thru 211

Jun.03

20-09-21

201 thru 211

Jan.2001

20-10-1009

201 thru 206

Jun.04

20-09-23

201/202

Jan.2001

20-10-3003

201 thru 204

Jun.02

20-09-41

201 thru 204

Jun.OS

20-10-3005

201 thru 204

Jun.03

20-09-91

201 thru 204

Dec.99

20-10-3008

201 thru 203

Jun.02

20-09-141

201/202

Dec.99

20-10-3527

201 thru 209

Jun.03

20-10-08

201 thru 203

Jun.03

20-10-3528

201 thru 206

Jun.02

20-10-31

201 thru 207

Jun.04

20-10-3534

201 thru 203

Jun.03

20-10-32

201/202

Jan.2001

20-10-3537

201 thru 207

Jun.02

20-10-33

201 thru 204

Jun.OS

20-10-4005

201 thru 204

Jun.02

20-10-34

201/202

Jan.2001

20-10-4007

201 thru 203

Jun.02

20-10-40

201 thru 204

Jun.03

20-10-4011

201 thru 204

Jun.02

1 thru 8

Jun.02

20-10-4012

201 thru 204

Jun.02

201 thru 204

Jun.05
20-10-4014

201 thru 204

Jun.02

20-10-4016

201 thru 203

Jun.OS

20-10-4501

201/202

Jan.2001

203 thru 205

Dec.99

20-10-50

20-1 0-75

201/202

Jan.2001

201 thru 206

Jun.OLt

20-10-354

201 thru 203

Jun.04

20-10-447

201 thru 204

Jun.02

20-10-4507

201 thru 204

Jun.02

20-1 0-481

201 thru 203

Jun.02

20-10-4553

201 thru 203

Jan.2001

20-10-482

201 thru 203

Jun.02

20-10-5016

201 thru 229

Mar.OG

20-10-499

201 thru 204

Jun.02

20-10-9053

201 thru 203

Jun.04

20-10-228

20iLOEP
Page

1 of 2

Mar.OG

RaYtaeOn

Aircraft

Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES


CH-SE-SU

PAGE

DATE

20-10-9070

201 thru 204

Jun.04

20-11-1040

201 thru 203

Jun.02

20-11-1041

201 thru 204

Jun.0S

20-95-00

1 thru 30

Mar.OG

20-95-11

1 thru 7

Mar.OG

20-95-101

1 thru 5

Jun.05

20-95-201

1 thru 7

Jun.04

20-95-301

1 thru 18

Mar.OG

20-95-401

1 thru 8

Mar.OG

20-95-501

1/2

Jun.04

20-95-601

1 thru 8

Mar.0G

AIRFRAME

20-LOEP
Page

2 of 2

Mar.0G

RCIYHI(WDII

Aircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE:

To locate

previous

topics

that previously existed in

ATA numbers table"

an

AM~I and may still be referred to, refer to the

Ch-Se-Su

Subject
STANDARD PRACTICES

Page

AIRFRAME
20-00-00

GENERAL

Description
20-09-20

TORQUE LOADING

201

Maintenance Practices

RETENTION OF BEARINGS BY W AND S RETAINING RINGS

20-09-21
201

Maintenance Practices
20-09-23

REUSE OF SELF-LOCKING NUTS

201

Maintenance Practices
20-09-41

COMPONENT LOCKING

201

Maintenance Practices
20-09-91

FLARING OF STAINLESS STEEL TUBES

201

Maintenance Practices
20-09-141

COUNTERSUNK HEAD BOLTS

201

Maintenance Practices

APPLICATION OF ALOCROM 1200

20-10-08

(ALODINE 1200)

201

Maintenance Practices

CONTROL CABLES

(EXAMINATION

AND REJECTION

CRITERIA)

20-10-31
201

Maintenance Practices

CONTROL CABLE

(CORROSION PROTECTION)

20-10-32
201

Maintenance Practices
20-10-33

STRIPPING OF PAINT

201

Maintenance Practices
CHEMICAL REMOVAL OF POLYSULPHIDE

(Pr-tC) SEALANTS

20-10-34
201

Maintenance Practices

VACU-BLASTING WITH DRY ALUMINA GRIT

20-10-40
201

Maintenance Practices
WIRING PROCEDURES AND REPAIR

Description

%xisting/

immediately following this TOC.

and

Operation

Maintenance Practices

20-10-50
1
201

20-CONTENTS
Page

Jun.05

Raytheon

Asrcralt Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Ch-Se-Su

Subject
STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME continued

APPLICATION OF SODIUM ALGINATE RELEASE AGENT

20-10-75
201

Maintenance Practices
APPLICATION OF URETHANE FINISH TO EXTERNAL SURFACES

20-10-228
201

Maintenance Practices
LEAK TESTING FLUID

20-10-354
201

Maintenance Practices
LEAK TESTING FLUID

Topic

Deleted

(SHERLOCK)
(Data transferred to Topic

SEALING COMPOUND

Page

20-10-355
20-10-354

FLEXIBLE SEAL APPLICATIONS

20-10-447
201

Maintenance Practices
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING JOINTING COMPOUNDS

20-10-481
201

Maintenance Practices
20-10-482

APPLICATION OF ACID RESISTING PAINT

201

Maintenance Practices

SEALING OF PERSPEX, LAMINATED GLASS WINDOWS AND PANELS 20-10-499


201

Maintenance Practices
RENOVATION OF FURNISHING MATERIALS

20-10-560
201

Maintenance Practices
POLISH AIRCRAFT SKINS

20-10-811

(EXTERNAL)

201

Maintenance Practices

SEALING OF INTEGRAL FUEL TANKS WITH


20-10-1001

POLYSULFIDE TYPE COMPOUNDS

201

Maintenance Practices
SEALING OF PRESSURE CABINS AND AREAS OUTSIDE INTEGRAL
FUEL TANKS WITH POLYSULFIDE TYPE COMPOUNDS

20-10-1002
201

Maintenance Practices

FORM-IN-PLACE SEALS FOR WEATHERPROOF!NG

20-10-1009
201

Maintenance Practices
AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHING SEALANT

20-10-3003
201

Maintenance Practices

HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANTS

(SILCOSET

AND

SILASTIC)

20-10-3005
201

Maintenance Practices
METAL FILLED EPOXIES FOR GAP FILLING

Maintenance Practices

20-10-3008
201

20-CONTENTS
Page

Jun.05

RayNteon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Ch-Se-Su

Subject
STANDARD PRACTICES

Page

AIRFRAME continued

APPLICATION OF COLD CURING EPOXY PRIMER


20-10-3527

TO INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SURFACES

201

Maintenance Practices

APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE AND PERMEABLE FINISH


20-10-3528

TO AIRPLANE INTERNAL SURFACES

201

Maintenance Practices

APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE FINISHING ENAMEL FOR THE


20-10-3534

OVERCOATING OF SEALANTS

201

Maintenance Practice

APPLICATION OF ANTISTATIC PAINT TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS


OTHER THAN CARBON FIBER

20-10-3537
201

Maintenance Practice

BONDING SILICONE RUBBERS

20-10-4005
201

Maintenance Practice

BONDING RUBBER AND P.T.F.E. TO PERSPEX OR METAL

20-10-4007
201

Maintenance Practice

BONDING WITH EPOXY ADHESIVES FOR NON STRUCTURAL PARTS 20-10-4011


201

Maintenance Practices
RUBBER BONDING ADHESIVE

20-10-4012
201

Maintenance Practices

BONDING WITH CONTACT ADHESIVE

20-10-4014
201

Maintenance Practices
BONDING WITH SCOTCH-SEAL METAL SEALANT 2084

20-10-4016
201

Maintenance Practices
SHRINK FITTING OF BOLTS, BUSHES, PINS, ETC.

20-10-4501
201

Maintenance Practices

LOCKING OF THREADS WITH ANAEROBIC ADHESIVE

20-10-4507
201

Maintenance Practices

RETENTION OF BUSHES AND BEARINGS BY LIQUID SEALANT

20-10-4553
201

Maintenance Practices
ELECTRICAL BONDING

20-10-5016
201

Maintenance Practices

DEGREASING OF METALLIC MATERIALS


Maintenance Practices

20-10-9053
201

20-CONTENTS
Page

Jun.05

Rayfheoll

Aircraff Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Ch-Se-Su

Subject
STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME continued

PREPERATION OF RUBBER SURFACES FOR BONDING

20-10-9070
201

Maintenance Practices
20-11-1040

VERY HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANTS

201

Maintenance Practices

PRECIPITATION STATIC

Page

(P-STATIC)

20-11-1041

TEST

201

Maintenance Practices

STORES DATA
NOTE:

For information

concerning servicing, storage, shelf life, transportation

etc. of vendor

components, refer to the relevant vendor publication.

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
20-95-00

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Approved Suppliers
20-95-11

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Greases and Lubricants


20-95-101

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Fluids and Oils


20-95-201

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Cleaning Agents,

Paint

Strippers

and Release

Agents

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

20-95-301
1

Adhesives, Jointing and Sealing Compounds


CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

20-95-401
1

Enamels, Lacquers, Paints, Primers and Varnishes


CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

20-95-501
1

Chemical and Electro/Chemical Surface Finishes

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Miscellaneous Materials

20-95-601
1

20-CONTENTS
Page

Jun.OS

Rayiheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES INTRODUCTION

CH-SE-SU

PAGE

DATE

Introduction

1 thru 5

Mar.OG

INTRODUCTION-LOEP
Page

1 of 1

Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

INTRODUCTION

i. INFORMATION
NOTE:

Throughout

this Standard Practices Manual where Hawker 800XP is referenced, the

Hawker 850XP

publications are listed on the web at http:llpubs.raytheonaircraft.com.


these publications, contact the Technical Manual Distribution Center (TMDC)
676-8238, fax (316) 671-2540, or E-mail TMDC@rac.ray.com

For

All commercial

Neither reissues

or

to obtain reissues

revisions

or

designation of

equally applies.

automatically provided to the holder


applicable to this manual, refer to the

are

revisions

Company Service Bulletin No. 00-2001


Subscription Services Information.

or

visit

our

web site at

more

information

at 1-800-796-2665

or

of this manual. For information


latest revision of the

on

(316)

on

how

Raytheon Aircraft
then select

http:llpubs.raytheonaircraft.com.,

publications are listed in the current Electronic Directory of Catalogs and Services (EDOCS)
(P/N 994-32808). For Information on these publications contact the Technical Manual Distribution
Center (TMDC) at 1-800-796-2665 or (316) 676-8238, fax (316) 671-2540, E-mail TMDC@rac.ray.com or
visit our web site at http://pubs.raytheonaircraft.com.,
then select Searchable Publications Status and Price
Additional
CD-ROM

List.

publications are listed in the current Publications Price List (P/N 118556). Contact your
Raytheon Aircraft Service Center for information on these publications or visit the Publications price
site at http://pubs.raytheonaircraft.com.

Additional

The

Raytheon

Electronic Publication

manual, along with others, is available


are

available for

nearest

list web

System (REPS) contains selected Manuals in a digital format. This


on CD-ROM. Optional paper copies of the manuals on the CD-ROM

purchase.

A. General

prepared in accordance with the


2200 with respect to the
America)
Specification
requirements
arrangements and content of the Chapter/System with the designated numbering system. The manual
has one volume and covers all series 1251Hawker airplanes.

The 125/Hawker All Series


of ATA

Chapter

20 Standard Practices manual is

(Airline Transport Association

of

physical and chemical processes which require the use of chemicals,


other
solvents, paints, and
commercially available materials. The user of this manual should obtain the
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) from the manufacturers or suppliers of the materials to be used.
This manual describes the

user must be completely familiar


procedures, recommendations, warnings
disposal of the materials.

The

Updated specification
by

the

Raytheon

with the

manufacturer/supplier

information

and cautions set forth for the safe use,

numbers and material

equivalents

Aircraft Process and Environmental

and obey
handling, storage

acceptable alternatives
Laboratory (Dept. 037,

or

have been

the
and

approved
section)

nonmetallic

Wichita, Kansas, USA.

Manufacturers, where known,

are

listed in the

20-95-00 where current manufacturer


It shall be the

responsibility of

referenced in this manual

are

the

names

Suppliers

and addresses

Code column and correspond to section


are

provided.

to ensure that the latest revision of the publications


during operation, servicing and maintenance of the airplane.

owner/operator

utilized

INTRODUCTION

PMaaSreg~

Rayfheon

Aircraft

Company

1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Raytheon Aircraft Company expressly reserves the right to supersede, cancel and/or declare obsolete
notice.
any parts, part numbers, kits or publications that may be referenced in this manual without prior
WARNING: Use

only parts

obtained from

with

connection

sources

maintenance

the

approved by Raytheon Aircraft Company, in


repair of Raytheon Aircraft Company

and

airplanes.

produced and inspected under


suitability for use in Raytheon
rigorous procedures
Aircraft Company airplane applications. Parts purchased from sources other than
those approved by Raytheon Aircraft Company, even though outwardly identical in
appearance, may not have the required tests and inspections performed, may be
different in fabrication techniques and materials, and may be dangerous when
Genuine

WARNING:

Raytheon Aircraft Company parts

are

to insure airworthiness and

installed in
WARNING:

an

airplane.

Salvaged airplane parts, reworked parts obtained from sources not approved by
Raytheon Aircraft Company or parts, components or structural assemblies,

the
the

may have been

authenticated,
service history of which is unknown or
subjected to unacceptable stresses or temperatures or have other hidden
cannot be

damage,
through routine visual or usual nondestructive testing techniques.
This may render the part, component or structural assembly, even though originally
manufactured by the Raytheon Aircraft Company, unsuitable and unsafe for airplane
not discernible

use.

WARNING:

B.

Raytheon Aircraft Company expressly disclaims any responsibility for malfunctions,


failures, damage or injury caused by use of parts not approved by the Raytheon
Aircraft Company.

Correspondence
concerning the care of your airplane, it is important to include the airplane
serial number in any correspondence. The serial number appears on the model designation placard.
Refer to Chapter 11 of the Illustrated Parts Catalog for Placard location.
If

question

should arise

C. Publications

Change Request (PCR)

irregularity or missing information is noted, the user of this manual may access a PCR form at http:/
select Forms and Reports and then select Publication Change
/www.pubs.raytheonaircraft.com.,
Request. This form and the information that was entered will be electronically forwarded to Raytheon
Aircraft Customer Support. The change request will be researched for any necessary updates to the
publication. Assistance is available, at any time, by contacting Raytheon Aircraft Technical Support at
If

an

800-429-5372

or

316-676-3140.

D. Normal Revisions
Normal Revisions to this manual
i.

Paper
That

are

issued to

provide changes

to standard

practices

information.

Revision

portion
denoted by

of text which has been revised

by

the addition

of,

or a

change in,

information is

a solid revision bar adjacent to the text. Each revised page will ONLY show
revision bars for text changed by the revision. There will not be a revision bar if text was

deleted from the page.


Revised illustrations will be identified

by

Mar.OGINTRODUCTION

revision bar

printed

on

the side of the page.

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

2. CD-ROM Revision
Normal revised text

on

the CD-ROM will be

text. For each revision of this

The

manual,

highlighted yellow

a new

across

the revised passage of

CD-ROM will be issued.

CD-ROM may contain revised illustrations.

Revisions to the illustrations

are

not

identified

E.

Temporary Revisions
Revisions to this manual

Temporary

between normal revisions. Each


followed

by

sequential

are

issued to

provide

standard

temporary

number in the order of

practices

information in the interim

number to which it

applies,
by
chapter
publication (Temporary Revisions 20-1, 20-2, etc.). If

revision is issued

the

relevant, the information in the temporary revision should be included in the

next normal revision of the

manual.
i.

Paper Temporary Revisions


Revisions

Temporary

are

printed

on

yellow paper

manual in accordance with the instructions

section, and subject


2. CD-ROM
A

new

and

provided

are

to be inserted in the maintenance

and

adjacent

to

applicable chapter,

matter in the manual.

Temporary Revisions

CD-ROM will be issued for each Temporary Revision to this manual. This information

conjunction with

is listed in

the

applicable chapter, section, subject

on

the CD-ROM.

F. Revised Text

by the addition of, or a change in, punctuation and/or


information is denoted by a
adjacent to the textual column in the margin of this
bars. That date printed on the bottom of each page
revision
have
not
paragraph. Each page may or may
that
information
indicates when the
on
page was changed. Each page will ONLY show revision bars for
punctuation and/or text changed by the current revision. Revised text in REPS will be denoted by yellow
That

portion

of text which has been revised

solid revision bar

highlighting.
G. Revised Illustrations

H.

illustration is modified

When

an

along

the outside

Warnings,

or a new

illustration is added, it will be noted

by

solid line

(revision bar)

margin of the illustration.

Cautions and Notes

WARNING

Brings

attention to

an

operating procedure, inspection or maintenance practice,


personal injury or loss of life.

which if not correctly followed, could result in

CAUTION

Brings

attention to an

operating procedure, inspection, repair

condition, which if not strictly observed, could result in damage


NOTE

Brings

attention to

condition, which is essential to

or

or

destruction of

operating procedure, inspection, repair


highlight.

an

INTRODUCTION

or

maintenance

equipment.
maintenance

Raylheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

2. MANUAL LAYOUT
A. Title

Page

A Title page is located at the beginning of the manual and provides the part number of the manual, and
lists all aircraft models pertaining to this manual. Information throughout this manual is applicable to all

models listed

on

the title page

B. Record of Revisions
The

(Normal) Page

manual will have

printed

except where specifically stated.

Record of Revisions page. The Record of Revisions is

provided following

the Title page. When a revision is inserted, the revision number, the date the revision is inserted into the
manual, and the initials of the person(s) inserting the revision should be recorded on this page.

C. Record of
The

Temporary Revisions Page


of Temporary Revisions page. The Record of Temporary
Record of Revisions page. When a temporary revision is
the appropriate information should be recorded on this page.

printed manual will have a Record


Page is located following the

Revisions

inserted

or

removed from this manual,

D. Introduction- LOEP
The introduction has

separate List of Effective Pages and lists the issue date of each page.

E. Introduction
The introduction follows the Introduction LOEP

F.

LOEP

Chapter 20
The

printed

manual has

Chapter 20 List of Effective Pages.

The List of Effective

Introduction and lists the issue date of each page that is effective for that

G.

Chapter
The

Table of Contents

20

printed manual has a Chapter 20 Table


Chapter 20 List of Effective Pages

Existinglprevious
This table

gives

be found

by

cross

chapter.

of Contents

Pages. The Chapter Table of Contents Pages


chapter.

and lists the contents of the data for that

ATA numbers table

topic, which previously existed in an AMM may still be


topics
replaced by more up to date procedures the latest procedure can
old
the
AMM
reference against the new reference in this manual.
checking

a cross

referred to. Where

reference where

have been

3. HOW TO USE THE MANUAL


A. ATA

Subject

Matter

Assignment

The contents of this manual

(1)

Level~-

follows the

Pages

follow the

H.

Pages

are

organized

into three levels. The three levels

ChapterlSystem

INTRODUCTION

are:

Aircraft tompany
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

procedures are broken down into two major groups, Standard Practices and
They are assigned a number, which becomes the first element of the
standardized numbering system. Thus the element "20" of the number 20-95-11 refers to the
Chapter "STANDARD PRACTICES".
The various

Consumable Materials.

(2)

Level

The

2-Subsystem/Section

chapterlsystem

of

procedure is broken

down into

subsystems/sections.

These

subsystems

identified by the second element of the standard numbering system. The element "95" of the
number 20-95-11 concerns itself with Consumable Materials.

are

(3)

Level

3-Unit/Subject
subsystemlsection may be identified by the third element of the
a subject designator. This element is assigned at
manufacturer and may or may not be used. In this example, the subject is

The individual units within

standard numbering system. The element "11" is


the

of the

option

"Greases and Lubricants".

(4) Additional

Data

Page

The data may be

Block

additionally

(a) Page

Block 0

Page 1 thru 99 System Description

(b) Page

Block 2

Page 201

B, References to Procedures,
A

has been

system

thru 299 Maintenance Practices

Figures, Equipment

and Materials

provide a method of allowing the user to quickly locate data referred


system provides information for both the printed manual as well as

developed

in the other manuals. This

to

to
a

in electronic manuals.

hyperlink
Here

broken down into page blocks.

are a

When the

few

examples:

user

FASTENERS

is directed to information in another manual, the text will be

IDENTIFrCATrON

(Ref. 800-SRM, 51-41-00, 001).


Repair Manual.

as

follows: Refer to

The information is found in

Chapter

51-41-00 within page block 001 of the Structure


When the

example

user

an

is in

procedure

information is found in

Chapter

a tool or piece of equipment, for


(Ref. 1TEM-125-111000, 07-10-26). The Axle Jack
Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual.

and is directed to information about

Axle Jack, the text will be

as

follows:

07-10-26 of the

INTRODUCTION

PMaaSreg~

~G:

=I

~DX(T)

Existing/previous
This table

oq I

more

gives

up to date

a cross

reference where

procedures

the latest

ATA numbers

topic, which previously existed in an AMM may still be referred to. Where topics have been replaced by
procedure can be found by cross checking the old AMM reference against the new reference in this manual.
a

88

SERIES

oo

0"

125/H-20

Chapter title

125/H-20

SERIES

800, 800XP

SERIES

800XP

1-700

1000

PRO LINE 21
GENERAL

20-00-00

N/A

N/A

N/A

TORQUE LOADING

20-09-20

20-09-20

20-09-20

20-09-01

RETENTION OF BEARINGS BY W AND S RETAINING RINGS

20-09-21

20-09-21

20-09-21

20-09-21

REUSE OF SELF-LOCKING NUTS

20-09-23

20-09-23

20-09-23

20-09-23

COMPONENT LOCKING

20-09-41

N/A

N/A

N/A

FLARING OF STAINLESS STEEL TUBES

20-09-91

20-09-91

20-09-91

20-09-91

COUNTERSUNK HEAD BOLTS

20-09-141

20-09-141

20-09-141

20-10-08

20-10-04

20-09-04z

20-1 0-08

20-10-11

20-10-31

20-10-31

20-10-31

20-10-31

20-10-32

20-10-32

20-10-32

20-10-32

20-10-33

20-10-33

20-10-33

20-10-10

1
n

APPLICATION OF ALOCROM 1200


CONTROL CABLES
CONTROL CABLE

(EXAMINATION

(ALODINE 1200)
AND REJECTION

CRITERIA)

(CORROSION PROTECTION)

STRIPPING OF PAINT

Pr
-1

v,

h)
O

~L

cln

SEALANTS

20-1 0-34

N/A

N/A

N/A

VACU-BLASTING WITH DRY ALUMINA GRIT

20-1 0-40

N/A

20-1 0-40

20-1 0-40

WIRING PROCEDURES AND REPAIR

20-10-50

N/A

N/A

NIA

APPLICATION OF SODIUM ALGINATE RELEASE AGENT

20-10-75

20-10-75

20-10-75

20-10-21

APPLICATION OF URETHANE FINISH TO EXTERNAL SURFACES

20-1 0-228

N/A

N/A

N/A

LEAK TESTING FLUID

(NEODOL 91-6)

20-1 0-354

20-1 0-354

20-1 0-354

20-10-22

LEAK TESTING FLUID

(SHERLOCK)

20-10-355

Topic deleted

20-10-447

20-10-447

20-10-447

20-10-23

20-10-481

20-10-481

N/A

N/A

SEALING COMPOUND

(PRC)

FLEXIBLE SEAL APPLICATIONS

ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING JOINTING COMPOUNDS

~13

~n

20-1 0-822

CHEMICAL REMOVAL OF POLYSULPHIDE

231
CP

now

covered

by

20-10-354.

n
-n

j
1P3
Pr

CC~

=I

125/H-20
-1

Chapter

title

I
125/H-20

I
SERIES

SERIES

800, 800XP

~n

SERIES

800XP

1-700

1000

PRO LINE 21

8 8

THE APPLICATION OF ACID RESISTING PAINT

20-10-482

20-10-482

20-10-482

20-10-24

SEALING OF PERSPEX AND LAMINATED GLASS WINDOWS AND

20-10-499

20-10-499

N/A

N/A

RENOVATION OF FURNISHING MATERIALS

20-10-560

20-10-560

20-10-560

20-10-25

POLISH AIRCRAFT SKINS

20-10-811

20-10-811

N/A

N/A

20-10-1001

20-10-1001

20-10-1001

20-10-03

oo

PANELS

(EXTERNAL)

SEALING OF INTEGRAL FUEL TANKS WITH POLYSULFIDE TYPE


COMPOUNDS

i
x
n

SEALING OF PRESSURE CABINS AND AREAS OUTSIDE INTE-

20-1 0-1 002

20-1 0-1 002

20-1 0-1 002

20-10-04

GRAL FUEL TANKS WITH POLYSULFIDE TYPE COMPOUNDS


20-10-1009

N/A

N/A

N/A

AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHING SEALANT

20-10-3003

20-10-3003

N/A

NIA

o,

20-10-3005

20-10-3005

N/A

NIA

METAL FILLED EPOXIES FOR GAP FILLING

20-10-3008

20-10-3008

20-10-3008

N/A

APPLICATION OF COLD CURING EPOXY PRIMER TO INTERNAL

20-10-3527

20-10-453

N/A

N/A

~D

PI

SILCOSET AND SILASTIC

AND EXTERNAL SU RFACES

20-10-500

20-23-0

APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE AND PERMEABLE FINISH TO

20-10-3528

20-1 0-500

20-1 0-42

20-1 0-12

20-10-3504

20-10-3504

20-10-29

20-21-0

20-21-0

20-1 0-30

20-22-0

20-22-0

20-10-3534

NIA

NIA

NIA

20-10-3537

20-11-1019

20-11-1019

20-10-09

BONDING SILICONE RUBBERS

20-10-4005

20-10-4005

20-10-4005

20-10-27

BONDING RUBBER AND PTFE. TO PERSPEX OR METAL

20-10-4007

20-10-4007

20-10-4007

20-10-28

AIRPLANE INTERNAL SURFACES

APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE FINISHING ENAMEL FOR THE


OVERCOATING OF SEALANTS.
APPLICATION OF ANTISTATIC PAINT TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS
OTHER THAN CARBON FIBER

rn

20-1 0-3512

FORM-IN-PLACE SEALS FOR WEATHERPROOFING

HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANTS

hi

g
n
o

3
Y

=I

125/H-20

Chapter

SERIES

125/H-20

title

SERIES

SERIES

800, 800XP
800XP

1-700

v,

1000

PRO LINE 21

BONDING WITH EPOXY ADHESIVES FOR NON STRUCTURAL

20-1 0-4011

N/A

20-1 0-4011

20-1 0-17

20-10-4012

20-10-4012

20-10-4012

N/A

PARTS
o

RUBBER BONDING ADHESIVE

BONDING WITH CONTACT ADHESIVE


BONDING WITH SCOTCH-SEAL METAL SEALANT 2084

20-10-4014

20-10-312

1 20-10-4016
20-10-4501

SHRINK FITTING OF BOLTS, BUSHES, PINS, ETC.

20-10-31~

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

20-10-4501

20-10-4501

20-10-4501

LOCKING OF THREADS WITH ANAEROBIC ADHESIVE

20-10-4507

20-10-4507

N/A

N/A

RETENTION OF BUSHES AND BEARINGS BY LIQUID SEALANT

20-10-4553

N/A

N/A

N/A

ELECTRICAL BONDING

20-10-5016

20-10-5016

20-1 0-5016

20-10-01

DEGREASING OF METALLIC MATERIALS

20-10-9053

N/A

N/A

N/A

PREPARATION OF RUBBER SURFACES FOR BONDING

20-10-9070

N/A

N/A

N/A

VERY HIGH TEMPERATURE SEALANTS

20-11-1040

20-11-1040

20-11-1040

20-10-08

20-11-1041

N/A

N/A

N/A

20-95-00

20-95-00

20-95-00

20-95-00

PRECIPITATION STATIC

(P-STATIC)

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

TEST

APPROVED SUPPLIERS

Grease and lubricants

Fluidsand oils

Cleaning agents, paint strippers

I
20-95-201

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Chemical and electro/chemical surface finishes

I
20-95-201

ii;

~i

i4
n
O

X
3

CC:
20-95-301

20-95-301

20-95-301

20-95-301

20-95-401

20-95-401

20-95-401

20-95-401

20-95-501

20-95-501

20-95-501

20-95-501

Enamels, lacquers, paints, primers and varnishes

sm

CP

sealing compounds

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

r
n

20-95-101

20-95-101

I
20-95-201

F;

ZU

and release agents

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

and

I
20-95-201

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

I
20-95-101

20-95-101

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Adhesives, jointing

20-95-11

20-95-11

20-95-11

20-95-11

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

9 2:
1

=I

125/H-20

Chapter title

I
125/H-20

SERIES

SERIES

800, 800XP 8

SERIES

1-700

800XP

1000

PRO LINE 21

8 8

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

oo

20-95-601

20-95-601

20-95-601

20-95-601

Miscellaneous

8
B
C)

v,

i3
h>
O

;I

U1,

TI

Ip

B n,

CHAPTER

STANDARD
PRACTICES

(AIRFRAME)

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

GENERAL- DESCRIPTION
WARNING: WHEN YOU USE ANY OF THE MATERIALS LISTED IN THIS MANUAL, OBEY ALL
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS FOR USE, HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL AS
RECOMMENDED ON THE MANUFACTURERS OR SUPPLIERS DATA SHEETS.

CAUTION:

IDENTIFY WITH A CODE, FLIGHT CONTROL CABLES, PIPES, ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS


OR WIRES DISCONNECTED DURING MAINTENANCE. THIS WILL HELP YOU INSTALL
THEM CORRECTLY AGAIN. AFTER CONNECTION REMOVE ALL IDENTIFICATION CODES.

MAK~ SURE THE SYSTEM WORKED ON AND THE ASSOCIATED SYSTEMS FUNCTION
CORRECTLY BEFORE YOU RETURN THE AIRPLANE TO SERVICE.

1.

General
This manual describes
materials.

physical and

Descriptions,

These processes

are

been reviewed and

maintenance

for

use

procedures

practices

based upon current and

approved

International material

chemical

by

the

and

which

require

the

use

of

commercially

inspections for Hawker Airplanes

accepted specifications.

Raytheon

are

included.

The consumable materials have

Aircraft Process and Environmental

equivalents and/or alternate products

are

available

included where

Laboratory.

possible. Helpful

information has been added to the remarks column.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-00-00

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

TORQUE LOADING
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
INFORMATION

EquipmentlMaterials

Partlltem No.

Grease

034

(Chapter 20-95-11)

Mineral oil

126

(C hapter

137

(Chapter 20-95-101)

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Methylated spirits

227

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Paint, black

440

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wire, corrosion resistant

651

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Brush

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Torque Equipment

Local

Engine

oil

20-95-1 01

supply

are torque loaded use locking devices which are incorporated in either the nuts or the necessary
Torque loading is applied to nuts and bolts (including setscrews) to prevent critical overstressing
with the possibility of subsequent failure of the part. The torque figure quoted for each application also gives
maximum security and even tightening.

Nuts which

washers.

Engine oil (Item 137) or light mineral


prelubricated nuts are used.

oil

(i2em 128)

is used

as a

lubricant

on

threads of nuts and bolts,

except

where

non-mandatory torque loadings are specified in the maintenance instructions. Do not exceed
the maximum torque limit to align a lock pin or tab washer. If a locking position can not be aligned within the
specified torque limits, either change the nut, loosen the nut and tighten to 90% of the specified minimum
torque, or add a washer.
Mandatory

and

2. USE OF EXTENSION SPANNERS

reading, the handle of the torque wrench must be held with one hand only, the thumb
lying along it. The extension spanner should be in line with the center of the torque
gripping
wrench. VVhen a horizontal extension spanner or extension piece is used in with a torque wrench, the actual
load applied when torque tightening will be of a greater value than that set on the torque wrench. To calculate
the torque setting for a required torque loading use the following formula:
To obtain the correct

the handle, not

Required torque setting


W

actual torque

setting

W+E

distance between center of torque head and center of wrench handle.


of extension spanner between centers.

length

20-09-20

RBIYCheOn

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

A.

Example, Ibf in.


To find the

12 inch

torque setting

long

wrench

(10

for

specified

load of 75 Ibf in. when

inches between

centers): 75

using

10
x

10+3

3 inch extension spanner and

581bf in.

being used does not incorporate a scale or dial, e.g. the breaking type,
interposed between the wrench and the setting rig during the setting procedure.

If the torque wrench


extension must be

B.

the

Example,Nm
To find the

torque setting for

wrench with

an

effective

length

specified
of 300

load of 8.0 Nm when

mm:

300
x

300

75

using

75

mm

extension and

NOTE: A

torque

6.4Nm

being used does not incorporate a scale or dial, e.g, the breaking type,
interposed between the wrench and the setting rig during the setting procedure.

If the torque wrench


extension must be

setting rig must be

used to set

break back,

or

other

torque wrench without

scale

M1605 O

Figure 201
Holding a Torque Wrench

Correct Method of

20-09-20

or

EXTENSION SPANNER

TORQUE WRENCH

Jun.04~of"

the

dial.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3. PIPE CONNECTORS

A. AN

Pipe Connectors

NOTE: The
and

following information on AN Connectors applies only


to series 1000 airplanes.

AN pipe couplings to between the


(Ref. Table 202) as appropriate. AN adapters
limits (Ref. Table 203).

with

airplanes

Honeywell engines

minimum and maximum

(1) Torque tighten


or

to

in manifolds

are

to be

torque (Ref. Table 201)


tightened to between the

tightening torques in (Table 201) if both parts of the connection


includes the assembly of steel end fittings on flexible pipes to steel connectors.

(2) Only

(3)

If

one or

or

the

use

parts of a connection is of light alloy, use (~Table 202). This applies


fittings assembled to steel connectors.

both

hose end

(4) Tightening

To make

pipe

or

sure

B. AGS

value in (Table 201), (Table 202) or (Table 203) gives adequate


prevent the connection being loosened by vibration.

that the

pipe flare and

union take up set when

to

torque 10% higher

than the value

Paint

Pipe

to the

line

specified

connection with

a new

specified.

across

the

joint using

brush

(Item 676)

and black

paint (Item 440).

Connectors

(2) Torque tighten

(3) Torque tighten

pipe

to

component
fittings.

connectors in accordance with

light alloy to light alloy pipe to pipe and pipe to component connectors
(Table 202). This includes all flexible hoses with aluminum end fittings.

all steel

To minimize the risk of

(a) Tighten

and

with steel end

all

accordance with

(b)

value.

(1) Torque tighten all steel to steel pipe to pipe


(Table 201). This includes all flexible hoses

(4)

assembling

Loosen the nut two turns.

(c) Tighten
(d)

light alloy pipe

union:

(a) Tighten
(b)

steel. This

appropriate

to the

mechanical resistance to

(5)

to

are

the nut to

or

light alloy adapters

leakage
a

at

joints

do

as

into manifold blocks in accordance with

follows:

torque approximately 10% higher

than the value

specified.

Loosen the nut two turns.

(c) Torque tighten

the nut to the

specified

(d) Lockwire(ltem 65l)the coupling

as

value.

required.

20-09-20

in

(Table 203).

RayMheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Table 201

Torque Tightening

of Steel AN and AGS

Torque Ibf

Pipe Couplings

in.

Torque

Nm

AN connection

AGSconnection

size

size

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

-3

3116

95

105

10.73

11.29

-4

1/4

135

150

15.25

16.29

-5

5/16

170

200

19.21

22.60

-6

3/8

270

300

30.51

33.89

-8

1/2

450

500

50.84

56.49

-10

518

650

700

73.44

79.09

-12

3/4

900

1000

101.68

112.98

Table 202

Torque Tightening

of

Light Alloy AN and AGS Pipe Couplings


Torque Ibf in.

Torque

Nm

AN connection

AGSconnection

size

sire

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

-3

3/16

25

35

2.82

3.95

-4

1/4

50

65

5.65

7.34

-5

5/16

70

90

7.91

10.17

-6

3/8

110

130

12.43

14.69

-8

112

230

260

25.99

29.38

-10

5/8

330

360

37.28

40.67

-12

3/4

460

500

51.97

56.49

Table 203

Torque Tightening of Steel and Light Alloy

AN and AGS

Torque

Adapters into Manifold Blocks

Ibf in.

Torque Nm

AN connection

AGSconnection

size

size

Min.

Max.

Min.

Max.

-3

3/16

65

75

7.34

8.47

-4

1/4

95

105

10.73

11.86

-5

5/16

120

130

13.56

14.69

-6

3/8

155

165

17.51

18.64

-8

1/2

280

305

31.64

34.46

-10

5/8

380

405

42.93

45.76

-12

3/4

550

600

62.14

67.79

20-09-20

RBylheon

Aircraft Company

125lHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

IDENTIFICATION

4. MANDATORY TORQUE LOADING

bolts and nuts which must be

Normally removable

Bolt heads and nuts

high is
Holes
in.

(3

painted,

of bolts

1/8 to 3/16 in.


All

black

assembly

on

and

painted (Item 440) ring

nuts

or

(3

are

contained within

mm) high

to 4

to be

torque loaded

Bolt-heads and nuts

ring

as

follows:

black letterT 1/8 to 3116 in.

which contains

one

black

(3

to 4

mm)

black letterT 1/8 to 3116

painted (Item 440) ring, with

were

painted

was

on

black letterT

normal vision.

procedure of identifying normally


assembly was as follows:

NOTE: Before mid-1977 the manufacturers

A red

identified

marked close to the center of the group.

readily Visible with

must be

markings

require

are

mm) high.

to 4

Groups

painted black (Item 440)


adjacent structure.

marked with

are

torque loaded

are

the

on

AIRFRAME

painted

red after final

around the bolt hole

on

assembly

removable nuts and bolts which

in the structure.

the structure

together

with

red letterT.

5. NON-MANDATORY TORQUE LOADINGS


For nut and/or

values

are

bolts, which

not detailed

are

as

being subject

to

mandatory torque loading,

the

following

given for guidance:


Table 204
Guidelines for Non-mandatory Torque Loadings

Torque Loading Ibf

75 Ton

70

60

114 in.

115

5/16 in.
3/8 in.

195

7/16 in.

290

335

1/2 in.

425

490

9/16 in.

600

690

760

5/8 in.

specifications

For 64 KSI bolts

55 Ton

use

use

7.91)

890

(22.03
(32.77
(48.02

(67.80
(85.88

use

the

the

torque

torque

2240 =123,200 Ibs

20-25(2.26-2.82)
45

14.12)

85

50
90

(5.08

5.65)

(9.60 -10.17)

25.99)

145

170

(16.38

19.21)

37.85)

215

250

(24.29

55.37)

315

365

77.97)

450

515

100.56)

570

665

and materials refer to the Structural

168 KSI bolts

For 123 KSI bolts

(6.78

-125(12.99
230

For 160

168,000 Ibs

2240

30-35(3.39-3.95)

3/16in./No.10

For bolt

Normal Steel

High Strength Steel

Thread Size

(Nm)

in.

values in column 1

values in column 2

the torque values in column 3

Light Alloy

I I
10-15(1.13-1.69)
25-30(2.82

3.39)

45

(5.08

5.65)

(8.47

10.17)

75

50

90

28.25)

115

130

(12.99 -14.69)

(35.59

41.24)

170

195

(19.21

22.03)

(50.85

58.19)

240

275

(24.12

31.07)

(64.41

75.14)

300

355

(33.90

40.11)

Repair Manual (SRM)

51-41-00.

(High Strength Steel).

(Normal Steel).

(Light Alloy).

20-09-20

RB~heOn

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

6. ~-CLAMPS
To make

that friction

sure

faces of the

clamp

mating
(Item 034).

slight misalignment does not prevent V-clamps from being properly tightened, the
coupling flanges are to be lubricated. Unless otherwise stated, use grease

or

and the

7. TORQUE TIGHTENING OF TENSION FASTENERS IN JOINTS WITH POLYSULFIDE

INTERFAY

joints contained by fasteners during the curing period of the sealant,


unacceptable in the case of tension fasteners which are torqued to a
pre-tension.
causing a
To
this
loss of pre-tension it is necessary to tighten tension fasteners
level.
overcome
pre-determined
of
initial
the
assembly before final locking. Methods 1 and 2 are given to cover
curing
progressively during
without
and
with grease. Where no method is specified by the manufacturer
assembled
and
nuts
fasteners

Polysulfide

sealant

exude from

can

This is

loss of

Method 1 is to be used.

A.

Assembly Without Grease (Method


(1)

(i.e. structure face, washer face and


torque spanner is applied. Clean the item
and face with a clean lint free cloth (Item 621) dampened with solvent (Item 201) or (Item 227)
then wipe dry with a clean dry cloth before solvent is dry.
Clean the fastener threads, unlubricated nuts and the faces

the nut

or

fastener

at the end where the

seating face)

(2) Make sure the fastener, nut threads and seatings are clean and that there is
present, due to the cooling effect (through evaporation) of the cleaning solvent.
NOTE: Lubricants

self- lubricated nuts

on

the manufacturer. The torque


conditions (i.e. self lubricated

(3) Tighten fasteners


tightening.

(4) Wait

in sequence to the

minimum of 2 hours and

are

not to be removed unless

settings quoted by
lubricant

or

Lockwire

or

split pin

the nut

NOTE: Double wire

unsupported
length
B.

Assembly
(1)

removed).

required torque

value and note the sequence for

is short and

then

(2) Apply grease


requirements.
Do

operations

to

in

wipe dry
the

movement is observed.

preferred and is essential if the locking wire is long and is


damaged. Single wire locking is permissible if the locking

is

can

lays

become

close to the

component locked.

(Method 2)

with Grease

(Item 227)

subsequent

repeat paragraph 7.A. (3).

Clean the fastener threads with


or

(3)

locking

expressly authorized by

required.

as

and/or

condensation

the manufacturer take account of the nut

(5) Repeat 7.A. (3) and (4) until a stable condition exists and no further
Complete this within the initial cure time of the sealant being used.

(6)

no

with

threads

paragraph

20-09-20

7.A.

clean lint free cloth

a
a

clean

(Item 6321) dampened


dry cloth before the solvent is dry.

and

mating surfaces

(3)

(6)

to

in

with solvent

accordance with

the

(Itc?m 201)

manufacturers

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

12S/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

8. INSPECTION

A. Procedure

(1)

(2)

Make

sure

that the correct

and is

correctly

Make

sure

torque equipment,

set to the correct

torque setting,

is used

throughout

calibrated.

that the fasteners

are

tightened

in the correct sequence and that there is


specified torque is applied.

no

relative

movement between the nut and fastener when the

lockwire/split pins

(3) Make

sure

that

Make

sure

that all

(4)

are

to

an

inspection procedures

acceptable

are

standard.

carried out within the

cure

time of the sealant.

20-09-20

Page

207Jun.04

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

RETENTION OF BEARINGS BY W AND S RETAINING RINGS

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i.

General(Figure201)
(W and S) bearing retaining ring, capable of sustaining an incidental side load of
a light alloy ring which is pressed into a housing groove with special tools. This
ring is a truncated cone in shape before insertion, and, when fitted, forms a fiat retainer, similar to a
washer. In combination with its mating ring or an abutment in the housing, the W and S ring will rigidly
clamp in either ball, self-aligning or roller bearings.
A Walker and Schofield

Ib., consists of

up to 100

Each groove is spaced to suit a standard ring or rings in the bearing housing and approved tools only
must be used for cutting the groove or grooves. As shown, bearings can be held by a retaining ring on

retaining ring. When strength considerations


permit, a 3/32 in. diameter, axial extraction groove is also cut into the housing. This enables the visible
portion of the ring to be drifted radially inward, distorting it sufficiently clear of the retaining groove at this
point and enabling it to be gripped by pliers and pulled out.
each side

or

by

means

of

an

abutment in the

Due to variations in the size of

radii

housing

and

one

of standard

bearings, complete clamping of


imperative therefore to make sure the
bearing
using
rings.
bearing is not axially slack after insertion of rings. When any slackness is found, the assembly concerned
must be rejected and one or both of the standard rings must be removed and replaced by an Overthick
ring or rings.
corner

may not be achieved when

the

the outer

on

races

standard

It is

replacing a bearing during the course of a normal overhaul or during field service, it may be
necessary to fit an Overthick ring or rings in order to clamp the new bearing properly, due to the radii
the corners of the new bearing not being the same as those on the old bearing. It is also possible that
When

on
a

bearing originally fitted with standard rings may be found to have worked loose in service. In such cases
an Overthick ring or rings should be fitted, in place of the existing ring or rings, so that the bearing is
properly clamped.
rings are the next even standard wire gage (s.w.g.) thicker, are finished in anodic yellow and
have the suffix O after their normal part number; thus, a plain finish 22 s.w.g. A18Y ring will be the
standard ring, and a yellow finish 20 s.w.g. A18YO ring will be the Overthick one.
Overthick

retaining rings with suffix letter X may be encountered in service. to enable existing stocks of
rings to be used up they should be fully annealed before use and left in this condition. Rings with
suffix letter Y are in current use and may be used as supplied. Instructions for removal and insertion of
each type of ring are identical.
W and S

these

Because of

certain amount of

spring-back which

expected to lie completely flush with


pressing operations in an attempt to
must check that

Inspection
sure

or

occurs

the outer face of the


make the

housing lips

are

ring

NOTE:

ring is pressed

bearing; therefore,

into its groove, it is not

do not resort to excessive

lie flush.

free from cracks after the

rings

are

fitted. It must also be made

rings have entered the grooves without deformation; thickening of the


usually denotes excessive resistance to insertion and is not acceptable.

that the

locally,

when the

BEARINGS RETAINED BY SPUN-IN BUSHES

rings,

REMOVAUINSTALLA TION

either

generally

(20-09- 101~ may

be found in the Hawker 800 and 800XP, BAe 125 Series 800A and 8008 Overhaul Manual

(OM 125-800).
EFFECTIVITY:

20109-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page 201

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

RING
BEFORE
USE

III
I II

II

II
II

WALKER 8 SCHOFIELD
RETAINING RING

I
I

AIRFRAME

II RING PRESSED
II FLAT

01y 8 S)

RETAINING RING
GROOVE

RETAINING RING
GROOVES

SELF ALIGNING
BEARING

BEARING
HOUSING

GROOVE
SELF-ALIGNING SHPERICAL
BEARING RETAINED BY A
W& S RING AT EACH SIDE

SELF-ALIGNING SPHERICAL
BEARING RETAINED BY AN
ABUTMENT AND ONE W 8 S RING

AXIAL GROOVE
FOR EXTRACTION

O
BALL BEARING

BALL BEARING RETAINED


BY A W& S RING AT EACH SIDE

BEARING
HOUSING

RETAINING;; ~;GnllUI UU
BALL BEARING RETAINED BY AN
ABUTMENT AND ONE W& S RING

Walker and Schofield

retaining rings
Figure 201

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

M1606_0

20-09-21
Page

202

Jan. 2001

Rayl~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

2.

Tools and
A.

Special

Equipment
tools

required:

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Tool Kit

25Y1121A/B

-Chisel
Extraction tool

B.

of tools

Description
(1)

For

(Figure 202,

bearings retained by

washer,

As the

during

insertion of

packing piece

combination of
of

bearing

J72143

(contained

in tool kit

25Y1121A/B)

ring

and

an

abutment, each tool comprises

nut, bolt,

and

the

ring,

the

housing

bearing

in the correct position in its

packing piece step heights

dimensions. Each side of

are

packing piece

housing

varied to suit each


is identified

by

suffix letter.

and bolt compress the

BOLT, WASHER

25Y1121A/B)

is used to support

W and S

The tool is assembled to

against

in tool kit

201)

W and S

one

(contained

special packing washer and, if necessary, a sleeve. Tools for bearings retained by two
rings are basically the same but the packing washer is replaced by a stepped packing

piece.

means

Table

J72142

W and S

(2)

AIRFRAME

bearing

NUT

bearing

punch

and

housing

onto the W and S

and screwed

ring, forcing

together

with spanners. The nut

it into the groove of the

housing,

and

outer track.
BOLT, WASHER

NUT

5) PUNCH

5) PUNCH

1) PACKING WASHER
SLEEVE
PACKING PIECE

SINGLE-GROOVE
HOUSING

PACKING
WASHER

(8~
DOUBLE-GROOVE
HOUSING

M1B10 O

Assembly

of tool

Figure 202

C.

Selection of tool

(1)

In the
are

case

(Tables

201

of A65Y

(W

and202)
and S

rings

are

used with double groove

marked with the STD number of its tool and

EFFECTIVITY:

suffix letter A

bearings) the packing pieces


B. (Table 201)

or

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page 203

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

Rayfheon Aircraft
1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

The side suffixed A supports the

bearing

insertion of the second

suffixed B

during

additional

packing piece, suffixed B+.005

AIRFRAME

while the first W and S

ring.
or

But to allow for

ring

is inserted, and the side

machining tolerances,

an

8-.005 is included with the tool and is to be used

as

directed in the following text, to achieve the conditions described.

Packing pieces

for

with

use

double-groove housing

Table 201

SUFFIX LETTER

ITEM

PACKING PIECE STEP HEIGHT

0.065

0.035

8-.005

0.030

8+.005

0.040

~BL
8-.005

8+.005

M1611

(3)

The table

on

the lid of the tool kit box relates

W and S

ring

to the

part numbers of the individual pieces making up the tool used


headed 1, 3, 5 and 7

3.

give

the

coding

it retains and lists the

bearing

to insert the

and/or part number of each

piece

ring.

The columns

of the tool.

(Table 202)

Removalnnstallation of Bearings
bearing housings, embodying W and S rings and without an axial extraction groove, the following
procedure is suggested as a guide for W and S ring removal; individual experience may modify these
suggestions.
For

A.

Removal of

(1)

Split

bearing (Figures 203,

204 and 205)

the ring with chisel J72142. Make

sure

the

split

is clean, and extends the full width of

groove.

W.ANDS.
RING

COLD
CHISEL

BEARING

Ring

BEARING
HOUSING

m1607_0

broken with chisel

Figure 203

EFFECTIVITY:

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

204

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

Insert extraction tool J72143

adjacent

to

split,

and lever

AIRFRAME

upwards.

EXTRACTION TOOL
W.& S.
RING

/JW. AND S.
RING

BEARING HOUSING

Ring

M1608 O

levered up with tool

Figure 204

(3)

Keep

the extraction tool inserted between

twisting movement,

If the W and S

opposite

(5)

ring begins

original split,

grip ring

with

to break up, make

and continue the

Should these methods fail, the


with

(6)

the

and W and S

around the circumference of the W and S

of groove. It may be convenient to

(4)

bearing

ring

may be

pair

of

ring

pliers

fresh start

ring,

to

to

and twist.

Repeat this

eventually force

complete

the

ring

out

removal.

by splitting the W

and S

ring directly

procedure.
split

into several

pieces

and

carefully

moved inward

chisel.

Press out

bearing.

W.AND S. RING

EXTRACTION TOOL

Ring

\d~3

M3720

removed with extraction tool

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY:

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

205

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Installation of

(1)

AIRFRAME

bearing

Single-groove housing (Figure206)


Select the correct

(a)

appropriate
Press

(b)

to the

into

bearing

punch, bolt, packing


W and S

particular
housing,

until

washer and, if necessary, sleeve numbers

ring

bearing

and

bearing being

outer track sits hard

installed.

against

the abutment of the

housing.
punch

(c)

Assemble

(d)

Place W and S

(e)

Fit bolt

(f)

Fit

packing

on

bearing.

washer with

recess

on

located within

Make

remove

just begins

ring. Continue

housing groove

sure

the

bearing

standard

and assemble washer and nut to bolt.

through

the

packing

washer.

tool kit box indicates when sleeve is to be used.

Screw tool together, until it

into the

facing inwards,

If necessary; fit sleeve around bolt


Label

(h)

ring

through bearing.

NOTE:

(g)

to bolt.

clamp

to screw tool

and compress

is not

to

axially

the W and S

together

ring.

Check that

to force the outer

ring against bearing

loose after insertion of

as

far

ring.

as

punch

periphery

is

of the

ring

possible.

If looseness is apparent,

ring and fit Overthick ring.

W 16(2

Insertion of W and S

ring

Figure 206

(2)

Double-groove housing (Figures 207, 208


(a)

(6)

209 and Table

201)

Select the correct

punch, bolt and packing piece part numbers applicable


bearing being installed.

and S

ring

Press

bearing into

equally
EFFECTIVITY:

and

correct

position

in

housing.

The

bearing

to the

special W

outer track should be

adjusted

between grooves.

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

206

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(c)

Assemble

(d)

Place VV and S

(e)

Fit bolt

(f)

Fit

punch

to bolt.

ring

on

bearing.

through bearing.

packing piece

with side suffixed A

to bolt. If necessary, fit correct

Screw tool

(g)

within

ring

the outer

far

as

AIRFRAME

together,
and

until it

packing

just begins

packing piece step

periphery

of the

ready

ring into

washer

to

on

clamp

is inside
the

to enter

housing

and assemble washer and nut

packing piece.

W and S

ring.

housing. Continue

housing

Check that

punch

to screw tool

groove and compress

is located

together

to force

ring against bearing

as

possible.

(h)

Remove tool from component without

(i)

Assemble punch to washer and bolt.

disturbing bearing.

M 1613

Insertion of first W and S

Figure

(j)

PlaceW

(k)

Fit bolt

(I)

Fit

ring

207

andSringonbearing.

through bearing.

packing piece

with correct side

bolt. If necessary, fit suitable

EFFECTIVITY:

ready

packing

housing and assemble


packing piece.

to enter

washer

on

washer and nut to

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page 207

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

Ray~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Mlbl(

Insertion of second W and S

Figure

NOTE:

(Reference

Table

second W and S

side B

or one

201.)
ring.

ring

208

Select correct packing

piece for use during insertion

For example, if Item 8 side A

was

used in B

then Item 8

(2)(f),

side of Item 9 wi/l be used. Determine the correct side to

of

use

:swollofsa

Insert the ~.005 side of packing


pressure

housing and

Item 9 into

hold in with hand

Measure dimension M with feeler gauges:

on4.

If M dimension is
of packing

piece

piece

zero

(packing piece

butts

against housing)

use

the

-t.

005 side

Item 9

If M dimension is between 0.0025 in, and 0.0075 in. inclusive,

If M dimension is greater than 0. 0075 in.,

use

use

side B, Item 8.

the -.005 side of item 9.

(m)

together, until it just begins to clamp W and S ring. Check that punch is located
within ring and packing piece step is inside housing. Continue to screw tool together to force
the outer periphery of the ring into the housing groove and compress ring against bearing as
far as possible.

(n)

Make

Screw tool

sure

remove

the

bearing

is not

axially

loose after insertion of

standard ring and fitOverthick

rings.

If looseness is apparent,

ring.
FIRST W. AND S. RING

BEARING

HOUSING

"M"

PACKING PIECE
SIDE 8+.005

Mlels_o

Packing piece selection


Figure 209
EFFECTIVITY:

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

208

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

W and S

ring/bearing

AIRFRAME

and insertion tool data

Table 202

ITEM 1

S ASSEMBLED

ITEM 3

(Figure 210)

ITEM 5

(Figure 210)

(Figure 21 0)

ITEM 7

(Figure 210)

RING ON DRG. No.

PART No.

CODE

PUNCH

BOLT

PACKING

A24Y

25081 257

P11

A52Y

25CW865

P11

25CW795

P11

A25Y

I 25UN427

CODE

PART No.

CODE

SIZE

25Y1407

10-32

I UNF

P?A

1 25Y1387/1

P1D

25Y1387/7

PART No.

No.

No.

No.

SLEEVE

B1

25Y1415A

STD419C/5315

814

25Y1 757/1 A

STD41 90/24/5

2SY1417A

1 B2

I STD419C/54/5

25CF1245
25081243

25UM953

I STD419D126/5

I STD419C/90/5

53

25Y1 593

S1

25\/1413

S1

25\/1413

25UM825
25UM955
A29Y

P1B

25TR275
25WG413

25Y1 387/3

I"

1/4"

I UNF

25WG411
A52Y

25CW443

P1C

25Y1387/5

I STD419D/2/5

PID

25\/1387/7

I STD419D/25/5

P4A

25Y1 393/1

25CW455
25CW453
25CW55
A66Y

25CT475
25UM993
25UM997

A24Y

25UN243

25Y1419A

83

STD419D/3/5

25UN247

25806155
25802803
25806945
25807249

25FC7503
A25Y

A26Y

25FT263

P3B

25\/1391/3

25-6CX19A

P12

25Y/1 597

25CW505

P3A

25\11391/1

I STD419D/26/5

I STD419C/6515

25CT407

I
25CT131
25FC35651"

I
1"

1 5/16"
I UNF

25CT283

A31Y

2508605

P48

25\1139313

25UM227
25TR387
25WG425

P2A

25Y1 389/1

P2B

25Y1 389/3

2108315

P3A

25Y1391/1

25CX981

P4B

25\(1393/3

I"

STD419C/92/5

I"

I sTD419cnlll

2570369
25TR417

25TE235
25TE237
25W53903
25WS41 03
A35Y

EFFECTIVIPI:

20-09-21
209

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

12S/HAWKER CHARTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

W and S

ringlbearing
Table 202

ITEM 1

S ASSEMBLED

ITEM 3

(Figure 210

and insertion tool data

(Centlnued))
ITEM 5

(Figure 210)

(Figure 210)

ITEM 7

(Figure P10)

RING ON DRG. No.

PART No.

CODE

I SIZE

CODE

I PART No.

2565561

STD419D/4 /7

25E5561

STD419D/4/8

25W837

P8

25Y1401

25UM441

P3B

25\11391/3

P4B

25Y1 393/3

P3B

25Y1391/3

SLEEVE

I CODE

PART No.

No.

No.

No.
A25Y

PUNCH

BOLT

PAGKING

84

STD419/4/5

25Y1421/1A

I S2

25\11411

I S2

25\/1411

STD41 90/29/5

54

25Y1 595

1 STD419D/27/5

52

25\11411

I"

I"

I STD419Cn3/5

25TR211

25WG347
25UM449

25WS1865
25WB1 85
25TE177

25\1\18221
25W8243
25W8283

25\/\18187

25WB25
A26Y

25CX1497

25CX789

I
25\/1391/1

P3A

25CX791
25CX793
25CX1843

25CX1845
25CX1847
25CF1127

25CF1183
25CF1765
25CF99

86

25Y1 421/1 3A

I
I

1 87
I 84

25Y1421/17A

1 85

25Y1421/9A

84

25Y1421/1A

I"
I"

I
I

1 3/8"
I UNF

I"
I

I"

STD41 9C/55/5

25Y1421/1A

25CF2551

25CF775
25CF339
A31Y

25CW289

P3B

25Y1391M

25CF3161

P2A

25Y1389/1

25081203

P2A

STD41 90/45/5

25081827

25081763

I"

1 87

25Y1421/17A

86

25Y1421/13A

B5

25Y1421/9AI"

2508989
25-608329
25CW443

P7

25Y1 399

25CW903
25CW695

A48Y

25CF913

P2A

25Y1389/1

25UN9

P3A

25Y1391/1

25CX185

P2A

25UD11&12

P3B

I 86

25Y1421/13A

25Y 1 38911

1 B5

25Yt421/9A

25\/1391/3

84

25Y1421/1A

25UD21&22
A50Y

25UN113A B

A65Y

25881047

A67YO

P7

I"

25\/1399

I"

25UD17&19

P3C

25Y1391/5

25FC3577

P28

25Y1389/3

EFFECTIVITY:

85

I"

25Y1421/9A

STD41 90/82/5

20-09-21
210

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

R~ylheon A~rcraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES
W and S

ring/bdaring
Table 202

S ASSEMBLED

ITEM 1

ITEM 3

(Figure 210)

arid

AIRFRAME

insertion tool data

(Continued)

(Figure 210)

ITEM 5

(Figure 210)

ITEM 7

(Figure 210)

RING ON DRG. No.

BOLT

PACKING

PART No.

CODE

PUNCH

SIZE

A18Y

No.

25\11403/1

P9A

25CF1 707

PART No.

CODE

No.

89

25Y1 423/9A

SLEEVE
CODE

PART

No.

No.

STD41 9(=/46/5

25CF981

25CF1191

I 88

25Y1 423/1 A

25CF925

I"

I B10

25Y1 423/1 3A

25CF923

I"

1 7/16"

UNF
A18YO

25FC3577

P9A

A1SY

25FN349

PSB

A20Y

25FC3591

P5A

89

25Y1423/9A

STD41 9(3/46/5

25Y1 403/3

BE

25Y1 423/1 A

STD41 SC/47/5

25Y1 395

B11

25Y 1425/1 A

STD41 9C/48/5

25FC3605
A27Y

25081 367

Bfl

25\11389/3

P2B

25Y 1425/1 A

STD41 9(=/56/5

25CW51

I"

I STD4190n6/5

25CW417

I"

I"

I ST0419(=/56/5

25CF779

25CF1325
25CF753A/B
A38Y

25UN7

P2B

25Y1 389/3

B11

25Y1 425/1 A

STD41 9C19/5

112"

25WF85

UNFI"

I"

I STD419D/5/5

P3C

25Y1 391/5

P2B

1 25Y1389/3

25WS1 869

P3C

25Y1391/5

A61Y

25TE243

P6

25Y1 397

B11

25Y1425/1 A

STDQ1 9(=/94/5

A71Y

25CW475

P2B

25Y1 389/3

812

25Y1425/9A

STD41 9C/113/5

A27Y

25CF1439

P10

25Y1 405

813

25Y1427A

STD41 9[)/6/5

A50Y

25WS377
25WF41 95
25\1\18221

25W8187
25UN113

5/8"
UNF

NOTE:

Item numbers in Table 202 refer to callouts in

Figure

210.
ITEM 7, SLEEVE

ITEM 3, BOLT
ITEM 1, PACKING

II
ITEMS,PUNCH

ii
ii

Mills O

Insertion tool data

Figure 210
EFFECTIVITY:

20-09-21

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

211

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

REUSE OF SELF-LOCKING NUTS


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
SCRAP ANY NUT WHICH HAS OBVIOUSLY LOST ITS LOCKING QUALITIES. DO NOT

CAUTION:

ATTEMPT TO RESTORE, OR IMPROVE, THE LOCKING TORQUE OF ANY NUT.

following procedures concern the installing of self-locking nuts of the deformed thread type (including
captive self-locking nuts) and apply to internal and external use. An internal nut being defined as a nut

The

within any

engine casing.

the

To avoid the

costly damage

could result in

to the

of the locking feature,

efficiency

possibility

engine
as

and

of

self-locking

hazarding
by

measured

the

nuts

of the

becoming

aircraft)

loose

or

detached

it is necessary to make

Locking Torque (run-down torque)

is

(which
sure

that

satisfactory

at the time of installation.

The measured run-down torque check,


nuts of
16

self-locking,

using

inch, used externally. Nuts of this type, up

may be checked

by

direct

reading torque wrench,


and for nuts, with

deformed thread, type used

internal~,
to, and including

the manual method described in

must be

5/16 inch thread

subparagraph

complied

thread diameter

with for all

more

than 51

diameter, used externally

C where it is

impossible

to

use

the

torque method.

2.

3.

Tools and

equipment

Equipment/Materials

Part/item No.

Engine oil

Item 137

(Chapter 20-95-101)

Check the measured runldown torque


A.

Check the measured run-down torque, with

Make

clean

(2)

(3)

direct

reading torque

wrench

(Table 201)

BOLTS WITH DAMAGED THREADS AND ROUGH ENDS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

CAUTION:

(1)

sure

that the threads of the bolt

engine

oil

(item 137) (or as

Screw the

self-locking

protruding

from, the nut end face.

nut

Refer to Table 201 and,


nut or bolt.

During

this

on

using

the bolt

direct

operation,

or

stud

are

clean and

detailed in the relevant

or

undamaged and lubricated with

instructions).

stud until the bolt

or

reading torque wrench,

make

sure

stud end is flush with,

check the load

or

required

slightly

to turn the

that the thrust face of the nut does not contact the

component face.

(4)

Reject
new

the nut if it has

nut and

EFFECTIVITY:

locking torque

below the value for size

repeat the measured run-down torque check until

given inTable 201,


satisfactory.

then select

20-09-23
201

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Minimum run-down

locking torque

for

self-locking

AIRFRAME

nuts

Table 201

Minimum

Thread size

B.

No.4

UNF

0.5

0.06

No.6

UNF

1.0

0.11

No.8

UNF

1.5

0.17

No.lO

UNF

2.0

0.22

1/4 in.

UNF

3.5

0.40

5/16 in.

UNF

6.5

0.73

3/8 in.

UNF

9.5

1.07

7/16 in.

UNF

14.0

1.58

1/2 in.

UNF

18.0

2.03

9/16 in.

UNF

24.0

2.71

5/8 in.

UNF

32.0

3.62

This

procedure

is

an

alternative method and

inch thread diameter in external

(1)

Attempt

to screw the

maximum

(2)

If the nut

finger

can

check until

Checks

on

CAUTION:
A.

final

self-locking

areas

only applies to nut sizes up to, and including 5/is


impossible to use the torque method.

where it is

nut on the bolt or stud

beyond

the

locking

section

using

nut and

repeat

pressure.

be screwed

beyond

the

locking

section

reject

it. Select

a new

the

satisfactory.

assembly

INSUFFICIENT BOLT OR STUD THREAD PROTRUSION IS UNACCEPTABLE.

During final assembly (after torque-tightening),


tin

(Nm)

manually

Check the run-down torque


NOTE:

4.

Minimum torque

torque (Ibf. in.)

addition to the chamfered

portion

of the bolt

check to make
or

stud

end)

is

sure

that

minimum of

protruding beyond

one

full thread

the outer face of the

nut.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-09-23

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

202

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

COMPONENT LOCKING

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. INFORMATION
Bolts and nuts etc,

on

which the

Bolts and nuts etc. used


with

on

security of Class

1 structures

shall be locked to Standard A.

Class 2 structures shall be locked to Standard A if the nut

parts having relative motion

such

as

or

its bolt is in contact

would tend to loosen the nut.

Other bolts and nuts etc. shall be locked to Standard A

Standard A

depends

or

B at the

designers

Standard B

Locking

Locking

Split pins

Stiffnuts

Locking

Double nuts locked

wire

discretion.

Spring locking

together

washers

Tab washers

assembly procedures require components to be locked, select the method


following general examples. Assembly procedures will define the type of locking to be
and the general method must be adapted to suit each particular case.
Where

to be used from the

used in each instance

2. WIRE LOCKING
Use 22 s.w.g. non-corrodible steel wire, DTD.189A for all
refer to other materials.

Keep

wire under tension

on

initial

loosening

tanks, and where possible in other


metal

spikes

and

keep

electrostatic

of

wire-locking, except where assembly procedures

component, and

stow wire ends flat to

prevent damage. In fuel


standing sharp

areas, tuck wire ends under another wire to remove free

discharge

hazard to the minimum.

A. Bolts and Nuts


The basic
it tends to

B.

principle is to prevent
tighten the bolt or nut.

bolt

or

nut

Double wire

unscrewing, therefore the wire must be positioned


locking as shown in Figure 201 must be used.

so

that

Pipe Couplings
Fipe couplings, irrespective of their type or position in the aircraft, are to be positively locked (Ref.
Figure 201). Single wire locking is permissible on pipe couplings where the wire length is short and
located close to the component being locked. Double wire locking is preferred, and is essential where
the connecting length of wire is unsupported andlor can be damaged. The basic principle is to prevent a
joint unscrewing, therefore the wire is to describe a helix around the joint for at least half a turn in the
appropriate direction.
All

C. Turnbuckles and
Wire-lock to method

Adjustable

as

shown

on

End Struts

Figure 202.

20-09-41

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3. PEENING OF BOLT ENDS


CAUTION: Locking by peening

can

be used

only when

it is referenced

by an assembly procedure.

assembly procedures refer to locking by peening, cut the bolt end down to dimension A in Figure 202.
slight countersink is permissible if required, and the bolt end is then to be peened over to close one thread
as close as possible to the nut. If special tools are not available, peening can be affected by using a hammer
and flat punch; use a heavy reaction block to support the bolt head. It is essential to check tightness of all
nuts after initial peening; follow this check by further deformation.

When
A

After

locking by peening, protect peened

area

with treatment RF

(Ref. 20-10-3527, 201).

4. SPOT LOCKING OF SCREW AND BOLT HEADS


CAUTION: Spot locking
When

can

be used

only

when it is referenced

by an assembly procedure.

assembly procedures refer to spot locking of countersunk screw and bolt heads, use a centre punch to
part, surrounding the screw or bolt, or, where applicable, into each end of the screwdriver

burr metal from the

slot.

5. SPLIT PINNING

assembly procedures
unless otherwise specified.

When

Bolt Size

refer to

split pinning,

Split

(UNF)

use one

of the

following

drills to suit the

particular split pin,

Drill Size

Pin

No. 10-32

SP90C8

#51, 0.067 in. (1.70 mm)

1/4 in.

SP90C8

#51, 0.067 in. (1.70 mm)

5/16 in.

SP90C8

#51, 0.067 in. (1.70 mm)

3/8 in.

SP90E8

#41, 0.096 in. (2.45 mm)

7/16 in.

SP90E10

#41, 0.096 in. (2.45 mm)

1/2 in.

SP90E10

#41, 0.096 in. (2.45 mm)

9/16 in.

SP90G12

#30, 0.128 in. (3.25 mm)

5/8 in.

SP90G12

#30, 0.128 in. (3.25 mm)

3/4 in.

SP90H14

#20, 0.161 in. (4.10 mm)

7/8 in.

SP90H14

#20, 0.161 in. (4.10 mm)

1 in.

SP90K18

#10, 0.193 in. (4.90 mm)

6. STIFFNUT
Where stiff nuts

are

used,

minimum of

one

complete thread

must

project beyond

the nut.

Stiff nuts may be used on Class 1 applications where there are five or more bolts in a group, in which the
loosening of one nut would not be catastrophic if the remaining bolts and nuts can sufficiently support the

proof

Jun.05~of

loads.

20-09-41

Raytheon

nircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

DRILL C

AIRFRAME

B7
A

1~3
1/4

SIZE

UNF

13/16 UNFI 3/8

UNF

17/16

UNF

1 1/2

No. 8

No. 10

No.58

Na.SB

1/4

UNF

15/16

UNF

13/8

UNF

17/16 UNFI 1/2

UNF

SIZE A

A ACROSS

.431

.493

.554

.679

.741

FLATS

438

.500

.562

.688

.750

.365

.417

492

.604

.676

No.58

No.58

No.58

No.54

No.54

DRILLC

BOLT

UNF

DRILLB

No. 58

No. 58

No. 54

No. 54

No. 54

DRILL No. 58 TO 8E USED FOR No. 10 PAN HEAD BOLTS AND SCREWS

DRILLING OF BOLTS FOR WIRE LOCKING

DRILLING OF NUTS FOR WIRE LOCKING

TYPICAL METHOD OF WIRE LOCKING BOLT


HEADS TOGETHER

(DOUBLE

WIRE

LOCKING)

RIGID
ANCHOR

WIRE LOCKING PIPE COUPLINGS


THE BOLT END IS CUT DOWN TO DIM.A

(EOUAL

TO 1

1/2

THREAD

PITCHES) AND

PEENED-OVER TO CLOSE ONE THREAD


AS CLOSE TO THE NUT AS POSSIBLE

800
MINIMUM
0.15 IN. OR

D/p

WHICHEVER IS SMALLER

*b~
M4421

PEENING OF BOLT ENDS

SPOT LOCKING OF NUTS

Figure 201
Component Locking

20-09-41

HAOOB998104AA

Raytheon

nircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

LOCKNUTS

CONTROL CABLE TURNBUCKLES

TURNBARREL AND SCREWED ENDS


LOCKNUTS

1TENSION ROD AND TAPPED ENDS


LOCKNUTS

SPECIAL TURNBARREL AND SCREWED ENDS


NOTE: TWISTED ENDS TO BE PUSHED INTO HOLE TO AVOID FOULING

R.H.THREAD

LOCKNUTS

L.H.THREAD

ii)

d Y

(ii

ADJUSTABLE STRUT-BOTH ENDS ADJUSTABLE


LOCKNUT

ADJUSTABLE STRUT-SINGLE END ADJUSTABLE


LOCKNUT

ADJUSTABLE STRUT INCORPORATING A QUICK RELEASE COUPLE

LOCKNUTS

SPRING STRUTS OR RAMS INCORPORATING A PISTON WHICH IS FREE TO ROTATE

Figure 202
Component Locking

Jun.05~f"

20-09-41

M4419

Ray~heonAircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

FLARING OF STAIMLESS STEEL TUBES


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1.

General

Flaring of tubes may be carried out using power-operated percussion, pressure equipment or hand rotary
flaring tools. The most reliable means of producing satisfactory flares is by power-operated percussion or
pressure equipment. However, satisfactory results can be produced using hand rotary flaring tools,
provided hardened and polished flaring cones are used. AGS hand rotary flaring tools, tungsten carbide
pipe expanders and
A.

Tools and
CAUTION:

associated accessories may be obtained under the

~ollowing part

numbers.

equipment
IF HAND ROTARY TOOL PART NUMBER AGS 772 IS USED, OPERATORS MUST

MAKE SURE THAT AN APPROPRIATE HARDENED AND POLISHED PIPE


EXPANDER IS FITTED.

Part/item No.

Equipment/Material
Pipe Flaring Tool
(Small Type) (Hand rotary
3/16 in. to 1/2 in.)
Pipe expander 3/16
Pipe diameter 3/16

AGS 772
tool for

pipe

sizes

J6614, Item 1

(Complete Assembly)

in. to 1/2 in. diameter

J6614, Item

in.

Split die AGS

776A
776B

Pipe

diameter 1/4 in.

Split die AGS

Pipe

diameter 5/16 in.

Split

die AGS 776BB

Pipe

diameter 3/8 in.

Split

die AGS 776C

Pipe

diameter 7/16 in.

Split

die AGS 776CC

Pipe diameter 1/2


NOTE:

The

(fits

AGS 772

only)

Split die AGS

in.

adaptor bush (J6615,

Item

4)

is

required to

776D

enable

split dies

for 3/16 in. to 1/2 in.

diameter pipes to be used in AGS 773.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20109-91
Page

201

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

CAUTION:

WHEN FLARING STAINLESS STEEL

TUBE,

TOOL AGS773 MUST NOT BE USED

(SUITABLE

AIRFRAME

THE PIPE EXPANDER SUPPLIED WITH

FOR LIGHT ALLOY TUBE

ONLY).

EITHER J6615 ITEM 2 OR 3, DEPENDENT ON THE SIZE OF THE TUBE TO BE

FLARED, MUST BE USED.

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Pipe Flaring Tool


(Large Type) (Hand rotary tool for pipe
5/8 in. to 1-1/4 in.)

AGS 773

J6615, item 1
(Compiete Assembly)

sizes

in. to 1-1/4 in, diameter

Pipe expander 5/8

Pipe expander 3/16

J6615, Item 2

in. to 1/2 in. diameter

J6615, Item 3

Adaptor bush

J6615, Item

Pipe diameter 5/8

776E

Split

die AGS 776F

diameter 7/8 in.

Split

die AGS 7766

Pipe diameter

1 in.

Split

die AGS 776H

Pipe diameter

1-1/8 in.

Split

die AGS 776

diameter 1-1 14 in.

Split

die AGS 776J

Pipe
B.

SplitdieAGS

3/4 in.

Pipe diameter

Pipe

in.

Pipe diameter/split

die number cross-reference

AGS 772

Split Die No.


(use with adapterbush,

Pipe
Diameter

Item

2.

AGS 773

Pipe
Diameter

Split Die

No.

4)

3/16 in.

AGS 776A

5/8 in.

AGS 776E

1/4 in.

AGS 7768

3/4 in.

AGS 776F

5/16 in.

AGS 776BB

7/8 in.

AGS 776G

3/8 in.

AGS 776C

1 in.

AGS 776H

7/16 in.

AGS 776CC

1-1/8 in.

AGS 776

112 in.

AGS 776D

1-1/4 in.

AGS 776J

Flaring
A.

Procedure

(1)

(FigurePO1)

The end of the tube must be cut at


remove

any

EFFECTIVIP~
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

saw

cuts, notches

or

right angles

to the axis of the tube and the end finished to

similar marks from which

crack could

develop.

20-09-91
Page

202

Dec. 99

Ray~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

Burrs and

sharp edges

be

radiused.

slightly

must be removed from the cut ends of the tube and the inside

Cleanliness of the end of the tube and the

(3)

AIRFRAME

use

of uncontaminated lubricant when

edge

flaring

must

are

essential.

(4)

Select the correct size

split

die for the tube to be flared and put into the tool.

(5)

Place the tube into the

split

die

(6)

Close the

(7)

Rotate the knurled collar with four holes to

CAUTION:

clamp

and

tighten

so

it

the nut

protrudes just
so

over

the tube will not

move

the

WHEN USING A HAND ROTARY FLARING

the thickness of the tube wall.

move.

expander
TOOL,

until it

just touches

the tube.

A STEADY EVEN ROTARY

MOTION MUST BE MADE WITHOUT UNDUE PRESSURE.

CAUTION:

(8)

Slowly

A CLEAN LUBRICANTMUST BE USED DURING THE FLARING PROCESS.


rotate

expander

handle to

adjust knurled

collar and

flare has been achieved when the tube has filled the

angle

move

the

expander forward. The

full

at the end of the die.

CLAMP

HANDLE FOR
EXPANDER

EXPANDER

ROTATING

~ii

NUT

-----c~

KNURLED

SPLIT

COLLAR

DIE
M3361
HA208

973436AA

Pipe Expander Tool Assembly

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-09-91
Page

203

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3.

AIRFRAME

Inspection/Check
A.

Examine the

(1)

pipe

The formed end must be examined to make


flared end must be

B.

Pressuretestthe

rejected

and the tool

for pressure

Test pressure

required

(2)

Test pressure

required for

(3)

Test pressure

required for suction pipes

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

there

are no scores.

If

scores are

present, the

pipe

(1)

EFFECTIVITY:

sure

examined.

return

pipes to 4,500 psi.

pipes

to 500

to 50

psi.
psi.

20-09-91
Page

204

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

COUNTERSUNK HEAD BOLTS


1.

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

General(Figure201)
The UNF bolts have 100"

identify
2.

AIRFRAME

or

120" countersinks and

the type of bolt heads

as

plunge-milled

and

parallel

or

waisted

recesses

in the head. The

recesses

Hi-torque respectively.

Remove and Install Bolts (Table 201, Table 202)


To

and install

remove

and sockets
milled and

are

plunge-milled

and

Hi-torque head

used. The bolt heads and drivers

are

bolts without

illustrated in

damaging the recess, special drivers


Figure 201. The part numbers of plunge

IHi-torque bolts, and the appropriate drivers and sockets are

shown in Table 201 and 7able 202.

DRIVER

""""J
RECESS

PLUNGE-MILLED
BOLT

SOCKET

~I

WAISTED
RECESS

TORQUE BOLT

M11872

Approved

drivers and sockets for countersunk head bolts

Figure 201

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-09-1 41
Page

201

Dec. 99

Rilytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Approved

Drivers for

Hi-Torque

AIRFRAME

Bolts

Table 201

C/SINK

SLOT RADIUS

SOCKET

DRIVER

PART NUMBER

BOLT SIZE

DHS 1419-20

No 10 UNF

120"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS3

1/4 UNF

120"

.437 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

HTS4

No 10 UNF

100"

.219 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

Y4928

1/4 UNF

100"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS3

5/16 UNF

100"

.437 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

HTS4

3/8 UNF

100"

.50 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

HTS5

No 10 UNF

100"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

050

HTS3

1/4 UNF

100"

437 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

A50

HTS4

No 10 UNF

100"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS3

1/4 UNF

100"

.437 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

HTS4

No 10 UNF

100"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS3

1/4 UN~

100"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS3

5/16 UNF

100"

.437 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

HTS4

3/8 WNF:

100"

.50 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

HTS5

No 10 UNF

120"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

1/4 UNF

120"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS3
HTS3

25 WS3195

No 10 UNF

100"

.281 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

050

HTS3

25 WS3197

No 10 UNF

1000

.187 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

HTS2

DHS 1421

DHS 1423

DHS 1424

DHS 1473

DHS 1475

Approved

Drivers for

Plunge-milled

Bolts

Table 202

PART

BOLT SIZE

C/SINK

SLOT

SOCKET

DRIVER

RADIUS

NUMBER
No 10 UNF

100"

.219 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

J72537 Ref 1

1/4 UNF

100"

.30 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

J72537 Ref 2

5/16 UNF

1000

.30 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

J72537 Ref 2

3/8 UNF

100"

.375 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

J72537 Ref 3

DHS 1403-4

No 70 UNF

120"

.30 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

J72537 Ref 4

DHS 1411-12

No 10 UNF

100"

.219 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

050

J72537 Ref 1

1/4 UNF
5/16 UNF

100"

.30 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

J72537 Ref 2

100"

.30 in

J72260 Ref 2

or

A50

J72537 Ref 2

No 10UNF

120"

.30 in

J72260 Ref 1

or

D50

J72537 Ref 4

DHS 1401-2

DHS 1416

EFFECTIVIP~
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-09-141
Page

202

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

APPLICATION OF

AIRFRAME

ALOCR6NI 1200 (ALODINE 1200)

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH ALOCROM 1200. PUT ON
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE ALOCROM MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE
WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN

WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

A.

Introduction
NOTE:

Alocrom and Alodine

range of products

practice

materials that

approved

made of aluminum and its


Alocrom 1200 is

gold

two trade names for the same

product.

marketed under the Alodine trade

covers

the procedure for the

for the internal and external

Outside the UK the Alocrom

name.

application

of Alocrom 1200 and lists the

protection of components

and assemblies

alloys.

finish chromate conversion

to metal. Whilst the

coating system,

adhesion of

paint

significantly

affect electrical contact resistance. Aiocrom also

be used to
B.

are

This maintenance
are

are

repair damaged

use

anodic finish

of alocrom

on

improves

the

which when

paint

improves

aluminum and its

applied improves

the

adhesion it does not

corrosion resistance, and may

alloys.

Equipment/Material
Equipment/Materials

Part/item No.

Degreasing agent

Item 230

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800XP

(Chapter 20-95-201)

20-1 0-08
Page

201

Jun.OS

Raytheon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Materials

Part/item No.

Alocrom 1200

Item 504

(Chapter 20-95-501)

Lint-free cloth

Item 621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Item 627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Item 634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Item 676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Item 679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Item 682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Silicon carbide paper


Barrier

(400 grade)

cream

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

2.

shield

clothing

Demineralized water

Local

supply

Swabs

Local

supply

Water miscible cleaner

Local

supply

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to the

Application
NOTE:

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

of Alocrom 1200

A chromate

coating

will be

the outside skin while

required when the protective coating (anodic)

stripping

the

paint

surfaces with Alocrom 1200 before

A.

Surface

(1)

has been

damaged

on

It may also be necessary to activate old anodized

priming.

preparation

Make

sure

that the

area to

be treated is of sufficient

the Alocrom 1200 solution and to allow for the


been obtained. If necessary
the

(2)

Degrease

(3)

Rub down the

area

remove

to be treated with

area

with 400

miscible cleaner to obtain

paint

area

adequate

finish

to make

sure

of

an even

removal of excess,

(STRIPPING

OF

once

application

of

the coat has

PAINT).

degreasing agent (Item 230)

and lint free cloth

(Item 621).

silicon carbide paper (Item 627 or alternative) with water


smooth surface free from contaminates. Feather the edges of the

grade

surrounding paint.

(4)
B.

Rinse the

area

with water to

remove

all dust and debris. Allow the

area

to

fully dry.

Mixing

WARNING:

DO NOT STORE MIXED ALOCROM FOR MORE THAN 24 HOURS. SMALL QUANTITIES
OF TOXIC CYANIDE GAS MAY BE FORMED. SAFELY DISCARD ANY UNUSED
MIXTURE AFTER 24 HOURS IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL DISPOSAL

PROCEDURES.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800XP

20-1 0-08
Page

202

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(1)

AIRFRAME

Prepare the Alocrom solution by mixing 4 oz of Alocrom 1200 powder (Item 504) to 1 US gal of
(4.8 oz of Alocrom 1200 powder to 1 Imp gal of water, 30 grams of Alocrom 1200 powder
to 1 liter of water). The powder must be added slowly at room temperature, stirring continuously.
water

NOTE:

For aluminum

alloy surfaces previously

been

within 16 hours

painted

weaker

The Alocrom solution is mixed in


water

(0.25

powder

oz.

ofAlocrom 1200

to 1 liter of

water).

The

treated

by anodizing

coating

of Alocrom should be

ratio of 0.2

powder to

powder

oz

or

pickling but

of Alocrom 1200

lmp gal of water,

must be added

slowly

which have not

applied.

powder to

1 US

gal

of

1.6 grams ofAlocrom 1200


at room

temperature, stirring

continuously.
C.

Surface treatment
WARNING:

DO NOT ALLOW

OR

SAWDUST)

CLOTHS, SPONGES OR ANY ORGANIC MATERIAL (EG. PAPER

WHICH ARE WET WITH ALOCROM TO DRY OUT AS THEY MAY

CONSTITUTE A FIRE HAZARD. WASH CLOTHS ETC. IN WATER IMMEDIATELY


AFTER CONTAMINATION AND DISCARD THEM INTO A NON-FLAMMABLE

CONTAINER.

(1)

Frequently apply the solution by swab or brush (Item 676) to the surface to be treated for three
to five minutes (for temperatures above 68"F (20"C), a shorter application time may be
necessary) until the surface color is golden iridescent to light brown all over, depending on the
alloy composition, condition and surface preparation.

(2)

Treat small

areas

fresh solution

(3)

Remove

as

excess

at a

time, make

sure

that the

NOTE:

dry

the

Any bright areas


process must be

EFFECTIVIPI:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800XP

treated is

uniformly

wetted and

apply

Alocrom from the surface

soft sponge or cloth, taking care not to


demineralized water wherever possible.
If necessary

being

necessary.

(4)

area

area

using

by flushing with clean water or gently swabbing with a


damage the freshly treated surface. Rinse finally with

hot air up to

of powdery deposits

on

maximum of 104"F

(40"C).

the treated area indicate

improper treatment and the

repeated.

20-1 0-08
Page

203

Jun.03

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

CONTROL CABLES (EXAMINATION AND REJECTION


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

CRITERIA)

INFORMATION
CAUTION: When handling control cables,

use

protective gloves.
Partlltem No.

EquipmentlMaterials
Corrosion

Cleaning

preventative

solvent

Lint free cloth


Protective

gloves

079

(Ci7apter 20-95-11)

219

(Chapter 20-95-201)

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

2. GENERAL

A. Cable Construction

(1)

Control cables
are

are

then twisted

formed

by helically twisting

laid around

or

carbon steel/stainless steel

are

central strand

set number of wires to make

(core)

strand. The strands

to form the cable. Control cables made from

of various construction

(Ref. Table 201).

Table 201

Cable Construction
British
Standard
Identifier

Cable Size

4P

5 cwt

Cable Material

Cable Class
7 X 7

(7

strands of 7 wires per

strand)

Stainless Steel

(flap synchro
cables)
strand)

(7

strands of 7 wires per

10 cwt

7 X 14

(7

strands of 14 wires per

strand)

Carbon steel

10P

15 cwt

7 X 19

(7

strands of 19 wires per

strand)

Carbon steel

51P

25 cwt

7 X 19

(7

strands of 19 wires per

strand)

Carbon steel

7 X 7

(7

strands of 7 wires per

5 cwt

5P

2.4

mm

3/32 in.

(approx.
diameter)

strand)

Carbon steel

perstrand)

Carbon steel

30 cwt

7 X 19

(7

strands of 19 wires per

53P

40 cwt

7 X 19

(7

strands of 19 wires

(1) Components
Wire

used in control cables


Each individual

are

(Kc;f. Fiyure 201).

cylindrical

steel rod

or

Carbon steel

strand)

52P

B. Cable Definitions

(a)

Carbon steel

7 X 7

4P

thread.

20-~ 0-31

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

helically twisted

(b)

Strand

Each group of wires

(c)

Core

The central strand about which the

(d)

Cable

A group of strands laid

helically

laid.

or

remaining strands of the

about

cable

are

laid.

helically

a core.

~t
DIAMETER

DIAMETER

DIAMETEA

F~?I
7X19

7X14

7X7

HA208

001154AA.AI

Figure 201
Cable Cross-section

C. Cable Size

(1)

Rating and Systems

Refer to ~TBb[e 202 for information on cable size rating, system to which control cables
connected and the appropriate tensions for that system (Ref. 27-00-00, 201).

are

Table 202

System
Control Cable

System

Aileron Control

System

Aileron Trim Control

Cable Size

Cable size

System

Aileron Servomotor Circuit


2.4

Rudder Control

mm

System

Rudder Trim Control

System

Rudder Servomotor Circuit


2.4

Jun.04~P

20-1 0-31

mm

Rating
System

rating

Cable Tension"

15 cwt

70 to 80 Ib

(31.7

to 36.3

kg)

25 cwt

70 to 80 Ib

(31.7

to 36.3

kg)

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

10 cwt

95 to 100 Ib

(43.1

to 45.4

kg)

35 to 40 Ib

(15.8

to 18.1

kg)

15 cwt

70 to 80 Ib

(31.7

to 36.3

kg)

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

10 cwt

95 to 100 Ib

(43.1

35 to 40 Ib

(15.8

(approx. 3/32
diameter)

(approx. 3/32
diameter)

in.

in.

to 45.4
to 18.1

kg)
kg)

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Table 202

System
Control Cable

System

Elevator Control

System

Cable Size

Cable size

Rating
System

rating

Cable Tension"

25 cwt

70 to 80 Ib

(31.7

to 36.3

kg)

25 cwt

85 to 95 Ib

(38.6

to 43.1

kg)

(3.175 mm)

75 to 85 Ib

(34.1

to 38.6

kg)

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

Forward

System
elliptical pulley

Elevator Control

of

Aft

1/8 in.

(1000)compensator

Elevator Control

Forward of

System

Elevator Trim Control

(15.8

10 cwt

35 to 40 Ib

(15.8

to 18.1

kg)

circuit

5 cwt

35 to 40 Ib

(15.8

to 18.1

kg)

System

10 cwt

35 to 40 Ib

(15.8

to 18.1

kg)

Flap synchronizer

(elevator,

(approx. 3132
diameter)

in.

10 to 15 Ib

5 cwt

aileron

and thrust control lever


Nose wheel

kg)

35 to 40 Ib

mm

Flap Control System

Gust lock

(43.1

to 18.1

2.4

Air brake Control

95 to 100 Ib

10 cwt

Elevator Servomotor Circuit

to 45.4

(4.5

to 6.8

kg)

kg)

baulk)
20 Ib

10 cwt

steering system

(9.1 kg)

Throttle circuit

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

Throttle circuit

5 cwt

25 to 40 Ib

(11.3

to 18.1

kg)

H.P. cock circuit

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

L.P cock circuit

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

Crossfeed

5 cwt

25 to 30 Ib

(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

5 cwt

25 to 30

lb(11.3

to 13.6

kg)

(Hawker

800XP and Hawker

800XP Pro Line

21)

tank

Long range

NOTE
At

(2)

an

ambient

temperature of

Control cables fitted with barrels

(3) If,

on

straighten

(21.1"C).

For deviations from the ambient

applies

Chapter

27.

to the

nipple

is found to have

permanent set,

no

attempt

the cable.

On reinstallation, the cable should be positioned radially, within the barrel,


same position in the quadrant as that before removal.
NOTE: This

see

(Ref. Figure 202).

removal, the cable adjacent

should be made to

(4)

70" F

at any cable connection to

quadrant

where

so

that the set lies in the

cable barrel is used.

20-1 0-31

Raytheon

nircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

ALIGN CABLE SUCH THAT


ANY SET IS IN ITS ORIGINAL
LOCATION AND DIRECTION

BARREL

NIPPLE

\u~\

POSITION OF POSSIBLE SET

IN CABLE, WHERE CABLE WRAPS


AROUND BLEND RADIUS BETWEEN
SLOT AND QUADRANT CABLE GROOVE
M4979 2
HA20B99021 7AA

Figure

202

Cables Installed With Barrels

3. CONTROL CABLE INSPECTION


A. Broken Wires

during the inspection the Quantity of broken wires is found to


quantity, then the control cable must be replaced immediately.

CAUTION: If

CAUTION: No broken wires

are

permitted

where the control cables go

through

a possibility of the broken wires bunching around


replaced irrespective of any other damage.

CAUTION: If there is

NOTE: If the

quantity of broken wires is equal or


replaced before 30 flight hours.

less than the

be

more

than the

permitted

pressure seal.

pulley, the cable

permitted quantity,

must be

then the control cable

must be

(1)

Control cables

(a)

are

to be

carefully

of the

and/or broken wires

(Ref. Figure 203).

by passing a cloth both ways along the length of the cable.


close visual examination of the cable to determine the full extent

damage.

control cable that has

airframe

components, such

paragrclph 2.C).

Jun.04~$"

worn

Examine cables for broken wires


If the cloth catches, make

(2) Any

examined for

20-~ 0-31

broken wire in
as

pulleys

and

an area

that is not in contact with

fairleads,

wear

producing
(Ref.

must be examined for corrosion

Ral~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

W855

Figure 203
Ispection Technique

Cable

(3)

Critical

areas

and around

(a)

for wire

breakage

are

those sections of the cable which do pass

through

fairleads

pulleys.

A maximum of 3 broken wires

through

fairlead

or

around

CAUTION: Broken wires

only
pulley.

along

is

permitted

two successive

in

part of

inch

one

control cable which goes

(25.4 mm) lengths

of cable

are

not

permitted.
(4)

Permitted limits for cables with broken wires

(a)

Class 7 X 7 cables

(b)

Class 7 X 14 cables

over one

3 broken wires with

3 broken wires with

NOTE: No broken wires

are

acceptable

inch

(25.4 mm) lengths

of cable

are:

maximum of 2 broken wires per strand.


a

maximum of 2 broken wires per strand

at sections of cable

passing through pressure

seals.

inspection broken wires are found, but they are within the permissible
limits, the cable(s) must be changed within 30 flying hours. If the cable(s) are in
excess of the limitations then the cable(s) must be changed.

NOTE: If after this

(c)

Class 7 X 19 cables

6 broken wires with

maximum of 3 broken wires per strand.

B. Cable Wear
NOTE:

Any wire

worn more

NOTE: The number of


one

than 60% of its diameter shall be counted

permissible

worn

wires

over a one

inch

as a

broken wire.

(25.4mm) length

of cable is reduced

by

wire for every broken wire.

NOTE: More than


and not

one worn

adjacent

to

cable section is
one

another

on

permissible provided

that all

worn

sections

the cable circumference.

201 0-31

are

within limits

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

INDIVIDUAL OUTER WIRES


WORN 40

50"/0

(NOTE RLENDINC
AREAS)

OF WORN

INDIVIDUAL OUTER WIRES WORN


INDIVIDUAL OUTER WIRES WORN

MORE THAN 500/u

LESS TIIAN 400/0

INDIVIDUALLY

(WORN AREAS
DISTINGUISHABLE)

MShh

Ilh!0~1
,,,,,,jn~hl

Figure 204
External Cable Wear Patterns

(1)

External cable
area

(2)

at

one

wear

normally

side of the cable

Internal cable

or

along

the

working length of the cable either


periphery (Ref. Figure 204).

over a

contact

around the cable

in the sections of cable which pass over pulleys and quadrants. This
detected unless the strands of the cable are separated (Ref. Figure 205).

wear occurs

condition is not

easily

NOTE: Under unfavorable

cable

occurs

operating conditions,

internal cable

wear.

Mse~

Figure 205
Internal Cable Wear

20-10-31

wear can

be

greater

than external

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

CAUTION: If the

cable(s)

NOTE: If after this

cable(s)
(3)

Permitted

wires,

(4)

in

worn more

than the limitations then the

inspection worn wires are found, but they


subjected to repeat inspections at no

must be

limits

wear

are as

are

AIRFRAME

over a one

inch

(25.4mm) length

are

within the

more

of cable,

cable(s)

than 300

provided

must be

permitted limits, the


flying hour periods

that there

are no

maximum of 3 wires

50%

of their diameter.

Class 7 X 7 cable

(b)

Class 7 X 14 cable

maximum of 3 wires

worn

50%

or more

of their diameter.

(c)

Class 7 X 19 cable

maximum of 6 wires

worn

50%

or more

of their diameter.

worn

or more

acceptable until exposure of the cable outer wires,


rough edges. Cables should be changed as soon as the
become exposed. To clarify a difference in terminology, "Swagged tubes" and "Sleeved
physically the same thing.

On sleeved cables,
such

outer wires

cables"

broken

follows:

(a)

provided

changed.

are

of the sleeves is

wear

wear

is smooth with

no

C. Corrosion
CAUTION: Discard the cable if inner strand corrosion is found.

(1)

especially

Check for corrosion

on

cable sections in contact with

pulleys,

fairleads and pressure

seals.

NOTE: Areas

especially

Main

prone to cable corrosion

shrouds.

Tailplane trailing edge

(2)

shrouds.

of fin.

If any surface corrosion is found, do


inspection of inner strands.
NOTE: It may be necessary to
corrosion.

(3)

follows:

landing gear bay.

VVing trailing edge

Top

are as

a more

remove

detailed

inspection requiring

and flex the cable to

cable

properly inspect

slackening for

it for internal strand

In case of minor corrosion:

CAUTION: Do not soak the cable with cleaning solvent


lubrication of the cable.

(a) Apply

small

quantity

of

cleaning

solvent

or

(Item %19)

damage may

to

be done to the internal

lint-free cloth

(Ilertl 621)

and clean

the cable.

(b)

Allow the cable to

(c)

If

required, apply

fully dry.

an

anticorrosion coat

(Item 079)

to the cable

(FPef. 20-10-3%, 201).

20-1 0-31

NaYtNeerr Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

(CORROSION PROTECTION)

CONTROL CABLE

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1.

General
The

application

of corrosion

protection

inhibiting compound by

corrosion

to control cables leaves a

way of

Part/item No.
630

material

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Cleaner

219(Chapter20-95-201)

Lint-free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

or

ARS

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

or

ARS

079

(Chapter 20-95-11)

Chemical resistant

gloves (Neoprene)

Safety glasses
Corrosion

and

possible.

Equipment/Material

preventative

Reference manufacturers recommendations

Spraying equipment

3.

displacing

equipment

Tools and

Masking

water

tack-free waxy film. Moveable parts should be masked before

treatment, unless sufficient control of the spray is

2.

penetrating,

Procedure
WARNING: WHEN HANDLING CONTROL CABLES, WEAR PROTECTIVE GLOVES.

WARNING:

COMBUSTABLE LIQUID

(ALIPHATIC HYDROCARBON SOLVENT).

REFERENCE

MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS FOR APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.


OBSERVE STATED PRECAUTIONS DURING APPLICATION.

A.

Preparation
(1)

Moisten lint-free cloth with solvent cleaner


sure

it is free of surface dust and

and

wring

out. Clean cable surface

making

grime.

Wringing out the lint-free cloth


surplus fluid will not penetrate

NOTE:

(Item 219)

after application of solvent cleaner, makes


to the cable core,

diluting

or

damaging

the

sure

that any

protective

lubricant around each strand.

(2)

Inspect

cable for broken wires, cable

note any deterioration of

(3)

wear or

prior protective

corrosion

as

discussed in

Chapter 20-10-31. Also

treatment.

Moveable parts should be masked before treatment, unless sufficient control of the spray is

possible.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-32

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

201

RaytLeon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACIICES

(4)
B.

If cable satisfies

NOTE:

(1)

protective finish

of

Application

requirements in Chapter 20-10-31, protect

Cables must be

Corrosion

on

AIRFRAME

cable

as

follows.

control cables

perfectly dry before protective

preventative (Item 079)

should be

coat is

applied.

applied by spraying using

the manufacturers

recommended system.
NOTE:

(2)

Reference manufacturers data for recommended

Recommended dry film thickness is 30 microns


film thickness of

(3)

The

protective

approximately

film must be

60 microns

even over

entire

(1.3 mils).

(2.6 mils)

application procedures.
Product should be

to allow for solvent

length without extra

applied

to

wet

evaporation.

thickness

areas

due to

drops

or

runs.

NOTE:

Where cable sections


excess

protective coating

which would

(4)
C.

Drying

time is

are

wear

in contact with

pulleys

and fairleads, make

is removed to prevent these parts

sure

that any

collecting abrasive

dust

the cables.

approximately

1 to 3 hours,

according

to the ambient

temperature.

Inspection

completion,

(1)

On

(2)

Make

sure

remove

any

masking

that the entire work

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

area

and check for

complete

freedom of movement

is clean and clear of tools and

on

parts.

equipment.

20-1 0-32
Page

202

Jan. 2001

Raytheon Aircraft
1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

STRIPPING OF PAINT
1.

AIRFRAME

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH CLEANING FLUIDS AND PAINT
STRIPPER. PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

(ITEM 675), SAFETY GLASSES (ITEM 679)


634) ON AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.
WARNING:

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM

WHEN YOU USE SOLVENT CLEANERS OR PAINT STRIPPER MAKE SURE THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A
WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR

AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15

MINUTES, HOLDING

THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

CAUTION:

THE USE OF UNAPPROVED PAINT REMOVAL METHODS OR FAILURE TO STRICTLY


COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE MAY RESULT IN IMMEDIATE OR

SUBSEQUENT SEVERE STRUCTURAL DAMAGE.


CAUTION:

DO NOT USE MECHANICAL

(BLASTING) TECHNIQUES,

THEY DESTROY ANODIC AND

ALOCROM PROTECTION, AND ERODE METAL THICKNESS.


CAUTION:

DO NOT USE ABRASIVE MEDIA STRIPPING, SUCH AS: PLASTIC GRANULES,

STARCH, CRUSHED NUT SHELLS, DRY ICE, AND PRESSURIZED WATER. THESE
METHODS WILL DISTORT THE SKIN PANELS AND CAUSE EXTENSIVE PANEL
DAMAGE.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE PAINT STRIPPER DOES NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH

WINDSHIELD

PANELS, WINDOWS, LAMP COVERS, TIRES, HOSES, COMPOSITE

SURFACES OR ANY AREAS WHICH ARE NOT TO BE PAINT STRIPPED.


CAUTION:

DO NOT USE WATER OF MORE THAN 140" F

(60" C)

WHEN RINSING. DAMAGE TO

THE REDUX BONDED JOINTS CAN OCCUR.


CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT WHEN PAINT IS

REMOVED, THE INITIAL PROTECTIVE

TREATMENT IS NOT DAMAGED.


EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-33
Page

201

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

THE

CAUTION:

AIRFRAME

AILERONS, ELEVATORS AND RUDDER ARE BALANCED FLIGHT CONTROLS.

THESE FLIGHT CONTROLS MUST BE BALANCED AGAIN AFTER ANY PAINT

REMOVAL OR APPLICATION,
MAKE SURE THAT ALL PAINT STRIPPER IS REMOVED FROM THE WORK AREA

CAUTION:

WHEN THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE. IF PAINT REMOVER IS LEFT IN CONTACT WITH

THE AIRPLANE SKIN OR STRUCTURE FOR A PROLONGED

PERIOD, CORROSION

CAN OCCUR.
A.

Introduction

topic gives the procedure for the effective stripping of cured epoxies, epoxy primers,
polyurethanes and similar catalyzed paint from metal surfaces by the use of a non-methylene chloride,
low odor, thixotropic paint remover.

This

B.

EquipmentlMaterial

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, Solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Paint

235

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Emulsion cleaner

245

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Aluminum foil tape

628

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

remover

cream

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

shield

clothing

Litmus paper

601A

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Sodium carbonate solution

602A

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Local

supply

Local

supply

Airlwater

jet

or

pressure water

jet (NOT high

pressure)
Nonatomizing spray equipment
2.

Storage
(1)

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

data sheets for

storage instructions.

20-1 0-33
Page

202

Jun.03

Rayfheon Aircraft
125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3.

AIRFRAME

Paint removal
NOTE:

Unless there is

applied

was

A.

an

overriding requirement,

it is not necessary to

remove

well adhered

primer that

at initial construction.

Preparation
(1)

Dampen

(Item 621) with solvent cleaner (Item 208) and clean the
stripper removing all traces of grease and
area emulsion cleaner (Item 245) may be used, being mixed

clean lint free cloth

metal

surface which is to be treated with paint


contamination. In the keel
ratio of

one

the surface with

(2)

Dry

(3)

Protect with

NOTE:

areas

clean lint free cloth.

which

Attach temporary

become

can

tape firmly

(c)

plates

of

over

all butt and

light

uniform coat of paint

Make

brush

(Item 676)

Make

sure

NOTE:

ingress

of

paint

damaged

as

plates/outlets.

follows:

protect rubber and plastic parts, including windshield panels,

(Item 628)

lap joints,

to

rows

protect sealant, adhesive and interfay. Press the


of fasteners, rivets and

stringers, drain holes,


plates/outlets.

access

edges

of

panels.

holes, antennae, rotating beacons,

paint stripper

Use

NOTE:

and outlets to avoid the

the external surface of the static

Mask off all close section

Application

(2)

to

covers

ice detectors and static

(1)

all static

covers, tires and hoses.

Use self-adhesive metal tape

(b)

in the

water.

paint must not be applied to

windows, lamp

B.

parts

masking tape (Item 630)

New

Protect all

(a)

to 9

and residues.

removers

(4)

part cleaner

sure

that all

The

or

non-atomizing type sprayer wand installed


stripper (Item 235) to the surface area.

that the

corners

paint stripper is

and crevices

uniformity of the

coat is

are

at room

apply

temperature before it is used.

well covered

important to

to a barrel pump to

avoid

by paint
areas

remover.

being

left attached after the rest

of the coat lifts off.

(3)
C.

Leave the

Removal of

(1)

Make

paint stripper

on

the surface until the top coat blisters and lifts away from the

primer.

paintstripper
sure

NOTE:

that the

paint stripper chemical action in 3.8. (2)

If the removal of the

adequately

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

is finished.

paint topcoat is attempted too soon some paint may not be


a second application of stripper may be required.

detached and

20-1 0-33
Page

203

Jun.03

tteythoen Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

Using a spatula/scraper (Item 645), or stiff bristle brush remove the stripper and loosened paint
paying special attention at lap and butt joints, vents, bolt heads, stringers and any such areas
where projections and breaks in contour prevent easy removal.

(3)

All

(4)

Thoroughly clean
slight brushing to

paint

NOTE:

(5)
(6)

residue is to be collected

An air

Remove all

the

area

remove

Check internal

areas

paint

as

solid waste and discarded.

using cleaner solvent followed by copious


paint particles or smears of stripper.

warm

water washes and

loose

waterjet may be

protective

any unwanted

4.

AIRFRAME

covers

used for this purpose at normal domestic pressure.

and

masking.

to make sure that the

paint

remover

is not present. If necessary,

remove

remover.

Inspection
A.

Procedure

(1)

Check the residual

acidity of the work area with litmus paper (Item 601A) or other means of
measuring P.H. An area that has an acidity reaction less than 6.5 P.H. must be washed with a
0.5% (by weight) sodium carbonate solution (Item 602A) and rinsed again with a warm water jet
at normal domestic pressure.

(2)

Make

sure

that

no

joints

and seals have been

accordance with relevant standard

(3)

Make

sure

thoroughly

(4)

that the

edge

of the

damaged. Any damage


practice procedure.

stripped

area

is to be

is sound, uncontaminated

in

repaired

by stripper,

and

clean.

Paint

strippers may cause damage to adhesives and sealants if they stay


component longer than necessary to soften the paint. Corrosion may also
regular checks are made to determine the paint softness.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

in contact with the


occur.

Make

sure

that

20-1 0-33
Page

204

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

CHEMICAL REMOVAL OF POLYSULPHIDE

AIRFRAME

(PRC) SEALANTS

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE VAPORS WHEN USING SOLVENTS. USE MECHANICAL VENTILATION
OR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION WHEN WORKING IN A CONFINED SPACE OR AREA.

WARNING: AVOID CONTACT WITH EYES, SKIN AND CLOTHING. WEAR EYE PROTECTION,
APPROVED GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.

WARNING: EXPLOSIVE. KEEP AWAY FROM SOURCES OF HEAT, FIRE OR SPARKS.

AFTER APPLICATION OF

CAUTION:

SOLVENT, THE AREA WHERE SOLVENT HAS BEEN USED MUST

BE NEUTRALIZED AND CLEANED.

1.

General
The

following procedure

describes the

use

of solvent

(Item 289) for the quick

Any

residue is eliminated

The

by reapplying

solvent

wipes (Item 287) or wash (Item 288) are also


ready for reapplication of sealant and/or painting.

2. Tools and

used

fully

cured sealant.

easily be removed using a nonmetallic


(Item 289) or using a wipe (Item 287).

The solvent breaks down sealant resistance and the sealant


scraper.

removal of

as

can

neutralizing agents

to make

sure

the site is

Equipment

Equipment/Material
Nonmetallic tool

(for scoring)

Part/item No.

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Nonmetallic scraper

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Natural, short bristle brush

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Lint free cloth

Item 621

(20-95-601)

Masking tape

Item 630

(20-95-601)

Fabric

Item 287

(20-95-201)

Cleaner/Degreaser wash

Item 288

(20-95-201)

Solvent

Item 289

(20-95-201)

wipe

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-34

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker800,1000,800XP

Jan.2001

201

RelftNeen Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3.

AIRFRAME

Procedure
A.

Initial

preparation

CAUTION:

ACRYLICS, COMPOSITES AND PLASTICS MUST BE PROTECTED FROM CONTACT


DURING APPLICATION OF SEALANT, WIPES OR CLEANER.

B.

(1)

Mask

(2)

Score the surface of the

areas

Application
(1)

Apply

adjacent

to the area to be worked.

polysulphide

sealant to be removed, with

nonmetaliic tool.

of solvent

large quantity

of solvent

(Item 289)

to the surface of the sealant

using

natural short

bristle brush.

(a)

Allow solvent to go into sealant for

(b) Agitate

C.

Regular agitation of the solvent with

the brush will make it easier to

Allow solvent to continue to go into sealant for

an

remove

sealant.

additional twenty minutes.

Removal of sealant

(1)

Use

nonmetallic scraper to

NOTE:

(2)

Sealantshouldbe

An additional

repeat "B.

(3)

application

Application

remove

easyto

of solvent

the sealant. Use

care

not to

damage the surrounding paint.

remove.

(Item 289)

may be

of solvent" steps until sealant

required

can

if sealant is thick. If needed,

be removed

easily.

When all traces of sealant have been removed, neutralize and clean the

287)
4.

ten minutes.

the surface of the sealant with the brush.

NOTE:

(c)

approximately

or

cleaner/degreaser wash (Item 288)

where the solvent

was

area

with

wipes (Item

applied.

Inspection
(1)

Examine surface for

(2)

Restore surface finish,

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

signs
as

of

damage

to the surface finish.

needed, in accordance with Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

20-1 0-34
Page

202

Jan. 2001

Rayeheon Aircraft
f25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

VACU-BLASTING WITH DRY ALUMINA GRIT


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
WARNING:

COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE INJURY. DO NOT POINT A COMPRESSED AIR OUTLET AT
YOURSELF OR ANOTHER PERSON.

WARNING:

ALUMINA GRIT IS DANGEROUS. IT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR SKIN AND EYES.

SAFETY GOGGLES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MUST BE WORN WHEN USING A


VACU-BLASTER. IF YOU GET ALUMINA GRIT IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR SKIN:

FLUSH YOUR EYES WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES


CLEAN YOUR SKIN WITH SOAP AND WATER

GET MEDICAL HELP.

1.

General
DO NOT USE THE BLASTING PROCESS TO REMOVE SURFACE

CAUTION:

BLEMISHES,

SCRATCHES OR SEVERE CORROSION DAMAGE. THESE DEFECTS MUST BE


CORRECTED BEFORE BLASTING IS STARTED.
This section
with

dry

gives the procedure for blasting aluminum,


grit for the purpose of:

Improving

Cleaning

or

restoring

the

fatigue

before metal spray,

Removing anodising,
The

aluminum

alloy,

steel and titanium components

alumina

behaviour of the component.

bonding

scale and

light

or

protective

corrosion

treatments.

products.

blasting process will give a clean, uniform surface finish. Because of the problem of
blasting different materials, one of the following requirements must be observed.

contamination

when

For components that can be removed from the airplane, separate cabinets must
provided so that different metals, for example, aluminum alloys, steels and

Requirement A
(preferred method)

be

titanium,

Requirement

The

are

not blasted with the same batch of alumina

blasting equipment

must have

grit.

separator. The separator will make sure


grit is kept to a level so that one type

that the contamination level of the alumina

of material will not be contaminated with another.

Requirement

The alumina

grit

Grit used for

must meet these

blasting

aluminum

used for steel, titanium


Grit used for

NOTE:

Only use

the method described in

Requirement B

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

are

not

or

or

or

titanium

blasting steel,

used for aluminum

requirements:
aluminum

alloys

alloys.

titanium and titanium

aluminum

Requirement C

must not have been

alloys

must not have been

alloys.

if methods detailed in

Requirement A

and

practical.

20-1 0-40
Page

201

Jun.03

Raltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Only

AIRFRAME

grade of alumina grit must be used in the blasting machine at one time. The blasting
applied to components until all these relevant operations are complete:

one

process

must not be

Forming, involving bending, drawing, stretch forming, stretch straightening.


and

Deburring
Local

blending

Chemical

radiusing

of

edges,

corners, holes etc.

of scratches and other surface


heat treatment and

contouring,

Nondestructive

imperfections.

welding.

testing including magnetic

and penetrant

dye

methods.

Dimensional and surface finish checks.

2.

Tools and

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Degreaser/cleaning agent

Item 230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, Solvent

Item 201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Alumina

Refer to Table 201

grit

Tape

Aluminum foil

Item 628

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Tape

masking

Item 630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Lint free cloth

Item 621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Portable

Any reputable supplier (ARS)

x10

3.

equipment

blasting equipment

Any reputable supplier (ARS)

magnifying glass

Method
A.

Preparation
(1)

If necessary,

(2)

Make

sure

remove

the

paint from

the affected

area.

that all relevant structural/mechanicaI processes have been

completed

in the

area

to

be blasted.

the

(3)

Degrease

(4)

With

masking tape

care

to

access

area

protect
holes

to be blasted with

or

screw

are

degreaser/cleaner (Item 230)

aluminum foil tape, mask all

threads, control cables,

completely

areas

pulleys,

that

are

and lint free cloth

not to be blasted. Take

etc. Make sure that all

blanked off to prevent the

(Item 621).

ingress of

alumina

lightening

grit

special

and

to unwanted

areas.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-40
Page

202

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Procedure

(1)

Select the correct alumina

grit size,

make

sure

there is

alumina

enough

grit

to

complete

the

blasting process.

(2)

Set the vacu-blast

height,
CAUTION:

as

for pressure, rate of travel, distance from nozzle and Almen

equipment

are

necessary.

BEFORE THE WORK AREA IS BLASTED, USE AN UNWANTED PIECE OF SIMILAR


MATERIAL TO TEST THE SETTING OF THE VACU-BLAST EQUIPMENT. THIS WILL
PREVENT DAMAGE AND DISTORTION TO THE WORK AREA.

(3)

Operate
the
for

(4)

the vacu-blast

complete

cleaning,

area
or

is covered and has

to remove

grit

even

passes

over

the work

area.

Make

sure

uniform appearance. If the vacu-blast process is used

corrosion, make

Remove any residual dust and

CAUTION:

make slow

equipment and

sure

that all the unwanted material is removed.

from the work

area

with

compressed

air

jet.

IF METAL-SPRAY SURFACE TREATMENT IS REQUIRED BEFORE PAINTING

OPERATIONS, IT MUST BE DONE WITHIN A

4 HOUR PERIOD. VACU-BLASTED

SURFACES ARE PARTICULARLY VULNERABLE TO CORROSION.

(5)

Examine the work

area.

Make

sure

the finish is uniform, smooth, free from scores, corrosion,

and other blemishes. Check the material thickness is within tolerance.


NOTE:

(6)

A x10

magnifying glass

Remove the

masking

it in

until the

position

(7)

Clean the work

(8)

If it is not

area

practical

to

Apply protective

EFFECTIVI~PI:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

strong light will help with this examination.

material. If aluminum foil tape is used for

painting operations
with cleaner

apply

temporary protective fluid,

(9)

and

the
to

are

(Item 201)

protective

masking,

it is

acceptable

to leave

complete.
and lint free cloth

(Item 621).

treatment to the work

area

within 4 hours,

apply

prevent corrosion.

finish to the blasted

areas.

20-1 0-40
Page

203

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Table 201

Approved

Materials

MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION

GRADE

SUPPLIERS

Alumina

White Alumina

90-100

Abrasive

Grit

Developments Ltd.,
Henley-in-Arden,

Solihull,
Alumina

Virgin

Brown

120-220

G rit

West Midlands,
B95 5AH,
U.K.

Alumina

White Alumina

90-100

Virgin Brown
IF Type

120-220

Grit

Washington Mills Electro Minerals, Ltd.,


Mosley Road,
Trafford Park,

Alumina
Grit

Manchester,
M17 1 NR,
U.K.

Table 202
Particle size and distribution of the alumina

grit

Grade 90/100

Sieve 1

Sieve 2

Sieve 3

Sieve 4

Pan

Aperture size

250 CLm

180 I.Lm

106 I~m

75 Clm

3% Max.

ASTM Ell

60 mesh

80 mesh

140 mesh

200 mesh

100% pass

20% Max.

60% Min.

3% Max.

Retained

Retained

Pass

Grade 120/220

Sieve 1

Sieve 2

Sieve 3

Pan

Aperture size

180 FLm

125 CLm

63 ym

15% Max.

ASTM Ell

80 mesh

120 mesh

230 mesh

15% Max.

75% Min.

Retained

Retained

100% pass

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-40
Page

204

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

WIRING PROCEDURES AND REPAIR


DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1.

General
WARNING:

USE CARE WHEN DISTURBING OR REMOVING WIRE HARNESSES/BUNDLES TO


MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF WIRE INSULATION DAMAGE/CRACKING. CARE MUST
BE ESPECIALLY USED IN AREAS WITH SEVERE WIND AND MOISTURE PROBLEMS

(SWAMP AREAS)
AREA,

CAUTION:

SUCH AS THE WHEEL WELL, AFT EQUIPMENT BAY, WING FLAP

ETC.

EXISTING WIRING SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE AIRPLANE

MUCH AS

(AS

TO MINIMIZE ADDITIONAL WIRE DAMAGE. DAMAGED WIRING SHOULD

POSSIBLE)

BE CAPPED AND STOWED AND NEW WIRE SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN ITS PLACE.

PARTICULAR ATTENTION SHOULD BE GIVEN TO WIRE INSULATION COMPATIBILITY


AND ROUTING TO REDUCE FUTURE WIRE DAMAGE.

general guidance. Special inspections should be conducted as


operator, based on airplane experience. Any discrepancies found should be

This information is intended to be used

deemed

appropriate by

each

as

repaired.
Operators and maintenance organizations should make sure that before any maintenance activity takes
place which is likely to generate conductive debris, wiring looms and electrical equipment in the work area
are provided with temporary protection against associated contamination. After maintenance is completed,
the work area must be specifically inspected to be free from such contamination.
required to install cable/looms during
requirements are to be strictly followed.
If it is

2.

modifications

or

routine maintenance the

following

Requirements
A.

The

(1)

cabling

must be

Prevent

chafing

and

protected

in the

abrasion and

guarantee

supported
or

between cable/loom and structure

(a)

Where

or

tollowing

ways

physical separation

of at least 10

mm

(0.4 in.)

other systems.

physical supports are not possible, grommets


adjacent metallic edges.

or

protection strips

must be

securely

fastened to all

(2)

Secure

(3)

Make

(4)

cabling

sure

where routed

cabling

is

through

bulkheads and structural members.

properly grouped

Prevent mechanical strain

or

work

in

junction boxes, panels

hardening

and

secure

cable bundles.

that would tend to break conductors

or

connections.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THE WIRE HARNESS WILL NOT BE TRAPPED OR PINCHED


BETWEEN MOVING PARTS. CHECK FULL RANGE OF MOTION.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-50
1

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(a) Special

care

must be taken in installations where harnesses or cables must

parts (i.e.

where there is relative movement between structural

damage, follow
routed and supported.

To prevent

The part of

these

techniques

wire harness which

access

cross an area

door, landing gear).

correctly

to make sure wire harnesses are

bridges

"hinge"

should be mounted

the harness

so

bending with the movement of the hinge. Run the harness section
with
the
hinge joint and place a support at each end (opposite sides of the
parallel

will twist instead of

hinge).
A

longer, parallel twisting

section results in less stress

on

the individual wires than

shorter section.

(5)

Prevent

associated

control cables,

cabling from causing damage to mechanical


moving equipment and pipes carrying inflammable fluids.

arcing

or

overheated

(6)

Prevent

cabling from hindering maintenance functions, for instance, inspection and modification.

(7)

Prevent

physical

(8)

Provide support for

(9)

Dress

cabling

interference between

cabling

to

so as

at connectors and

cabling

and other

equipment.

prevent excessive movement in

terminating

areas

of

high

vibration.

devices in the direction of the run, without

deformation of grommet seals.

(10)

Route cable/looms to avoid

(11)

drip loops where


panel or junction box.

(12)

Provide

Provide

areas

where

they

will

come

the cable/loom is routed downward to

(13)

correctly supported,

connector, terminal block,

cable/loom. Provide

individual wire. At terminal

an

strips

Prevent wrinkles in insulation. Wrinkles

are

stress concentrations which

polyimide

is

can

required

be

easily damaged

to be wrinkle free.

"pulled through" during replacement, to prevent damage


lacquer and polyimide topcoats. Snagging of polyimide topcoats can cause the tapes to

Cables should be "laid in" instead of


the

where

the radius may be three times the diameter of the wire.

and contribute to insulation failure. Wire insulated with

(14)

minimum bend radius of six times the outside diameter for

minimum bend radius of ten times the diameter for


the wire is

liquids, if possible.

into contact with

to

separate.

(15)

Do not route wires with dissimilar insulation within the

relative motion and abrasion between wires


or

(16)

ducting

when mechanical

The traditional "Hot

protection

Stamp" method

having

same

bundle, if possible, especially when

dissimilar insulation

can occur.

Use conduit

is needed.

has

never

been used

when used

on

the Hawker

airplane.

"Hot

Stamp"

ultra-thin walled insulation. Fracture

on
unsatisfactory
penetration to the conductor of these materials by the stamping dies
have occurred. Later in service, when these openings have been wetted by various fluids,
serious arcing and surface tracking will damage wire bundles.

marking

has been found to be

of the insulation wall and

(17)

Segregation

of 115 VAC power feeder cables to 28 VDC power and signal cables is to be
possible, to a minimum separation of 25.5 mm (1.0 in.).

maintained, where
EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-50

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Raltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3.

AIRFRAME

Primary Inspection Locations


The

following

areas are

The

Wings

locations that should receive

wing leading

and

trailing edges

special

are areas

attention in

that

wiring inspection

program.

experience difficult environments

for

wiring

installation.

maintenance and

are

The APU is

APU

Landing

These

and Nacelle Area

Engine, Pylon

susceptible

susceptible

to

areas

experience high vibration, heat, frequent

to chemical contamination.

high vibration,

Gear and Wheel Wells

These

heat and

areas are

frequent

exposed

maintenance.

to severe external environmental

conditions, vibration, chemical contamination and debris.


Electrical Panels and LRU Areas
when these

high density

areas are

wiring is particularly prone to broken wires and insulation


disturbed during troubleshooting activities, major modifications and
Panel

refurbishment.
Wires in the

Batteries

vicinity

of all

airplane batteries should be inspected


inspected for serviceability.

for corrosion and

discoloration. Discolored wires should be

Inspect splices and terminations for signs of overheating and security. If any signs
the splices or terminations should be replaced. This applies to galley power
overheating
feeders in addition to the main and APU generator power feeders. The desirability of periodically
retorquing power feeder terminations should be evaluated.
Power Feeders

of

are seen

Under

Galley

containers

are

and Lavatories

particularly susceptible

fluids, TKS fluids

galleys, lavatories,

TKS tank and other

liquid
lavatory

to contamination from coffee, food, water, soft drinks,

etc.

Under Floor and Rear


these

Areas under the

Equipment Bay Damage to wiring

can occur

due to maintenance activities in

areas.

Surfaces, Controls and Doors

Moving

or

bending

harnesses should be

inspected thoroughly

at

these locations.
Access Panels

Harnesses

near access

panels

can

receive

damage

and should have

special

emphasis inspections.
A.

Inspection
(1)

items

WireMlire Bundle
Aluminum drill
vibration

wires in

or

Inspect for:
shavings,

lint

bundle

or

bundles and may, if

or

dust

on or

inside wire bundles. Aluminum

wire insulation and

to

Wire insulation that has become brittle. Can allow wire to be

EFFECTIVIN:

shavings can, with


path between

conductive

provide
through
adjacent grounded structure. Lint and dust can accumulate on wire
subjected to overheated wires, ignite or possibly feed, an electrical fire.

other motion, cut

more

susceptible

to

cracking.

20-1 0-50
3

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Rayeheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

any wires insulated with aromatic polyimide must


serrations on the outside of the tie. Normal ties (i.e. those with

Wire bundle ties. Wire bundles

wire ties with the

use

the

locking

locking

serrations

on

AIRFRAME

containing

the inside diameter of the

tie)

may

damage the wire insulation.

NEEDLE TYPE TEST PROBES SHOULD NEVER BE USED ON INSULATED

CAUTION:

WIRES.

Damaged insulation and/or exposed conductor material of wires. Cracked, chafed and cut
insulation can provide a conductive path between wires in a bundle or to adjacent grounded
structure. Generally, a cracked wire does not have to be replaced but a split wire must be
replaced or repaired (spliced). A split wire is one where the conductor can be seen through
the crack. The tough insulation of aromatic polyimide can abrade other materials where
sawing type contact occurs. Proper support and separation will prevent such damage.
You may see situations where the topcoat is flaking off the insulation. In that case,
the transparent amber polyimide film will show, and at first sight, may be
misinterpreted as a bare copper wire. Loss of the topcoat does not affect the

NOTE:

insulating properties of the polyimide.


only a cosmetic concern.

As

long

as

the

polyimide

is

undamaged,

it is

Displaced (cold-flowed) wire insulation can occur under strain relief clamps, areas where
are tightly pressed against other wires or held tightly against structure. Typically

wires

causes

insulation to "flatten oul and may expose conductor.

Pinched wires

ties,

can occur

at wire

clamps,

connector backshell

clamps, excessively tight cable

etc.

Inappropriate/improper
crimp splices,

wiring repairs

such

the

as

use

of duct tape, electrical tape, poor

etc.
to fluid leaks

damage due

Wire insulation

(i.e. TKS, fuel, hydraulic fluid, coffee, lavatory

fluid, etc.)

Separation of electrical wires from hydraulic, fuel


10 mm (0.4 in.) separation and any wiring routed
provide separation.
Small bend radii of wire.

Wiring subjected

damage

to the wire insulation.

Sagging

wire bundles. Make

sure

bundles

to

Wire attached to the outside of


under

existing

wire

clamps.

Can

excessively tight

are

components, cables, hoses, other bundles,

not allowed to

bend radii may sustain

droop

onto structure,

etc.

wire bundle
cause

and oxygen lines. Make sure a minimum of


within 5.08 cm (2.0 in.) must be clamped to

using plastic

ties instead of

being

installed

chafed and cut wire insulation.

Unsupported wires running into conduit or wire supported in such a way as to pull the wire
against the side of the conduit entrance instead of into the center. Can cause chafed and cut
wire insulation.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-50

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Rayllheon Aircraft
~HAPTER

125/HAWKER

20

STANDARDI::PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

high temperature equipment. Wiring shall be kept separate from high


temperature equipment, such as resistors, exhaust stacks, heating ducts and deicers,
Proximity

to

to

prevent wire insulatidn deterioration.


Wires with different insulation types should not be routed together, where possible. Certain
wire insulations may be easily abraded by other types of wire insulation.
Wire Harness

(2)

Clamps

Inspect

for:

sure any protective material on the wire clamp (i.e. rubber, plastic, etc.) is in
serviceable and functional condition. Clamps should be secured to structure and wire bundle

Condition. Make

should be snug in

clamp.

Connectors- Inspectfor:

(3)

Condition. Make

sure

connectors are free of

corrosion, moisture, dust and metal shavings.

Check for

worn environmental seals, loose contact tension, proper contact locking, missing
seal plugs, missing dummy contacts, etc. Drip loops should be maintained when connectors
are

below the level of the harness and

tight

bends at connectors should be avoided

or

corrected.
Backshells-

(4)

Inspectfor:

Condition. Wires may break at connector backshells due to excessive flexing, lack of strain
relief or improper buildup. Loss of backsheli bonding may also occur due to these and other
factors.
Electrical Conduits and

(5)

Susceptibility

Sleeving

Inspect for:

to water/moisture entrance. Conduits should not be

susceptible

to the

entrance of moisture. If moisture

should be made in the

going into conduits and sleeving is unavoidable, provisions


lower portions of the conduit to drain any moisture and prevent

accumulation.
Condition.
Make

sure

Damage to sleeving
components

are

and conduits, if not corrected, will often lead to wire

free from corrosion, moisture, dust, and metal

damage.
shavings. Check

that conduit is secured to structure.

(6)

Terminations-

Inspectfor:

Condition. Terminal

lugs and splices

are

susceptible to mechanical damage, corrosion, heat


buildup and nut torque on wire lugs is critical

and chemical contamination. Also, the

damage
performance.

to their

(7)

Grounding

Points-

Condition.

Inspectfor:
security (i.e. tightness) condition of
Any grounding points that are corroded or have
repaired and be checked for proper resistance.

Grounding points should

be checked for

termination, cleanliness and corrosion.


their

protective coating

EFFECTIVITY:

should be

lost

20-1 0-50

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000; 800XP

Jun.02

R~ytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Routine

AIRFRAME

inspections
EXISTING WIRING SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE AIRPLANE TO

WARNING:

MINIMIZE WIRE DAMAGE.

IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE FOUND, THE WIRING MUST BE

CAUTION:

REPLACED WITH EQUIVALENT WIRING TO CURRENT SPECIFICATIONS.


NOTE:

The

of a 4X

use

(or greater) magnifier may be

needed.

severely damaged

(1)

Replace wiring that has been subjected to fraying or chafing, that


or that primary insulation is suspected of being penetrated.

(2)

Replace wiring having weather cracked outer insulation


to the point that slight flexing causes it to crack.

(3)

Replace wiring that is known to have been exposed to electrolyte or on which the insulation
appears to be ~or is suspected of being) in an initial stage of deterioration due to the effects of
electrolyte.

(4)

or on

has been

which the outer insulation is brittle

Replace wiring that shows evidence of overheating (even if only


overheating must be identified and corrected.

to

minor

degree). The

cause

of the

(5)

Replace wiring

on

which the insulation has become saturated with

engine oil, hydraulic fluid

or

another lubricant.

(6)

Replace wiring that

CAUTION:

bears evidence of

having

been crushed

severely

or

kinked.

CLEANING AGENTS OR PRESERVATIVES SHOULD NOT BE USED TO MINIMIZE


THE EFFECTS OF CORROSION OR DETERIORATION OF WIRE SHIELDS.

frayed

Replace shielded wiring

(8)

Replace wiring showing evidence of breaks, cracks, dirt,


placed over wire splices or terminal lugs.

(9)

Replace sections of wire in which splices occur at less than 3.05 m (10.00 ft.) intervals, unless
specifically authorized, due to parallel connections, locations or inaccessibility.

(1 O)
(11)

When

replacing wiring

on

or

coaxial cables,

String bindings or cable ties


integrity of the

the structural

4.

which the metallic shield is

(7)

must

always

identify
be

or

and/or corroded.

moisture in the

them at both

equipment

replaced following

plastic

sleeves

and power source.

modification

or

repair.

If not,

harness is weakened.

Wiring
A.

The

tollowing

cables have

insulation is PTFE

or

an

aromatic

polyimide

inner insulation. The outer,

or

primary

extruded FEP.

European Standard ECM44.

(1)

KP260 to

(2)

ACT260 to

(3)

KTCLto EL2124.

European Standard ECM65.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-50

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Rsytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

following cables have


polyurethanetopcoat.

The

(1)
C.

European

aromatic

polyimide

inner insulation. The outer

following cable has a polyimide outer covering (polyimide


shield). The inner conductors are covered in extruded PTFE.

The

ASCB databus cable to

following is

covering

is

Standard ECM49.

The

(1)
D.

KPSN to

an

AIRFRAME

Honeywell Specification

list of wire used

on

covers

the tinned copper braid

P7500579-1.

legacy/current production airplanes

which do not contain

polyimide.

5.

to British Standard BS G195.

(1)

Minyvin

(2)

Fepsil

to British Standard BS G206

(3)

Nyvin

to British Standard BS G177

(4)

Tersil to British Standard BS G189

(5)

Efglas

(6)

Fire resistant wire to

European Standard

ECM29

(7)

Fire resistant wire to

European Standard

ECM60

(8)

PTFE

(9)

Tefsil to

to British Standard BS G192

equipment

wire to British Standard BS G210

European Standard ECM63

(10)

M22759/32

(11)

M22759/34

(12)

M27500

Selection of Cable Ties


CAUTION:

CABLE TIES WITH INTERNAL LOCKING

SERRATIONS, WHICH

ARE LIABLE TO

DAMAGE THE CABLES, MUST BE AVOIDED WHEN USED TO SECURE WIRE


BUNDLES

CONTAINING, OR SUSPECTED OF CONTAINING, AROMATIC POLYIMIDE

INSULATED WIRING.

CAUTION:

ONLY APPLICATION TOOLS APPROVED BY THE CABLE TIE MANUFACTURER


SHALL BE USED, AND THE CABLE TIES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE

WITH THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.


A.

The selection and


relevant

use

of cable ties shall be made in accordance with the instructions of the

Design Authority

and the

The environmental conditions

EFFECTIVITY:

following

data:

(temperature range).

20-1 0-50

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

The maximum distance between cable ties.

B.

The correct mechanical tension to be used

during application.

The size of the cable tie to be used for any

given

Where the cable tie is not


suitable cable tie

The

using

loom, harness

diameter of cables.

specified by the Design Authority,


following parameters:

the installer shall select the most

the

or

bundle diameter.

The temperature range.

6.

Protective

tubing

tubing is used to protect the microswitch wires on the left and right main landing gears and in the
landing gear bays. The PTFE tubing Part Number is T105/2.

PTFE
main

EFFECTIVIN:

20-10-50

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jun.02

Ray~heon

nircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


WIRING PROCEDURES AND REPAIR
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
TEMPORARY REVISION 20-3
REASON FOR ISSUE

Lugs

on

UAM100 fuses

are

breaking

due to incorrect installation.

ACTION
In

place

of 20-10-50 page block 201 read this TR.

INFORMATION
This process defines the methods and limitations for

repairing

wires when it is

impracticable

to

renew.

2. SPLICING
CAUTION: Before cutting the damaged wire, make sure that there is enough wire to strip the insulation to
make a splice joint and that there is sufficient space in the area of damage to operate the
necessary tools.

A. Procedure
If there is insufficient wire

(1)

Remove the

portion

space,

or

of

use

damaged

following

the

methods.

wire back to the

equipment

with

removable termination

(Ref.

Figure 1).

II

EQUIP

II

EQUIP
REMOVABLE

TERMINATION

AREA OF DAMAGE

Figure i
Damage

Area of

(2)

Make up a
end to the

new

wire

(using wire type

equipment
(Ref. Figure 2).

(3)

Run the

new

wire and

TR 20-3

and install

splice

specifications) of sufficient length to reconnect the


equipment end termination and identification sleeve

to current

similar

the ends.

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

123lHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

EQUIP

AIRFRAME

EQUIP

M6280 0

NEW WIRE

SPLICE

HAZOF
004621AAAI

Figure
Splice

(4)

damaged wire are difficult to remove, e.g, potted, cut out the damaged portion,
length of new wire (using wire type to current specifications) and splice the
(Ref. Figure 3 and Figure 4).

If both ends of the


renew

ends

it with

EQUIP

suitable

rr,

EQUIP

j
AREA OF DAMAGE

HA20F

004622AA.AI

Figure 3
Damage

Area of

L~I-T
EQUIP

EQUIP

IT
NEW WIRE

SPLICE

M6278 0

SPLICE

HA2OF
004623AAAI

Figure

New Wire

B. Identification and

(1)

A cable

joined by

Recording of Joints
an

and must carry the

(a)

When
on

(2)

All

an

in-line

same

splice must

be

cable identification

regarded as
throughout.

single

identification sleeve is used in the place of cable

either side of the

repair joints

cable for identification purposes

printing,

sleeve shall be located

splice.

must be recorded in the aircraft records

indicating the circuit,

wire number and

location

C. Limitations of In-line

(1) Single

Splice Usage
24

12

must not be located under

clips

cored cables

only (size

inclusive),

each barrel of the

splice

must carry

only

one

cable.

(2) Splices

(3)

The distance between in-line


three

joints

in any

one

or

splice joints

branch of

ties in

conduit

(rigid

or

flexible).

must not be less than 2.0 ft.

(0.6 m)

and

no more

than

circuit.

TR 20-3

"""MaeCMay.OG

Raytheon

nircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(4)

Joints must be

(5)

Joints in
1.0 in.

adequately supported.

adjacent cables must be staggered from each other by a minimum of approximately


(25.0 mm), and located on outer surface of the loom, where possible.

splices may be used in

designated overheat

(6)

No

(7)

Joints must not be made in the

(a)

Cables

larger than

(b) High voltage


(c)

zone.

following cables:

(e.g. igniter

H.T.

leads).

Multicore cables.
cable.

(e) Screen/sheathed

(8)

size No. 12.

cables

(d) Thermocouple

(f)

AIRFRAME

cable.

Go-axial cable.

No splices may be used in the circuits that follow.

(a) Engine

(b)

Gas

Temperature

Fire and overheat detection and/or

(c) Thrust Management


(d) Wiring

circuit in

designated fire

to busbars in the

cable associated with

control

protection

associated with Generator control and

(e) Any feeder cables

(f) Any

designated

circuits in

fire

or

overheat

circuits in
or

designated

overheat

protection

zones.

fire

or

overheat

zones.

zones.

circuits.

primary distribution system.

electrically powered

or

signalled flight controls, but excluding flight

systems.

3. REPAIR OF STARTER MOTOR CABLES


A. Procedure

(1)

Starter motor cables may be repaired using heat shrink sleeving if the conductors
provided the conditions that follow are met:

(a)

Visual

inspection confirms

that

no

sharp

metallic

edges

have been

are

presented

exposed,

to the cable

where the chafe occurred.


reveals that

(b)

Visual

(c)

The cause of the chafe must be removed

inspection

no

strands

are

damaged.

by repositioning

the cable with suitable clearances

maintained.

(d)

(2)

No evidence of

Where

chafing

arcing

occurs

inside

increased to eliminate the


over

May.OG~6""

the shrink sleeve.

TR 20-3

from the cable is visible.


a

fireseal, the repair should make

possibility

sure

that the cable diameter is

of movement. This may necessitate

wrapping glass

fibre tape

Raylheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

4. REPAIR OF PTFEIFEP OUTER INSULATION DAMAGE

repair of PTFE/FEP outer insulation requires that a heat-shrinkable sleeve


completely over the wire. If this is not possible, the wire must be replaced.

CAUTION: The

CAUTION:

Damage

that extends

more

(38. 1 mm) along the cable and/or extends more


acceptable for repair and the wire must be replaced.

than 1.5 in.

of the cable circumference, is not

A. PTFEIFEP Outer Insulation

placed
than 1/4

Damage

of the PTFE/FEP outer insulation wrap is acceptable


damaged. No additional protection is required.

(1) Scuffing

must be

provided

the inner

polyimide

insulation is not

(a)

If doubt exists that there may be

damage

to the inner

polyimide insulation, proceed

to the

following paragraph 4.A.(2).


(2) Damage

to the PTFE/FEP outer insulation wrap that exposes and damages the polyimide
no conductor strands severed or with seriously damaged plating to reveal

insulation, but with

copper, may be repaired


and/or tape (A-A-59474).

using high temperature,

NOTE: The

cover

repair

should

the

damaged

area

heat-shrinkable

with

0.25 in.

B. PTFE/FEB Outer Insulation and Center Conductor

(1) Damage to
replacement

the

polyimide

insulation

and

sleeving (MIL-DTL-23053/12)

(6.35 mm) overlap

at each end.

Damage

center conductor is

not

acceptable and requires

of the wire.

5. FUSES

A. UAM100 Fuses

(1)

The

mounting lugs
length for mounting
NOTE:

on
on

the UAM100 fuses may be elongated


posts on the airplane.

as

necessary, to

provide adequate

the terminal

Although it is permissible to "open" the ends of each mounting hole on the UAM100 fuse,
the mounting holes should be elongated no more than necessary to provide clearance for
mounting.

TR 20-3

PageM4,vOfg~May.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

WIRING PROCEDURES AND REPAIR

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. INFORMATION

This process defines the methods and limitations for

repairing wires

when it is

impracticable

to

renew.

2. SPLICING
CAUTION: Before
make

cutting the damaged wire, make sure that there


splice joint and that there is sufficient space

is

enough

in the

wire to
of

area

strip the insulation to


damage to operate the

necessary tools.

A. Procedure
If there is insufficient wire

(1)

Remove the

portion

or

space,

of

use

damaged

the

following

methods.

wire back to the

equipment

with

removable termination

(Ref.

Figure 201).

I
REMOVABLE

TERMINATION
AREA OF DAMAGE
HA20F

Figure 201
Damage

Area of

(2)

(3)

Make up a
end to the

wire

(using
equipment and
(Ref. Figure 202).
Run the

new

new

wire and

wire

type

install

splice

specifications) of sufficient length to reconnect the


equipment end termination and identification sleeve

to current

similar

the ends.

EQUIP

SPLICE

NEW WIRE

EQUIP

M6280 6
HAIL)F

004621AA.AI

Figure 202
Splice
(4)

If both ends of the

damaged wire are difficult to remove, e.g. potted, cut out the damaged portion,
length of new wire (using wire type to current specifications) and splice the
(Ref. Figure 203 and Figure 204).

renew

ends

hL

it with

suitable

NOTE: Please

see

the

TEMPORARY
REVISION
that revises this page.

20-~ 0-50

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

EQUIP

AIRFRAME

IIII

EQUIP

f
AREA OF DAMAGE

HA20F

Figure 203
Damage

Area of

EQUIP

EQUIP

T
SPLICE

NEW WIRE

M6278 O

SPLICE

HA2OF
004623AAAI

Figure 204
New Wire

B. Identification and

(1)

A cable

joined by

Recording of
an

and must carry the

(a)

When

All

splice

must be

cable identification

regarded as
throughout.

identification sleeve is used in the

an

either side of the

on

(2)

in-line

same

Joints

repair joints

place

single

of cable

cable for identification purposes

printing,

sleeve shall be located

splice.

must be recorded in the aircraft records

indicating

the circuit, wire number and

location.

C. Limitations of In-line

(1) Single

cored cables

Splice Usage
only (size 24

12

must not be located under

clips

inclusive),

each barrel of the

splice

must carry

only

one

cable.

(2) Splices

(3)

The distance between in-line


three

joints

in any

(4)

Joints must be

(5)

Joints in

1.0 in.

Jun.OS

conduit

(rigid

or

flexible).

must not be less than 2.0 ft.

(0.6 m)

(7)

Joints must not be made in the

splices may

Cables

and

no more

than

circuit.

adjacent cables must be staggered from each other by a minimum


(25.0 mm), and located on outer surface of the loom, where possible.

No

(c)

ties in

adequately supported.

be used in

larger

(b) High voltage

202

splice joints

branch of

(6)

(a)

Page

one

or

designated
following

overheat

zone.

cables:

than size No. 12.

cables

(e.g. igniter

H.T.

leads).

Multicore cables.

hL
20-~0-50

NOTE: Please

see

the

TEMPORARY

REVISION
that revises this page.

of

approximately

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(d) Thermocouple

Screenlsheathed cable.

(e)

Go-axial cable.

(f)
(8)

No

cable.

be used in the circuits that follow:

splices may

(a) Engine

Gas

Temperature circuits

in

(b)

Fire and overheat detection and/or

(c)

Thrust

Management circuit in designated fire

(d) Wiring

associated with Generator control and

cable associated with

(f) Any

control

or

protection circuits

feeder cables to busbars in the

(e) Any

fire

designated

primary

or

overheat
in

distribution

electrically powered

designated

overheat

protection

or

zones.

fire

or

overheat

zones.

zones.

circuits.

system.

signalled flight controls,

but

excluding flight

systems.

3. REPAIR OF STARTER MOTOR CABLES


A. Procedure

(1)

Starter motor cables may be repaired using heat shrink


provided the conditions that follow are met:

(a)

Visual

inspection confirms that

no

metallic

sharp

sleeving if the conductors

edges

have been

are

presented

exposed,

to the cable

where the chafe occurred.

(b)

Visual

(c)

The

inspection

cause

reveals that

no

strands

are

of the chafe must be removed

damaged.

by repositioning the cable with suitable

clearances

maintained.

(d)
(2)

No evidence of

Where

chafing

arcing from the cable is visible.


inside

occurs

increased to eliminate the


over

fireseal, the repair should make

possibility

sure

that the cable diameter is

of movement. This may necessitate

wrapping glass

fibre

tape

the shrink sleeve.

4. REPAIR OF PTFEIFEP OUTER INSULATION DAMAGE


CAUTION: The repair of PTFE/FEP outer insulation requires that a heat-shrinkable sleeve must be
completely over the wire. If this is not possible, the wire must be replaced.
CAUTION:

Damage

that extends

more

A. PTFEIFEP Outer Insulation

(1) Scuffing

(38. 1 mm) along the cable and/or extends more


acceptable for repair and the wire must be replaced.

than 1.5 in.

of the cable circumference, is not

placed

than 1/4

Damage

of the PTFE/FEP outer insulation wrap is acceptable


damaged. No additional protection is required.

provided the

inner

polyimide

insulation is not

NOTE: Please

see

the

TEMPORARY

REVISION

II

that revises this page.

20-~ 0-50

Page

203

Jun.OS

ReYtNe(Hl

AiKraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(a)

If doubt exists that there may be

damage

to the inner

AIRFRAME

polyimide insulation, proceed

to the

paragraph 4.A.(2).
(2) Damage

to the PTFE/FEP outer insulation wrap that exposes and damages the polyimide
no conductor strands severed or with seriously damaged plating to reveal

insulation, but with

copper, may be repaired


and/or tape (A-A-59474).
NOTE: The

repair

should

using high temperature, heat-shrinkable sleeving (MIL-DTL-23053/12)

cover

the

damaged

area

with

0.25 in.

B. PTFE/FEB Outer Insulation and Center Conductor

(1) Damage to
replacement

the

polyimide

insulation

and

(6.35 mm) overlap

Damage

center conductor is

not

acceptable

of the wire.

NOTE: Please

see

fheTEMPORA Y

REVISION

Page

that revises this page.

20-1 0-50

at each end.

and

requires

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF SODIUM ALGINATE RELEASE AGENT

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
Sodium

alginate

release agent has the

contamination if the
craze

painted. The

readily removed without the risk of

that it is

release

agent is effective

up to 3020 F

(150" C)

Part/item No.

Release agent

Item 223

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Release agent fluid

Item 222

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Liquid detergent

Item 205

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Plastic

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Lint free cloth

Item 621

Preparation and application

or

ARS

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

containers, 1 pint (0.5 liter) capacity

Soft brush

(Chapter 20-95-601)

of material

Cleaning
(1)

Use
a

B.

and will not

equipment

Equipment/Material

A.

residual

Perspex.

2. Tools and

3.

is to be

area

advantage

liquid detergent (Item 205) and


cloth (Item 621) an allow to dry.

solution of

clean lint free

water to clean the

area

to be treated.

Wipe

with

Mixing
CAUTION:

MIX THE RELEASE AGENT IN A 1

PINT(0.5 LITER) CAPACITY PLASTIC

CONTAINER.

(1)

alginic acid, sodium salt powder (Item 223)


following proportions, by weight, to form a paste.
Mix the

Release agent

(Item 223)

Release agent fluid

(Item 222)

Add hot water

NOTE:

ethylene glycol (Item 222)

0.1412

ounce

(4 grams)

0.0706

ounce

(2 grams)

3.3182 ounces

Hot water

(2)

with

(not boiling) gradually to the paste

The release agent is

susceptible

and stir

to the

(94 grams)

thoroughly.

to attack by micro

organisms. Only prepare a

sufficient amount for the work at hand.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-75
Page

201

Jan. 2001

Rayeheon

Aircraft

IP5/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

C.

AIRFRAME

Application
MAKE SURE THE AREA TO BE TREATED IS CLEAN AND DRY.

CAUTION:

(1)

Apply

an even

N07E:

(2)

coat of the release

A current of

warm

agent solution

air may be used to

to the

speed

surface, using

up

Remove any residue of the release agent solution with

drying time,

soft brush. Allow to d~y.

if desired.

clean, lint free cloth moistened with

water.

(3)

Before reassembling parts, fit


relevant task

4.

or

apply

any

permanent

release agents which

are

given

in the

procedure.

Inspection
work shall be examined for

(1)

Completed

(2)

Periodical checks

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800XP

on

compliance

with the relevant task

procedure.

the process shall be carried out.

20-1 0-75
Page

202

Jan. 2001

Raytheon

Aircmft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF URETHANE FINISH TO EXTERNAL SURFACES


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this Maintenance Practice make sure that the warning and caution in
GENERAL DESCRIPTION, are read and understood (Ref. 20-00-00, 001).
WARNING: Put

on

679)

topic

protective clothing (ttem 682), this includes gloves (Item 675), safety glasses (Item
use barrier cream (Item 634) on areas of exposed skin.

and mask.

WARNING: When you use cleaner solvents (Item 201) or urethane (polyurethane) finish make
there is sufficient airflow in the work area. If you breathe the fumes, rest in a warm
with

sure
area

sufficient airflow. Get medical aid.

WARNING: If skin contamination occurs, gently and thoroughly clean with


non-abrasive soap. Get medical aid if irritation persists.

and

running water,

WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses. Flush with plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes, holding the upper and lower eyelids apart. Get immediate
medical aid.
WARNING: Do not eat, drink or smoke
Get immediate medical aid.
WARNING: Low flash

point

solvents

flammable material.

during

are

Comply

work. Should

ingestion

occur

rinse mouth with water.

contained in these materials which must be treated

with all local

as

WARNING: When

spraying is in progress, the spraying area is to be evacuated by all personnel


directly involved in the operation until two hours after spraying has ceased

WARNING: Make

sure

that the

airplane

CAUTION: Make

sure

that

drainage

holes

CAUTION: Make

sure

that

cleaning fluids

CAUTION: Do not touch the surface to be

CAUTION: When

airplane parts

are

is

grounded

are

safety regulations.

to

prevent explosion

due to static

not

discharge

not obstructed.

do not

come

painted

into contact with

after if has been

washed, make

sure

acrylic surfaces,

degreased

or

brake units

or

tires.

flatted.

that grease is not removed from any lubricated

polish or wax the airplane finish until it has cured for at least 60 days.
damage to the surface finish because paint does not obtain a hard finish for a

CAUTION: Do not

area.

This is to prevent
considerable time

after it has cured.


CAUTIONr All

flight

controls

are

to be

painted and balanced

in accordance with the

airplane

instructions.

EquipmentlMaterials

Partlltem No.

Cleaner, solvent

2Q1

(Chapter 120-95-201)

245

(Chapter 20-95-201)

290

(Chapter 20-95-2(31)

Cleaner

emulsion

Solvent, cleaner

Urethane, Enamel exterior

High Solid

Chromate Primer

409A

(Chapter 20-95-601)

4li~A(Chapter 20-95-601)

20-~ 0-228

manufacturers

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

EquipmentlMaterials

Partlltem No.

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper

6327

(Chapter 20-95-601)

PVC

629

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive Pad

637

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Milk Filter

671

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Cone Strainer

672

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter

Brush

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Safety glasses

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective clothes

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Tack

Rags

Local

supply

High

tack adhesive

Local

supply

Local

supply

Masking tape

Barrier

gloves

tape

Spray equipment

20-95-601

A. Introduction
This maintenance

practice details the requirements and procedures to be followed for the application of
(polyurethane) top coat finish to airplane external surfaces. The paint dries to a high gloss and
unaffected by the chemicals in hydraulic fluids, de-icer fluids and fuels.

urethane
is

Do all paint operations in good conditions, in a reasonably dust free atmosphere. The
procedures for surface preparation, paint mixing and application must be obeyed.

NOTE:

2.STORAGE
Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

technical data sheets for

storage instructions.

3. PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.

Repair
(1)

B.

All

of Joints and Seams

joints

Epoxide
(1)

(2)

Make

and

seams are

sure

that the

Remove and

keep

primer painted

they
(STRAIGHT) or
BASE).

necessary

are

(Ref. 20-10-1002, 201).

in

procedures. Repair
(FTeT. 20-10-3527, 201).

20-~ 0-228

area

to be

minimum of 24 hours.

painted (AMM, Chapter 23,


(ANGLED) or

STATIC DISCHARGE PROBE

check of the surfaces for corrosion

manufacturers

Jun.04~:"

as

surfaces have cured for

static wicks if

DISCHARGE PROBE
Do

repaired

Primer Finished Surfaces

DISCHARGE PROBE

(3)

to be

the surface

or

damaged paint

protection

as

work

necessary

as

STATIC
STATIC

per recommended

(Ref. 20-10-08, 201)

or

Raytheon

nircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(4)

Where surfaces have been contaminated, clean

as

AIRFRAME

follows:

(a) Skydrol, use a clean lint free cloth (Item 621) dampened
cloth frequently to avoid the spread of contaminates.
(b)

with

dry

on

the surfaces.

Remove dust, dirt, insects etc, from surfaces with emulsion cleaner
water in the ratio

applied by spray,
If

(Item 201).

clean cloth.

NOTE: Do not let the solvent cleaners

(6)

(Item 290). Change

Oil and grease, use a clean lint free cloth (Item 621) dampened with solvent
Change cloth frequently to avoid the spread of contaminates.

(c) Wipe dry

(5)

with solvent

by volume, one part of concentrate


brush (Item 676) or swab.

to nine

parts

(Item 245)

diluted with

of water. The cleaner

warm

can

be

flatting (or de-nibbing) of the paint coat on the surfaces is necessary, to remove any surface
as unusually rough areas, this is to be done with abrasive paper (Item 627) grades

defects such

320, 360

400.

or

NOTE: This

(7)

(8)

Rinse surfaces with water to

dry

with

Do

coat.

all emulsion cleaner and any dust

check of the surface cleanliness


3.8.

generated by flatting. Wipe

(3)

thru

(7)

until

by

means

of

water break test. If water break

occurs

surfaces with tack rags


coat of epoxy

(11) Apply a freshening


(Ilem 417A).
Do

check to

see

required repeat
C. Procedure for

(1) Strip paint


Do

as

if

3.8.

immediately prior

to

painting.

primer (Ref. 20-10-3527, 201)

flatting or de-nibbing of freshening


(6) thru (8) and (11).

with

high

coat is necessary. If

Repair of Urethane (Polyurethane)


necessary

or

solid chromate

flatting

or

Do

D. Procedure for

NOTE:Spotting
(1)

Make

sure

3.8.

(2)

Finished Surfaces

hidden corrosion. Where it is necessary

remove

and treat

and

(5)

thru

(12).

Touch-up Repair

in is not
that the

an

is

(Ref. 20-10-33, 201).

thorough check for possible


as paragraph 3.8. (3).

paragraphs

primer

de-nibbing

corrosion

(3)

repeat

water free surface is obtained.

sure that all windows, light lenses and any areas not to be sprayed are adequately masked
masking tape (Item 629) and spare paper to protect against paint spraying.

(10) Lightly wipe

(2)

freshening

Make
with

(12)

remove

clean cloth.

paragraph

(9)

promotes better adhesion of

acceptable repair procedure.

existing

urethane

(polyurethane)

has cured for

minimum of 72 hours.

20-1 0-228

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

Mask around

damaged

area

of skin with

finish, the masking is to be taken to the

(3)

Remove all loose

damaged

(4)
(5)

edges

of

paint by

AIRFRAME

masking tape. Where practical, for uniformity of top


joint or a break created by stripe lines.

coat

nearest skin

the

use

of

high

tape around the edges of the

tack adhesive

area.

Discard the

high

tack adhesive

tape.

Scuff around any rivets with an abrasive pad (Itefn 637) take care not to expose any bare metal
or on any rivet heads. If bare metal is exposed refer to 3.8. (3).

on

the surface

(6)

With abrasive paper (Item 627) grade 240 or 320 grit, carefully fair the
with the skin surface, make sure that no skin surface metal is removed.

(7)

When the
400

grit

to

edges

of the

existing paint

edges of the existing paint begin to fair into a smooth joint use an abrasive paper grade
remove the scratches left by the rougher paper. Make sure that no skin surface metal is

removed

(8)

The

(9) Lightly wipe


(10) Apply
(11)

(polyurethane) finish on the skin to be repainted should be lightly


grade 400 grit to remove the gloss and allow the next coat of paint to

urethane

existing

with abrasive paper

the surface with Tack

freshening layer

of

primer

Rags.
as

in

paragraph

3.B.

(11).

primer has cured for 24 hours, abrade the area under the repair with abrasive paper
grade paper grades 320, 360 or 400 grit. Flat the edges of the repair area until the indention where
the metal and the old paint meet is gone. If necessary apply additional primer until the juncture of
the old paint with metal is no longer visible.

Markings (Stripes

and mask the necessary

(1) Layout

stripe
painted (paragraph 5.B.).

Abrade within the

peel

orange

application

etc. Abrade

Clean surfaces

as

as

area

Trim)

3.8.

area

correctly will result

(5)

tape edges

and

as

in

grade 320
possible.

with abrasive paper

close to the

paragraph

or

area.

CAUTION: Failure to abrade the

(3)

adhere.

After the

E. Procedure for Color

(2)

abraded

paint peeling

or

400

grit

to

when

remove

stripe

is

all nibs

(7).

4. MIXING
Refer to Manufactu rers/Suppliers technical data sheets for the

mixing

instructions and

pot

life of the

materials.

5. APPLICATION
A. Urethane

(Polyurethane) Top

required for painting should be a temperature


relative humidity of between 30% and 75%.

NOTE: The conditions

30"C)

and

Coat Finish

20-~ 0-228

of between 59 and 86"F

(15

and

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

Always
or

NOTE: All

filter the materials

pressure

pots

are

milk filters

through

(Item 671)

AIRFRAME

or cone

strainers

(Item 672)

when guns

filled.

finishing materials must be agitated on a paint conditioner, stirred with a paddle or both.
that all heavy settling is off the bottom of container and thoroughly dispersed.

Make

sure

NOTE:

Apply
75"F

within 5 to 24 hours of

(23.8"C)

without

primer application
abrading 3.D. (11).

and not later than 96 hours at

NOTE: The pressure in the pressure pot, for normal use, should be between 11

15

room

psi

temperature

the indicator

on

gauge.
NOTE: When

high

areas are

of the fluid pressure

sprayed the fluid pressure is to be increased. This is done by the increase


by one pound for every two feet the gun is above the level of the pressure

pot.
NOTE:

the spray gun pressure at 45 55 psi. Hold the gun perpendicular to the area being coated
and maintain an 8.0 12.0 in. (203 305 mm) distance between the nozzle and the area being

Keep

coated.

(1)
(2)

Fill the spray gun container

or

pressure pot with

paint (Item 4a9A).

Use the spray gun to apply the top coat. This has at least two coats. The first coat
as a uniform wet film that is not sufficient to hide the primer.

(tack coat)

is

applied

NOTE: Allow

(3) Spray

minimum of 30 minutes between coats to let the solvent flash off.

final coat at

right angles

to the first coat

as a

full wet coat sufficient to flow out to

full

glossy

finish.
NOTE: The

dry

film thickness of the

paint

NOTE: Refer to manufacturer for the


NOTE: The

repair thickness

NOTE: Poor

does not

is to be from 0.0014 to 0.0025 in.

permitted number of repairs

apply

and

to control surfaces that

(0.036

to 0.064

mm).

paint thickness.

require balancing.

hiding colors, such as pure white and yellows, may require additional thickness to
hiding and will be dealt with as an exception. Areas such as the wing to fuselage
are expected to receive overlapping coats and will have additional paint thickness.

achieve
area

B. Procedure for Color

(1) Apply

the necessary

NOTE:

Markings (Stripes
paint

in the masked

or

area

Trim)

paragraph 5.A. (1)

thru

(3).

Masking tape may be removed immediately after the paint application. Always peel the
tape slowly away from the painted surface. Never peel the tape towards (into) the painted
finish. Remove the tape before the finish has cured to a state that will damage the edges
of the paint.

C. Cure Time

(1)

(25"C) before the airplane is put back into


performance
properties for several days after
paint system
best
To
achieve
as
as possible before the airplane
delay
long
performance
properties,
application.
is exposed to chemicals and flight service.
Let the finish

service. The

cure

for

minimum of 24 hours at 77"F


does not achieve full

20-1 0-228

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

curing process will continue to completion over a long period and to make sure of
better adhesion, it is essential, where further painting is required, e.g. emblems,
identification and service markings, that this paint is done within two weeks of the

NOTE: The

application

of the finish before full

cure

has been achieved.

6. INSPECTION
A. Procedure

(1)

Make

that the surfaces

sure

are

free from corrosion

as

per recommended

manufacturers

procedures.
(2)

The finished

applied

been

(3)

parts

or

components

to the necessary

must have

sound film of

satisfactory appearance which

has

areas.

Should any of the coats in the system be unacceptable the unsatisfactory coat or coats shall be
removed by wet and dry abrasion as far as possible back to the next satisfactory coat and the

system repainted.

(4)
(5)

Make

sure

that all

Make

sure

that all

after

(6)

masking materials
placards

legible

protective coverings

whenever the

airplane

have been removed.


has been

repainted

or

touched up

repairs.

Make

sure

replaced if they have been removed (AMM, Chapter 23,


(STRAIGHT) or STATIC DISCHARGE PROBE (ANGLED) or
BASE).

static wicks

DISCHARGE PROBE
DISCHARGE PROBE

Jun.04~f""

are

and

are

20-1 0-228

STATIC
STATIC

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


LEAK TESTING FLUID
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this Maintenance Practice make sure that the warning and caution in
GENERAL DESCRIPTION are read and understood (Ref. 20-00-00, Q01).
WARNING: Do not let the skin

topic

testing solution. Put on protective clothing


gloves (Item 675), safety glasses (Item 679). Use barrier cream
of exposed skin.

come

into contact with the

this includes

(Item 682),
(Itt?m 634) on

areas

WARNING: If skin contamination occurs,


non-abrasive soap.

gently

and

thoroughly

clean with

running water, and

WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses. Flush with plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes, holding the upper and lower eyelids apart. Get immediate

medical aid.
WARNING: Do not eat, drink or smoke during work. Should
Get immediate medical attention.

ingestion

occur

rinse mouth with water.

Partlltem No.

EquipmentlMaterial

604

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Water, distilled

622

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

6;75

~Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Leak

testing fluid

cream

Protective

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

679 (Chapter

shield

682

clothing

Coverslbarriers

or

trays

Stainless steel container

20-95-601)

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Local

supply

Local

supply

A. Introduction

practice gives the procedure to detect leaks at pipe connection joint(s) for
pressurized hydraulic and pneumatic systems. Leak checks are done by using a leak detection fluid
which is used to cover the suspect joint(s).
This

maintenance

2.STORAGE
Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppriers

data sheets for

storage instructions.

20-~ 0-354

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

3. PREPARATION

A. Procedure

(1)

If Neodol fluids

12)

(3)

used

are

Position coverslbarriers

being

tested.

Make

sure

must first be mixed to

they

in

(Item 622)

distilled water

or

5% solution of leak detector fluid with

suitable size of clean stainless steel container.

trays

to

prevent spread

of the fluid from the

connection

pipe

joint(s)

system is pressurized.

the

4. APPLICATION
A. Neodol Fluid

Types
spreading evenly

the solution

(1) Apply

and

rapidly

with

soft brush

(Item 676)

to the

joint(s)

to be

tested.

(2)

Do

an

immediate check of the

NOTE: Leaks

are

B. Sherlock Fluid

the

clusters of bubbles which

(Item 621)with
joint(s).

the

joint(s) using

collapse

and re-form

clean water and

use

continually.

to remove any residue of leak

clean lint free cloth.

Types

the leak test fluid

(1) Apply

for leaks.

free cloth

(3) Dampen a clean lint


testing solution from

(4) Thoroughly dry

by

shown

joints

NOTE: Fluid is

brush)

(Item 60Lf)

supplied
plastic

or

to the

joint(s)

to be tested.

a plastic squeeze bottle,


bottle with trigger spray.

in either

plastic

NOTE: Should dauber cap be used do not brush up "a lather".

bottle with dauber cap

Always apply the fluid

(includes

as a

clear

liquid.
(a)

For leak

(b)

For

testing

finding

small connections

small leaks

on

use a

large surfaces

squeeze bottle
or a

or

dauber cap.

hard to reach location, the spray method is the

most efficient.

(c)

At welded

or

riveted

brush to make

(2)

Do

an

sure

seams that may contain large leaks, flow the liquid on


the brush bristles partially close up the larger leaks.

immediate check of the

NOTE:

Large leaks

will

quickly

hold for 10 minutes

(3)

testing solution
application.
Leak

joint(s)
form

wide

for leaks.

large bubbles. Small leaks form clusters of small bubbles that

or more.

dries clean, leaves

20-~ 0-354

slowly with

no

greasy residue and rarely needs to be removed after

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE: If

cleaning

is

residue from

AIRFRAME

required, spray or wash with clean cold water to remove any leak testing
the joint(s). Thoroughly dry the joint(s) using a clean lint free cloth.

5. INSPECTION

A. Procedure

(1)
(2)

Make

sure

that there

are no

leaks.

Remove any covers/barriers

from

or

trays which have been positioned

to

prevent spread

joint(s).

20-~ 0-354

of solution

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

SEALING COMPOUND

AIRFRAME

FLEXIBLE SEAL APPLICATIONS

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THE WARNING AND

CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ AND

UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH SEALING COMPOUNDS. PUT ON

PROTECTIVE CLOTHES
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENT

(ITEM 201)

MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT

AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA
WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES,


OCCASIONALLY LIFT THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
AID.

WARNING:

THESE SEALING COMPOUNDS CONTAIN LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS, THESE ARE
FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

CAUTION:

THE SEALANTS USED IN THIS PROCESS ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR SEALING
ACRYLIC TRANSPARANCIES

A.

(PERSPEX).

Introduction

practice gives the materials and method of how to form a flexible seal for doors and
similar sealing applications. This method of sealing can be used when it is not practicable to seal with
a flexible moulding or a parallel strip of rubber. It is most useful where irregularities of the mating
surfaces make it necesssary to mould a sealing strip in situ which will fill a gap which varies in width.

This maintenance

NOTE:

For the temperature range

Manufacturers/Suppliers
B.

ofpolysulfide sealants

used in this process, refer to the

data sheets.

EquipmentlMaterials
EquipmentlMaterial
Polysulfide

sealant

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series

1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Pad/item No.
314

(Chapter 20-95-301)

20-1 0-447
Page

201

Jun.0P

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

ParVltem No.

Equipment/Material
Polysulfide

sealant

316

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

sealant

318

(Chapter 20-95-301)

223

(Chapter 20-95-201)

242

(Chapter 20-95-201)

217

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Primer, etch

497

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Release agent

(silicone compound)

Release agent

cleaner

Detergent

cream

gloves

Protective

Safety glasseslface

shield

clothing

Protective

NOTE:

ltem314

This

compound is for use in

NOTE:

ltem316

This

compound is

NOTE:

ltem318

This

compound is for use

even

use

thickness without

rolled out
NOTE:

for

as a

strip

most

applications.

in locations where
if the

short

cure

time is necessary.

sealing compound is to be applied in a band of


bedding-in the panel. If necessary, it can be

recourse to

of constant thickness.

This release agent is for use with all compounds, as necessary. Silicone release
are not to be used until final assembly, see paragraph 5.

ltem223

agents
2.

Storage
(1)

3.

Refer to

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Preparation
A.

Preparation
(1)

of

glass

The surfaces of
solution of

(59

(2)

to 118

Rinse with

assist

and reduxed surfaces

perspex/glass

warm water

mi)

of

warm

laminate parts that

at 122"F

detergent

(50"C)

cleaner to 1

water and drain until

are

to be mated must be washed with

and

detergent cleaner (Item 217).


gall (4.55 liter) of water.

dry.

Clean lint free cloth

(Item 621)

Dilute 2

4 fluid

oz.

may also be used to

drying.

EFFECTIVIT/:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-447
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

joints

must not be

must not

come

into contact with

with
B.

lint free cloth

a new

solvent cleaner

reduxed

(Item 621)

but the surface, if

joint,

moistened

vapor bath. Solvent cleaner

(Item 201)

(not soaked)

near a

joint, may be cleaned

with solvent cleaner.

of all other surfaces

Preparation
(1)

put into

Reduxed

AIRFRAME

Thoroughly

clean the surfaces in

impracticable wipe
NOTE:

surfaces with

lint free cloths

new

vapor bath, but where this is

(Item 621) dampened

grease and dirt. Cleaned surfaces must not be handled before


NOTE:

polysulfide

When

be that of the

NOTE:

When

sealant is

paint

applied

to

painted surfaces,

the

dry and free

from

bonding.

strength

of adhesion will

to the surface.

stronger adhesion is required, the surface

to which the

with solvent cleaner

the surface must be clean,

ready for the bonding operation,

When

(Item 201)

hot solvent cleaner

applied should be

sealant is to be

polysulfide

must not be

painted. The surfaces

treated with etch

primer

(Item 497) (paragraph 4).


NOTE:

In

cases

direct to

4.

Application
A.

Refer to

primer

mixing instructions.

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

(1)

Clean and

degrease

the metal surfaces with solvent cleaner

(2)

Spray

wet

coat of etch

one

even

primer (Item 497)

minimum of

one

(Item 208).

direct to the cleaned metal. The

hour pass before you

apply the

primer dries

sealant.

of sealant

Mixing
(1)

B.

polysulfide sealant should be applied

Procedure

Application
A.

fluid is present, the

paint free surface.

in 15-20 minutes but let

5.

hydraulic

Mixing
(1)

B.

of etch

where

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

mixing instructions and

cure

times.

Procedure

(1)

Apply the polysulfide

sealant to the

bonding

face of the component

using

suitable type of

extrusion gun.

(2)

To

prevent the polysulfide sealant from adhering

to the

surround, apply

thin coat of release

agent (Item 223) (APPLICATION OF SODIUM ALGINATE RELEASE AGENT)


surface and let

EFFECTIVIP/:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

dry.

typical joint

is shown in

Figure

over

the

landing

201.

20-1 0-447
Page

203

Jun.02

RaytLeon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

DOOR PANEL
OR SIMILAR

RELEASE
AGENT

AIRFRAME

EDGE TO
TRIMMED

SURROUND

LANDING

EDGE TO
BE TRIMMED

BONDING FACE
M12811

Typical

section

showing final assembly of


Figure

(3)

polysulfide
partial cure

sealant to make

after

If the

bedding-in
out as a strip

(6)

C.

applied

panel, polysulfide

sealant

in

band of

(Item 318)

even

thickness without

recourse

may be used. If necessary, it

can

to

be rolled

of constant thickness.

When the

assembly

dry, apply

any

paint

is

complete, wash off

the release agent

which may be necessary at this

(Item 223)

with clean water. When

stage.

paint has completely cured, apply the silicone release agent (Item 242) both to the
polysulfide sealant seal and to the surround, take care not to spread it beyond the surfaces
which are to be separated. This is the final application before flight and therefore must be
applied at this stage of assembly to prevent the seal bonding to the surround.
When the

Curing

(1)

Refer to
cure

6.

of the

sealant is to be

polysulfide
the

(5)

polysulfide sealant into contact with the surround, leave enough of


an efficient joint. Any excess compound should be trimmed away
sealing compound, use a perspex scraper.

Push the component with the


the

(4)

seal

201

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for pot life, work life, tack free time and initial

time.

Inspection/Check
A.

Checks

(1)

Make

sure

there is adhesion between the

been bonded,

(2)

Make

sure

bonding

on

by lightly applied

polysulfide

pressure with the

sufficient release agent remains


final

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Mawker 800, 1000, 800XP

on

sealant and the surface to which it has

fingers.

the

landing

surround to prevent the component

assembly.

20-1 0-447
Page 204
Jun.02

RayTheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING Ji~lNTING COMPOUNDS

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THE WARNING AND
CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ AND

UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH SEALING COMPOUND. PUT ON
PROTECTIVE CLOTHES
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENT

(ITEM 201)

MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT

AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE FUMES, REST IN A WARM

AREA,

WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES,
OCCASIONALLY LIFT THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
AID.

WARNING: THESE SEALING COMPOUNDS CONTAIN LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS, THESE ARE
FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

A.

Introduction

mixing instructions which are required to make an


electrically conductive seal which is suitable for airframe joints, where the best possible electrical
conductivity is required. This compound is not to be used on fatigue conscious primary surfaces.
Interfaying surfaces are not to be anodised, because of the non-conductive nature, of the anodic film.
A clear, water based adhesion promoter is first applied to the substrates to improve the strength of the
joint.
This maintenance

B.

procedure gives the

material and

EquipmentlMaterials

Equipment/Material

ParVltem No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

287

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Fabric

wipe

Electrically

conductive sealant

Adhesion promoter

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

320A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

321A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

20-1 0-481
Page 201
Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective

Gauze

2.

shield

clothing

Local

pad

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

interfaying surfaces are to be thoroughly cleaned with a new lint free cloth (Item 621)
dampened with solvent cleaner (Item 201). Always pour solvent on to cloth to avoid
contaminating the solvent supply.

(1)

The

(2)

Wash

one

small

area

(3)

Cleaned surfaces must not be handled before

Application
(1)

important that the surface is dried with a second clean


prevent redeposition of contaminates on the substrate.

at a time. It is

before the solvent evaporates to

4.

supply

Storage
Refer to

3.

AIRFRAME

of component items.

of adhesion promoter

Apply
a

bonding

cloth

uniform thin

layer of

adhesion promoter

(Item 321A)

to the solvent cleaned surface with

clean gauze pad.

(2)

Allow to

dry for approximately

(3)

Wipe off

any

CAUTION:

excess

30 minutes, at standard

adhesion promoter

(Item 321A)

temperature.

with

clean gauze

pad.

IF CONTAMINATION OCURRS ON THE SURFACE OR THE SEALING PROCEDURE

HAS NOT STARTED WITHIN 4 HOURS OF THE APPLICATION OF THE ADHESION

PROMOTER, CLEAN AND PRIME AGAIN.


5.

Application
A.

of the sealant

Mixing
CAUTION:

(1)

THE MIX RATIO IS VERY CRITICAL.

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

data sheets

or

the sealant container for

mixing instructions.

20-1 0-481
Page

202

Jun.02

Raltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

AIRFRAME

Procedure

(1)

Use

Make

spatula
sure

to

apply

it remains free of

(2)

Joints must be closed within

(3)

Wipe

(4)

To exclude moisture from

off any

surplus

layer of sealant over


any foreign matter.

an even

one

hour

of the

(work life)

sealant with fabric

the full surface

application

wipes (Item 287)

unprotected surfaces

make

area

of each

of the sealant.

and form fillets at

sure

the fillet

mating face.

edge

of

joints.

overlaps the protective

treatment that exists.

(5)

The closed

joint must be firmly retained with fasteners or clamps and must remain undisturbed
approximately 6 hours. Fasteners and clamps can then be removed.

in

this condition for

C.

Sealant

(1)
6.

curing

Refer to

times

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for work life, tack free time and initial

cure

time.

Inspection
A.

Checks

interfaying

surfaces have been

(1)

Make

sure

the

(2)

Make

sure

the sealant has exuded

is

along

Make

sure

unprotected

(4)

Make

sure

the

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

required

surfaces around the


standard of

cleaned.

length of the joint to provide


interfaying surfaces.

the full

complete coverage of sealant between the

(3)

thoroughly

joint

conductivity

are

adequately

evidence that there

covered with

fillet of sealant.

has been achieved.

20-1 0-481
Page

203

Jun.OP

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF ACID RESISTING PAINT


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THE WARNING AND

CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ AND

UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE MATERIALS USED IN THIS

TOPIC. PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

675),

SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM
(ITEM 634) ON

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENT

(ITEM 201)

MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT

AIRFLOW iN THE WORK AREA. DO NOT BREATHE FUMES. IF YOU BREATHE FUMES,

REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL


AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15

MINUTES, HOLD

THE

UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. IF INGESTION OCCURS, RINSE THE

MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

THESE MATERIALS CONTAIN LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS, THESE ARE HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance

practice

includes the

preparation

of

an

acid resistant

paint which

will withstand

battery acid, phosphate ester hydraulic fluids and water. Aluminium alloys to which this scheme is
applied must have been anodized or pickled to Raytheon Aircraft Company process specifications.
This

paint

scheme may be

treatment. This

B.

applied

paint scheme,

to other metals which have had the normal

pre-paint surface

when finished, is white in appearance.

Equipment/Materials

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Primer, epoxy base

465

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Paint, acid resistant

431

(Chapter 20-95-401)

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-482
Page

201

Jun.O2

Raytheon Aircraft
I~WHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective
Barrier

2.

shield

clothing

cream

Storage
(1)

3.

Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheet for storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Chemical treatment

(1)

B.

Aluminium-alloy parts where the surface finish is damaged must have the surface finish
(APPLICATION OF ALOCROM 1200 AND EPOXIDE PRIMER). Steel parts are to be
phosphated or cadmium plated.

degrease suspend all parts in a solvent cleaner (item 201)


approved method before you apply paint.

To

NOTE:

Where

vapor bath is not practical, swab with

solvent cleaner

of

Application
A.

vapor bath

lint free cloth

or

by

any other

(Item 621) dipped in

(Item 208).

primer

Mixing
(1)

B.

restored

Degreasing
(1)

4.

AIRFRAME

Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheet for

mixing

instructions.

Procedure

(1)

Apply one double track coat and let dry for 4 hours,
(15" td 23" C) and a relative humidity of 35 to 80%.

(2)

The

at

temperature of 59"

to 73.4" F

weight of the primer is approximately 1.18 oz. (33.6 gr.) per 1.2 so. yd. (1 sq.mt.)
and the covering capacity is approximately 15.5 sq.yd. per 2.08 U.S. pt. (1.76 imp. pt.)
(13 sq.mt. per liter) per coat, this assumes no losses, with a film thickness of 0.0008 in.
(20 microns).

dry

film

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000
Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-482
Page

202

Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

5.

Application
A.

finishing paint

Mixing
(1)

B.

of

Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheet for

mixing

instructions.

Procedure

(1) Apply

one

double track coat and allow to

35 to 80% relative

NOTE:

NOTE:

(2)

humidity

dry

for 8 hours at 59" to 73.4" F.

(15"

to 23"

C.)

and

to attain chemical resistance.

A wait of at least 48 hours is necessary before the

airplane

6.

AIRFRAME

finishing paint is dry enough

for the

to be flown.

At least 7

days

are

necessary for the

finishing paint

to be

fully cured.

dry film weight of paint finish is approximately 2.59 oz. (73.5 gr.) per 1.2 sq.yd. (1 sq.mt)
covering capacity is approximately 10.76 sq.yd. per 2.08 U.S.pt. (1.76 imp.pt.) (9 sq.mt.
liter) per coat, assumes no losses with a film thickness of 0.002 in. (50 microns).

The

and

the

per

inspection/Check
(1)

Do

an

Inspection of the finished parts to make

sure a

complete film

of

satisfactory appearance

is

achieved.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-482
Page

203

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

SEALING OF PERSPEX, LAMINATED GLASS WINDOWS AND PANELS


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING

AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE SEALANT. PUT ON

PROTECTIVE CLOTHES
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

IF YOU BREATHE FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW.


GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, REMOVE CONTAMINATED CLOTHES,

GENTLY

AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET
MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION OCCURS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES,


OCCASIONALLYLIFT THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF INGESTION

OCCURS, WHEN THESE MATERIALS ARE USED, DO NOT INDUCE

VOMITING. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS ARE CONTAINED IN THESE MATERIALS WHICH MUST
BE TREATED AS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL SAFETY

REGULATIONS.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance
windows and

panels

the removal and

panel

practice gives the procedure of

to which

how to form

seal for

Perspex,

laminated

glass

with the parts in situ. The sealant has low adhesion characteristics which facilitate

changing

of windows, doors

parting agent

has been

or

applied

panels. The seal is formed by bedding

window

into the uncured sealant and then it is left in

place

or

until

the sealant has cured.


B.

Equipment/ Material

Equipment/
Detergent

Material

cleaner

Part/ Item No.


217

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Release agent fluid

222

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Release agent

223

(Chapter 20-95-201)

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-499
Page

201

Jun.02

Raltheen Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Part/ Item No.

Material

Equipment/

Cleaner, solvent

(Chapter 20-95-201)

sealant

313

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

sealant

359

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

sealant

324A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

sealant

325A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

gloves

Safety glasses/face

shield

clothing

Protective

Local

Extrusion gun

supply

Storage
(1)

3.

201

Polysulfide

Brush

2.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Preparation
A.

of

Preparation
(1)

Perspex

The surfaces of
solution of

(59
(2)

to 118

Rinse with

Preparation
(1)

of

warm

detergent

water and drain until

dry.

layer of release agent (Items 222


mating surface (APPLICATION OF

(Item 621)

may also be used to

(mixed)) to the perspex or glass


SODIUM ALGINATE RELEASE AGENT).

and 223

The surfaces of the metal parts that are to be mated are to be


solvent (Item 201) using a new lint free cloth (Item 621).
Pour cleaner, solvent onto the cloth to avoid

Dry the

metal

mating surfaces

with

All metal

or

painted surfaces

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

are

to be

on

thoroughly

contaminating

second clean cloth

prevent the redepositing of contaminates

(3)

Clean lint free cloth

oz.

of metal surfaces

NOTE:

(2)

laminate parts that are to be mated must be washed with a


(50"C) and detergent cleaner (Item 217). Dilute 2 4 fluid
cleaner to 1 gall (4.55 liter) of water.

water at 1220F

thin

laminates
8.

laminate surfaces

drying.

assist

(3) Apply

glass

perspex/glass

warm

mi)

or

cleaned with cleaner,

the solvent

supply.

prior to the cleaner evaporating

to

the substrate.

primed.

20-1 0-499
Page 202
Jun.Oe

Ral~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

PRIMER ON METAL OR
PAINTED MATING SURFACE

OUTBOARD
PERSPEX/ GLASS LAMINATE

SEALANT

METAL SKIN

RELEASE AGENT ON

PERSPEX OR GLASS
LAMINATE MATING SURFACE
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH PERSPEX

GLASS LAMINATE

PANEL

GASKET

NO RELEASE AGENT ON THESE

FACES UNLESS SPECFIED

METAL
COVER GASKET ON BOTH SIDES

SKIN

WITH A THIN LAYER OF SEALANT

TYPICAL ASSEMBLY OF

PANEL(

EXPLODED

VIEW)

Messe
HAOeB998246AA

Typical

sections

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-499
Page 203
Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

4.

Sealant

(1)
5.

Sealant
A.

mixing
Refer to

mixing

instructions and

times.

cure

application

Procedure

(1)

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

(FigurePO1)

Apply polysulfide

sealant to the fixed metal

(a)

Sealant

(Items

313

(b)

Sealant

(Items

324A

or

359)

or

325P;)

(2)

Install the detachable part in

(3)

Allow the sealant to

(4)

On

completion,

cure

with

brush

with

place

so

mating

as

follows:

(Item 676).

spatula

surface

or

extrusion gun.

that it is bedded into the uncured sealant.

before the detachable part is removed.

the sealant is trimmed and

surplus

sealant is

peeled

off

by

hand from around the

seal

6.

Assembly
(1)

of

panels (Figure 201)

When this

NOTE:

procedure

No

(a) Apply

panels

which

are

to be

readily

primer or parting agent is required for this type


thin

If there is

(b)

is used for

no

layer

of

polysulfide

gasket, apply

removed do

as

follows:

of assembly unless it is

sealant to both sides of the

specified.

gasket.

thick coat of sealant either to the

panel

or

the metal

mating

skin.

(2)
7.

Install the

panel

and clean off the

excess

sealant.

Inspection
(1)

Make

sure

that the sealant, when mixed, is free from air bubbles

(2)

Make

sure

that the

(3)

Seals that have cracks

EFFECTIVTTY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

mating surface
or

is

or

pockets

before

use.

completely covered.

voids must be

rejected.

20-1 0-499
Page

204

Jun.02

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

RENOVATION OF FURNISHING MATERIALS


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING AND

CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ AND

UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH ANY CLEANERS OR RENOVATION
MATERIALS. PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

(ITEM 675), SAFETY GLASSES (ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 634)

ON AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND

ACIDS, MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT


FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA

AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE

WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. IF NOT BREATHING GIVE ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. GET


IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

TAKE GREAT CARE WHEN YOU MIX ACID AND WATER. MAKE SURE YOU ALWAYS ADD
ACID TO WATER NEVER ADD WATER TO ACID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

WATER,
WARNING:

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH RUNNING

AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION PERSISTS.

IF EYE CONTAMINATION OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT LENSES.

FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, WHILE YOU HOLD THE
UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR. DO NOT
INDUCE VOMITING. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

1.

General
A.

Introduction
This maintenance

furnishing
B.

practice covers the materials and procedure employed


keep their deterioration to a minimum.

to clean and renovate

materials to

Equipment/Materials

Equipment/Material

ParVltem No.

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective

clothing

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

shield

20-1 0-560
Page

201

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

2,

To clean
A.

furnishing

materials

Equipment/Materials

Part/item No.

Equipment/Material

226

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, carpet

228

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner

247

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Foam cleaner

248

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Leather finisher

249

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Fabric protector

251

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, anti-static

285

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Liquid detergent (household)

624

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper

646

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Soft cloth

655

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Brush

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Chamois leather

695

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Polish, hardwood

697

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Sponge

698

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Vacuum cleaner

Local

Soap

B.

flakes

(duster)

supply

Storage
Refer to

C.

AIRFRAME

Manufacturers/Suppliers

To clean curtains,

If

possible,

Make

(2)

If

an

(a)

fabric and covered bulkheads

DO NOT DRY CLEAN COVERS THAT HAVE LEATHER PARTS.

CAUTION:

(1)

upholstery

data sheets for storage instructions.

sure

remove

airplane and wash or dry clean as necessary.


applicable to the material that is to be cleaned.

the item to be cleaned from the

that the cleaner and the

procedure

is

item cannot be removed to be cleaned:

Make

shampoo

solution of

one

(b) Apply shampoo solution with a


with the grain of the material.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

part cleaner (Item 247)

sponge

(Item 698)

or

to 8

parts

soft brush

warm

water.

(Item 676)

and rub

gently

20-1 0-560
Page

202

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(c)

(3)
D.

small

time and rinse each

Work

on a

Keep

the sponge well rinsed to

water

frequently

at

area

to

keep

(d)

Do not soak the fabric.

(e)

Move onto the next area,

(f)

Make

that all the

sure

When the material is

dry,

area as

you go with

clean

it clean.

overlap

the last

cleaned to avoid the creation of

area

spray-on fabric protector

(Item 251)

can

be

applied.

cleaner and brush to

(2)

Make

(3)

Use

brush moistened with the solution to rub the carpet from side to side,

solution of

as

the

one

lay

remove

dirt

the surface.

Use

direction

spots.

shampoo is removed.

(1)

sponge.

luggage bay linings

To clean carpets and


a vacuum

damp

shampoo solution. Change the rinse

all traces of

remove

AIRFRAME

on

part carpet cleaner (Item 228) to 20 parts

of the

pile.

Clean

only

small

area

at

warm

water.

finishing

in the

same

time.

DO NOT MAKE THE CARPET TOO WET. A LONG DRYING PERIOD CAN

CAUTION:

CAUSE THE COLOR TO BLEED, OR CAUSE SHRINKAGE OR MILDEW. ONLY


WET THE TIPS OF THE PILE, DO NOT WET THE BACKING OF THE CARPET.

(4)

Use

(5)

Use

same

CAUTION:

(6)
E.

plastic

or

wooden

lint free cloth


direction

as

spatula (Item 645)

(Item 621) lightly


lay of the pile.

to remove any foam in the direction of the

pile.

moistened with clean water to rub the surface twice in the

the

DO NOT WALK ON THE CARPET WHILE IT IS STILL WET.

Before the carpet is used, let it

dry completely.

To clean artificial suede and PVC

(1)

panels, headlinings, light

For window

(a)

Make

(b)

If

(c)

solution of

an area

Rub the

is very

area

one

dirty,

covers or

other items made of artificial suede

part cleaner (Item 247)


use a

household

nylon

to 8

parts

warm

or

PVC.

water.

nail brush to scrub the surface.

to be cleaned with a lint free cloth moistened with the solution and let the area

dry.
(2)

To

remove

(a)

oil and grease stains,

Hold the

(b) Depress

(c)
(3)

Let it

can

upright

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(Item 248):

apply sufficient foam

10-20 seconds and then

After you clean suede,

EFFECTIVITY:

foam cleaner

6-9 inches away from the item.

the spray button to

dry for

use

use a

wipe

to the

away with

area

clean

to be cleaned.

damp cloth.

suede brush to raise the nap.

20-1 0-560
Page

203

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

F.

AIRFRAME

Toclean leather

(1)

To clean leather which has

(a)

flakes

are

Use

smooth finish.

solution of soap flakes

Make

dissolved. Add cold

approximately

(b)

105"F

lint free cloth

(Item 226) and hot water. Make sure that all of the
water (if necessary) to reduce the temperature to

soap

(40"C).
moistened with soap solution to rub the surface

lightly

gently with

circular movement.

(c)

Use

lint free cloth

lightly

moistened with clean water to

remove

all of the soap solution from

the surface.

(d)

If necessary,

apply

small

of leather finisher

quantity

(Item 249)

with

clean cloth. Let it

for 10 to 20 minutes for the natural oils to penetrate into the leathers pores.
excess

(2)

oils with

To clean leather with

Wipe off

dry

any

soft, dry clean cloth (Item 655).

fine nap, rub

gently

with abrasive paper

(Item 646)

to remove dirt and

raise the nap.

G.

To clean the windows

WINDOW SURFACES ARE EASILY SCRATCHED. TAKE GREAT CARE WHEN YOU

CAUTION:

CLEAN A WINDOW TO PREVENT ANY DAMAGE TO THE SURFACE.


THE USE OF A CIRCULAR MOTION TO CLEAN A WINDOW SURFACE CAN CAUSE

CAUTION:

GLARE RINGS.
Use

(2)

To finish the window clean:

dampened

chamois leather

(1)

(a)

Shake the

(b)

Hold the

(c) Depress
(d)
(3)

Use

can

can

of antistatic cleaner

Lightly polish

dry

cloth

to remove surface dust and any residues.

(Item 285) vigorously

to mix the contents.

8-10 inches away from window.

upright

the spray button and

soft

(Item 695)

(Item 655)

window surface with

apply

to window surface.

to remove wet residue from window surface.

dry

clean cloth all until ail

polish

is removed,

use an

up and

down motion.

H,

NOTE:

Fold the cloth after each pass to prevent the formation of scratches from any dirt which may
accumulate on the cloth.

To clean

plastic laminate, painted

(1)

(2)

metal and stainless steel.

Lightly

rub surface with

5 mi of

liquid detergent (Item 624)

lint free cloth

(Item 621)

with

warm

clean water to which

has been added.

When clean, rinse the surface with clean water to

dry

moistened with

remove

all traces of the

liquid detergent,

then

clean cloth.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-5~0
Page

204

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

I.

To clean hardwood

(1)

Gently wipe
or

(2)

clean cloth with oval motions

dirt is visible

as soon as

clean cloth and

apply

on

the

along

grain

of the wood. Turn

any section.

domestic hardwood

polish (Item 697).

Allow to

dry

and

polish

with

clean cloth.

To clean the

flight compartment

CAUTION:

TO AVOID SHRINKAGE, DO NOT USE HEAT TO DRY THE SHEEPSKIN COVERS.

(1)
3.

away any dust with

fold the cloth

Use
a

J.

AIRFRAME

Use

seats

solution of soap flakes and

warm

water to clean the

sheepskin

covers.

Stain removal
A.

Equipment/Material

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Ammonia

215

(Chapter 20-95-201)

218

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Hydrogen peroxide

221

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Oleic acid

511

(Chapter 20-95-501)

Sodium

512

(Chapter 20-95-501)

Oxalic acid

513

(Chapter 20-95-501)

Fabric refresher

696

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Detergent

B.

hypochlorite

Storage
Refer to

C.

cleaner

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

General
When you

remove

stains, obey the general procedures and requirements

on

how to clean the different

types of material.
Before you try to
After

remove a

stain,

remove

stain has been removed, make

they dry.
696).

If, after you

remove a

Procedures for the removal of

all dirt from the surface.

signs of any chemicals used


unpleasant smells remain, use a fabric

sure

stain any

that all

removed before

refresher spray

(Item

specified in paragraph 3.D. through


3.1. If the stain covers a large area or extends to the full depth of the pile of a carpet, the affected
upholstery or carpet must be removed from the airplane to be cleaned, or the part must be replaced.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

common

stains to small

are

areas are

20-1 0-560
Page

205

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

clean lint free cloth moistened with the

Use

fold

or

cloth to make

replace

sure

rub to moisten the surface and

limit the
D.

To

depth

remove

to which the

pile

applicable

AIRFRAME

solution to clean the

it is clean when you blot. Do not soak the

help

the action of the cleaner. When you

area. Frequently turn i


upholstery material, lightly

stain from

remove a

carpet,

is moistened to the minimum necessary.

air sickness, grease and oil stains


IF AMMONIA IS INGESTED IT MAY HAVE FATAL RESULTS. DO NOT INDUCE

WARNING:

VOMITING. GIVE LARGE QUANTITIES OF WATER TO DRINK. DO NOT GIVE


ANYTHING BY MOUTH TO AN UNCONSCIOUS PERSON. GET IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION.

(1)

Use
at

(2)

mixture of 5%

approximately

Use

detergent (Item 218) and a maximum of


(60"C) to clean the area.

lint free cloth moistened with clean water to

10% ammonia

(Item 215)

in water

140"F

remove

all

signs of the

solution.

Dry

thoroughly
(3)
E.

To

Remove any grease stains with

remove

degreasing agent (Item 230).

blood stains

WARNING:

IF HYDROGEN PEROXIDE IS INGESTED IT MAY BE HARMFUL. DO NOT INDUCE

VOMITING. GIVE LARGE QUANTITIES OF WATER TO DRINK. DO NOT GIVE


ANYTHING BY MOUTH TO AN UNCONSCIOUS PERSON. GET IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

DO NOT RUB. IF YOU RUB OR BLOT TOO HEAVILY IT CAN CAUSE A STAIN TO
SPREAD OR TO PENETRATE DEEPER.

(1)

Moisten the stained

area

with cold water, then

hydrogen peroxide (Item 221)

gently

blot with

clean cloth

with

dampened

to work the solution into the affected area. Work from the outside

of the stain to prevent any increase in the

area

of the stain. Continue to blot until the stain is

removed

(2)

Use

lint free cloth

dampened

with clean water to

remove

all

signs of

the solution.

Dry

thoroughly.
F

To

remove

WARNING:

ink stains with oxalic acid

IF OXALIC ACID IS INGESTED IT MAY HAVE FATAL RESULTS. DO NOT INDUCE

VOMITING. GIVE LARGE QUANTITIES OF LIMEWATER OR MILK TO DRINK. DO


NOT GIVE ANYTHING BY MOUTH TO AN UNCONSCIOUS PERSON. GET
IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

NOTE:

(1)

For colored ink, the

Use

solution of 10%

stain, then rinse


EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

use

of oleic acid

(Item 511)

(maximum) oxalic
thoroughly with water.

acid

may be

(Item 513)

more

satisfactory (paragraph

in water at 140"F

(60"C)

3. G).

to remove the

20-1 0-560
Page

206

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

While the

area

(Item 218)
(3)

Use

and

is still moist,
a

apply

to the

area a

maximum of 10% ammonia

solution made up of

(Item 215)

lint free cloth moistened with clean water to

AIRFRAME

in water at

remove

all

signs

mixture of 5%

approximately
of the solution.

detergent
(60"C).

140"F

Dry

thoroughly.
G.

To

ink stains with oleic acid

remove

WARNING:

IF SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE IS INGESTED IT MAY BE HARMFUL. DO NOT INDUCE


VOMITING. GIVE LARGE QUANTITIES OF WATER TO DRINK. DO NOT GIVE

ANYTHING BY MOUTH TO AN UNCONSCIOUS PERSON. GET IMMEDIATE


MEDICAL ATTENTION.

(1)

Use

solution of 5% oleic acid

140"F

(60"C)

(2)

While the

(3)

Use

to

area

remove

(Item 511)

and 10%

(maximum)

ammonia

(Item 215)

in water at

the stain.

is still moist,

apply

solution of 5% sodium

lint free cloth moistened with clean water to

remove

hypochlorite (Item 512)

in water.

all

Dry

signs

of the solution.

thoroughly.
H.

To

remove

(1)

Some

mildew and iron mould stains

drainage marks may be removed


(paragraph 3.D).

with

detergent (Item 218)

and ammonia

(Item 215)

as

for airsickness

(2)

For iron marks,

use

the

same

procedure

as

for the removal of ink stains with oxalic acid

(Item

513) (paragraph 3.Fl.


I.

To

remove

urine stains

(1)

Mix

(2)

Clean the affected

(3)

Use

solution of 10%

detergent (Item 215)

and water.

area.

lint free cloth moistened with clean water to

remove

all

signs

of the solution.

Dry

thoroughly.
4.

Inspection/check
(1)

Make

sure

furnishing
5.

Renovate
A.

that all cleaner and stain removal residues have been removed from carpets and

materials.

furnishing

materials

Equipment/Material

Equipment/Material
Lacquer,

clear

Lacquer, pigmented
EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Part/item No.
423

(Chapter 20-95-401)

424

(Chapter 20-95-401)

20-1 0-560
Page

207

Jun.OS

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Thinner

425

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Cleaner

210

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Storage
Refer to

C.

AIRFRAME

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Resurface scuffed material


BEFORE YOU DO ANY SPRAY OPERATIONS. PROTECT ALL NEARBY SURFACES,

CAUTION:

ESPECIALLY PERSPEX.

(1)

When

furnishing

improvements

(a)

Vynide type has


roughened surface can be

material of the

to the

become

Clean the surface to be treated, with cleaner

damage
(b) Spray

to the surface.

on

two

finishing

Wipe

with

over

coats of clear

worn or

scuffed to

noticeable

obtained if you treat the surface

dry

(Item 210).

as

degree,

follows:

Do not rub to

clean cloth and allow to

heavily to avoid any


dry completely.

lacquer (Item 423) and let it dry for

15 minutes between

coats.

This

NOTE:

(c) If
(d)
D.

small

The

area

is to be rectified the

coats should be

applied

Paintthefurnishing
CAUTION:

with

lacquer must not be thinned more than

dry

in

equal parts

lacquer may be brushed

approximately

per volume.

on.

two hours air

drying.

material

BEFORE YOU DO ANY SPRAY OPERATIONS. PROTECT ALL NEARBY

SURFACES,

ESPECIALLY PERSPEX.
NOTE:

(1)

A colored overspray may be used to

cover

soiled

Vynide

when installed in the

Vynide type can be oversprayed with


las necessary) if you treat the surface as follows.

materials of the

Furnishing

different color

(a) Thoroughly clean the surface with cleaner (Item 210), wipe
completely. Make sure that the surface is free from grease.
(b) Apply

two coats of

thinner

(Item 425).

pigmented lacquer (Item 424)


Let the first coat

dry

in

dry for

The second coat should be

(d)

The mixture

(e)

A standard color range is available to

thinned with

one

be

cover

color that matches

or a

dry

equal parts per volume, with


you apply the second coat.

hour.

sprayed with a conventional paint spray


convenient, provided it is consistent with the final result.
can

down and let the surface

15 minutes before

approximately

(c)

either

airplane.

gun

or

general requirements

may be brushed, if

and is

supplied

in

more

one

pint

sizes.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-560
Page

208

Jun.OS

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(f)

Lacquers

in

special

lots. To

gallon

get

AIRFRAME

colors to match
color match,

particular furnishings can be obtained but only in 20


sample of the color required, or if known, the color

reference number should be sent to:

Service

Engineering Manager

211-B91

Dept.

Customer

Support

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

PO Box 85
Wichita
KS 67201

0085

USA
When you order the standard pigmented lacquer (Ifem 424) the reference number
F: 153 is suffixed by a number which will indicate the color required, for example:

NOTE:

E.

204 1

Pale

F: 153

2004

Black.

of clear lacquer

Application
(1)

F: 153

Protective barrier

Clear lacquer
barrier

(Item 423) may be applied to Vynide


against nicotine stains and general dirt.

(2)

The

(3)

When you

lacquer

solvent

(4)

as a

Grey.

on

Lacquer
to the

must be

applied

in

exactly

the

same

and similar PVC covered cloth to

way

as

that detailed in

paragraph

provide

5.C.

degrease the surface of silk screened PVC cloth with cleaner (Item 210), try out the
a small off-cut to provide a guide as to how hard the particular surface can be rubbed.

must not be

Vynide

applied

to the

Vynide

until the

Vynide is installed in the airplane or installed


possibility of cracks in the Vynide when

covered component. This will prevent any

it is folded.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-560
Page

209

Jun.03

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


POLISH AIRCRAFT SKINS (EXTERNALLY)
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this Maintenance Practice make sure the WARNING and CAUTION in topic
GENERAL DESCRIPTION are read and understood (Ref. 20-00-00, 001).

polishes may cause irritation of the eyes and mucous membranes.


protective gloves (Item 675) and safety glasseslface shield (Item 679) before you

WARNING: Contact with

Put

on

do this

Maintenance Practice.
WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses. Flush with plenty
of water for several minutes, occasionally lift the upper and lower eyelids. Get immediate
medical aid.
This Maintenance Practice defines the materials and

procedure for polishing unpainted aluminum-alloy


ItemlPart No.

EquipmentlMaterials

607

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Finishing composition

608

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Mutton cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Metal cleaner and

Protective

polish

gloves

Safety glasses/face

shield

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Aluminum/stainless

polish

693

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Ventilated airflow mops 8 in.

NOTE: Electric

polishing

polishing

16

Local

ply

machines

are

prohibited

in

supply

flight hangars,

and

suitable

portable pneumatic

machine must be used.

NOTE: The maximum revolutions of the

greater

skins.

polishing machine,

when

using

an

8 in. diameter mop, must not be

than 1,400 rpm.

2. PROCEDURE
A. Skin

preparation

(1) Before
B.

you

polish the airplane skin,

remove

all

scores

and scratches from the

exposed

metal skin.

Buffing
(1)

a buffing mop driven by


motion when it is in contact with the

Polish with

(2) Initially

buff with

(3) Finally

buff with

a new

a new

a polishing machine.
airplane skin.

Make

mop dressed with metal cleaner and


mop dressed with

sure

you

keep

polish (Itern 607).

finishing composition (Item 608).

20-1 0-811

the

buffing

mop in

Raytheon

Aircraft

tompany

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

Mops

frequently dressed with


clogged will mark the skin.

must be

become

hacksaw blade to

NOTE: A different mop must be used for the different


like glaze will not be obtained.

C. Final hand

AIRFRAME

prevent clogging. Mops which

polishing compositions otherwise

mirror

polishing

(1)

Polish the

(2)

Polish

airplane

by hand,

skin to

with

brilliant finish to

clean mutton cloth

Jun.0420-10-811

protect the skins

(Item 621)

from moisture.

and aluminum/stainless

polish (Item 693).

RayTheon

Aircraft

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

SEALING OF INTEGRAL FUEL TANKS WITH


POLYSULFIDE TYPE COMPOUNDS
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THE AIRPLANE IS ELECTRICALLY GROUNDED BEFORE ANY WORK IS


STARTED.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH SEALING COMPOUNDS. PUT ON
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE SOLVENT CLEANERS OR PRIMER MAKE SURE THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A
WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

THESE SEALING COMPOUNDS CONTAIN LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS, THESE ARE
FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT THE FUEL TANKS ARE EMPTY OF FUEL, DRAINED OF WATER
AND PURGED OF FUEL FUMES BEFORE THE START OF ANY OPERATIONS

(CHAPTER 12,
CAUTION:

FUEL SYSTEM AND CHAPTER 28,

STORAGE).

KEEP THE FLAP VALVE SEATINGS AND MANDATORY FUEL AND AIR PASSAGES

FREE OF SEALANT.
CAUTION:

CLEANING SOLVENTS MUST NOT BE POURED OR SPRAYED ON THE STRUCTURE


BECAUSE OF POSSIBILITY OF RUN BACK BETWEEN LAYERS OF STRUCTURE,
THEN CREEP BACK AGAIN BRINGING CONTAMINATION ON TO THE CLEANED

SURFACES.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 001


Page

201

Jun.03

Ral~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

WHEN YOU USE SPATULAS TO REMOVE SEALANT TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE

CAUTION:

ANY PROTECTIVE TREATMENT FINISH.


A.

Introduction
This maintenance
for the

assembly

practice

all appropriate
a

barrier

the

procedures which

of parts used in the construction of

and contamination of

with

covers

airplane

structure and

are

integral

necessary to

a means

of

effective

systems. To achieve this, close attention

is necessary. A range of sealants is used to

joints
layer as

give

protection of

joint sealing

fuel tanks and to prevent the loss of fuel

cover

sealing of
applications together
damage e.g. swarf, during
to the

various

the sealant from mechanical

assembly.
B.

EquipmentlMaterial

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

255

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner

264

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Fabric

287

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Solvent, thixotropic gel

289

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

291

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Compound, sealing

312

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

313

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant fillet

314

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant brush

315

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

rapid

316

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

interfay (adhesive)

317

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant constant thickness

318

(Chapter 20-95-301)

328

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Wipe

grade (adhesive)
grade (adhesive)
cure

(adhesive)

Aerosil

(adhesive)

Polysulfide

Sealant

347

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

348

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

350

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

351

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

359

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

380

(Chapter 20-95-301)

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

interfay (adhesive)

20-10-1001
Page

202

Jun.03

Rayeheon Aircraft
125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Sealant, quick repair

390

Adhesion Promoter

321A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

324A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

325A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Phenolic Microballoons

334A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesion Promoter

335A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Sealant, quick repair

336A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesion Promoter

344A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, silicon carbide

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20~95-601)

White cotton

673

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

shield

clothing

(Chapter 20-95-301)

20-95-601

Squeeze

bottle

689

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive

pad

699

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Extrusion guns and nozzles

Safety

vacuum

cleaner

Clamps

Sealing fairing

tool

Mixing

and

Plastic

Storage

Container

Shore "A" durometer

2.

AIRFRAME

Local

supply

Local

supply

Local

supply

Local

supply

Local

supply

Local

supply

Storage
(1)

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

data sheets for storage instructions.

20-10-1001
Page

203

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3.

AIRFRAME

Preparation
A.

of

Assembly

(1)

Where

new

components
all assemblies

practical

drill/reamed to the

parts requiring sealant should be fitted, clamped and then

or

required hole

size. The

clamping

is to be done without any disturbance of the

assembly.
(2)

Dismantle assemblies
NOTE:

or

parts, deburr holes and

When it is not practical to work to

remove

all swarf between

paragraph (1) refer to

the

interfaying

Raytheon

surfaces.

Aircraft

Company.
B.

Preliminary cleaning

(1)

Use

safety

cleaner

vacuum

or a

clean bristle brush

(Item 676)

to

remove

swarf, and any other

loose material.

(2)

After any loose material has been removed, clean the area to be sealed with a lint free cloth
(Item 621) dampened with solvent cleaner (Item 208, 230 or 264). Make sure the cloth does not
contain

(3)
(4)

Dry

solvent cleaner to

enough

the

area

If grease,

or

with another clean,


oil-like films

dry

Primed surfaces

aged

wet abraded with 320


an even

C.

more

grade

cloth before the solvent cleaner evaporates.

still present, do

are

contamination is removed and the

(5)

drip.

dry

paragraphs (2) and (3) again until the

cloth is not discolored.

than 72 hours, to which the sealant is to be


silicon carbide paper

(Item 627),

or

applied, are to be lightly


pad (Item 699), to give

abrasive

matt surface.

Finalclean

CAUTION:

IF THE FINAL CLEAN PROCEDURE IS NOT

SUFFICIENT, THEN THE BOND OF THE

SEALANT TO THE STRUCTURE WILL NOT BE CORRECT.


NOTE:

Do the final clean

pour solvent cleaner

(1)

Carefully
689).

(2)

Fold lint free cloth

(3)

Dampen

(Item 621)

Carefully
cloth in

(Item 208,

the sealant is

230

to eliminate any

or

scrub

one

enough

an area

(not

264)

raw

the cloth with solvent cleaner from the

cloth does not have

(4)

immediately before

solvent cleaner to

clean

dry

into

polyethylene

squeeze bottle

(Item

edges.

polyethylene squeeze
drip.

to exceed 36 inches in

hand, followed with

applied.

length)

bottle. Make

sure

with the solvent cleaner

that the

dampened

cloth in the other hand to absorb the solvent before it

evaporates.
NOTE:

Always

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

clean

an area

wider than the width of the

area

to receive sealant.

20-1 0-1 001


Page

204

Jun.OS

Rly~heon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Do not scrub

NOTE:

more

than is necessary to prevent removal of any protective treatment

which may have been

(5)

Use extreme
areas

which

wiped dry

Repeat

(7)

After

(8)

Carefully

to clean inaccessible corners, gaps etc. A small

difficult to get at. Brushes with

are

with

the

(6)

care

applied.

nylon

bristles

paint

are not

brush may be used for

be used. Surfaces

to be

clean cloth before solvent cleaner evaporates.

procedure

drying

until the clean

cloth does not become discolored.

degreasing, let a period of 20-30 minutes elapse to allow the metal, which will have cooled
significantly during the application of the solvent cleaner, to regain the temperature of the
surrounding air. This is because moisture from the air may condense on the cool surfaces, thus
preventing sealing.
remove

any moisture from the surface with

clean, dry, lint free cloth (Item 621).

dryness can be made just out side the area to be sealed. A piece of
approved masking tape (Item 630) approximately 6 in. x 1 in., (150 mm x 25 mm), is
pressed firmly into the surface and then removed by pulling at right angles to the
surface. The dryness of the surface is shown by the uniform bond of the tape to the

A check for surface

NOTE:

surface. The presence of moisture will result in almost total lack of

(9)

are

Wear clean white cotton

gloves (Item 673) if the cleaned surfaces have


they must be cleaned again.

bond.

to be handled. If the

surfaces become contaminated

(10)

All final clean parts

application
again.
D.

are

to be covered

of sealant is

expected.

or

protected from contamination if any delay in the


lapse is more than 1 hour, parts are to be cleaned

If the time

Procedure before ovecoatlfillet

(1)

sealant, (e.g. fillet or overcoat), are to be protected from


possible and a cleanliness check (paragraph 3.C.) is to be done
adjacent structure, before the application of the sealant.
Areas which

are

to have further

contamination wherever

(2)

Where contamination is evident, the

procedure

is

as

on

follows:

(a) None-tack free exude:


The exude is to be completely removed using a woodenlplastic spatula (Item 645) and
cleaned (paragraph 3.C.). If required apply adhesion promoter (paragraph 4.).
(b) Tack free
Do
E.

Special cleaning
(1)

4.

(paragraph 3.C.)

and if

required apply adhesion promoter (paragraph 4.).

for fasteners

Clean bolts and rivets with solvent cleaner


hot solvent in

(2)

exude and unsealed structure:

final clean

(Item 201)

vapor bath in batches sufficient for

before

one

use.

days

It is

permissible

to clean with a

work.

Cetyl Alcohol is often applied to threaded fasteners as torque-tension control and is to


removed by swabbing or scrubbing the surface with solvent cleaner (Item 255 or 291).

Application

be

of adhesion promoter

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-10-1001
Page

205

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(1)

Apply a thin layer of adhesion promoter (Items 321A,


using a brush or clean lint free cloth (Item 621).

(2)

Let the adhesion

5.

(3)

After the

(4)

If the

drying
(Item 621).

prior

time

to the

not less than 30 minutes at

application

wipe of any

or

excess

344A)

room

to the cleaned surfaces

temperature and for

Sealant

not

of the sealant.

adhesion promoter with

clean, dry lint free cloth

primed surface becomes contaminated or sealing is not done within


application of the adhesion promoter, remove the adhesion promoter with
(Item 201), and apply a new layer.

4 hours after

solvent cleaner

mixing
Refer to

(1)
6.

promoter dry for

than 4 hours

more

335A

AIRFRAME

data sheets for

mixing

instructions.

of sealant

Application
WARNING:

Manufacturers/Suppliers

MAKE SURE THAT THE FUEL TANKS ARE EMPTY OF FUEL, DRAINED OF WATER
AND PURGED OF FUEL FUMES BEFORE THE START OF ANY OPERATIONS

(CHAPTER 12,
A.

FUEL SYSTEM AND CHAPTER 28,

STORAGE).

General
Do a tank pressure check as detailed by the Raytheon Aircraft Company. All sealant must be fully
cured before the pressure check is done and must have a minimum hardness of 35 shore A (which is
to be checked with a durometer). Any leaks must be repaired and the pressure check done again.

Seal all leak

paths except

at removable doors and

fittings

that

are

Use the type of sealant material that will provide sufficient time to
during the work life time of the sealant.

provided with gaskets

complete

the

or

assembly

"0"

of the

rings.

joints

to be sealed

Sealants must not be

applied

when

surrounding temperature

Structures that need overhead fillet seals, gap seals,


such
B.

as

until sealant has reached

riveting,

Procedurefor

(1)

Make

(2)

Use

interfay

sure

or

is below 60"F

hole seals,

are

(15.5"C)

not be vibrated

excessively,

tack free stage.

sealant

that all surfaces

are

thoroughly

clean and

dry

before the

application

of any sealant.

grade of interfay sealant (Item 314, 347 or 348) and apply a uniform, void free
mating surfaces, to a total combined thickness of approximately 0.02 in.
sufficient to result in a small continuous exude of sealant when the joint is closed.

suitable

of sealant to both

layer
(0.6 mm),

or

(3)

Make

sure

that the sealant line extends

(4)

Make

sure

that the

(5)

The sealant may be applied by means of a brush or spatula (Item 645). Fillets may be formed
the operator running a spatula or suitably protected finger along the sealant edges.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

approximately

0.25 in.

(6 mm) beyond

the

joint

line.

joint is closed within the work life of the sealant.

by

20-1 0-1 001


Page

206

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(6)

AIRFRAME

joint is to be slave bolted or clamped for initial assembly, slave or clamp at a pitch of
(25.4 to 76.2 mm) to prevent quilting. Every effort is to be made to replace these by
permanent bolts or rivets within the work life of the sealant. Make sure that the clenching action
of the bolts or rivets is correct before the work life of the sealant expires.
If the

1 to 3 in.

(7)

When parts
remove

drawn

sealant before

together and sealant


driving rivets.

extrudes from holes

use a

dry

lint free cloth to

(8)

completed within the work life of the sealant being used then the slave
bolts must achieve a clenching action equal to that to be achieved by the permanent bolts or
rivets. These are to be retained until the cure time has expired.

(9)

joints before the sealant exceeds its work life will result in loose joints
causing a loss in fatigue strength and a lack of pressure tightness. If it is evident that this has
occurred the joint is to be separated immediately and the sealant cleaned off before
reassembling the joint with fresh sealant.

(10)

(11)
C.

are

If

an

assembly

Failure to clench the

complete

joint

provide
running

smooth fillet seal

spatula

Interfay

sealant is to be overcoated with

Use

(a)

is

the exude is to be continuous, and is to be faired back into the

When the

Procedure for gap

(1)

cannot be

grade

of

anti-slump
or

cavity

(Item 315, 316,

sealant

are

(Item 314, 317, 347,

to be clean

348

350

or

or

351).

380).

before the

(paragraph 3.C.)

Anti-slump sealant may not be suitable for certain gaps


thickened sealant

Thickened sealant

(a)

sealant

by

anti-slump

sealant

applied.

NOTE:

(2)

brushing

joint to

the operator

sealant

All faces of the gap

is

This may be achieved

joint.
along
edge
suitably protected finger along the joint.

or

filling

suitable

of the

the

(Item

All faces of the gap

of overcoat sealant

(Item

318 mixed with Item 328

318 mixed with Item 328

or cavity are to
(Item 315, 316,

or

or

or ca vities,

334A)

and in this

case

is to be used.

334A).

be clean
350

or

(paragraph 3.C.) and covered with a thin layer


351) immediately before the thickened sealant is

applied.
D.

Procedure forfasteners
NOTE:

Fasteners must be installed and orientated

as

detailed

by

the

Raytheon

Aircraft

Companys

requirements.
the rivet sets, draw sets, and

bucking

bars clean at all times.

NOTE:

Keep

NOTE:

Install rivets, from the center of the pattern and work outwards.
fasteners

one

(rivets

(1)

All fasteners

(2)

Sealant is to be

Replace

any temporary

at a time.

and

applied

bolts)

are

to be assembled wet.

under the head of all interference fit bolts and to the head and shank of

all clearance fit bolts.


EFFECTIVIN:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 001


Page

207

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

When

(4)

Torque load fasteners as necessary on assembly (TORQUE LOADING). They


together with sealant and immediately torque loaded.

(5)

Preformed rivets need not be

bolts

possible

are

to be held from

dipped

turning

whilst the nuts

tightened.

are

are

to be inserted

in sealant before insertion

that the sealant will exude under the head and the tail of the
E.

AIRFRAME

provided it has been established


rivet during riveting.

Procedure for fillet sealant

(1)

skins/stringers thinner than 0.10 in. (2.5 mm) filleting at the edges is impractical,
edges are to be sealed with an overcoat sealant as specified in paragraph 6.F.

(2)

Apply

the sealant

more

parts. Make

Make

sure

(3)

For

or

347) into

or over a

joint

or seam
or

caused

by

the

mating

of two

or

mated parts.

it into

by smearing

the nozzle

adequately as it is worked into place. This may be


place with a spatula, or by means of an extrusion gun.

of the extrusion gun pointed into seam and almost perpendicular to


the line of travel. The gun is to be moved forward along the fillet with a shearing action

Keep

which

(4)

sure

314

it fills the mismatch of the surfaces

that the fillet sealant adheres

achieved either
NOTE:

(Item

these

pushes

The fillet is to be

tip

the sealant ahead of the gun and into

continuous, without voids and is

to

place.

overlap the adjoining

structures

by

0.79 in.

(20 mm).
(5)

Fair the sealant into the

Press the tool


not

(6)

F.

joint

or seam.

against
trapped within the sealant. Work

Make

This may be done

the sealant and

move

it

parallel

by the use of fairing tools or equivalent.


joint or seam. Make sure that air is

to the

out any air bubbles.

the fillet size is sufficient to fill the necessary gaps


attachments, where on stringers thicker than 0.25 in.

completely, except on skin to


stringer
(6.35 mm) the fillet is not to be
wider than 0.25 in. (6.35 mm). On stringers thinner than 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) the fillet width,
measured from the stringer edge, is to be approximately equal to the thickness of the stringer
unless otherwise specified by the Raytheon Aircraft Company.
sure

Procedure for overcoat sealant

(1)

Apply a layer of brushing sealant (Item 350 or 351) 0.005 to 0.035 in. (0.13 to 0.89 mm) thick to
completely cover the parts concerned, with an overlap of 0.125 to 0.25 in. (3.18 to 6.35 mm)
beyond any sealant that has already been applied. Make sure that the new sealant is worked
into all cracks and crevices.

NOTE:

(2)

Apply

Apply

the sealant

as a

Items 315 and 316 may also be used

the overcoat sealant

by

brush

or

continuous film.

as an

overcoat sealant.

wooden spatula

the brush method is used stroke the sealant in two

or

(the brush

method is

three directions to

preferred). When
complete

ensure

coverage.
NOTE:

Where the sealant is

applied over an existing sealant, this is to have reached a


damaged by the overcoat application.

sufficient state of cure that it is not

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 001


Page

208

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

G.

7.

Procedure for barrier

layer

layer sealing compound (Item 312) may be applied to sealants for the purposes of
protection against mechanical damage eg.swarf, during assembly procedures. The barrier layer
may be applied to sealants that have exceeded their tack free time.

(1)

Barrier

(2)

Apply the barrier layer with a brush to completely


extending up to 0.0625 in. (1.59 mm) beyond it.

Breakable
A.

AIRFRAME

cover

the sealant to which it is

applied and

joints

Procedure

(1)

A number of

joints

in

pressurized system

will

require

to be "breakable" for various purposes.

These may be made with low adhesion sealant (Item 313, 359, 324A, or 325A) or by O
other forms of seals. For further information on breakable joints refer to:- SEALING

proprietary parts, normal practice will be to omit the interfay and


filleting sealant, reliance being placed mainly on the inbuilt seal in the part. However a brush
overcoat as given in paragraph 6.F. is to be applied on the pressurized side of the joint.

(2)

Joints that

(3)

In any

Quick

repair

are

case

not sealed e.g.

of doubt the

Raytheon Aircraft Company

should be consulted for clarification.

sealants
and

336A)

always

be used in

conjunction

adhesion promoter

Sealants

(2)

These materials may be used to fillet seal, interfay seal or wet assemble parts which can be
done within the specified application life. They are primarily intended for repair situations or

(Item 390
(paragraph 4.).

faster

must

cure

an

require long application life conditions,

and

Procedure for self

sealing

Aircraft

When self

(2)

Where

benefit from

Company)

nuts

sealing nuts are used without washers they do not require sealant
cadmium plated nuts and bolts are to be treated as in paragraph 9.8.

(1)

can

times.

Special sealing requirements (when required by Raytheon


A.

with

(1)

small structural builds, which do not

9.

or

FLEXIBLE SEAL APPLICATIONS.

COMPOU ND

8.

rings

washer is to be installed under the nut, the washer and its

structure where it is to be

installed),

under the nut but

mating faces (the nut and


promoter applied

need to be cleaned and adhesion

(paragraph 4.).
(3)

The washer is then covered with fillet sealant

(4)

The
sure

B.

excess

exuded fillet sealant is formed into

that the fillet extends

Procedure for non-self

(1)

over

sealing

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

6.

C.)

and

immediately

assembled.

continuous fillet around the washer

the base of the nut and is allowed to

making

cure.

nuts and bolt heads

Clean surfaces and bolts to be sealed and

EFFECTIVITY:

(paragraph

apply adhesion promoter (paragraph 4.).

20-1 0-1 001


Page

209

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

D MAX

?ii

,,,i~i

L
M1619

Diameter of nut, washer

or

bolt head

0.40 in.

Overcoat non-sealed nut

Figure
D~DIAMFTER

OF
NUT OR BOLf HEAD

201

D MAX

+OaO in.

~1 I-j

0.06 in.MIN

M1610

Overcoat bolt head

Figure
(2)

Apply

overcoat sealant

bolt head if the head is

202

(paragraph 6.F.) over the exposed bolt head, nut thread and washer (or
inside the tank) to form a cap conforming to the dimensions in figures

201 and 202.

10. Clean up after


A.

assembly

Procedure

(1)

Remove unwanted sealant, which has not got to the tack free condition,

by cleaning with

SkyWipes (Item 287).


(2)

Remove unwanted sealant, which has got to the tack free condition, by applying undiluted
brush and leaving on the surface for 15-45 minutes.

SkyRestore (Item 289) by


(3)

Scrape

(4)

Wipe

off with

wood

the surface with

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

or

plastic spatula.

clean cloth.

20-1 0-1 001


Page

210

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

11.

AIRFRAME

Inspection
(1)

Make

sure

that the fuel tanks have been de-fuelled and drained of water.

(2)

Make

sure

that the fuel tanks have been

(3)

Make

sure

that all surfaces

(4)

Make

sure

that the

(5)

Make

sure

that all necessary

protective

(6)
(7)

joints

are

purged of

thoroughly

all fuel fumes.

clean and

to be sealed are mated

dry before

the

application

of any sealant.

correctly before the application

drilling and de-burring


applied.

has been

of sealant.

completed and that specified

treatments have been

Make

sure

that the

joint faces,

Make

sure

that the

joints are assembled within the work life of


along the edges of the mating faces.

bolts and rivets

are

cleaned and

degreased

before

the sealant and that

assembly.
a

continuous

line of sealant extrudes

(8)
(9)

(10)

Make

sure

that any additional fillet


that all assemblies

Make

sure

seals

or

Make

sure

are

or

overcoat is

to structural

any other type of seal that would


that all

earthing points

are

applied correctly.

requirements before the fillet seals,


the parts is applied.

overcoat

cover

checked before sealant is

applied (ELECTRICAL

BONDING).

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 001


Page

211

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

SEALING OF PRESSURE CABINS AND AREAS QUTSIDE INTEGRAL


FUEL TANKS WITH POLYSULFIDE TYPE COMPOUNDS
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING

AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH SEALING COMPOUNDS. PUT ON
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682), THIS INCLUDES GLOVES (ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS OR PRIMER MAKE SURE THERE IS


SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A
WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION
RUNNING

WARNING:

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

THESE SEALING COMPOUNDS CONTAIIN LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS, THESE


ARE FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

CAUTION:

CLEANING SOLVENTS MUST NOT BE POURED OR SPRAYED ONTO THE


STRUCTURE BECAUSE OF POSSIBILITY OF RUN BACK BETWEEN LAYERS OF THE

STRUCTURE, THEN CREEP BACK TO AGAIN BRING CONTAMINATION

ON TO THE

CLEANED SURFACES.
A.

Introduction
This maintenance

practice covers the procedures which are necessary to give effective joint sealing
assembly of parts used in the construction of pressure cabins and areas outside the integral
fuel tanks. Special care is required for all parts (skin laps, seam bulkheads, doublers, fasteners etc.)
that lead out of the pressure boundary to prevent pressurization leaks. A range of sealants are called
for to cover various applications together with a barrier coating as a means of protection of the sealant
from mechanical damage e.g. swarf etc. during assembly.
for the

NOTE:

The pressure

boundary

is the

fuselage structure

between the forward and

rear

pressure

bulkheads.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 002


Page

201

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES
B.

AIRFRAME

EquipmentlMaterial

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Release agent

242

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Emulsion cleaner

245

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

255

(Chapter 20-95-201)

256

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner

264

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Fabric

287

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Solvent, thixotropic gel

289

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

291

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

293

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Compound, sealing

312

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Polysulfide

Sealant

313

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Polysulfide

Sealant fillet

314

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant brush

315

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

rapid

316

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

interfay (adhesive)

317

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant constant thickness

318

(Chapter 20-95-301)

328

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Cleaning

solution

Wipe

grade (adhesive)
grade (adhesive)
cure

(adhesive)

Aerosil

(adhesive)

Polysulfide

Sealant

330

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

347

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide Sealant

348

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

350

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

351

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant corrosion

inhibiting

357

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant corrosion

inhibiting

358

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

359

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

380

(Chapter 20-95-301)

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

interfay (adhesive)

20-10-1002
Page

202

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Sealant, quick repair

390

Adhesion Promoter

321A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

324A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

325A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Phenolic Microballoons

334A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesion Promoter

335A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Sealant, quick repair

336A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

337A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

338A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

339A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesion Promoter

344A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, silicone carbide

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

White cotton

673

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

shield

clothing

Squeeze

bottle

689

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive

pad

699

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Extrusion guns and nozzles

Local

supply

Vacuum cleaner

Local

supply

Clamps

Local

supply

Local

supply

Local

supply

Local

supply

Sealing fairing

tool

Plastic

and

Mixing

Storage

Shore "A" durometer

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Container

20-1 0-1 002


Page

203

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

2.

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

of components

Pre-assembly

(1)

Where

practical,

all assemblies

then drill/reamed to the

Disassemble the assemblies

NOTE:
B.

that when the

sure

clamps

are

installed the

or

parts, deburr any holes and

all the swarf from between

remove

surfaces.

interfaying

the

parts that need sealant should be assembled, clamped and

hole size. Make

is not disturbed.

assembly
(2)

or

required

When it is not

practical

to work to

paragraph (I)

refer to

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company.

Preliminary cleaning
(1)

Use

cleaner

a vacuum

or

clean bristle brush

(Item 676)

to do

preliminary

clean to

remove

dust,

swarf and other loose contaminates.

(2)

After the loose material has been removed, clean the

(Item 621) dampened with


enough solvent to drip.

(3)

Dry

(4)

If grease,

the

area

or

cleaner solvent

with another clean,


oil-like films

are

(Item 208,

area

230

to be sealed with

or

264).

lint free cloth

The cloth must not contain

cloth before the solvent evaporates.

dry

still present, do

paragraph (2)

and

(3) again

until the contamination

is removed and discloration of cloth is not evident.

(5)

Surfaces that have been

primed

for

more

than 72 hours, to which the sealant is to be

lightly wet abraded with 320 grade


(Item 699) to give an even matt surface.
need to be

(6)

External surfaces that have been

processed

silicon carbide paper

(Item 627)

or

applied,
nylon pad

to include an intermediate barrier coat

over

the

primer paint need to have the barrier coat removed from the area that is to be interfay
sealed, plus an approximate 1 in. (25.4 mm) overlap, before the interfay sealant is applied.
epoxy

(7)

Remove the barrier coat


solvent

(8)

When the

light
C.

Final

(Item 293)
interfay

overspray

on

operation has been completed


exposed areas of epoxy primer.

sealant
the

with

mix of 50%

the barrier coat is to be restored

by

cleaning
cleaning shall be accomplished immediately before

NOTE:

Final

NOTE:

Inadequate cleaning

(1)

by light abrasion with a nylon pad (Item 699) wetted


Wipe dry with clean lint free cloths (Item 621).

in water.

Carefully

fill

can

result in

polyethylene squeeze
raw edges.

an

unacceptably

bottle

(Item 689)

sealant

application.

low level of sealant adhesion.

with solvent

(Item 230).

Fold the lint free

cloth to eliminate
EFFECTIVIT~

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 002


Page

204

Jun.03

Ral~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

(3)

Dampen the cloth with solvent


enough solvent to drip.
Carefully

scrub

an area

hand, followed with

one

(not
a

evaporates. Always clean

Use extreme
areas

be

which

the

Repeat

(6)

After

(7)

Carefully

to exceed 36 inches in

clean

dry

an area

length)

with the solvent

dampened

cloth in

cloth in the other hand to absorb solvent before it

wider than the width of the

difficult to get at. Brushes with

with

squeeze bottle. The cloth should not have

area

protective

to receive sealant. Excessive

treatment which may have been

to clean inaccessible corners, gaps, etc. A small

care
are

wiped dry

(5)

polyethylene

is to be avoided to prevent removal of any

scrubbing
applied.
(4)

from the

AIRFRAME

nylon

paint

brush may be used for

bristles may not be used. Surfaces

to

are

clean cloth before the solvent evaporates.

procedure

until there is

no

discoloration

the clean

on

drying

cloth.

cleaning, let a period of 20-30 minutes elapse to allow the metal, which will have cooled
significantly during the application of the solvent, to regain the temperature of the surrounding
air. This is because moisture from the air may condense on the cool surfaces, thus preventing
sealing.
remove

any moisture from the surface with

clean, dry, lint free cloth.

madejust outside the area to be sealed. A piece


(Item 630) approx. 6 in. xl in., (150 mm x 25 mm), is
approved masking
be pressed firmly into the surface and then removed by a pull at right angles to the
surface. The dryness of the surface is shown by the tape adhering uniformly to the

NOTE:

A check for surface

dryness

can

be

tape 2310M

of
to

surface. The presence of moisture will result in almost total lack of adhesion.

(8)

Wear clean white cotton


occurs, the surfaces

(9)

are

All parts that have had

delay

in the

gloves (Item 673) when


to be cleaned again.

you handle clean surfaces. If contamination

protected from contamination, if any


the time lapse is in excess of 1 hour, parts are

final clean shall be covered

application of sealant is expected.


again.

If

or

to be cleaned

D.

Procedure for

(1)

(2)

cleaning

before

ovecoating/filleting
fillet

overcoat) are to be protected from


contamination wherever possible. A cleanliness check (paragraph 3.C.) is to be done, on
adjacent structure, before the sealant is applied.

Areas which

are

to have further sealant

Where contamination is found, the

(e.g.

procedure

or

shall be

as

the

follows, las necessary)

None-Tack Free Exude

(a)

The exude is to be
accordance with
with

(b)

paragraph

completely removed with a none-metalic spatula and cleaned in


paragraph 3.C. If necessary apply an adhesion promoter in accordance

4.

Tack Free Exude and Unsealed Structure


Do

as

detailed in

paragraph

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

paragraph

3.C. if necessary

apply

adhesion promoter in accordance with

4.

20-1 0-1 002


Page

205

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

E.

Special cleaning
(1)

F.

for fasteners

Bolts and rivets

to be cleaned with cleaner solvent

before

use.

vapor bath in batches sufficient for

NOTE:

Cetyl Alcohol is often applied to threaded fasteners as torque- tension control and shall
be removed by swabbing or scrubbing the surface with solvent (Ifem 255 or 291).

permitted
days work.

Special cleaning

of

to clean with hot solvent in

(Item 201)

It is

one

skydrol contamination

(1)

Skydrol contamination from the hydraulic systems is to be removed by initially swabbing


scrubbing the area using undiluted cleaning fluid (Item 256).

(2)

Finally swab or scrub the contaminated area


by a rinse with clean water and then dry with

with diluted emulsion cleaner


a

The emulsion cleaner shall be diluted


to 9

parts

(Item 245)

or

followed

clean cloth.

by

volume to the ratio of 1 part emulsion cleaner

water.

of adhesion promoter

Application
A.

are

NOTE:

NOTE:

4.

AIRFRAME

Procedure

(1)

Apply

thin

surfaces

(2)

(3)

(4)

Let the

layer of adhesion promoter (Items 321A, 335A


using a brush or clean, lint free cloth (Item 621).

layer dry for

not less than 30 minutes at room

before the sealant is

applied.

After the

wipe off any

drying

time

excess

or

344A)

to the solvent cleaned

temperature and

adhesion promoter with

not more than 4 hours

clean, lint free cloth.

primed surface becomes contaminated or sealant application is not accomplished within


application of the adhesion promoter, the adhesion promoter is to be removed
solvent (Item 201), and a new layer applied.

If the

4 hours after the


with

5.

Sealant

(1)
6.

mixing
Refer to

Application
A.

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

mixing

instructions.

of sealant

General
NOTE:

fuselage pressure check is to be done as detailed by Raytheon Aircraft Company. All


fully cured before the pressure check is done and must have a minimum
hardness of 35 shore A (which is to be checked with a durometer). Any leaks must be

sealant must be

repaired and the pressure


NOTE:

Allparts, (skin laps,

seams,

all holes, gaps, slots,


pressure boundaries
EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

check done

etc.)
are

again.

bulkheads, doublers, stringers,

that lead out of, attach to,

nut

or cross

plates,

screws, bolts etc, and

parts that lead

out of the

to be sealed.

20-1 0-1 002


Page

206

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Use the type of sealant material that will provide sufficient time to

NOTE:

the joints to be sealed

during

when the ambient temperature is below 60 "F

Sealants must not be

NOTE:

Structures that need overhead fillet seals, gap seals,


such

excessively,

as

applied

or

until sealant has reached

riveting,

the

complete

assembly of

the work life time of the sealant.

NOTE:

(1)

AIRFRAME

hole seals,
a

are

(15.5 "C)

not be vibrated

tack free stage.

applied to primed or painted surfaces, light abrasion with an abrasive pad


improve adhesion before the final clean procedure is done. It should not be
abrade freshly primed surfaces.

Where sealant is to be
is to be used to

necessary to

(2)

Surfaces with

primer

over

six months old may be either:

Abraded with abrasive

(a)

pads immediately before the surfaces

are

cleaned and the sealant

applied.
Cleaned and then refreshed with

(b)

further thin

layer of primer,

as

described in

APPLICATION OF COLD CURING EPOXIDE PRIMER TO INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL

SURFACES, before the sealant is applied.


B.

Procedurefor

(1)
(2)

interfaysealant
all surfaces

Make

sure

Use

suitable

void free
0.6 mm,

layer
or

grade

are

of

thoroughly

before the

application

of any sealant.

interfay sealant (Item 314, 347, 348, 338A or 339A) and apply a uniform,
mating surfaces, to a total combined thickness of approximately

sufficient to result in

small continuous exude of sealant when the

Make

sure

the sealant line extends

(4)

Make

sure

that the

(5)

The sealant may be

(6)

dry

of sealant to both

(3)

the

clean and

joint

operator running

approximately

mm

beyond

the

joint

joint

is closed.

line.

is closed within the work life of the sealant.

applied by means of a brush or spatula (Item 645). Fillets may be


a spatula or suitably protected finger along the sealant edges.

formed

by

joint is to be slave bolted or clamped for initial assembly, slave or clamp at a pitch of
(25.4 to 76.2 mm) to prevent quilting. Every effort is to be made to replace these by
permanent bolts or rivets within the work life of the sealant. Make sure that the clenching action
of the bolts or rivets is correct before the work life of the sealant expires.
If the

1 to 3 in.

(7)

When the parts


remove

(8)

If

an

are

drawn

together

sealant before rivets

are

and sealant exudes from holes

use a

dry

lint free cloth to

installed.

completed within the work life of the sealant being used then the slave
a clenching action equal to that to be achieved by the permanent bolts or
These shall be retained until the cure time has expired.

assembly

cannot be

bolts must achieve


rivets.

(9)

joints before the sealant work life is expired will result in loose joints which
may cause a loss in fatigue strength and a lack of pressure tightness. If it is evident that this has
occurred the joint is to be separated immediately and the sealant cleaned off before the joint is
Failure to clench the

reassembled with fresh sealant.

EFFECTIVIP/:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1002
Page

207

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPIER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(10)

(11)
C.

When the

joint is complete

provide
running

smooth fillet seal

spatula

Interfay

sealant is to be overcoated with

Procedure for gap

(1)

Use

(a)

or

filling

suitable

NOTE:

cavity are
applied.

or

sealant is

Anti-slump

(Item

All faces of the gap

with

thin

to be cleaned in accordance with

(Item

318 mixed with Item 328

318 mixed with Item 328

or

cavity

or

or

348

joint

to

the operator

or

380).

or

paragraph

3.C. before the

cavities, and in this

334A)

case

is to be used.

334A).

shall be cleaned in accordance with

of overcoat sealant

layer

by

sealant.

sealant may not be suitable for certain gaps

before the thickened sealant is


D.

brushing

be achieved

grade of anti-slump sealant (Items 314, 315, 316, 317, 347,

Thickened sealant

(a)

to be faired back into the

sealant

thickened sealant

(2)

continuous, and is

along the edge of the joint. This may


suitably protected finger along the joint.

All faces of the gap

anti-slump

the exude is to be

AIRFRAME

(Items 314, 315, 316, 347,


applied.

paragraph 3.C. and coated


or 351) immediately

350

Procedure forfasteners

NOTE:

Fasteners must be installed and orientated per current

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

requirements.
NOTE:

Keep

NOTE:

install rivets, from the center of the

the rivet sets, draw sets, and

fasteners

(rivets

(1)

All fasteners

(2)

Sealant is to be

at

one

and

bucking
pattern

bars clean at all times.

and work outwards.

Replace any temporary

time.

bolts)

are

to be assembled wet.

under the head of all interference fit bolts and to the head and shank of

applied

all clearance fit bolts.

(3)

When

(4)

Torque load fasteners as necessary on assembly (TORQUE LOADING). They


together with sealant and immediately torque loaded.

(5)

Preformed rivets need not be

possible

bolts

are

to be held from

dipped

turning whilst the

nuts

in sealant before insertion

are

tightened.
are

to be inserted

provided it has been


during riveting.

established

that the sealant will exude under the head and the tail of the rivet

E.

Procedure for fillet sealant

(1)

skins/stringers thinner than 0.10 in. (2.5 mm) filleting at the edges is impractical,
edges shall be sealed with an overcoat sealant as specified in paragraph 6.F.

(2)

Apply

the sealant

more

parts. Make

For

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(Items
sure

314

or

347)

into

or over a

joint

or seam

it fills the mismatch of the surfaces

or

caused

by

the

these

mating

of two

or

mated parts.

20-10-1002
Page

208

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Sealant

(Items
Company.

NOTE:

(3)

Make

sure

or

339A)

may also be used if apptoved

that the fillet sealant adheres

achieved either

by smearing

it into

place

adequately
with

as

by Raytheon Aircraft

it is worked into

spatula,

or

by

means

of

place.
an

This may be

extrusion gun.

tip of the extrusion gun pointed into seam and almost perpendicular to
the line of travel. The gun is to be moved forward along the fillet with a shearing action
which pushes the sealant ahead of the gun and into place.

NOTE:

(4)

338A

Keep

the nozzle

The fillet is to be continuous, without voids and is to

overlap the adjoining

structures

by

0.79 in.

(20 mm).
(5)

Fair the sealant into the

Press the tool


not

(6)

(7)

trapped

against

joint

or seam.

the sealant and

This may be done


move

it

parallel

by the use of fairing tools or equivalent.


joint or seam. Make sure that air is

to the

within the sealant. Work out any air bubbles.

the fillet size is sufficient to fill the necessary gaps

completely, except on skin to


stringer attachments, where on stringers thicker than 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) the fillet shall be not
wider than 0.25 in. (6.35 mm). On stringers thinner than 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) the fillet width,
measured from the stringer edge, shall be approximately equal to the thickness of the stringer
unless otherwise specified by Raytheon Aircraft Company.
Make

sure

External surface

longitudinal

seam

fillets

are

to be

applied

with

surface appearance is smooth and continuous and contains


be made as follows:

no

care

to make sure that the

defects. The fillet is to

unsightly

(a) Apply masking tape along the top edge of the lip of the seam and on the lower adjacent
surface at a distance equal to the skin thickness away from the seam (this will make a 45"
fillet)

(b)

Use

(c)

Form the fillet into the

an

extrusion gun to

spatula,

apply

required

coated with release

bead of fillet sealant

along

the

profile shape by drawing a


agent (Item 242) along the length
45"

seam.

non-metalic

straight edge

of the fillet in

smooth

continuous motion.

(d) Remove
F.

the

masking tape after the

sealant has been allowed to

cure

for

one

hour.

Procedure for overcoat sealant

(1)

Apply a layer of brushing sealant (Items 350 or 351) 0. 005 to 0.035 inch thick (0.13 to 0.89 mm)
completely cover the parts concerned, with an overlap of 0.125 in. to 0.25 in. (3.18 to
6.35 mm) beyond any sealant that has already been applied. Make sure that the new sealant is
worked into all cracks and crevices. Apply the sealant as a continuous film.

to

NOTE:

Items 315, 316 314 and 347 may also be used

approved by Raytheon Aircraft Company


(2)

Apply

the overcoat sealant

by

brush

or

wooden

as an

spatula (the

the brush method is used stroke the sealant in two

overcoat sealant. When

Items 357 and 358 may also be used.

or

brush method is

three directions to

preferred). When
ensure complete

cove rage.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-10-1002
Page

209

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

Where the sealant is

applied

over an

existing sealant,
damaged by

sufficient state of cure that it shall not be


G.

Procedure for barrier

(1)

(2)

sealing compound (Item 312) may be applied to sealants for the purposes of
protection against mechanical damage eg.swarf, during assembly procedures. The barrier
may be applied to sealants that have exceeded their tack free time.

Apply the barrier coating with a brush to completely


extending up to 0.0625 in. (1.59 mm) beyond it.
The extension is for the

barrier

Breakable

use

coating

the sealant to which it is

of masking tape to control the

by the

and

application so that the edge


application of the

removal of the tape after the

sealant.

A number of joints in a pressurized system will require to be "breakable" for various purposes.
These may be made with low adhesion sealant (Items 313, 330, 359, 324A, 325A or 337A) or by
O rings or other forms of seals. For further information on breakable joints refer to:- SEALING
FLEXIBLE SEAL APPLICATIONS.

(2)

Joints that are not sealed e.g. proprietary parts, normal practice will be to omit the interfay and
filleting sealant, reliance being placed mainly on the inbuilt seal in the part. However a brush
overcoat as given in paragraph 6.F. shall be applied on the pressurized side of the joint.

(3)

In any

Quick

repair

case

of doubt

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

(1)

Sealants

(2)

These materials may be used to fillet seal,

(Items
(paragraph 4.).

390 and

336A)

must

specified application

small structural builds, which do not

faster

should be consulted for clarification.

sealants

done within the

cure

always

life.

be used in

conjunction

(2)

Where

adhesion promoter

require long application life conditions, and

sealing

Aircraft

can

benefit from

Company)

nuts

When self
cadmium

an

times.

Procedure for self

(1)

with

interfay seal or wet assemble parts which can be


They are primarily intended for repair situations or

Special sealing requirements (when required by Raytheon


A.

applied

joints

COMPOUND

9.

cover

coat

Procedure

(1)

8.

the process.

coating

of the overcoat is not disturbed

A.

this shall have reached

Barrier coat

NOTE:

7.

AIRFRAME

sealing nuts are used without washers they do not require


plated nuts and bolts shall be treated as in paragraph 9.8.

washer is to be installed under the nut, the washer and its

structure where it is to be

installed),

sealant under the nut but

mating

faces

need to be cleaned and adhesion promoter

(the nut and


applied

(paragraph 4.).

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-1 002


Page

210

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

The washer shall then be coated with fillet sealant

AIRFRAME

C.)

6.

(paragraph

and

immediately

assembled.

(4)

The

excess

making
B.

sure

exuded fillet sealant shall be formed into


that the fillet extends

Procedure for non-self

(1)
(2)

over

overcoat sealant

Apply

continuous fillet around the washer


cure.

nuts and bolt heads

sealing

Clean surfaces and bolts to be sealed and

form

the base of the nut and allowed to

(paragraph 6.F.)

apply

over

the

adhesion promoter

exposed

(paragraph 4.).

bolt head, nut thread and washer to

cap.

NOTE:

For details of overcoating of heads of bolts and nuts refer to: SEALING OF INTEGRAL
FUEL TANKS WITH POLYSULPHIDE TYPE COMPOUNDS.

10. Clean up after


A.

assembly

Procedure

(1)

Remove unwanted sealant, which has not got to the tack free condition,

by cleaning

with

SkyWipes (Item 287).


(2)

Remove unwanted sealant, which has

SkyRestore (Item 289) by

11.

(3)

Scrape

(4)

Wipe

off with

wood

the surface with

or

brush and

got

to the tack free

leaving

on

condition, by applying undiluted

the surface for 15-45 minutes.

plastic spatula.

clean cloth.

Inspection
(1)

Make

sure

that all surfaces

(2)

Make

sure

of the correct

(3)

Make

sure

that ail necessary

protective

thoroughly clean

mating

treatments have

Make

sure

that

(5)

Make

sure

that the

joints

comes

out

of the

are

and rivets

along

the

edges

Make

sure

that any additional

filleting,

(7)

Make

sure

that all assemblies

are

(8)

Make

type of seal that would

sure

that all

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

dry before

the

to be sealed before the

are

has been

cleaned and

application

application

completed

degreased

of any sealant.

of sealant.

and that

before

specified

assembly.

assembled within the work life of the sealant and that

(6)

any other

joints

and

drilling and de-burring


been applied.

joint faces, bolts

(4)

line of sealant

are

or

of the

mating

overcoating

to structural
cover

earthing points

are

is

continuous

faces.

correctly

requirements
applied.
parts

done.

before fillet seals,

coating seals,and

is

checked before

sealing (ELECTRICAL BONDING).

20-1 0-1002
Page

211

Jun.03

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

FORM-IN-PLACE SEALS FOR WEATHERPROOFING


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this Maintenance Practice make sure the warning and caution in
GENERAL DESCRIPTION are read and understood (Bef. 20-00-00, Gal).

sealing compounds. Put on protective clothes


gloves (Item 675), safety glasses (Item 679) and mask. Use
(Item 634) on areas of exposed skin.

WARNING: Do not let the skin

(Item 662),
barrier

topic

come

into contact with

this includes

cream

WARNING: When you use cleaner solvent (Item 230) make sure there is sufficient airflow in the work
area. If you breathe fumes, rest in a warm area with a sufficient airflow. Get immediate

medical aid.
WARNING: If skin contamination occurs, gently and thoroughly clean with
non-abrasive soap. Get immediate medical aid.

running water,

and

WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses. Flush with plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes, occasionally lift the upper and lower eyelids. Get
immediate medical aid.
WARNING: Do not eat, drink or smoke
Get immediate medical aid.
These

WARNING:

during

work. Should

sealing compounds contain low


Obey all local safety regulations.

flash

ingestion

occur

rinse mouth with water.

point solvents,

these

materials.

EquipmentlMaterial

Partlltem No.

Detergent cleaner

217

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Release

223

(Chapter 20-95-201)

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

(Chapter 20-95-301)

agent

Degreasing agent

Polysulfide

sealant

314

Polysulfide

sealant

317

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Aerosil

328

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

347

~Chapter 20-95-301)

Chalk, French

601

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, silicone carbide

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-9560"1)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Tissue, soft paper

642

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Brush

676

(@hapter 20-95-601)

Safety glasseslface

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

sealant

cream

gloves

shield

20-1 0-1009

are

flammable

RByHICMI

nircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Partlltem No.

EquipmentlMaterial
Protective

Sealing

682

clothing

(Chapter 20-95-601)

SL 4561-1 to -8

washer

Extrusion guns and nozzles

Local

supply

(non-ferrous)

Local

supply

felt

Local

supply

Chisel

or

knife

Cotton wool

or

AIRFRAME

applications.

NOTE: Item 314

This sealant is for

use

in most

NOTE: Item 317

This sealant is for

use

with

NOTE: Item 347

This sealant is for

use

in locations where

NOTE: item 223

This release

agent is

for

(Raytheon)

acrylic panels.

use

short

with all sealants,

cure

as

time is necessary.

necessary.

A. Introduction

practice gives the materials and method to be used to produce or repair form-in-place
give weather proofing between removable or hinged access doors or panels and adjacent
structures. This type of seal is not intended as a pressure seal and is only suitable for temperatures
between -58"F (-50"C) and 230"F (110"C).

This maintenance
seals to

The materials called up are resistant to kerosene and hydraulic fluid. The basic sealing technique is to
apply a layer of uncured polysulfide rubber between the door landing and the door and allow it cure in
situ. A bond between the seal and the door is prevented by the use of a release agent but the seal
should remain

attached to the door

permanently

NOTE: The installation of

a new

door

or

panel

landing.

may

require

the manufacture of

a new

seal.

2.STORAGE
Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

storage instructions.

3. PREPARATION
A.

Preparation
(1)

perspex/glass laminate parts that are to be mated must be washed with


(30" C) and detergent cleaner (Item r17). Dilute 2 4 fluid oz. (59
of detergent cleaner to 1.2 US gall (1 Imp gall, 4.55 liter) of water.
warm

water at 86" F

Rinse with
assist

B.

Perspex Surfaces

The surfaces of
of

(2)

of Glass and

warm

water and drain until

dry. Clean

lint free cloth

(Item 621)

solution

to 118

mi)

may also be used to

drying.

Preparation of
(1) Thoroughly

Metal Surfaces

clean the metal surfaces

contamination

by

CAUTION: Illake

use

of

lint free cloth

sure

that

area

to

they are free from


(Item 621) dampened with degreasing agent (Itern 230).
over

the

degreasing agents

area

do not

to

be bonded

come

until

into contact with any redux bonded

ioint.

(2)

Allow the cleaned

clean paper tissues

warm

(Ilem 642).

20-~ 0-~009

up for 30 minutes and

wipe

off any moisture that condenses with

Raytheon

Aircraft

tompany
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3) Lightly abrade the surface finish of the area to be bonded,


627) to improve the surfaces for sealant adhesion.
(4) Repeat paragraphs
NOTE: When

3.B.

grade

320 abrasive paper

(Item

(l)and (2).
bonding operation,

for the

ready

with

the surface must be

grease and dirt. The clean surfaces must not be handled


treatment is

(5)

If the surface

protective

(6)

Mask off with

tape (Item 630)

the

damaged,

areas

which

restore

are

as

prior

necessary

clean, dry and free from

to

bonding.

(Ref. 20-10-3527, 201).

not to have sealant

applied (Figure 201).

4. APPLICATION OF SEALANT
A.

Mixing
(1)

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Refer to

mixing

instructions and

cure

times.

B. Procedure

(1)

Select

sealing

NOTE: To make

washer of
sure

suitable size and thickness for the door fasteners.

that there is

complete perimeter

minimum thickness of 0.02 in.

of the door, the

washers

sealing

are

(0.6 mm)
provided

of rubber around the


to

prevent complete

squeeze of the uncured sealant.


NOTE: For doors where the gap to be filled is large, the sealing washers can be made thicker
bonding together several washers wit adhesive as called for in paragraph 4.B. (2).

(2)

Use
door

(3)

Use

brush

(Item 676)

landing, covering
a

brush

to

put

an area

(Ilem 676)

to

thin

layer

of sealant

(Item 347)

around each hole

sufficient for the attachment of each

put a thin layer of sealant (Item 347)


landing.

on

sealing

position

by

in the

washer.

face of the

sealing

washer which

is to be attached to the door

(4)

Let the sealant

(5)

Press the

location)

(Item 347) dry

sealing

washers

and allow to

NOTE: For

hinged

for about 5 minutes

(Figure 201)

in

or

position

until

on

just tacky.

the door

landing (at each bolt

or

camloc

cure.

doors spacers

are

still

required,

even

on

the sides without fasteners, to

rectangular approximately 0.24


(6 x 10 mm) or circular 0.31 to 0.39 in. (8 to 10 mm) diameter made from 0.24 to
0.31 in. (0.6 to 0.8 mm) precured sealant (Items 314, 317 or 342) and bonded midway
across the landings at a pitch of approximately 2.36 in. (60 mm).
maintain the minimum thickness of sealant. These

(6)

To

prevent

polysulfide sealant and the door and areas of the surround where
layer of release agent (Item 223) (Ref. 20-10-75, 201) over the landing
apply
it dry (Figure 201).

bond between the

surface and let

thin

(7) Simple fasteners, floating


over

layer of
spacer rings.

the

be

0.39 in.

it is not wanted

to have

can

thin

and fixed anchor nuts, 114 turn fasteners and their receptacles are also
agent applied to assist in the removal of any sealant that penetrates

release

20-1 0-1 009

RaYPNeMl

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

EXCESS SEALANT
TRIMMED-OFF FLUSH

MASKING

MASKING

RELEASE AGENT
ON DOOR

SKIN

DOOR

DOOR LANDING

SEALING WASHER
BONDED TO LANDING

MASKING ON

EXCESS SEALANT

EDGE OF DOOR

TRIMMED OFF

APERTURE
M7721
HAOOB986582AA

Figure 201
Typical layout of door

seal

(8) Apply the polysulfide sealant either (Items 314, 3170r 347) to the bonding face of the component
using a suitable type of extrusion gun filling the gaps round the sealing washers to a depth slightly
in excess of their thickness. The material must be applied within the relevant application life of the
sealant.

NOTE: Sealant may not be suitable for ail applications as the wet sealant can run out of the gap. In
this case sealant may be thickened with Aerosil (Item 328) to make the sealant thixotropic
and thus

(9)

Install the
the

door, take

surplus

bottom

non-slump

on

care

on

vertical surfaces

not to

damage

(Ref. 20-10-1002, 201).

the release

agent film. Tighten all attachments

to exude

through the gap between the door and the aperture until the door is felt to
the washers without too much compression or the door becomes flush with the

surrounding

sealant

skin. This work must be carried out within the work life of the sealant

being

used.

NOTE: Some instances may occur particular on functioning doors where it is necessary to
unwanted sealant with a suitable scraper before the material has cured.

(1 O)
(11)

Allow to
Use

cure

for the minimum

(12)

Jun.04~4"

curing time.

heated non-ferrous chisel

smooth exterior. Take


Remove the

care

or

knife,

to trim off unwanted sealant to

that unwanted sealant does not rest

masking tape

20-10-~009

remove

on

give

and cook

an

on

aerodynamically

the hot blade.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Unfasten the attachments and

(14)

Trim off any unwanted sealant from the inside

(15)

remove

use a

edge

suction cup if necessary.

of door

landing.

masking tape and wash off the release agent from the components
with
clean lint free cloths dampened with water when the seal is
scrubbing
by
be satisfactory.

Remove the remainder of the


and fasteners

considered to

(16)

If the seal is considered to be

(17)

Dust the cured seal with French chalk

prevent
C.

the door,

(13)

Repairs

to

unsatisfactory carry

out

(Item 601).

repairs

as

in

paragraph

4C.

This should be rubbed into the surface to

future adhesion when the door is installed.

Damaged Seals

NOTE: If the seal does not bond

sufficiently,

contains holes, cavities

or

does not fill the

it may be repaired using the original sealant material or the repair sealant.
washers are to be bonded back in position or replaced by new parts.

(1) Thoroughly
(2)

Mask the
no

clean the

adjacent

to be

areas

area

protected

of seal

by degreasing

from the sealant and

as

reapply

in

paragraph

release

required volume,
Any unattached

3.B.

agent

to the

areas

to which

sealant bond is wanted.

(3) Apply

the sealant

as

in

paragraph

l.B.

D. Poor Seal Bond

(1)

Clean the gap between the seal and door landing with a ball of cotton wool or felt which has been
dampened with degreasing agent and then twirled around the end of a pointed stick.

(2)

Allow to

(3)

Mask the

(4) Inject

dry

for

minimum of two hours.

edges.

fresh sealant into the

(5)

Install the door and

(6)

Do

(7)

operations

in

tighten

paragraph

aperture.
all attachments to exude the unwanted sealant.
4.B.

(10)thru (17).

satisfactory,
(Item 627).

If adhesion is still not


abrasive paper

(8) Repair the

seal

as

cut off the detached

sealant, clean the bond

area

with

grade

320

paragraph 4.8.

5. INSPECTIONICHECK
A. Checks

(1)

complete and neat seal strip each side of the fasteners and which
aperture. If there is not, or, the appearance is not satisfactory, or there
excessive number of bubbles and cavities, then the seal must be repaired or remade.

Make

sure

that there is

bonded all round the door


an

20-1 0-1 009

is
is

Ralnheon

nireraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

Make

sure

(3)

Make

sure

good bond between the polysulfide sealant


by lightly applied pressure with the fingers.

there is

been bonded,

AIRFRAME

that the

sealing

washers

are

still in

place

or

and the surface to which it has

if removed that the cavities

are

filled with

sealant.

(4)

Make

sure

that the surfaces

over

the door and minimum

peripheral

gaps

are

smooth and flush with

surrounding surfaces.
(5)

Do

check of all fasteners for freedom of movement and that

installed to the structure to make

20-1 0-~ 009

sure

that

no

they

lock when the door

sealant has entered the

receptacle.

or

panel

is

RayCheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHING SEALANT

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL


AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH SEALANT COMPOUNDS. PUT ON

PROTECTIVE CLOTHES

GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENT

(ITEM 201)

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE FUMES, REST IN A


WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

THE FILLER MAY CAUSE SKIN OR EYE IRRITATION IF CONTACT IS MADE, AND IS
HARMFUL IF SWALLOWED. IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND

THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET


MEDICAL ATTENTION IF IRRITATION OCCURS.

WARNING:

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART TO RINSE THE ENTIRE SURFACE OF THE
EYE AND THE LIDS. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SWALLOWED DILUTE BY DRINKING TWO GLASSES OF WATER. GET IMMEDIATE

MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS ARE CONTAINED IN THESE SEALING COMPOUNDS


WHICH MUST BE TREATED AS FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL
SAFETY REGULATIONS.

A.

Introduction

practice gives the procedure for Aerodynamic Smoothing Sealant (Items 396 and
397) which can be used for filling gaps between the edges of metal sheets to provide a smooth
aerodynamic finish. The smoothing sealant is a silver grey colored two-part,manganese dioxide cured,
polysulfide supplied in pre-weighted kits in two forms (1/2 hour and 2 hour application life). When
cured (refer to table 201) it becomes a tough rubber-like compound. It bonds well, has good
This maintenance

weathering properties,

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

and has

working temperature

of -65" F

(-54" C)

+250"

F.(+121" C).

20-1 0-3003
Page

201

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Equipment/

Materials

Equipment/Material

ParVltem No.

Smoothing

sealant

396

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Smoothing

sealant

397

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Smoothing

sealant

(Chapter 20-95-301)

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

637

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive

pad,

Protective

(Supraflex 600A)

Barrier

(or

very fine

ultra fine and

wet)

gloves

Safety glasses/face

shield

cream

NOTE:

Equipment and tools should be cleaned with cleaner solvent (Item 201) or a chlorinated
solvent immediately after use, otherwise it may be impossible to remove the compound.

Storage
(1)

3.

322A

(sprayable)

Cleaner, solvent

Abrasive paper

2.

AIRFRAME

Refer to the

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

storage information.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

Dirt and other

foreign

matter must be

out of the grooves and

scraped

scraper, after which the surfaces must be cleaned with


230) or other approved cleaner.
NOTE:

The cleaner should be

poured on

to

corners

cloth soaked in

clean cloth to maintain

with

perspex

degreasing agent (Item

an

uncontaminated

supply of cleaner.
(2)

Clean
the

one

small

area

at a

time, and dry with

is to be used, the whole

Where

(4)

Painted surfaces which have

(5)

clean cloth

immediately

before the

application

of

smoothing sealant.

(3)

the

spraying

smoothing

sealant to the

Particular attention to
of the

coating

will

high gloss
paint.
a

cleaning

occur to

area

and

make

completely cleaned

finish should be "flatted" to

"flatting"

sure

is to be

should be made to the

that the

edges will

be

one

improve

areas

provided

in

with

operation.

the adhesion of

where the boundaries

optimum bonding

conditions.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3003
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(6)

should be achieved

flatting

The

Superflex

(Item 677)

600A

or

by using

AIRFRAME

pads (Item 637) abrasive paper


approved abrasive paper. Clean away all

abrasive

other similar

dust with

clean cloth.

(7)

Where

(8)

The materials

spraying

is to be used, it will be necessary to mask the

are

supplied

in kits which have the correct

areas

proportion

that

are not

to be

sprayed.

of accelerator to base in the

ratio of:

For sealant

(a)

(Item

(b) For sprayable


NOTE:

396

sealant

or

397)

(Item 322A)

The accelerator must be

Make

sure

is 1 part accelerator to 10 parts base

slowly stirred into

that the sides,

corners

4.

the base until

uniform color is obtained.

and bottom of the containers

Only by proper mixing, using

all of the two part mixture.

optimum

is 1 part accelerator to 12.5 parts base.

are

scraped

to include

the correct proportions,

can

results be obtained.

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

The mixed

sealant

smoothing

(Item

396

or

397) can be applied by a spatula or extension gun,


working out any air bubbles or voids, and shaping

forcing the material into the groove or cavity,


with a suitable plastic or wooden tool.
using a spatula to apply
degreasing agent (Item 230).

(2)

When

(3)

The

sprayable

NOTE:

are

applied by

if the

spray gun with

spatula

large

is first

dipped

in

nozzle.

one

by experiment.

sprayed coat is

required

necessary to get the correct thickness, at least four

between each coat

application.

smoothing sealants (Item 396, 397 or 322A) cure with a finish which is silver grey. It may be
abraded or cut to shape with a sharp knife. Do not damage the surface. The smoothing sealant

The

when cut reverts to

(5)

is

treated is to be found

If more than
hours

(4)

(Item 322A)

dragging

The size of the nozzle and the distance the spray gun is held from the surface that is

being
NOTE:

sealant

the filler, it will obviate

it

Any masking

dull grey color.

which has been used should be removed when the filler is tack free. Refer to

Table 201.

NOTE:

For every 9" F (5" C) rise in temperature, application life will be reduced by approximately
half. For every 9" F (5" C) drop in temperature, application life will be increased by

approximately half.
NOTE:

Smoothing sealant is
(50" C).

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000
Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

not to be

applied to

surface when iis temperature exceeds 122" F

20-1 0-3003
Page

203

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Table 201
Details of

cure

times

Initial Cure Time

Application Life
(77"F (25"C)
50% RH)

Work Life

Tack Free Time

Reference

(77"F (25"C)
50% RH)

(77"F (25"C)
50% RH)

P/S 895-81/2

1/2 hour

1 hour

8 hours

24 hours

2 hours

4 hours

24 hours

48 hours

6 hours

30 hours

(77"F (25"C)
RH)

50%

(Item 396)
P/S 895-8-2

(Item 397)
PR-1435GS

1 hour

(Item 322A)
(6)
5.

If

subsequent paint finish

is necessary, it must not be

applied

until the filler is tack free.

Inspection/Check
A.

Procedure
to be coated with the

(1)

Make

sure

that the

(2)

Make

sure

that the surface of the

(3)

Before

paint

is

area

applied

to the

smoothing

smoothing

smoothing

sealant has been

adequately

cleaned.

sealant is smooth and blended to the surface finish.

sealant make

sure

that the

edges

are

adhering

to the

metal surfaces.

(4)

Make

sure

that the

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

smoothing

sealant does not interfere with any

moving part.

20-1 0-3003
Page

204

Jun.Oe

Ray~heon Aircraft
1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

HIGH TENIPERATURE SEALANTS

AIRFRAME

(SILCOSET

AND

SILASTIC)

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE SEALANTS. PUT ON
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
GLASSES

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 679)

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND SEALANTS MAKE SURE THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A
WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT

EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE

MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

CAUTION:

WHEN SILICON ADHESIVES CURE THEY GIVE OFF ACETIC ACID VAPORS. KEEP IN
AN AREA WITH SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW UNTIL ADHESIVE HAS CURED.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance

items such

as

practice gives

the method to be used for the

hot air ducts, which

are

in

bonding and the sealing of gaps for

extremely high temperature

For this purpose and to

areas.

cover different design requirements various types of silicone sealant are available.
withstand temperatures which range from -76"F (-60"C) to 4820F (250"C).

NOTE:

The sealants listed in this


The sealants have

B.

no

topic

will not withstand hydraulic fluids

solvents and do not shrink while

or

They will all

kerosene for long periods.

they are curing.

Equipment/Materials.
Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner Solvent

201

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(Chapter 20-95-201)

20-1 0-3005
Page

201

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Degreasing agent

230

Adhesive Sealant

326A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesive Sealant

327A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesive Sealant

332A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Primer

333A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Primer, sealing compound

365

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Primer, adhesive

369

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Primer

370(b) (Chapter 20-95-301)

Silicone Adhesive

371(a) (Chapter 20-95-301)

Silicone Adhesive

371(b) (Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Storage
(1)

3.

shield

clothing

Protective

2.

AIRFRAME

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Refer to

data sheets for storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

thoroughly de-greased with a clean cloth (Item 621) soaked with


cleaner solvent (Item 201), degreasing agent (Item 230) or other approved cleaner. Always pour
solvent on to cloth to avoid contaminating the solvent supply. Use a clean dry cloth to remove

The relevant

areas

must be

the solvent residue before it evaporates.

(2)

All metal

applied
(3)

Make

dry
NOTE:

surfaces, whether painted

with

sure

the

for at least
An

over

brush

(Item 676).

primer
one

is

application

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

applied

hour at

room

of the

or

unpainted, are to have a thin uniform layer


primer details refer to Table 201.

of

primer

For the

slightly larger than the joint area and allowed


temperature before the sealant is applied.

to an area

primer

to air

will result in poor adhesion of the sealants.

20-1 0-3005
Page

202

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Table 201
Primer

applications
Primer

Sealant

(Item 326A)

Silcoset

Silcoset 152 RTV

(Item 327A)

Ambersil

RTV

(Item 371(a)) and Silastic


(Item 371(b))

Dow

Coming

93-076

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Silastic 732 RTV

4.

primer

No. 6

Primer 1200 RTV

738

Coming

Dow

(Item 332A)

(Item 369)

(color red) (Item 365)

Primer 1204

(Item 333A)

Mixing
(1)

5.

primer (Item 370(b))

Silcoset 101 RTV

data sheets for

mixing

instructions.

Application
A.

Sealant(Silcoset
(1)

101

RTV)

only sufficient quantity of

Mix

sealant

(Item 326A)

for the purpose which has been

specified by

the manufacturer.

(2)

Where cured Silcoset 101 is to be used in service at

temperatures in

excess

of 302"F

(150"C),

temperature conditioned by progressively heating it up to its service


hours
at 248"F (120"C) and then for 4 hours at each temperature interval of
(4
temperature,
77 to 86"F (25 to 30"C) until the service temperature is reached).
it should be first

(3)
B.

Clean off any

Sealant(Sealant

surplus

93-076

RTV)

of mixed sealant

(1)

A uniform

(2)

The mixed sealant, after

layer

This is to make

(3)

sure

(Item 332A)

application,

is to be

applied

is to be allowed to

the sealant remains in

place

to both

partially

cure

when the parts

surplus sealant from the closed joint leaving


lapping occurs.

Clean off the


where

C.

sealant.

are

mating

surfaces.

before

closing

the

joint.

assembled.

small fillet at the

edges of the

sheets

Fillet sealants

(1)

If

fillet is

371B)
(2)

The

or

area

required,

use

Silcoset 152

the

one

part white sealant Silastic 732 (Item 371A), Silastic 738 (Item

(Item 327A).

to which the sealants

are

to be bonded is to be covered

by

the

appropriate primer

as

detailed in Table 201.

(3)

The sealant is

applied by extruding it from

tube

or

cartridge and forcing

into the

joint

or seam

to

obtain full contact between sealant and surface.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3005
Page

203

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(4)

These sealants

cure on

and the sealant is

fully

atmosphere.

exposure to the

Within

AIRFRAME
one

hour

tack free skin is formed

cured in the times detailed in Table 202.

Table 202
Fillet sealant

0.125 in.

(Item 371(a))

0.5 in.

Silastic 738

(Item 371(b))

Cure time at

room

temperature

24 hours

(3 mm)

(13 mm)

days

0.025 in.

(0.6 mm)

24 hours

0.125 in.

(3 mm)

72 hours

0.5 in.

6.

times

Fillet Thickness

Sealant
Silastic 732

cure

(13 mm)

14

days

Silcoset 152

(Item 327A)

0.125 in.

(3 mm)

24 hours

Silcoset 153

(Item 371(c))

0, 1 57 in.

(3.98 mm)

24 hours

Inspection
A.

Procedure
coverage of the

(1)

Make

sure

there is

(2)

Make

sure

that all gaps have been filled.

(3)

If

pressure test is

EFFECTI~ITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

complete

required

make

sure

joint

area

before the joint is closed.

it is not done until the sealant is cured.

20-1 0-3005
Page

204

Jun.03

Raydheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METAL FILLED EPOXIES FOR GAP FILLING

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THE WARNING AND

CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ AND

UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

THE FILLER MAY CAUSE SKIN OR EYE IRRITATION IF CONTACT IS MADE, AND IS
HARMFUL IF SWALLOWED. PUT ON CHEMICALLY RESISTANT GLOVES
AND SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 675)

BEFORE THE WORK IS STARTED. HANDS ARE TO

BE THOROUGHLY WASHED WITH SOAP AND WATER WHEN THE WORK HAS BEEN

COMPLETED.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLD

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

THE

EYE LIDS APART TO MAKE SURE YOU FLUSH THE ENTIRE EYE SURFACE AND LIDS.
GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SWALLOWED, RINSE MOUTH. DO NOT CAUSE TO VOMIT. GET IMMEDIATE

MEDICAL AID.

A.

Introduction

practice gives the procedure for two part hard setting metal filled epoxy compounds,
used
to fill gaps and cavities in metals (including aluminum) and to rectify out of line
be
can
faces. It is an aluminum colored putty which bonds well to metals and has good weathering properties.
This maintenance

which

compound can be applied to painted, unpainted or chemically treated surfaces which are
approved for corrosion resistance. The cured compound will withstand exposure to Kerosene, ASTM
40" C) and
#3 oil, water and chlorinated solvents and has a working temperature between -104"F
cured
material
The
stoved.
can be
and
be
and
can
painted
+250"F.(+121"C). It contains no solvent
machined, drilled, filed or tapped, use conventional working tools.

This

NOTE:

B.

only be used for component parts and at locations where it can be locked in
position by the outside profile. (It requires a depth of 0. 10 to 0.20 in. (3.5 to 5.0 mm.) to make
a satisfactory buttjoint).

Devcon F should

Equipment/

Materials

EquipmentlMaterial

ParVltem No.

Compound, sealing

326

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000
Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(Chapter 20-95-301)

20-1 0-3008
Page

201

Jun.02

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Release agent

223

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

gloves

Safety glasses/face shield


NOTE:

Mixing equipment is required, together with spatulas and/or putty knife


prepared compound.

NOTE:

Tools and mixing surfaces must be cleaned with cloths soaked in degreasing agent (Item
230) before the compound has cured. They should be cleaned immediately after use as the
residues

2.

are

difficult to

to

spread

the

remove.

Storage
Refer to the

3.

AIRFRAME

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

storage information.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

sealing compound (Item 326) is to bond are to be cleaned with


degreasing agent (Item 230) until the surface is free from contamination. A

Metal surfaces to which the


cloth soaked in

glossy painted surface


(2)

Clean

one area

at

must be abraded to a matt finish.

time, and dry with

clean cloth

immediately before

the

application

of

sealing compound.
(3)

Under cold working conditions heat the repair area to between 1 OO"F andlOS"F (38"C and
43"C) immediately before you apply the sealing compound. This procedure dries off any
moisture, contamination or solvents and assists in the sealing compound bonding.

(4)

A release agent

(Item 223)
sealing compound.

NOTE:

To
to

4.

Mixing

surfaces which

keep the surrounding sides


give a neat appearance.

and

Refer to the

applied

This surface must be treated with

surrounding

(5)

must be

require

clean

to any surface which is not

release agent which


to be

can

be

required

easily

to retain the

removed from the

painted.

apply masking tape (Item 630)

around the

packing position

curing

Manufacturers/Suppliers

EFFECTIVIPI:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

data sheets for

mixing

and

curing

information.

20-1 0-3008
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

5.

AIRFRAME

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

The

sealing compound

with

mated

as

minimum

(2)

(4)

or

If the surface of the


a

(3)

spread over the prepared surface or pushed firmly into a cavity


Any parts which have to be assembled at this stage must be
quickly as possible because of the compounds short working life (60 minutes). Apply a
thickness of 0.062 inches (1.2 mm). Do not feather edge. Use butt joints.

putty knife

is to be

similar tool.

compound

is to be contoured it may be

"wiped" into the required shape,

use

wet cloth.

The

surplus compound
together.

must be

wiped away with

Rough edges may be filed after the compound


required using the relevant paint scheme.

clean cloth

has cured. The

as soon as

compound

the parts

can

are

then be

placed

painted

as

NOTE:

Do not

NOTE:

A 0.50 inch

use

It will be

6.

paint strippers

on

these

compounds.

(12. 70 mm.) thick section


fully cured in 16 hours.

of compound will initially

cure

at 75"F

(24" C)

in 4 hours.

Inspection/Check
A.

Procedure

(1)
(2)

Make

sure

If you

use

the

compound

has

good

bond to the surfaces it

covers

and is locked in

position.

compound to repair a distorted or out-of-line frame, make sure any irregularities


sufficiently to prevent distortion of the mating part when it is installed.

have

been removed

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3008
Page

203

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF COLD CURING EPOXY PRIMER TO


INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL SURFACES

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675),
(ITEM 634) ON

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS OR PRIMER MAKE SURE THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A
WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS ARE CONTAINED IN THESE MATERIALS WHICH MUST
BE TREATED AS A FLAMMABLE MATERIAL. COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL SAFETY

REGULATIONS.

WARNING:

WHEN SPRAYING IS IN PROGRESS THE SPRAYING AREA IS TO BE EVACUATED BY

ALL PERSONNEL NOT DIRECTLY INVOLVED IN THE OPERATION UNTIL TWO HOURS
AFTER SPRAYING HAS CEASED.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT DRAINAGE HOLES ARE NOT OBSTRUCTED.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT CLEANING FLUIDS DO NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH ACRYLIC

SURFACES, BRAKES OR TIRES.


CAUTION:

DO NOT TOUCH THE SURFACE TO BE TO BE PAINTED AFTER IT HAS BEEN


DEGREASED OR FLATTED.

CAUTION:

DO NOT ALLOW ANY PAINT SPRAY OR DRIFT CONTAMINATION TO REACH ANY


OTHER PARTS WHICH DO NOT REQUIRE TO BE SPRAYED.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3527
Page

201

Jun.03

Ra~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

WHEN AIRPLANE PARTS ARE

CAUTION:

WASHED,

AIRFRAME

MAKE SURE THAT GREASE IS NOT

REMOVED FROM ANY LUBRICATED AREA.


A.

Introduction

This maintenance

practice

covers

the

procedure

reinforced resin-fiber and tedlar covered


The

primer

can

be

for the

plastic parts

applied by conventional

and

primer

to

metalic,

areas.

air spray, airless spray

unimproved resin-fiber components (for example parts

of epoxy

application

not filled

or

or

airless electrostatic spray. For

covered in

Tedlar) application by

brush is necessary.
The

primer

etc.)

is to be

has been

NOTE:

applied

protective

treatment

(anodic,

cadmium

plating, blasting,

applied.

Further details of the Process


to the

application
B.

after the relevant

Raytheon

specifications quoted in
Company.

this

procedure

can

be obtained

by

Aircraft

EquipmentlMaterial

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Primer, epoxy

466

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Primer, epoxy

472

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Primer, epoxy

474

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Primer, epoxy

410A

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Filler

411A

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Hardener

412A

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Hardener

484

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, silicone carbide

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, garnet

646

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

shield

20-1 0-3527
Page

202

Jun.OS

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Protective

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

699

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive

2.

clothing

pad

Tack cloths

Local

supply

Spray equipment

Local

supply

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

Preparation

of surfaces

The surface of all

plating

parts

must first have been cleaned and where necessary

treatment relevant to that

(1)

Aluminum
with

(2)

one

alloy parts

are

to be

degreased

Process

(b)

APPLICATION OF ALOCROM 1200

(c)

Process

specification

specification

alloy parts

Aluminum

one

(a) Degreased

to Process

approved

an

given

surface treatment

or

follows:
solvent and treated in accordance

anodizing.
(ALODINE 1200).

Chromic/Sulfuric

alloy

specification

steel parts
to Process

are

specification

Metal

to Process

specifications

to Process

resisting

Cadmium

alloys,

specification

steel parts

plated

(b)

Metal

(c)

Pickled to Process

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

are

to Process

copper and copper

sprayed

(1)

and

subsequently

contaminated

are

to

to Process

of metallic materials.

to be treated with one of the processes that follow:

alloys.

Corrosion

in

alloys.

(ALODINE 1200).

and copper

(c) Phosphated

as

of aluminum and aluminum

Degreasing

alloys, copper
sprayed

pickling

of the processes that follow:

APPLICATION OF ALOCROM 1200

Carbon and low

(a)

Chromic acid

which have been treated

be treated with

(b)

with

as

of the processes that follow:

(a) Cadmium plated

(4)

material, normally these will be

(a)

(b)
(3)

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Cadmium

Zinc

spraying

Phosphate

to be treated with

specification

plating

or

for steels, titanium, titanium

Aluminum

spraying.

treatment for steels.

one

Cadmium

of the processes that follow:

plating for steels, titanium,

titanium

alloys.

specifications

specification

Pickling

Zinc

spraying

or

Aluminum

spraying.

of stainless steel and nickel chromium

alloys.

20-1 0-3527
Page

203

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Blasted to Process

(d)
(5)

Titanium parts

are

to be treated with

Cleaned to Process

(a)

blasted to Process

(b) Prepared
copper

alloys

for

specifications

to Process

Vacuum

cleaning

blasting

Vapor blasting.

Liquid

or

or

specification

Zinc

Pickling

thoroughly

check for surface cleanliness

grade

degreasing

and

Vapor blasting.

by

an

spraying.

of titanium and titanium

cleaned before

means

of

adequately

painting

non-woven

nylon

abrasive

alloys.
follows:

as

water break test. The presence of

cleaned surface.

After the surface has been cleaned, reinforced resin-fiber parts

fine

immersion

of titanium, stainless steel, copper and

Preparation

specifications

continuous film of water indicates

(b)

or

of the processes that follow:

Alkaline

specification

All non-metallic surfaces shall be

(a) Do

one

blasting

subsequent electro-plating.

Pickled to Process

(d)

Vacuum

specifications

to Process

(c) Metal sprayed

(6)

specifications

AIRFRAME

pads (Item 699). Make

sure

lightly

to

are

that

no

abraded with

fibers

are

damaged.
(c)

After final
shall have
filler

cleaning
a

clean

(Item 411A)

with solvent

slightly

(Item 208)

and clean lint free cloths

matt appearance. To

mixed with activator

(Item

484

improve
or

(Item 621)

the surface

412A)

may be

the surface

minimum

of

quantity

applied, paragraph

4.H.

(method 6).
4.

Application of primer
A.

General
NOTE:

(1)

Make

sure

that the epoxy

great

care.

The first coat of

rough

Where

or one

all external surfaces of the

with orange

peel

airplane

effect will affect the final

is

applied with
livery paint.

should follow as soon as possible after the surface pre-treatment and


completion. The parts should be kept in clean and dry conditions.

primer

within 24 hours of its

(2)

primer coat on

surface

delay of 24 hours to 72 hours occurs, between the surface pre-treatment of


alloy parts and primer painting, then such parts shall be degreased to Process
specifications Alkaline cleaning, Degreasing of metallic materials or Liquid immersion
degreasing or refreshed with alocrom (APPLICATION OF ALOCROM 1200 (ALODINE 1200)).
an

inevitable

aluminum

(3)

(4)

If the

delay is greater than 72 hours refresh with


(ALODINE 1200)) or strip the pre-treatment and
Make

sure

that the

primer

base material is

Poor adhesion will result if it is deficient in

EFFECTIVIT~

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

alocrom

(APPLICATION

OF ALOCROM 1200

reprocess.

thoroughly
pigment.

mixed in its container before it is used.

20-1 0-3527
Page

204

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

The pot life of the materials

(5)

depends upon

the

Temperature ("C)

NOTE:

temperatures

Time

as

follows:

(hrs)

18 thru 21

32 thru 35

The pot life at the maximum

AIRFRAME

application temperature

of 30"0 will be between these

times.

NOTE:

(6)

Any material left, after the pot life

The mixed materials

are

to be stirred

has been exceeded, must be discarded.

immediately

before

filling

the spray gun container and may

then be used.

(7)

The

is to be

applied as a double-track coat at a minimum ambient temperature of 15"C


with a relative humidity of between 30% and 75% and allowed to dry for a minimum of two hours
before overcoating. When de-nibbing is required the primer is to be allowed to dry for four hours.

primer

Unimproved (that

(8)

is not filled

need two brush coats of

(9)

The initial

curing

will be achieved

by

by Tedlar) reinforced resin-fiber laminate surfaces


hours drying time between coats.

one

of the

may

following curing cycles:

at 18"C and below 75% relative

humidity

for 72 hours.

Kept

at 18"C and below 75% relative

humidity

for 24 hours. Then at 13oC and below 70%

Kept

covered

Kept

humidity for

relative

The

or

primer with four

at 15.5"C and below 75% relative

cure

humidity

process continues and adhesion of

curing

full

144 hours.

of the

primer

applied

has taken

place,

is

application

of certain cellulose

or

subsequent

it is therefore

within 2 to 48 hours of the

undercoat)

for 168 hours.

coat to the

important

application

acrylic finishing paints

may

primer

that the

of the

is

impaired

finishing

coat

when

(or

primer. The subsequent

require the primer to

be dried for 24

hours.

It is essential where further

markings that
(10)

such

Alternatively to
temperature

(11)

Make

sure

painting

facilitate

painting
is

is

complete within

early handling

not to exceed 70"C for 30

that all

areas

that

required,

are

e.g. emblems, identification and service

two weeks of the

application

of the

primer.

of the primed components, they may be force dried at a


minutes, provided a subsequent coat is not to be applied.

not to be

sprayed

are

correctly

masked with spare paper and

masking tape (Item 630)

EFFECTIVIPI:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-10-3527
Page

205

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

AIRFRAME

Mixing
(1)

Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

NOTE:

Failure to mix the base and the


adhesion and may prevent the

NOTE:

Make

only

sure

the

instructions.

mixing

catalyst at the proper ratio before


primer from curing properly.

manufacturers base and

same

use

catalyst materials

will result in poor

are

mixed

together.
C.

Spray application

Method 1

NOTE:

Normal

operating

of epoxy

primer

pre-treated

onto any

conditions necessary:-

15 thru

Temperature

metal surface

30"C, Relative Humidity 30%

minimum, 75% maximum.

(1)

Make

sure

that the correct pre-treatment has been done and:

If less than 24 hours have

(a)

elapsed since

the pre-treatment

was

applied, proceed

with

paragraph (3).
(b)

Where

an

aluminum

inevitable

alloy

Degreasing

(2)

or

parts then

with

1200

(ALODINE 1200))

more

and

cleaning

OF ALOCROM 1200

is greater than 72 hours refresh with alocrom


or

cleaning,

proceed with paragraph

(ALODINE 1200))

and

(APPLICATION

OF ALOCROM

strip the pre-treatment and reprocess.

than 24 hours have

cleaning, Degreasing

(2)

Liquid

Alkaline

specifications

immersion

(APPLICATION

elapsed

metals other than aluminum

with

or

to Process

paragraph (3).

delay

on

degrease

of metallic materials

If the

If

of 24 to 72 hours has occurred since the surface pre-treatment of

refresh with alocrom

proceed

(c)

delay

since cadmium

alloys, degrease

of metallic materials

or

to Process

Liquid

or

plating

phosphating (or alternatives)

specifications

immersion

Alkaline

and then

cleaning

proceed

paragraph (2).

If the part has been

with

degreased by swabbing carefully

painting, the part is to


before painting starts.

be allowed to stand for at least 30

Allow the part to reach

water condensate with a clean

dry

cloth

approved degreasing fluid before


minutes in the paint shop conditions
an

shop temperature and then

remove

all traces of

(Item 621).

(3)

Mix the epoxy primer paint (Items 466, 472,


thoroughly and fill the spray gun container.

(4)

Adjust

(5)

Spray

474

or

410A)

as

detailed in

paragraph

4.

A., stir

nozzle and flow valve to suit.


a

uniform coat of

primer taking

care

to

give

one

wet upon wet coat at

right angles

to each

other.

(6)

Allow to

dry for

minimum of 2 hours

or

if

de-nibbing

is

required

allow to

dry

for

minimum of 4

hours.

(7)

Do

visual check for

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

evenness

of the

coating.

20-1 0-3527
Page

206

Jun.03

Rayl~heon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

D.

NOTE:

application

Brush

Method 2

Normal

primer

of epoxy

operating conditions

to reinforced resin- fiber laminates

necessary:-

Temperature

15 thru

30"C, Relative Humidity 30%

minimum, 75% maximum.

part with

suitable cleaner

(1)

Wash the

(2)

Abrade the surface

(3)

Swab with clean cloths

(4)

to remove any left over release film.

lightly with 200-240 grade abrasive paper (Item 627) or fine grade nonwoven nylon abrasive pads (Item 699), make sure that no fibers are damaged. Use solvent
cleaner (Item 208) and clean cloths (Item 621) to remove any contamination.

Do

(Item 621)

paragraphs(l)

thru

(5)

Allowtodry.

(6)

Clean with solvent

(7)

Allow the part to


clean

and

dry

of clean water.

an

(4).

and clean lint free cloths

(Item 208)

regain shop temperature


(Item 621).

cloth

Mix the epoxy

plenty

by means of a water break free test. The presence of a


adequately cleaned surface. If water break occurs repeat

check for surface cleanliness

continuous film of water indicates

(8)

(Item 201)

and then

primer paint (Items 466, 472,

474

or

(Item 621)

remove

410A)

to remove dust.

all traces of water condensate with

as

detailed in

stir

paragraph 4.B.,

thoroughly.
(9)

Thoroughly

brush the

(10)

Allow to air

dry

more

646)

E.

primer

on

to the reinforced resin-fiber surface.

for between 4 and 48 hours, and then

than 48 hours

elapse lightly

moistened with water.

flat the surface with

Repeat paragraphs (5)

apply

grade
(9).

primer. If
garnet paper (Item

second brush coat of

320 abrasive

thru

minimum of 16 hours, and then very lightly flat the surface with
abrasive garnet paper (Item 646) moistened with water.
for

(11)

Allow to

(12)

Wash off all residue with water and allow the part to

(13)

Do

Method 3

NOTE:

dry

visual check for

evenness

Spray application

Normal

of

grade

320

dry.

coating.

of epoxy

primer

onto Tedlar covered

operating conditions necessary:- Temperature

15 thru

plastic

surfaces

30"C, Relative Humidity 30%

minimum, 75% maximum.


clean the part with cleaner solvent

(Item 208) and clean cloths (Item 621).

(1)

Carefully

(2)

Allow the surface to

(3)

Mix the epoxy primer paint (Items 466, 472, 474


thoroughly and fill the spray gun container.

(4)

Adjust

dry
or

410A)

as

detailed in

paragraph 4.B.,

stir

the nozzle and flow valve to suit.

EFFECTIVIPI:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-10-3527
Page

207

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(5)

(6)

Apply

(7)

Allow to

grade

F.

shop temperature. Spray


right angles to each other.

Allow the part to reach


wet upon wet coat at

minimum of 4 hours and then, if necessary, very

dry for a

abrasive garnet paper

(Item 646)

(9)

Do

visual check for

Touch

during assembly

of the

to

give

one

other

alloy parts (Repair the primer paint


operations)
with solvent cleaner

Lightly flat the surrounding primer with 360


the edge, but do not remove metal from the

area

(Item 621)

clean cloth

the surface with 320

coating.

(2)

lightly flat

for aluminum

up

or

evenness

Degrease the affected

Wipe

care

dry.

(1)

(3)

primer taking

moistened with water.

Wash off all residue and allow the part to

Method 4

uniform coat of

further thin spray coat 2 hours after the first.

(8)

AIRFRAME

400

(Item 201)
grade

in local

and clean cloths

abrasive paper

areas

damaged

(Item 621).

(Item 627), feathering

in

bare surface.

moistened with solvent cleaner

(Item 208)

to remove any

contamination.

(4)

4. C.

appropriate part by paragraph


(method 2, paragraph (8) onwards).

convenient to the

paragraph
G.

410A) brush or spray, as


(method 1, paragraph (3) onwards) or

Wash, dry and paint with epoxy primer (Items 466, 472, 474

Method 5
NOTE:

4.D.

Application

Normal

of

primer

to tubular

operating conditions

or

parts

necessary:-

Temperature

15 thru

300C, Relative Humidity 30%

minimum, 75% maximum.


the part

detailed in

(1)

Prepare

(2)

Plug

(3)

Allow the part to reach

(4)

Mix the epoxy

one

Plug

paragraph

4. C.

(method 1, paragraphs (1)

and

(2)).

end of part.

thoroughly
(5)

as

shop temperature.

primer paint (Items 466, 472,


just over half full.

474

or

410A)

as

detailed in

paragraph 4.B.,

stir

and fill the part

the other end of part and invert the part several times to

part with epoxy

plug

and drain the

Remove

(7)

Removethe

(8)

Carefully using

(9)

Allowtodryfortwo

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

cover

the inside of the

primer.

(6)

one

completely

paint

into

suitable container.

otherplug.
a

brush touch in untreated

plug

contact area at tube ends with epoxy

primer.

hours.

20-10-3527
Page

208

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

H.

Application

Method 6

(1)
(2)

Prepare the part


If necessary to
brush

or

of filler and

as

detailed in

emphasis

any

spray and allowed to

primer

onto reinforced resin-fiber

paragraph

pinholes,
dry for

AIRFRAME

4.D.

parts

(method 2, paragraphs (1)

single light

coat of

primer

can

thru

be

(7)).

applied by

either

4 hours.

(3)

Mix the filler in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions.

(4)

Apply the filler to the surface with a suitable wooden/plastic spatula (Item 645) or brush (Item
676) to force the filler into any surface imperfections and holes and to remove any surplus from
the surface.

(5)

When

surface residue

dry,

Wipe with

(7)

Allow the part to

(8)

5.

tack cloths to

(6)

clean

can

be

wiped from

the surface

using

clean cloth moistened with

(Item 208).

cleaner solvent

remove

dust before the

regain shop temperature and


dry cloth (Item 621).

Apply the primer as detailed in paragraph


4.E. (method 3, paragraph (3) onwards).

4.D.

primer

then

is

applied.

remove

all traces of water condensate with

(method 2, paragraph (8) onwards)

or

Paragraph

Inspection/check
A.

Procedure
is

applied

(1)

Make

sure

that before any

(2)

Make

sure

that the finished parts have

coating
(3)

The

which has been

optimum

(4)

Make

applied

an

the initial

sound film of

pre-treatment finish has been applied.

satisfactory

appearance and

evenness

of

to the necessary areas.

primer coating should


approved thickness meter.

thickness of

measured with
NOTE:

primer

be 13 to 30 microns

(0.0005

to

0.0012in.)

when

dry weight of the primer is approximately 25-34 g/sq. m. (0. 75-1.00 oz./sq.yd.)
covering capacity is approximately 17 sq.m./l (90 sq.yd/gal).
The

sure

that, after painting,

EFFECTIVIT~

125 Series 1 -1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

no

placards

have been covered with

paint.

20-1 0-3527
Page

209

Jun.03

RayZheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE AND PERMEABLE FINISH TO AIRPLANE


INTERNAL SURFACES
1.

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675),
(ITEM 634) ON

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND CONDUCTIVE COATINGS MAKE SURE
THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE

FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.
WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

WHEN SPRAYING IS IN PROGRESS THE BREATHING APPARATUS WORN BY THE

OPERATORS IS TO BE OF THE CONTINUOUS FLOW, OR DEMAND, VALVE PATTERN,


COMPRESSED AIR TYPE.

WARNING:

SUPERVISORS OF THE SPRAYING PROCESS MUST WEAR SUITABLE RESPIRATORS,


E.G. SIEBE GORMAN FILTASAFE WITH FC6 CARTRIDGES.

WARNING:

WHEN SPRAYING IS IN PROGRESS, THE SPRAYING AREA IS TO BE EVACUATED BY


ALL PERSONNEL NOT DIRECTLY INVOLVED IN THE OPERATION UNTIL TWO HOURS
AFTER SPRAYING HAS CEASED.

WARNING: THE MATERIALS ARE TOXIC. DISPOSE OF WASTE SAFELY, NOT INTO DRAINS.

WARNING:

OBEY ALL RELEVANT NATIONAL AND LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

WARNING:

CLEANER SOLVENTS HAVE LOW FLASH POINTS. THESE ARE FLAMMABLE

MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3528
Page

201

Jun.02

Ral~heon Aircraft
125IHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

MAKE SURE THAT CLEANING FLUIDS DO NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH ACRYLIC

CAUTION:

SURFACES.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT DRAINAGE HOLES ARE NOT OBSTRUCTED.

CAUTION:

DO NOT ALLOW ANY PAINT, SPRAY OR DRIFT, TO CONTAMINATE DIELECTRIC

FAIRINGS AND PANELS; DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND FAULTY SIGNALS MAY


RESULT.
DO NOT TOUCH THE SURFACE TO BE PAINTED AFTER IT HAS BEEN DEGREASED

CAUTION:

OR FLATTED.
A.

Introduction
This maintenance practice describes the procedure and lists the approved materials which may be
applied for the internal protection of aircraft details and assemblies that require a flexible and
permeable finish. The areas or parts to which the finish is applied and the required color will be
specified by the manufacturer. Where practical the same manufacturers material is to be used for the
primer coat, the ground coat, (where applicable) and the finishing coat.
This maintenance

practice covers the application of the finish to be applied by conventional air spray,
airless spray or airless electrostatic spray. Where it is necessary to apply a finish but spray application
is not practicable, brush application may be used subject to the resultant finish meeting the required
standard.

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Paint activator

As

required

Paint base

As

required

Paint thinners

As

required

Cleaner

emulsion

245

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaning

solution

256

(Chapter 20-95-201)

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Safety glasses

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective clothes

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Spray equipment

Local

supply

Tack rags

Local

supply

Abrasive paper

360

or

400)

cream

Protective

NOTE:

(grade 320,

gloves

Do all painting in

surface

good conditions in

reasonably dust free atmosphere.

preparation, paint mixing and application

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

The

procedures for

must be observed.

20-1 0-3528
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

2.

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

Preparation
A.

B.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

technical data sheets for storage instructions

of Surfaces

Procedure

(1)

Surfaces

(2)

Furtheraction

Paint

(1)

requiring

Whether the

(b)

Whether

flatting

is not

flatting

paint

is

is

being applied before

or

If

flatting

is

required

application

of

required, lightly wet-flat

(3)

Clean the surface with water and

(4)

Apply

NOTE:

paint finish

When the
the

NOTE:

with

epoxide primer.

application

of the

primer.

as

primer

and the surfaces have been

detailed

kept

are

clean and

dry,

the

only preparation

used for this purpose make

the surface after the

after four hours, with abrasive paper

the

painted

after 48 hours of the

that is necessary is the removal of dust. If tack rags


grade is compatible with the finish.

(2)

to be

are

required.

within 48 hours of the

application

finish

permeable

isdependenton:

(a)

If

flexible and

primer

has

sure

that the

adequately dried, normally

(Item 627).

dry.
(paragraph 4).

paint is applied by spray, within

the

period of two

to 48 hours of the

application

of

primer.

When the

paint is applied by brush,

within the period four to 48 hours of the

application

of the

primer.
C.

Paint

(1)

application

after 48 hours of the

Clean the surface

area

with emulsion cleaner

volume, 1 part concentrate to 9

(2)

For

application

parts

of water.

of the

primer.

(Item 245)
Apply the

diluted with water in the ratio


cleaner

by

spray, brush

or

by

swab.

airplanes which may have been contaminated with hydraulic fluid (Item 107), clean the
areas with undiluted cleaning solution (Item 256) applied by br~sh or swab.

affected

(3)

Clean the surface

NOTE:

area

with water and

Paragraphs 2.C.(1) (2)

and

(3)

(4)

Lightly wet-flat the surface

(5)

Clean the surface with water and

(6)

Apply a very
or

thin coat of

dry.

may be omitted if surface is not contaminated.

with abrasive paper

(Item 627).

dry.

epoxide primer to

the

area.

Make

sure

to cover any

exposed

bare metal

fastener heads.

EFFECTIVIN:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3528
Page 203
Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(7)

(8)

If

flatting, or denibbing
detailed (paragraph 4)
epoxide primer.
If

is

flatting

of the second coat of

within the

period

required, lightly wet-flat

(10)

4.

Clean the surface with water and

Apply the surface finish


with epoxide primer.

Application
NOTE:

required, apply

the

paint

finish

as

of two to 48 hours of reactivation of the surface with

has

primer

adequately dried, normally

(Item 627).

dry.

detailed

(paragraph 4)

within 48 hours of reactivation of the surface

of surface finish

The conditions

30"C)
A.

as

is not

the surface after the

after four hours, with abrasive paper

(9)

primer

AIRFRAME

required for painting should be a temperature

Humidity of between

and a Relative

of between 59 and 86"F (15 and

30% and 75%.

Mixing
(1)

Refer to

technical data sheets for the

Manufacturers/Supplies

instructions and pot life of

mixing

the materials.
B.

Methodl
NOTE:

Spray application

of the surface finish within two to 48 hours of the

application

of epoxide

primer.
the part

(1)

Prepare

(2)

Mask the

adjacent

painted (paragraph 3.),

to be

or area

areas

that

are

not to be

sprayed

and let it reach

with

shop temperature.

masking tape (Item 630)

and spare

paper.

(3)

paint thoroughly

Stir the mixed

(4) Adjust nozzle

and flow valve

(5)

Spray the part

(6)

Allow to

(7)

Do

dry

in

or

clean

suitably.

taking

areas,

and fill the spray gun container.

care

to

give

"C)

64 to 70 4

or

90"F

or

1009

(38"C)

for 3 hours.

or

140"F

(60"C)

for 30 minutes.

(18

to 21

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

right angles

to each other.

for 6 hours.

for 4 hours.

visual check to make

those necessary

wet upon wet coat at

atmosphere:

At

(32"C)

one

sure

that

sound

!ilm of satisfactory appearance has been applied

to

areas.

20-1 0-3528
Page

204

Jun.02

Raytheon

Aircraft

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

C.

AIRFRAME

Method2

NOTE:

of the surface finish 48 hours

Spray application

or more

after the

application

of epoxide

primer.
and let it reach

(1)

Prepare the part

(2)

Mask the

(3)

Apply a thin (refresher) coat of the same epoxide primer


application and allow to dry for two hours.

(4)

areas

to be

or area

that

are

painted (paragraph 3.),

not to be

painted

Apply the surface finish in accordance


application of the epoxide primer.

with

shop temperature.

masking tape (Item 630)

with Method 1.

as

used in the

Complete

the

and spare paper.

original primer

painting

within 48 hours of

the
D.

Method3

NOTE:

Brush

of the surface finish within 24 to 48 hours after the

application

application

of epoxide

primer,
(1)

Prepare

(2)

Mask the

(3)

Stir the mixed

(4)

Apply the paint within

(5)

Allow to

(6)

Do

the

part

areas

dry

in

that

are

painted (paragraph 3.),

not to be

painted

48 hours of

shop temperature.

masking tape (Item 630)

priming, apply by brush,

and spare paper.

one

full coat of the

paint

finish.

clean atmosphere:

At

64 to 70"F

(18

or

90"F

for 4 hours

or

1009

(38"C)

for 3 hours

or

1409

(60"C)

for 30 minutes

with

and let it reach

paint thoroughly.

(32")

to 21

visual check to make

those necessary
E.

to be

or area

"C) for

sure

that

6 hours

sound film of

satisfactory appearance

has been

applied

to

areas.

Method4

NOTE:

Brush

application

of the surface finish 48 hours

after the

or more

application

of epoxide

primer.

Prepare the part

(2)

Mask the

(3)

Apply a thin (refresher) coat of the same epoxide primer


application and allow to dry for two hours.

areas

EFFEGTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

or area

that

are

to be

painted (paragraph 3.), and

(1)

not to be

painted

with

let it reach

shop temperature.

masking tape (Item 630)


as

used in the

and spare paper.

original primer

20-1 0-3528
Page

205

Jun.OP

Ral~heon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(4)

5.

delay, proceed
epoxide primer.

Without

with Method 1 and

complete

within 48 hours of the

application

of the

Inspection
A.

Procedure

(1)

The finished parts


been

(2)

applied

or

components must have

sound film of

satisfactory appearance

which has

to the necessary areas.

The thickness of

coating when measured with

an

approved

thickness meter shall be

approximately:
43-50 microns

(0.0015

to 0.002

in.)

for

primer/finish

68-75 microns

(0.0025

to 0.003

in.)

for

primer/groundcoat/finish

68-75 microns

(0.0025 to

in.)

for

primer/finish/further

93-100

(3)

microns(0.0035

0.003

to 0.004

in.)

for

schemes
schemes.
finish

primer/groundcoat/finish/

further finish.

Should any of the coats in the system be unacceptable the unsatisfactory coat or coats shall be
removed by wet and dry abrasion as far as possible back to the next satisfactory coat and the

system repainted.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3528
Page

206

Jun.02

Ral~heon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE FltUISHING ENAMEL FOR THE

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

OVERCOATING OF SEALANTS
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL


AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING


SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675),
(ITEM 634) ON

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE SOLVENT CLEANER

(ITEM 290)

ON POLYURETHANE COATINGS

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU
BREATHE EXCESSIVE

FUMES, REST IN

A WARM AREA WITH SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW.

GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF ANY IRRITATION
CONTINUES.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES,

OCCASIONALLY LIFT THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

CAUTION:

EFFICIENT SEALING CAN ONLY BE GOT BY STRICT ATTENTION TO CLEANLINESS


AND TO THE SEQUENCE OF DRYING AND CURING TIME.

A.

Introduction

procedure for the application of a polyurethane coating to


overcoat fillet sealants which have been previously protected with a paint treatment. This is to increase
the sealants resistance to phosphate-ester hydraulic fluid. The polyurethane coating color is matched
by the use of two different colored coatings (gray or yellow).
This maintenance

B.

practice

covers

the

EquipmentlMaterials

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

290

Polyurethane, coating

415A

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Polyurethane, coating

416A

(Chapter 20-95-201)

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(Chapter 20-95-201)

20-1 0-3534
Page

201

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face

Storage
(1)

3.

shield

clothing

Protective

2.

AIRFRAME

Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

Thoroughly clean the area to be overcoated to remove all swarf and


paying particular attention to the joints and corners in the structure.

(2)

Thoroughly wipe over the entire area to be treated using a clean white lint free cloth (Item 621)
dampened with solvent cleaner (Item 290). Pay particular attention to all seams, joints and
corners. Frequently change the cloth and wipe until it shows no traces of contaminates or
hydraulic fluid.

(3)

Let all of the solvent evaporate before the

(4)

Do

check for any extensive

(a) Chapter 20,

polyurethane coating

paint damage. If any damage

is

other

assembly

debris

applied.

is found refer to the

applicable topic:

APPLICATION OF COLD CURING EPOXY PRIMER TO INTERNAL AND

EXTERNAL SURFACES.

(b) Chapter 20,

APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE AND PERMEABLE FINISH TO AIRPLANE

INTERNAL SURFACES.

4.

Mixing
(1)

Ref er to the Manuf actu rers/Suppliers data sheets for the


the

5.

mixing

instructions and the pot I if e of

polyurethane coatings.

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

Stir the

(2)

Apply

polyurethane coatings (Item

one

thick

layer of

the

415A

or

416A) thoroughly

polyurethane coating (Item


joints and corners.

415A

or

before

application.

416A) by

brush

(Item 676), work

the material into all the seams,

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3534
Page

202

Jun.03

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

Spread the polyurethane coating to cover all the exposed sealant and to overlap the sealant
edges by approximately one inch (25 mm), unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.

Though

NOTE:

the

preferred method of application

equipment capable
(25 mm)
(4)

(5)

6.

of applying the

is

by brush, spraying

polyurethane coating

in

may be used with

spray band of

one

inch

wide.

polyurethane coating may be used to "touch-up" rivets and bolts and to repair minor
damage in the areas being treated, provided that the surface preparation in paragraph 3.
been carried out, and that the primer coat is undamaged or has been repaired.

The

In

areas

likely to

come

into contact with

over

the treated surfaces. This is to be

time

(4

to 16

has

phosphate-ester hydraulic fluid, apply a thin second coat


applied between the initial drying time and the fully cured

hours).
dry for

16 hours.

(6)

Allow the

(7)

Only apply the polyurethane coating within


relative humidity of not more than 75

polyurethane coating

to

temperature range of 59-77"F (15-25"C) and

Curing
(1)

Let the

polyurethane coating

cure

days before there is any possibility


phosphate-ester hydraulic fluid.

for at least

contamination of the treated surface with

7.

AIRFRAME

seven

of

Inspection/Check
A.

Procedure

(1)

(2)

Make

sure

layer

of the

polyurethane coating is continuous. Where doubt exists apply one


polyurethane coating over any area of suspected flaws in the coating.

that the

further

inspection of the polyurethane coating within the time interval to let any additional
polyurethane coating be applied within four to sixteen hours of the application of the previous
polyurethane coating.
Do the

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3534
Page

203

Jun.03

Rayeheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

APPLICATION OF ANTISTATIC PAINT TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS


OTHER THAN CARBON FIBER
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKESURE THAT THE WARNING


AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING


SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675),
(ITEM 634) ON

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND CONDUCTIVE COATINGS MAKE SURE
THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE

FUMES, REST IN
WARNING:

A WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENN OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT

EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE

MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

WHEN SPRAYING IS IN PROGRESS THE BREATHING APPARATUS WORN BY THE


OPERATORS IS TO BE OF THE CONTINUOUS FLOW, OR DEMAND, VALVE PATTERN,
COMPRESSED AIR TYPE.

WARNING:

SUPERVISORS OF THE SPRAYING PROCESS MUST WEAR SUITABLE RESPIRATORS,


E.G. SIEBE GORMAN FILTASAFE WITH FC6 CARTRIDGES.

WARNING:

WHEN SPRAYING IS IN

PROGRESS, THE SPRAYING AREA IS TO BE EVACUATED BY

ALL PERSONNEL NOT DIRECTLY INVOLVED IN THE OPERATION UNTIL TWO HOURS
AFTER SPRAYING HAS CEASED.

WARNING: THE MATERIALS ARE TOXIC. DISPOSE OF WASTE SAFELY, NOT INTO DRAINS.

WARNING:

OBEY ALL RELEVANT NATIONAL AND LOCAL SAFEN REGULATIONS.

WARNING:

CLEANER SOLVENTS HAVE LOW FLASH POINTS. THESE ARE FLAMMABLE


MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY REGULATIONS.

EFFECTIVIN:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3537
Page 201
Jun.02

RPylheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

CAUTION:

AIRFRAME

MAKE SURE THAT CLEANING FLUIDS DO NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH ACRYLIC
SURFACES.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT DRAINAGE HOLES ARE NOT OBSTRUCTED.

CAUTION:

DO NOT ALLOW ANY PAINT, SPRAY OR DRIFT, TO CONTAMINATE DIELECTRIC


FAIRINGS AND PANELS; DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND FAULTY SIGNALS MAY

RESULT.
CAUTION:

BEFORE CONDUCTIVE COATING SPRAY IS APPLIED TO A SURFACE, MAKE SURE


THAT THE MATERIAL AND SURFACE ARE AT THE SAME TEMPERATURE AS THE
LOCAL ENVIRONMENT.

CAUTION:

DO NOT TOUCH THE SURFACE TO BE PAINTED AFTER IT HAS BEEN DEGREASED


OR FLATTED.

A.

Introduction

practices gives the materials and methods for the application of antistatic paint
(conductive coating) to composite materials, but excluding carbon fiber, to prevent the accumulation
static charge.

This maintenance

B.

EquiPmentand

materials

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner solvent

208

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Coating, conductive

493

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper

632

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper

646

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Gloves

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Safety glasses

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective clothes

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

500V

Local

Megger

supply

(Figure 201)

Special probe
2,

of

Storage
(1)

Refer to the

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for storage and shelf life details.

20-1 0-3537
Page

202

Jun.Oe

aayltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3.

AIRFRAME

Application
A.

Surface

(1)

preparation

Use

degrease

Use abrasive paper

(3)

Use

(4)

Do

(Item 621)

coating

is to be

201

or

208)

to

applied.

to abrade the surface to

give

moistened with solvent cleaner

matt appearance.

(Items

201

or

208)

to

all swarf and dust from the surface.

check of the surface cleanliness

occurs

B.

(Item 646, grade 320)

clean lint free cloth

remove

(Items

moistened with solvent cleaner

and clean the surface to which the

(2)

(Item 621)

clean lint free cloth

repeat paragraph 3. (1)

Procedure Method 1, PR-934

to

(3)

by

means

until

of the water break free test. If water break

water break free surface is obtained.

(Item 493)

DO NOT OPEN THE CONTAINERS IN WHICH THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE

CAUTION:

CONDUCTIVE COATING ARE SUPPLIED UNTIL READY TO USE.

(1)

Mix the conductive

coating (Item 493)

in the

proportions specified

in Table i,

as

follows:

Table I
Material

mixing proportions
Proportion, parts by weight

Material

NOTE:

Kits

are

Part A

35

Part B

94

Part C

40

Part D

supplied

with the individual parts in the above

thoroughly.

(a)

Pour part C into part D and mix

(b)

Pour the mixture of part C and D into part B and mix

(c)

Mix

thoroughly

for

thoroughly

before

adding part A.

right up to the time of pouring into the spray


is mixed at the same time, it is not to be left

minimum of 10 minutes,

gun. If the material for further application


unstirred for longer than 5 minutes.
CAUTION:

proportions.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO FILL OR COVER PIN HOLES OR OTHER BLEMISHES BY

APPLYING MULTIPLE COATS.


CAUTION:

(2)

Apply

NOTE:

DO NOT USE THE MIXTURE AFTER THE POT LIFE OF 4 HOURS HAS EXPIRED.
a

uniform very thin double track spray coat to the

Whilst spraying, blow air back down the


to

agitate

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

the

specified

paint feed tube

area.

into the container every 20 seconds

paint.

20-1 0-3537
Page

203

Jun.02

Raltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

Leave the conductive

conductivity
(4)
C.

coating

(18

to 25

OC)

for 48 hours before

test is done.

Do the necessary test

procedure, paragraph

Mix the two parts

4.

(Item 493)

Procedure Method 2, 528)(306

(1)

to cure at 65 to 77 "F

AIRFRAME

(528)(306

and

910)(464) of the

conductive

coating (Item 493)

in

equal parts by

volume.

(2)

Let the mixed material stand for

(4)

Apply

4.

Test
A.

uniform

of spray to minimum

layer

Leave the conductive

either 7

(5)

minimum of 30 minutes.

DO NOT USE THE MIXTURE AFTER THE POT LIFE OF 4 HOURS HAS EXPIRED.

CAUTION:

(3)

days

at 77 "F

dry

film thickness of 0.0008

0.0002 in.

~t

coating to cure at 77 "F (25 "C) for one hour (before handling), followed by
(25 "C) or 12 hours at 140 "F (60 "C) to get the full cure.

Do the necessary test

procedure, paragraph

4.

procedure

Canopy(FlgurePO1)

ACTION

(1)

RESULT

Connect

one

terminal of

to both tails of the

(Figure 20 i).
to

(2)

(4)

500V megger

special probe

Connect the other terminal

normal test connector.

Place the test connector in firm contact

with the zinc canopy

(3)

edge.

Firmly press the special probe in contact


with the conductive coating
Repeat operation (3)
positions
NOTE:

Resistance value not to exceed 20

megohms.

Resistance value not to exceed 20

megohms.

at a number of

If the resistance at any point in

operation (3)

abrade the conductive

and repeat the test.

coating

primer is just showing through;


20

EFFECTIVIPI:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800XP

megohms

the

component

or

(4)

exceeds 20

megohms, lightly

Abrading may continue

until the

if the resistance value continues to exceed

is to be

rejected and reprocessed

20-1 0-3537
Page

204

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

3in.

(25.4mm)r
I.Oin.

r~A

-I

liemm)

0.625in.

(16 mm)

DIA
0.50 in.

-1,

(12.7m~)
0.75

in.(19 mm)

DIA

DRILL

SLOT FOR CABLE

No. 28

,~E--

0.375 in.

(9.5 mm)
1.3 in.

OUTLET TO GRIP

SECTION

CABLES FIRMLY

A-A

(25.4 mm)

6-32 UNC

SCREW

(4)

0.125 in.

(3.2 mm)
30.5mm

-I

_COVER

6-32 UNC

STUD

(2)
THREAD
6-32 UNC

in

5.1)m

(38

O.BP5 in

n~

0.25 in.

(6.35 mm)

DEEP

(16mm)
DIA

ROD

(2)

9
0.25 in.

CONTACT
PAD

(2)

/5\

0.5 in

(6.35 mm)

(12.7 mm) DIA

NOTES:
1.

METHODS OF MANUFACTURE MAY BE CHANGED


TO PERMIT USE OF METHODS AND MATERIALS AVAILABLE

2. DO NOT MIX PARTS MANUFACTURED IN INCHES

MATERIALS:

AND MILLEMETERS

THESE DIMENSIONS AND MATERIALS ARE IMPORTANT

/3\ AND

MUST NOT BE CHANGED

COVER

LFS

BODY

LFS

CONTACT

FINE STEEL WOOL

n.

PADS

A TO MAKE A GOOD ELECTRICAL CONTACT PADS ARE TO

4\

BE A TIGHT FIT IN THE ENDS OF THE RODS

CABLES

UNIVIN 16

CABLE

AMP TAGS

ENDS

CONTACT PADS MUST NOT SIGNIFICANTLY BULGE

ROD

BRASS

~S

NUTS

BRASS
BRASS
M7016

HA008998258AA

Special probe
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-3537
Page

205

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

PROBE
TEST POINTS

CONNECTOR
TEST POINT

REINFORCING

STRAP(2 PLACES)

TEST POINT
LINE MID WAY
BETWEEN
CONDUCTOR
STRIPS

CONDUCTOR

STRIP(6 PLACES)
SEGMENT
(G PLACES)
M12~04

Radome

earth bond return test

Figure 201
B.

Radome(FigurePO1 andfigure202)

ACTION

(1)

RESULT

Connect the terminals of


to the tails of the

500V megger

special probe

(Figure 201).
(2) Apply the probe with firm consistent
pressure at regular intervals around the
scuffed area of the conductive coating
which will be in contact with the

reinforcing strap
(3)

Resistance value not to exceed 150 kilohm.

At the center of each segment of the


radome as marked by the lightning

strips, place

the test lead in firm contact

with the abraded

area

of the conductive

which will be in contact with the

coating
reinforcing strap.
EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker800,1000,800X0

20-1 0-3537
Page

206

Jun.02

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

RESULT

ACTION

(4)

AIRFRAME

Placethetestconnectoratthecenterof

reinforcing strap segment between


adjacent conductor strips. Apply the
probe with firm consistent pressure at
three equally spaced points along the
line equidistant between the conductor
strips
a

Resistance at each
20

(5)

Repeat operation (4j for each of


other 5 segments

Resistance at each

If the resistance at any point in


maximum value,

lightly

may continue until the


to be excessive the

C.

not to exceed

point

not to exceed

the
20

NOTE:

point

megohms.

megohms.

operation (2), (4)

abrade the conductive

or

(5)

coating

primer is just showing through;

component is

to be

is

more

than the

and do the test

specified

again. Abrading

if the resistance value continues

rejected.

Closeup
(1)

Make

sure

that the work

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

area

is clean and clear of tools and miscellaneous

equipment.

20-1 0-3537
Page

207

Jun.02

Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

BONDING SILICONE RUBBERS


1.

AIRFRAME

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING;

SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

(ITEM 682),

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675),
(ITEM 634) ON

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND SILICONE ADHESIVES MAKE SURE

THERE IS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES,
REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION

PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15

MINUTES, HOLDING

THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

CAUTION:

WHEN SILICONE ADHESIVES ARE CURING THEY GIVE OFF ACETIC ACID VAPORS.
KEEP IN AN AREA WITH SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW UNTIL THE ADHESIVE IS CURED.

A.

Introduction

glass and
many plastic surfaces. The adhesive is available as either a two part silicone mix adhesive (Item 341)
which has a light straw translucent color with impact characteristics which is useful for bonding larger
items, or a as a one part ready to use silicone adhesive (Items 371(a),(b),(c)) which can be used direct
from the tube. They are useful for the bonding of smaller items. The silicone adhesives cure on
This maintenance

practice

covers

exposure to air moisture and

bonding procedure

for silicone rubber to itself, metal,

withstand extremes of temperature in the range of -103"F to +482"F


hydraulic fluids and kerosene for extended periods. The

will not withstand

+250"C). They
(-75"C
length of cure time depends
to

B.

can

the

on

the amount of moisture in the air and the thickness of material.

Equipment/Materials

EquipmentlMaterial
Isopropyl

alcohol

Degreasing agent

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

ParVltem No.
206

(Chapter 20-95-201)

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

20-1 0-4005
Page

201

Jun.02

Ral~heon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

ParVltem No.

Equipment/Material
Silicone adhesive

(2 part mix)

341

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Silicone adhesive

(1 part cold cure)

371

(a) (Chapter 20-95-301)

Silicone adhesive

(1 part

cold

cure)

371

(b) (Chapter 20-95-301)

Silicone adhesive

(1 part

cold

cure)

371

(c) (Chapter 20-95-301)

401A

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Spatula
Protective

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

shield

clothing

Clamps

Local

supply

Stainless steel wirebrush

Local

supply

NOTE:

Jigs

clamps

or

curing.
NOTE:

It is

If heat is

required to retain

the bonded silicone

(Item

341

or

371)

place while

in

it is

only necessary to provide light pressure.

oven

components

is

accelerate the

required

must not be

to

give

curing

of the silicone adhesive

steady temperature of212

subjected to

this

(Item

9" F:

34 1),

(100

5"

suitable air

C). Reduxed

higher temperature.

Storage
(1)

3.

are

required to

circulating

2.

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Primer, silicone adhesive

Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure for silicone rubber

(1)

Dampen

clean cloth

(Item 621)

with

Isopropyl

alcohol

(Item 206)

and

wipe

the surface of the

silicone rubber to be bonded.

a.

abrade the silicone rubber surface to be bonded with

(2)

Uniformly

(3)

Remove the abraded debris with

clean

dry cloth

and

stainless steel wirebrush.

repeat paragraph 3.A.(1).

Procedure formetal

(1)

Dampen a clean cloth with de-greasing agent (Item 230) and clean the
bonded removing all traces of grease and contamination.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

metal surface to be

20-1 0-4005
Page

202

Jun.02

Ray~heon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

The surface to be bonded must have its

applied unless documented by the

be

(2)

C,

treatment

applied but no paint finish

must

manufacturer.
with

Apply a thin layer of primer (Item 401A) to the metal surface


approximately 30 minutes for the primer to dry.

Procedure for

(1)

protective

soft brush

(Item 676).

Allow

perspex/glass

The surfaces of

Perspex and glass parts to be bonded


(50" C) and rinsed with warm water.

must be washed with

a warm

detergent

solution at 122" F

(2)

Make
done

4.

all surfaces

as soon as

are

quite dry before application

of the silicone adhesive which must be

this condition has been obtained.

Mixing
(1)

5.

sure

Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

mixing

instructions.

Application
A.

Procedure for silicone adhesive

(1)

(two part)

Leave the mixed silicone adhesive

NOTE:

The

days
The

at

room

setting

mating

one

hour.

when in the joint it will


an

extra

setting

9" F:

(100

cure

in 48 to

time of 3 to 4

temperature.

time

can

be shortened

for 12 hours at 212

by curing

subject

to the

surfaces

by

brush

(Item 676)

or

50

C).

higher temperature.

(0.254 to 0.381 mm.)


spatula (Item 645).

A uniform film of silicone adhesive 0.010 to 0.015 in.

both

(3)

approximately

temperature. A stronger bond will result from

Reduxed components must not be

(2)

to stand for

pot life of the mixture is approximately 4 hours, and

72 hours at room

NOTE:

(Item 341)

The solvent must be allowed to evaporate for 30 minutes,

or

thick is

applied

to

until the silicone adhesive loses its

tackiness, before the joint is made.

(4)

mating surfaces together with sufficient pressure to cause the silicone adhesive to
exude slightly from around the joint and a fillet is formed around the edges. Hold the joint under
light pressure for at least the first hour of curing at room temperature.

(5)

Final

(6)

joint is to be cured
operation is complete. It

Press the

joint thickness

If the

must be 0.010 to 0.020 in.


at

is

(0.254

to 0.508

mm.).

higher temperature the clamp should remain in place until the


essential the joint is not disturbed until the silicone adhesive is fully
a

cured.
B.

Procedure for silicone

(1)

adhesive(l part, cold cure)

(Item 371 (a), (b) or (c)) is applied direct from


joint closed within a short time of application.

The adhesive epoxy

surfaces and the

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

the tube to the

prepared

20-1 0-4005
Page

203

Jun.02

Ry~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

strength is achieved with a joint thickness of 0.020 It 0.005


fillings, thickness up to 0.125 in. (3.175 mm.) may be used.

Maximum

for gap

(3)

AIRFRAME

in.

(0.508

0.127

mm.)

but

joint can be handled in approximately 24


fully cured until 72 hours after the joint has

The silicone adhesive is cold cured and the bonded


hours at

room

temperature although

it will not be

been closed.

(4)

A uniform film of silicone adhesive about 0.010 in.

(0.254 mm.)

thick must be

applied

to both

are then pressed together with sufficient pressure to cause the silicone
slightly from around the joint and a fillet is formed around the edges. Hold the
joint under light pressure for at least the first hour of curing at room temperature.

mating

surfaces which

adhesive to exude

(5)

If the

joint is to be cured
operation is complete. It

at a

higher temperature the clamp should remain in place until


joint is not disturbed until the silicone adhesive

is essential the

the
is

fully

cured.

6.

Inspection/ check
A.

Procedure

(1)

The

hand

stressed

completed joint must be inspected for defects. Where the cured joints cannot be
a check by finger contact must be made to make sure the silicone adhesive
from between the joint faces for the entire joint length and there are no voids.

exudes

EFFECTIVIN:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4005
Page

204

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

BONDING RUBBER AND P.T.F.E. fO PERSPEX OR METAL


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING

AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE SEALING COMPOUND. PUT

(ITEM 682), THIS INCLUDES GLOVES (ITEM 675),


(ITEM 679) AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM (ITEM 634) ON

ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

SAFETY GLASSES

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS MAKE SURE THERE rS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW
IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A
SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR

AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance practice

gives the procedure to bond P.T.F.E. (Polytetrafluoroethylene)


Perspex crazing has been considered when making the

to perspex or metal surfaces.

bonding
a

two

adhesive and for this

adhesive with

low solvent content is used. It is available

part mix in kit form and is colored brown when mixed. The faces

rubber manufactured items


make

reason an

NOTE:

good

must be etched before their

as

to be bonded on PTFE and

assembly,

otherwise it is difficult to

bond.

The adhesive in this maintenance


resists

NOTE:

require

and rubber

choice of

Skydrol

Silicone and
cases

practice

will withstand Kerosene, and to

lesser

degree

and other hydraulic fluids.

Nylon

cannot be bonded with this adhesive and are to be treated as

for Perspex and any other materials. Refer to

Chapter 20, BONDING

special

OF SILICONE

RUBBERS for further details.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4007
Page

201

Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
I25/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES
8.

Equipment/Materials

Equipment/Material

ParVltem No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

Detergent cleaner

217(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Fabric

Wipe

287

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Sealing compound

314

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Tape

620(b) (Chapter 20-95-601)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Spatula
Safety glasses/face
Protective

2.

shield

clothing

(Chapter

20-95-201

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Preparation
A.

Procedure

NOTE:

The surface of PTFE and rubber must be treated to present a surface which is
the

(1)

bonding

medium. This is

normally

The etched surface of PTFE will have

sympathetic

to

achieved by etching the surface.

dull brown colored appearance and of rubber will have

crazed appearance.

(2)

(3)

painted or unpainted are to be thoroughly cleaned either in a hot


cleaner solvent (Item 201) vapor bath or, where this is not practical, clean the surfaces with
new lint free cloth (Item 621) dampened with degreasing agent (Item 230).
Metal surfaces, whether

The surfaces of perspex parts that

are

to be bonded must be washed with

solution of

warm

detergent cleaner (Item 217). Dilute 2 4 fluid oz. (59 to 118 mliter) of
detergent cleaner to 1 gall (4.55 liter) of water. Rinse with warm water and drain until dry. A clean
lint free cloth may also be used to assist drying.
water at 1220F

4.

(50"C)

and

Mixing
(1)

Refer to
and

cure

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

mixing instructions

with

application, tack free,

times.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4007
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

5.

AIRFRAME

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

Apply a reasonably thick layer of sealant adhesive (Item 314) to both mating surfaces with a
spatula (Item 645) or other suitable applicator. Make sure that it is spread evenly and without
any air bubbles.

(2)

Firmly press the two components together while the sealant adhesive is still tacky (within its
application life). Apply sufficient pressure to exude adhesive slightly from around the joint.

(3)

Wipe

(4)

Maintain

light

NOTE:

PTFE does not lend itself readily to

exuded adhesive away


pressure

on

immediately

the

joint

with fabric

wipes (Item 287).

until it is cured.

bonding, therefore if the edges tend to curl up when


place it is recommended that an adhesive tape (Item 620(b~ is applied to help keep
the edges flat. The adhesive tape must be removed when the joint has cured.

in

6.

Inspection
A.

Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

to their

(2)

that the P.T.F.E. and rubber parts have been etched

over

the faces to be bonded

prior

assembly.

joint must
applied by the fingers.

The bonded

EFFECTIVIN:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

be

inspected along

its whole

length

and tested with

light pressure

20-1 0-4007
Page

203

Jun.02

BoYlfboen Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

BONDING WITH EPOXY ADHESIVES FOR NON STRUCTURAL PARTS

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING

WARNING:

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

AND UNDERSTOOD.

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE ADHESIVES. PUT ON

WARNING:

(ITEM 682),

PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM ON

OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENT

(ITEM 201)

MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE EXCESSIVE FUMES,


REST IN A WARM AREA WITH SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES,

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCASIONALLY LIFT THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL
AID.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance

practice gives the

use

of several epoxy resin adhesives which will form

an

strong, durable bond with most materials including metal, ceramic, wood, and rubber. They
part components (epoxy resin and hardener) which when mixed together will cure at room

extremely
are

two

temperature.
This maintenance

practice

contains instructions for the

use

of thin, thick and low

is intended to include most of the conditions where materials

Each adhesive has its

They

can

own

be used for the

special purpose

repair

are

and should be used

of epoxy and

polyester

viscosity adhesives.
on
airplane.
specified by the manufacturer.

as

laminated

glass

It

the Hawker

bonded

cloth and

terylene

components.

They

must not be used for

bonding

perspex,

nylon, polythene, glass, P.V.C,

silicon rubber

or

primary

structure.

They

must not be used at

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

joints

which flex

unduly

in service.

20-1 0-4011
Page

201

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

8.

Equipment/Materials

Equipment/Material
thick)

306A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesive, epoxy (Viscosity

thin)

305A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesive, epoxy (Filled paste)

345

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Alocrom film treatment

504

(Chapter 20-95-501)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Glass fibre cloth

663

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves
shield

clothing

Brush

Localsupply

Clamps

Local

supply

Clips

Local

supply

NOTE:

All tools should be cleaned with hot water and soap before adhesive residues have had time
to

cure.

The removal of cured residues is

difficult and time

consuming operation.

Storage
(1)

3.

ParVltem No.

Adhesive, epoxy (Viscosity

Safety glasses/face

2.

AIRFRAME

Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

The faces to be bonded must be

(2)

painted finish can be bonded if there is no surface contamination. The surface gloss
by a fine abrasive paper (Item 627). Use a clean soft brush to remove all loose
particles. The surface is cleaned and the adhesive is then applied in the normal way.

thoroughly cleaned either in a hot vapour bath with solvent


cleaner (Item 201) or a new lint free cloth (Item 621) dampened with degreasing agent (Item
230). The faces to which the adhesive is to be applied must be free from grease, clean and dry.
Parts with

must be removed

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4011
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
1PSRIAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

When you woik with aluminium alloy parts make sure that the protective treatment is not
damaged over the areas that are to be bonded. Repair any damaged areas (where bare metal is
film treatment

showing) with Alocrom


EPOXIDE PRIMER).
(4)

4.

5.

(Item SOL1)(APPLICATION

OF ALACROM 1200 AND

mating surface. If it is not possible to etch the surface it must


be cleaned to remove all residual release agents used in the forming of the rubber. The surface
must also be scuffed through the outer skin to make a strong bond.
If rubber is to be bonded, etch the

Adhesive

(1)

AIRFRAME

mixing, pot

life and

cure

times
data sheets for the correct adhesive type, mixing

Refer to the Manufacturers/Suppliers


instructions, pot life and cure times.

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

Use

completely cover both the mating surfaces, of the parts to be


Apply the adhesive to a thickness of 0.002 to 0.004 in. (0.05 to
greatest lap shear strength to the joint.

spatula (Item 645)

to

bonded. with adhesive.


0.10

(2)

mm.)

to

give

the

clamped together with light even pressure as soon as the


sure that no air is trapped between the parts. An even light
applied.
clamping over the whole bond area will ensure the optimum cure (too much pressure leaves the
joint without sufficient adhesive). The clamps should remain in place until the adhesive has
The parts

are to

be assembled and
Make

adhesive has been

cured.

(3)

Any excess adhesive residue is to be


dampened with warm soapy water.

(4)

If

repair requires

mix and drained of

(5)

Apply

the

use

surplus

the adhesive to both

of

glass

cleaned from

fibre cloth

parts before it has cured using

(Item 663)

clean cloth

the cloth is to be soaked in the epoxy

adhesive.

mating surfaces. If required lay

the

impregnated

cloth

on one

of the

surfaces.

(6)

Bring

the parts

together

and make

sure

that

no

air is

trapped

between the parts

or

in the

glass

cloth.

(7)

Lightly clampthe partstogether.

NOTE:

cure at room temperature, higher temperatures even a few


temperature will increase the bond strength. Refer to manufacturers

Adhesive for bonded parts will

degrees above

room

technical data for further information about

NOTE:

It is recommended that

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

assembledjoints

cure

are

times.

supported

until the adhesive is cured.

20-1 0-4011
Page

203

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

6.

AIRFRAME

Inspection/Check
A.

Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

that the parts for

bonding

have been

correctly prepared

and have

dry

clean bond

surface.

(2)

Spot checks are to be made when the adhesive is being mixed and if necessary, representative
pieces should be made to prove the joint strength of the mating parts.

test

(3)

Make

assembled and that

sure

that the parts

sure

that the adhesive has cured before the

are

correctly

only light clamping

of the parts is

done.

(4)

Make

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

clamps

are

removed.

20-1 0-4011
Page

204

Jun.02

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

RUBBER BONDING ADHESIVE


1.

AIRFRAME

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS. PUT
ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHES

GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

IF YOU BREATHE

FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW.

GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT


MINUTES,

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15

OCCASIONALLY LIFTING THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET IMMEDIATE


MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

INGESTIONOCCURS, WHEN THESE MATERIALS ARE USED, DO NOT INDUCE


VOMITING. KEEP THE AFFECTED PERSON AWAY FROM HEAT, SPARKS AND
IF

FLAMES. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS ARE CONTAINED IN THESE MATERIALS WHICH MUST
BE TREATED AS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL SAFETY

REGULATIONS.

A.

Introduction

This maintenance

rubber)

practice gives

to itself and other

adhesive with
which exhibit

the

use

materials, such

neoprene base which is

good

of adhesives for the


as

bonding

metal, leather, fabric, etc. It is

applied to both mating

resistance to water, heat,

of rubber

humidity

surfaces. It

The adhesive will not withstand severe exposure to

NOTE:

The adhesive is suitable for both flexible and

are

supplied in packages comprising

either 250 mi, I liter

EFFECTIVIN:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

or

part cold

contact

gives strong

Skydrol, Kerosene,

rigidjoints and can

temperature although the application of heat will accelerate the


Kit sets

two

silicone

cure

resilient bonds

etc.

NOTE:

NOTE:

(not including

of base

or

ester lubricants.

be cured at

cure

room

time.

compound and activator. Kit sizes are

5 liters.

20-1 0-4012
Page

201

Jun.Oe

Raltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Equipment/
NOTE:

Materials

shape of the parts require

Unless the

required beyond
Equipment/

supply

of clips,

jig

to

clamps

or

Material

provide pressure,
weights

Very little

sufficient to

Part/ Item No.

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Adhesive

338

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Primer, sealing

462

(Chapter 20-95-401)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective

equipment is

apply light pressure.

229

grit

Abrasive paper, 100

shield

clothing

Storage
(1)

3.

Cleaner

Protective

2.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppiiers

storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

The surfaces to be bonded must be

correctly prepared by
(a)

dry

and free from grease. Make sure that the surface is


by wiping with a clean cloth dampened with:

the removal of any grease

For metallic materials

use

cleaner

(item 229)

until all grease and surface contamination is

removed.

(b)

For

none

metallic materials

use

degreasing agent (Item 230)

until all grease and surface

contamination is removed.

(2)

The surfaces of

none metallic materials to be joined must, where practicable, be well scuffed


grit, abrasive paper (Item 627). Dust must be removed by wiping with a clean
and then with a cloth dampened with degreasing agent (Item 230).

with clean, 100


cloth

(3)

All metal

or painted surfaces which are to be bonded are to be primed with primer (Item 462).
existing paint finish need not be removed, provided it is sound (strength of the joint will be
that of the paint to metal surface).

The

(4)

It is most

(5)

Use

important

brush to

completely,

that the

apply

minimum

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

thin

primer
even

period

one

is

thoroughly

layer

on

stirred in the container before it is

applied.

to the cleaned metal surfaces and allow to

hour, before the adhesive is

dry

applied.

20-1 0-4012
Page

202

Jun.02

BevtNeee Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

Primed surfaces may be left for periods greater than


and free from dust

NOTE:

4.

Adhesive

(1)
5.

they are kept clean

other contamination.

or

primer is being

hour provided

used

over a

lengthy period

it should be stirred

occasionally.

mixing

Refer to

Adhesive
A.

If the

one

AIRFRAME

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

mixing

instructions.

application

Procedure
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE BASE COMPOUND, CURING AGENT OR THE MIXED
UNCURED ADHESIVE ARE NOT CONTAMINATED WITH WATER OR WATER

VAPOR AS THIS COULD HAVE A DANGEROUS EFFECT ON THE BOND


STRENGTH.

(1)

Apply
brush

layer of adhesive (Item 338)


or other suitable applicator.
an even

over

the full

area

of both of the

mating

surfaces

by

dry for 5 tol 5 minutes or until they are tackfree and


can just be touched with the knuckle of the finger without any adhesive being transferred. This
technique is suitable for smooth regular surfaces and the parts may be joined at any stage.

(2)

The two films of adhesive must be allowed to

(3)

When

irregular surfaces are to be joined a thicker film of adhesive


application over the full area of both mating surfaces.

is

required

which demands

multi-coat

(a) The
and

(4)

When
since

(5)

first coats should be allowed to

allowing

strength

approximately

days. Cure rate may


approximately 2 hours.

the adhesive to

any air and to mate the parts

48 hours under normal ambient

be accelerated

positioning

(a) Preparation of the parts

(b) Apply

the final coat

accurately

temperature

reaching its maximum


158" F (70" C) for

of the adhesive bond continues to increase,

within 7

For parts where accurate

applying

for 5 to 15 minutes.

dry

cured after

conditions but the

(6)

20 to 30 minutes before

joining the two surfaces it is important not to trap


they cannot be repositioned when joined.

joint will be

The

this to

dry for

is

by heating

important,

one-way wet stick method may be used.

must be as described in

one

face

the parts to

Paragraph

3.

only and bring the parts together while

the adhesive is still

tacky.

(c) Adjust the


NOTE:

relative

positions

This method will give

as

required

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

apply

as

lower initial bond strength than

bond strength will be attained in 5 to 7

EFFECTIVIP~

and

much pressure
a

as

possible.

two-way dry stick but a maximum

days.

20-1 0-4012
Page

203

Jun.0e

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(7)

If the
over

edges have to be protected against the ingress of fluid the protective strip is best applied
joint when it is cured. It must be applied to surfaces which have been cleaned of grease

the

and other

6.

AIRFRAME

foreign

matter.

lrtspectsoP/Check
A.

Procedure

(1)

satisfactory bond has been made,


applied over the existing paint scheme, make sure

A visual

been

check, that

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

should be done. If the adhesive has


that the

bonding

is

adequate.

2011 0-4012
Page

204

Jun.OP

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

BONDING WITH CONfACT ADHESIVE


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THE WARNING AND
CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ AND

UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE ADHESIVE. PUT ON

PROTECTIVE CLOTHES (ITEM


GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENT AND ADHESIVES MAKE SURE THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE

FUMES,

REST IN A

WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. IF BREATHING STOPS GIVE ARTIFICIAL

RESPIRATION. IF BREATHING IS DIFFICULT GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. IF IRRITATION PERSISTS GET


IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES,


OCCASIONALLY LIFTING THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS. GET IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF INGESTION OCCURS, WHEN THESE MATERIALS ARE USED, DO NOT INDUCE

VOMITING. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

LOW FLASH POINT SOLVENTS ARE CONTAINED IN THESE MATERIALS WHICH MUST
BE TREATED AS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL SAFETY

REGULATIONS.

A.

Introduction

liquid air drying yellow colored adhesive which has exceptionally high
bond strength and bonds immediately and permanently upon application of contact pressure. It is therefore
necessary to ensure that the mating surfaces are aligned accurately. If this is not possible the applied part
should be made larger and the over hanging surplus cut to shape when the adhesive has cured. The
adhesive is primarily used for bonding decorative laminates to themselves, metal, wood, rubber and most
other surfaces. It is non-staining, water resistant and withstands oxidation, oils, greases and most
Fastbond 10 contact cement is

chemicals.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4014
Page

201

Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

B.

Equipment/

Material

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

206

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Adhesive

304, 339

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

637

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

White

673

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

694

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper
Barrier

(grade 240)

cream

Abrasive

pad

gloves

Protective

gloves

Brush

Safety glasses/face
Protective

shield

clothing

Seam roller

2.

or

362

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to the

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)

The surfaces that

are

to be bonded must be

clean, dry, free from contamination and all loose

particles.

(2)

(3)

Remove any glaze from smooth surfaces that are to be bonded


abrasive paper (Item 627) or abrasive pad (Item 637).
Clean all surfaces that
cleaner solvent

are to

(Item 201).

be bonded with

Then

wipe with

by

clean lint free cloth

dry clean

scuff

sanding

with 240

(Item 621) dampened

white cloth to

remove

grit

with

any solvent residue

before the solvent evaporates.

(4)

Repeat

NOTE:

the

cleaning

until

no

residue is visible

on a

dry

clean white cloth.

gloves (Item 673) while you clean and bond parts. The cleaned
they are handled with bare hands. If the cleaned surfaces
contaminated in any way they are to be cleaned again.

Wear clean white cotton

surfaces will be contaminated if


become

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4014
Page

202

Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

4,

Adhesive

mixing, pot life

Refer to the

(1)

and

times

Manufacturers/Suppliers

instructions, pot life and


5,

cure

cure

AIRFRAME

data sheets for the correct adhesive type,

mixing

times.

Application
A.

Procedure for

(1)

Make

NOTE:

(2)

(3)

none

sure

porous materials

that the adhesive is well stirred before

The adhesive and both surfaces should be 64"F

Apply

with

brush

generous

even

(Item 676)

(18"C)

or

above at time of bonding.

layer of adhesive (Item 304) over the entire area of both mating
or alternatively pour and spread with a spatula (Item 645).

Let the adhesive become touch

NOTE:

application.

surfaces

dry.

humidity

of 50% the touch

dry
approximately 10 minutes, but make sure the bond is made within one hour after the
application of the adhesive. You can bond at any time after the adhesive is touch dry but the

Under normal conditions of 74"F

(24"C)

and maximum

room

time is

longer you wait the stronger the initial bond


Put the

accurately positioned (once

mated

(4)

mating surfaces together


adjustment is possible).

(5)

Apply heavy pressure by hand with a 3 in. (76 mm) seam roller (Item 694) to every part of the
bonded assembly. Work progressively from one side to the other to remove any air bubbles and
make

CAUTION:

sure

so

that

will be.

they

are

no

of full contact between both surfaces.

DO NOT POUR SOLVENT CLEANER

(ITEM 206)

ONTO THE JOINT WHEN YOU

REMOVE EXCESS ADHESIVE. USE ONLY CLEAN WHITE CLOTHS DAMPENED


WITH SOLVENT CLEANER.

(6)

Use

clean white cloth

adhesive from the outer


B.

Procedureforporus
(1)

Make

NOTE:

(2)

sure

dampened with solvent


(decorative) faces.

cleaner

that the adhesive is well stirred before

brush

layers
(Item 676)

two

application.

or

first thin

(b) Apply

second

125 Series 1-1000

or

above at time of bonding.

(Item 304) over the entire area of both mating surfaces


alternatively pour and spread with a spatula (Item 645).

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(18"C)

of adhesive

(a) Apply

EFFECTIVITY:

to remove all uncured

materials

The adhesive and both surfaces should be 64"F

Apply

(Item 206)

even

layer

layer to each porus surface


and allow to become touch

and allow to

with

completely dry.

dry.

20-1 0-4014
Page

203

Jun.OP

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

AIRFRAME

humidity of 50%

dry
approximately 10 minutes, but make sure the bond is made within one hour after the
application of the adhesive. You can bond at any time after the adhesive is touch dry but the

Under normal conditions of 74"F

(24" C)

and maximum

room

the touch

time is

longer you wait the stronger the initial bond will be.

(3)

Put the

mating surfaces together


adjustment is possible).

so

that

they

are

accurately positioned (once

mated

no

(4) Apply heavy pressure by hand with a 3 in. (76 mm) seam roller (Item 694) to every part of the
bonded assembly. Work progressively from one side to the other to remove any air bubbles and
make

sure

of full contact between both surfaces.

DO NOT POUR SOLVENT CLEANER

CAUTION:

(ITEM 206)

ONTO THE JOINT WHEN YOU

REMOVE EXCESS ADHESIVE. USE ONLY CLEAN WHITE CLOTHS DAMPENED


WITH SOLVENT CLEANER.

(5)

Use

clean white cloth

adhesive from the outer

6.

dampened with solvent


(decorative) faces.

cleaner

(Item 206) to

remove

all uncured

Inspection/Check
A.

Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

mating

(2)

Make

that the parts that

are

to bonded have been

correctly prepared and have dry, clean,

surfaces.

sure

that the parts

bubbles in the

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

are

correctly

assembled and that there

are no

voids

or

trapped air

joint.

20-1 0-4014
Page

204

Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
1~MHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

BONDING WITH SCOTCH-SEAL METAL SEALANT 2084


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL,

ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE ADHESIVE. PUT ON

PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682), THIS

INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND ADHESIVE MAKE SURE THERE IS

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A
WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY

AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE
MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance

strength bonds

laminates. It has
B.

practice

introduces

to a wide range of
a

gap

a one part impact type, air drying adhesive, which provides high
substrates, including nylon, polythene, metal, wood and glass cloth

filling capability

of up to 1/16 inch and withstands water, oils, greases and fuel.

Equipment/Materials

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Adhesive

383

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

637

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper
Barrier

(grade 240)

cream

Abrasive

pad

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4016
Page

201

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Wooden/plastic spatula

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

White cotton

673

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective

gloves

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective

2.

shield

clothing

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for storage instructions.

Preparation
A.

Procedure

(1)
(2)

The surfaces to be bonded must be clean,


Remove any

dry,

free from contamination and all loose

glaze from smooth surfaces that are to be


(Item 627) or abrasive pad (Item 637).

bonded

by

scuff

sanding

particles.

with 240

grit

abrasive paper

(3)

Clean all surfaces that


cleaner solvent

are

(Item 201).

to be bonded with

Then

wipe

with

clean lint free cloth

dry

(Item 621) dampened

clean white cloth to

remove

with

any solvent residue

before the solvent evaporates.

(4)

Repeat

the

NOTE:

cleaning procedure

until

no

residue is visible

on a

dry

clean white cloth.

gloves (Item 673) while you clean and bond parts. The
they are handled with bare hands. If the
become contaminated in any way they must be cleaned again.

Wear clean white cotton

cleaned surfaces will be contaminated if


cleaned surfaces

4.

Adhesive
(1)

5.

cure

Refer to

time

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for adhesive

cure

times.

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

Apply a reasonably thick layer of adhesive (Item 383) to both mating surfaces with a spatula
(Item 645) or other suitable applicator. Make sure that it is spread evenly and without any air
bubbles.

(2)

Allow the

joint

to remain open for 5

The two parts shall be

NOTE:

If the adhesive is too

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

minutes, the adhesive should then be tacky

correctly positioned

dry,

one

and

or

nearly dry.

brought together.

surface may be re-treated with adhesive.

20-1 0-4016
Page

202

Jun.03

Aircraft

Rayl~heon

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

13)

press the two parts

Firmly

exude adhesive

NOTE:

(4) Wipe

slightly

together

while thB

from around the

Bdiiesive

is still

AIRFRAME

tacky. Apply

sufficient pressure to

joint.

Prepared parts grip immediately and cannot be adjusted readily.

exuded adhesive away

immediately

with

clean white lint free cloth

dampened with

solvent.

(5)

Maintain

(6) Any
6.

light

pressure

on

the

joint until it is

cured.

trim allowance which may have been added to facilitate part

positioning

is to be removed.

Inspection
A.

Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

mating
(2)

Make

that the parts that

are

bonded have been

correctly prepared

and have

dry, clean,

surfaces.

sure

that the

bubbles in the

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

parts

are

correctly assembled and that there

are no

voids

or

trapped

air

joint.

20-10-4016
Page

203

Jun.03

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

SHRINK FITTING OF

AIRFRAME

BOLTS, BUSHES, PINS, ETC.

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i.

General
WARNING:

DO NOT HANDLE LIQUID NITROGEN OR VERY COLD OBJECTS WITHOUT


PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT. REFER TO HEALTH AND SAFETY STANDARDS.

WARNING:

DO NOT USE THIS METHOD UNLESS SPECIFICALLY CALLED FOR.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE FINISH HAS BEEN COMPLETED ON THE
MATING SURFACES BEFORE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE.

WARNING:

AN INCORRECTLY INSERTED COMPONENT IS VERY DIFFICULT TO REMOVE

WITHOUT DAMAGE. CAREFUL PREPARATION IS NECESSARY TO REDUCE THE RISK


OF JAMMING.

The

following procedures

holes with close tolerance

either

shrinking, expanding

Some materials
to which

NOTE:

are

they may
The sole
make

Tools and

or a

combination of both.

sensitive to elevated temperatures. Refer to Table 201 for the maximum temperature

be heated to obtain the necessary


reason

expansion.

for cooling

clean ent~y. The

interference

2.

define the methods to be used to insert parts, such as bolts, pins or bushes, into
or interference without scoring the mating surfaces. These methods may include

or heating is to make sure that the part is sufficiently altered in size


degree of shrinking and/or expansion required depends upon the

to

specified.

Equipment
Partlltem No.

Equipment/Material

Molybdenum Disulphide

Grease

Item 088

(Chapter 20-95-11)

Cleaner, Solvent

Item 201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Polysulphide Polymer (two-part)

Item 313

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Jointing Compound

Item 307

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Liquid Nitrogen (N2)

Item 669

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Insulated Containers

Item 678

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Protective Gloves

Item 675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Full Face Shield

Item 680

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Safety

Glasses

Item 679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Safety

Shoes

Item 681

(Chapter 20-95-601)

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-4501

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

201

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Protective

Item 682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Electric Mantle

Item 683

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Hot Oil Bath

Item 684

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Refrigerator

Item 685

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Cleaning
3.

AIRFRAME

Clothing

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Cloths

Temperature Relationships
A.

Minimum temperature
MANY STEELS BECOME BRITTLE AT LOW TEMPERATURE. CRACKING MAY

CAUTION:

OCCUR IF HAMMERED.

(1)

There is
critical

(2)
B.

no

limit to the minimum temperature, therefore, the temperature of

provided

Normal

operation

is not

it is lower than that calculated for the interference.

properties

are

entirely

restored at

room

temperature.

Maximum temperature

(1)

The maximum temperature to which

Maximum

material may be raised is shown in Table 201.

Temperature

Table 201

Material

Maximum

Temperatu re

Steel

120" C

Brass

150"C(302"F)

Al. bronze

150" C

(3020 Fl

100" C

(2120 Fl

(248" Fl

[DTD 197]
Wrought

aluminum

Cast aluminum

alloys

alloys

600 C

(140" Fl

[DTD 298]
Steel and aluminum

alloy castings

120" C

(248" Fl

[DTD 7351
[DTD 304]
[HSA S.07]
[AL.OGL]

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-4501

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

202

RayZheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

C.

Expansion

AIRFRAME

and contraction per inch

Expansion

and Contraction Per Inch

Table 202

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Steel

120" C

248" F

.00123

Brass

Bronze

Aluminum

alloy
Maximum temperature for steel

.00191

and aluminum
110"C

230"F

.00110

.00171

100" C

212" F

.00098

.00153

.0017

Maximum temperature for


aluminum

900 C

1940 F

.00085

.00135

.0015

80"C

176"F

.00073

.00117

.0013

70" C

158" F

.00062

.00099

.0011

60" C

140" F

.00050

.00081

.0009

alloy castings.

alloy (wrought).

Maximum

.xutemperature
deRrof

Maximum temperature for cast


alloy DTD 298.

aluminum

NOTEr

50"C

122"F

.00038

.00063

40"C

104"F

.00027

.00045

.0005

30"C

86"F

.00016

.00027

.0003

20"C

68"F

.00005

.00009

.0001

15"C

59" F

.0007

10" C

50" F

.00005

.00008

.0001

O"C

32"F

.00016

.00027

.0003

-10"C

14"F

.00028

.00045

.0005

-20"C

-4"F

.00039

.00063

.0007

-30"C

-22"F

.00051

.00081

.0009

-400 C

-40" F

.00062

.00099

.0011

-50"C

-58"F

.00074

.00117

.0013

-600 C

-76" F

.00085

.00135

.0015

-70"C

-94"F

.00097

.001 53

.0017

.0019

-80" C

-1120 F

.00110

.00171

-1009C

-1480 F

.00130

.[]0204

.0021

-120" C

-1840 F

.00150

.00243

.0023

-1400 C

-2200 F

.00173

.00280

.0025

-1600 C

-256" F

.00194

.00316

.0027

-1800 C

-292" F

.00214

.00352

.0029

soaking

time of approximately

to achieve the values

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(prorated)

Room

Temperature

1/2 hourper inch of section thickness may be

required

quoted in Table 202.

20-1 0-4501
Page

203

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

4.

Procedure
A.

Initial

preparation

(1)

Thoroughly

(2)

Checkthe

following:

(a)

Make

(b)

Check

sure

(c) Check
Check

(d)

clean parts to be fit and the hole with Item 201.

dimensions

correct.

seating.
for any

Prepare freezing

(4)

If bushes

are

to treatments and surfaces.

damage

and

requirements

(3)

(Item 088)

are

and/or

heating

to be fitted into

all

over

alignments
unit and

if

more

adjust

housings grooved

the bore of the

housing.

than

one

to correct

hole

or

part is involved.

temperature. (See Table 202.)

for lubrication purposes,

lightly

Sealant must not be used for this

smear

grease

application.

SEALANT IS AN IRRITANT. AVOID CONTACT WITH THE BODY. ALWAYS WASH

CAUTION:

HANDS BEFORE EATING OR SMOKING.

(5)

Thinly

coat the entire

Class

B).

(a) Sealant

(b)

is

length

supplied

Smear sealant with

in

of the hole in which the part is to be fitted, with sealant

two-part kit. Mix according

spatula

and rub

on

(Item 313,

to manufacturers recommendations.

the surface to obtain the minimum

complete coating.

Do not brush.

B.

Shrinking
(1)

and/or

To find the

of

expansion

expansion

or

column in Table 202 and

NOTE:

(EXAMPLE 1)

components

contraction of

multiply by

0.00051

0.0017x 3/4

Place the component to be fit and mandrel, if


and at the

0.00102 inch

3/4 inch diameter hole in aluminum

Expansion
(2)

component, select the value from the appropriate

2 inch diameter steel bush cooled to -3CP C.

Contraction

(EXAMPLE 2)

the diameter.

100~ C.

0.00128 inch

required,

in the

refrigerant

for the

specified

time

specified temperature.

If the interference exceeds the contraction which

(a)

alloy heated to

component may then be heated

provided

can

the upper

be obtained

permissible

by freezing,

the

mating

temperature is not

exceeded.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000


Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4501
Page

204

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20

(3)

STAN~ARD i~RACTICES

The time interval between the removal of the


short

as

possible.

The

assembly

pait

from the

AIRFRAME

refrigerant

and

assembly

must be as

should be made within 10 to 15 seconds to prevent undue frost

formation.

(a) The temperature


(b)
(4)

A mandrel

Entry

can

of the parts

can

be used to aid

be better maintained if

handling

tools

are

insulated.

alignment.

must be made on the axis of the hole.

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4501
Page

205

Dec. 99

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

LOCKING OF THREADS WITH ANAEROBIC ADHESIVE


MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

DO NOT LET THE SKIN COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE ADHESIVES. PUT ON
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675), SAFETY


(ITEM 634) ON AREAS OF

EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS AND ADHESIVES MAKE SURE THERE IS
SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATHE

FUMES, REST IN

WARM AREA WITH A SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT

EAT,

DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE

MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

THE PRIMERS USED IN THIS PROCEDURE CONTAIN LOW FLASH POINT

SOLVENTS,

THESE ARE HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY ALL LOCAL SAFETY

REGULATIONS.

CAUTION:

DO NOT USE ANAEROBIC ADHESIVES NEAR TO TRANSPARENCIES. THE ADHESIVE


WILL CAUSE SEVERE CRAZING TO ACRYLIC MATERIALS.

A.

Introduction

(1)

procedure for the locking of threads with anaerobic


procedure are single component adhesives which change from
a liquid to a hard insoluble solid by the exclusion of air between close fitting metal surfaces.
When cured they prevent the loosening of threaded fasteners. They are available as either a
very low viscosity adhesive to allow penetration of the joint by capillary action or a high viscosity
adhesive where capillary action is not required.
This maintenance

practice gives

the

adhesives. The adhesives in this

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-1 0-4507
Page

201

Jun.Oe

Raltheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

8.

Equipment/nnaterials

Equipment/Material

ParVltem No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

Primer N

317A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Primer T

318A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesive

372

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Adhesive

374

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Protective

gloves

Brush
shield

Safety glasses/face
Protective

Spray
2.

clothing

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Local

gun

20-95-601

supply

Storage
(1)

3.

AIRFRAME

Refer to

data sheets for storage instructions.

Manufacturers/Suppliers

Preparation
A.

Procedure

paint (STRIPPING

(1)

Remove

(2)

Degrease the
Use

(a)

area to

vapor

OF

PAINTS)

and other

which the adhesive is to be

non

metallic

applied

degreasing method, by immersing

as

coatings

as

necessary.

follows:

the parts in

hot solvent cleaner

(Item 201)

vapor bath.

NOTE:

Where this

can

not be

done, parts may be cleaned with lint free cloths (Item 621)

dampened with solvent cleaner (Item 20 1).

(b)

Use

lint free cloth to

remove

any

remaining solvent cleaner before

(3)

specified adhesive requires an activator, a primer (Item


primer should be applied immediately after degreasing.

(4)

The

If the

primers

are

supplied ready for

use

and

are

317A

or

it evaporates.

318A)

is to be used. The

applied either with a brush (Item 676) or a spray


applied. Porous surfaces may need two

onto the surface area to which the adhesive is to be

layers of primer.
NOTE:

Active surfaces

EFFEGTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000
Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

(Primer optional): Brass,

copper, bronze, iron, soft steel, nickel.

20-1 0-4507
Page 202
Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE:

Inactive su/faces

AIRFRAME

Aliiminium, stainless steel, manganese, zinc, black

(Primer

oxide, cadmium, titanium, others.


NOTE:

As

in

(5)

an

alternative, where

Polythene bag

Parts that have been

primed

with

large number of small parts are to be treated, put the parts


small quantity of primer and let the parts tumble in the primer.

should be allowed to

dry under good

air flow until the surfaces

are

completely dry.
degreased and have had the primer applied, can be stored for up
(Primer N) or 7 days (Primer T). Contamination of the surface before
assembly should be prevented.

NOTE:

Parts that have been


to one month

4.

Application
A.

of adhesives

Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

that the adhesive

(Item

372

or

374)

is the correct

grade,

as

referred to

by

the

manufacturers documentation.

(2)

With

brush, direct from the bottle

compound
NOTE:

(3)

to the cleaned and/or

or, where

primed

appropriate,

threads of

one or

special applicator, apply the

both parts to be locked.

you do not apply too much adhesive to the threads. The excess adhesive
exposed at the ends of the threads will cure slowly and weaken the joint.

IWake

sure

or specified torque loading and/or


Where
screws).
possible, move surfaces in
required position (i.e. adjustment
each other for a few seconds to properly distribute the adhesive for maximum

Assemble the threaded components and

tighten

to the normal

set them to the

relation to
activation.

(4)

exceptional component assembly procedures, the adhesive (Item 374 only) may be
applied to the assembled parts by placing a small drop of the adhesive on the exposed thread
and pem7itting the compound to enter the thread by capillary action.
In certain

NOTE:

(5)

assembly cure for at least


ultimate strength is 3 hours).

Let the adhesive in the

(Time
5.

procedure (paragraph (4)) must only be used where the time required for the
adjustment or assembly of the component is longer than the curing time of the
compound, and the application as in paragraphs (2) and (3) would result in the cured
compound in the joint of the thread being disturbed.
This

to achieve

1 1/2 hours to achieve

handling strength.

Removal of uncured/cured adhesive


A.

Procedure

(1)

Uncured adhesive may be removed from the threads by wiping with solvent cleaner (Item
on a lint free cloth (Item 621). The parts should then have the primer (Item 317A or 318A)

applied again

EFFECTIVITY:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

as

necessary

(paragraph 3.),

and assembled

201)

(paragraph 4.).

20-10-4507
Page

203

Jun.02

Ray~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(2)

Cured adhesive may be more difficult to


The methods which can be used are:

remove

Wire

brushing, scraping

NOTE:

with

tap

or

normally require

mechanical methods.

die.

care on

parts where the protective

treatment would

damaged.
then to have the

primer (Item 317A


(paragraph 3.), and assembled (paragraph 4.).

(3)

6.

cleaning

These methods must be used with


be

The parts

or

and will

AIRFRAME

are

or

318A) applied again

as

necessary

Inspection~heck
A.

Procedure

(1)

Joints assembled with the adhesives

inspected using

an

fluorescence of the

EFFECTIVIPI:

125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

ultraviolet

light,

(both

adhesives have fluorescent

additives) should

where the presence of the adhesive is indicated

be

by

joint.

20-1 0-4507
Page

204

Jun.02

Ral~heon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

RETENTION OF BUSHES AND

AIRFRAME

BY LIQUID SEALANT

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1.

General
The retention of bushes and

bearings

advantages of low distortion

imposed

need for close tolerances

the

the careful

preparation

Surfaces to which the

bearings

or

other

on

housing.

of parts and

liquid

sealant

maximum gap of 0.003 inch

Tools and

the

housings

bearing,

The

or on

success

applied

by the

of items treated

subsequent operations
are

shafts

use

of

corrosion resistance of the

must be

liquid sealant has the

assembly,

by this process depends entirely on

of the items to be bonded

thoroughly

and the lack of

cleaned.

together.

Liquid sealant

must not enter

moving parts.

The dimensions of the bore of the

2.

in their
on

housing

(0.006

or

the diameter of the shaft must allow easy

inch clearance

on

assembly with

diameter).

Equipment

Equipment/Materials

Partlltem No.

Cleaning

Chapter 20-95-201,

Item 201

Liquid Sealant

Chapter 20-95-301,

Item 308

Lint free cloth

Chapter 20-95-601,

Item 621

solvent

White cotton

gloves

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)


Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Brushes

Masking for open sides of nonshielded bearings


Metal

Self-manufacture

cover

ARS.

Polyethylene plastic tape (or)

Chapter 20-95-601,

Item 630

Polyethylene

Self-manufacture

ARS.

cover

Pressure Sensitive

Paper Masking tape

Abrasive paper

or

Chapter 20-95-601,

(or)

Item 630

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Plastic scraper

3.

or

(600 grit)

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS)

Removamnstallation of Parts
A.

Removal of Parts

CAUTION:

(1)

CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO DAMAGE PARTS.

Parts may be

separated by

normal removal methods used for interference

or

press fit

assemblies.

EFFECTIVITY:

20-1 0-4553

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

201

Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Mating

(2)

surfaces must be cleaned of cured sealant

plastic scraper,

bearings
B.

AIRFRAME

or

or

with 600

abrading

grit

wet or

by scraping with a
dry paper taking care

suitable tool, such

as a

not to contaminate the

its lubricant.

Installation of Parts

CLEAN, WHITE COTTON GLOVES SHALL BE WORN DURING AND AFTER

CAUTION:

CLEANING OPERATIONS AND UNTIL BONDING OPERATIONS HAVE BEEN

COMPLETED. CONTAMINATION OF THE CLEANED SURFACES WILL OCCUR


WHEN THEY ARE HANDLED WITH BARE HANDS. IF THE SURFACES BECOME

CONTAMINATED IN ANY WAY, THEY MUST BE RECLEANED.


must be checked before

assembly for

(1)

Bearings

(2)

Assemble the parts. Check for

(3)

Bearings

cleaning fluids and/or liquid sealant from


accidentally entering the openings. Mask by using a polyethylene plastic tape or cover, metal
cover, or paper masking tape cut to shape (Item 630).

(4)

Clean all

(5)

with

clean, lint free cloth (Item 631) dampened with degreasing

NOTE:

Any other means

Coat the

mating surfaces of the bush or bearing thinly with liquid sealant (Item 308) by brushing
application from the nozzle of the bottle. Sealant must not be applied to the housing.

by

of holding parts must also be free from contamination.

direct

NOTE:

Any surplus liquid sealant

Assemble the bush


should be
should be

NOTE:

NOTE:

or

bearing

to the

must not be returned to the bottle.

housing

or

just visible along the mating face. An

carefully

removed

by soaking

It may be necessary before

bearings

the

the shaft. A continuous line of sealant


excess

surplus

assembly to

if access to that side will not be

of sealant

into

an

remove

delays curing and,

absorbent cloth

any masking

practicable

after

Multiple bearing assemblies separated by distance pieces


the bolt

(7)

satisfactory assembly.

with open ends must be masked to prevent

mating surfaces
agent (Item 230).

or

(6)

freedom of rotation.

Retain the

tightened

to normal

or

on one

(Item 308)
if present,

tissue.

side of rolling

assembly
shall be bolted

together and

torque levels.

parts in place if necessary by

means

of temporary

jigging

or

masking tape, and

leave

undisturbed for three hours.

(8)

NOTE:

Heat must not be used to accelerate the

Remove

masking, jigging,

EFFECTIVITY:

etc. and check

cure.

rolling bearing

for freedom of rotation.

20-1 0-4553

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

202

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

4.

AIRFRAME

Inspection
(1)

Assembled

rolling bearings

value when

specified) by rotating

or

(2)

gritty

On

(3)

the

the inner

while

EFFECTIVITY:

assemblies which

bearing, tighten

Assemblies shall be

bearing

inspected
or

for freedom of rotation

outer

races.

(to

There must be

the
no

appropriate torque

evidence of

sticking

feel to the motion.

multiple bearing

through

must be

to normal

inspected

holding

the shaft

are

spaced by

distance tube

place

bolt/nut

assembly

torque levels, and check for freedom of rotation.

for

curing

or

housing stationary.

of sealant

by applying
No

manual pressure to the bush

slippage

or

movement shall be

or

present.

20-1 0-4553

125 Series 1-1000

Page

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

Jan. 2001

203

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

ELECTRICAL BONDING
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this maintenance practice make sure that the Warning and Caution in
GENERAL DESCRIPTION, of this manual, are read and understood.
WARNING: Do not let skin

come

on

protective

gloves (Item 675), safety glasses (Item 679)


areas of exposed skin.

and mask.

into contact with cleaner solvents

clothing (Item 682),


Use barrier cream (Item 634)

sealants, put

or

this includes
on

topic

WARNING: When you use cleaner solvents and sealants make sure there is sufficient airflow in the
work area. If you breath fumes, rest in a warm area with a sufficient airflow. Get medical
aid.
If skin contamination occurs,

WARNING:

non-abrasive soap,

get

and

gently

thoroughly
persists.

clean with

running

water and

medical aid if irritation

WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses, flush with plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes, holding the upper and lower eyelids apart. Get immediate

medical aid.
WARNING: Do not eat, drink

or

smoke

during work. Should ingestion

occur

rinse mouth with water.

Get immediate medical aid.


WARNING: When you work with electrical equipment,
CAUTION: Non-conductive
areas.

The

areas

coatings

must be

must be

polished

obey all local regulations.

completely
to

removed from the electrical

bonding

and earth

smooth surface finish.

CAUTION: When you use silicone compound DC.4 (Item 008) take care not to contaminate any other
surfaces. The compound can damage paint and adhesive surfaces. Paint will not bond to
surfaces from which silicone

compound

has been removed.

CAUTION: All solid material which would interfere with the establishment of a low resistance path across the
electrical bond interface or which forms a wedge or barrier to keep the electrical bond area open
to the entrance of corrosive materials

NOTE: For electrical maintenance


maintenance

or

agents

must be removed.

Ref. 201050.
and AMM Chapter 2~,
to Ref
24,
20-10-50, 201 and
practices refer VI

ELECTRICAL

A. Introduction

practice gives the electrical bonding procedures which


airplane systems function, reliably and safely and to:

This maintenance
that the

Prevent the accumulation of electrostatic


Minimize the
Provide

an

possibility

adequate

Prevent interference with the


Provide

path

for

path

operation

conveying lightning

necessary to make

sure

charges.

of electric shock from the electrical

electrical return

are

supply and distribution system.

under both normal and fault conditions.

of services.

strikes.

20-10-5016

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Electrical bonding may be achieved by either faying of bare metal surfaces, bonding leads or inherent
The term inherent bonding is used where an adequate electrical path exists between parts or

bonding.

assemblies without any special action being necessary. It may be expected that the metallic skin of an
airplane, the internal main structure and connection between components, e.g. wing-to-fuselage, are
inherently bonded by permanent fasteners or the use of close tolerance bolts. Attachments of more than

12 permanent fasteners

B.

are

considered to be

inherently

bonded.

EquipmentlMaterials
ParVltem No.

EquipmentlMaterial

008

(Ref. 20-95-11)

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Ref. 20-95-201)

Compound, sealing

312

(Ref. 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

314

(Ref. 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

Polysulfide

Sealant

Compound,

silicone paste

1315(Ref. 20-95-301)
316

(Ref. 20-95-301)

340

(Ref. 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

347

(Ref. 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

350

(Ref. 20-95-301)

Polysulfide

Sealant

351

(Ref. 20-95-301)

Sealant

Lacquer, polyurethane

414A

Alocrom film treatment

504

(Ref. 20-95-501)

Lint free cloth

621

(Ref. 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, silicone carbide

627

(Ref. 20-95-601)

Masking tape

630

(Ref. 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Ref. 20-95-601)

637

(Ref. 20-95-601)

640

(Ref. 20-95-601)

642

(Ref. 20-95-601)

cream

Abrasive

pad, Scotchbrite (fine grade)

Tinned copper

bonding strip

Tissue, soft paper

1646 (Ref. 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, Garnet


Protective

gloves

Safety glasses/face

(Ref. 20-95-401)

shield

Protective clothing

675

(Ref. 20-95-601)

679

(Ref. 20-95-601)

682

(Ref. 20-95-601)

2.STORAGE
Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

20-10-5016

storage instructions.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

3. BONDING AND EARTHING SURFACE PREPARATION


A. General

(1)

bonding surfaces

The electrical

7.

paragraph

in

must be

clean, dry, conductive, free from

contamination, corrosive agents and all solid material.

(2) Remove all nonconductive materials. These materials include paints and other organic finishes;
anodizing films, oxide and sulfide films; oil, grease and other petroleum products.

(3)

Remove all corrosive agents. These include water, acids, strong alkalines and any other materials
provide conductive electrolytic paths.

which

(4)

Remove all solid materials which could hold the bond

sand, metal

dust, dirt,

B. Aluminum Surface
NOTE: The

(1)

paragraphs

filings

and the

products

that follow

Clean the surfaces to be

apply

CAUTION: Do not

to all classes of electrical bonds.

electrically

NOTE: For electrical bond

around the

areas

remove

bonded with

abrasive

(5)

When the

masking tape is
bonding area

(6) Apply
Install
than

bonding

Deep scratches, grooves

C, Steel, Titanium, Zinc,


NOTE: The

(1) Clean

paragraphs

paint

necessary

an

finer abrasive paper

(Item 504)

Cadium,

that follow

to the bared me~tal surface

Nickel

apply

or

Brass Surface

are

not

(Item

627

or

Item

646)

(Ref. 20-10-08, 201).

zinc

or

or

If the

delay

is

longer

Preparation

to all classes of electrical bonds.

cleaner solvent

(Item 201).

lacquer, as necessary, from the surfaces to be


abrasive pad (Item 637) or wheel can be used.

bonding hardware

gouges

application of the bonding components, clean


moistened with solvent (Item 201).
642)
(Item

or

remove

or

(Item 621).

or

CAUTION: Do not
Install

with tissue paper

the surfaces to be bonded with

Remove

or

equipment within one hour of surface preparation.


paragraphs 3.B.(1) thru (6) again.

hardware

hour do

7.

removed and before the

Alocrom film treatment

one

paragraph

bond.

clean white lint free cloth

the electrical

(3)

metal.

too much

(Item 201).

to contain the effect of the abrasive paper.

grade 320
pad (Item 637) (paragraph 3.A.(2)).

Remove all dust with

(2)

cleaner solvent

Remove all nonconductive materials with

(4)

(7)

area

refer to the Methods in

acceptable for an electrical

or

These solid materials include

Preparation

(2) Apply masking tape (Item 630)

(3)

joint apart.

of corrosion.

cadium

plating

from steel

or

bonded with the related thinners. If

brass surfaces.

equipment.

20-10-5016

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

D.

Surface

Magnesium Alloy

Preparation

CAUTION:

Magnesium alloy structures

NOTE: The

paragraphs

that follow

must not be used

apply

Clean the surfaces to be bonded with

(2)

Remove

necessary

(3)

Brush

an

area

deionized

(4) Carefully

or

or

Install
than

cleaner solvent

path.

(Item 201).

lacquer, as necessary, from the surfaces to be


pad (Item 637) or wheel can be used.
with Dow#19 solution for

distilled water to

dry

NOTE: Do not

(5)

current return

bonded with the related thinners. If

abrasive

liberally

blot

as a

to all classes of electrical bonds.

(1)

paint

AIRFRAME

with

remove

clean lint free cloth

the surface

wipe

blot

one

minute, then rinse immediately with clean

all chemicals.

(Item 621)

and let

dry

for 3 to 5 minutes.

carefully.

bonding hardware or equipment within one hour of surface preparation.


hour do paragraphs 3.0.(1) thru ~4) again.

If the

delay

is

longer

one

E. Inherent Electrical

Bonding

bonding is where specific portions of the surface areas of the members to be joined
placed in direct contact. Electrical continuity is obtained by establishing a fused metal bridge across
the junction by welding, brazing, sweating, swaging or by maintaining a high pressure contact between
the mating surfaces with rivets. No other preparation is necessary in inherently electrically bonded
applications.
Inherent electrical

are

F Radomes

require special treatment compared to other methods of electrical bonding as the conductive
paint, that the radome mounts upon, is a crucial element of the electrical bond. The
layer
conductive layer of paint must be exposed and must make contact with the mounting screws of the
radome. The anti-static paint itself must measure 0.5 to 75 MRlsquare. A finish layer land primer) may
be applied on top of the conductive layer of paint as long as the anti-static paint is left exposed where
the mounting screws for the radome would make contact.
Radomes

of the

4. TYPES OF SEALANT

A. Sealant

(1)

Groups

The sealant in the electrical

(2) Group~

bonding methods

by

the groups that follow.

sealants:

bonding of equipment
351).

For permanent electrical

315, 316, 347, 350


1/2

NOTE: The

work life

(a)

is shown

Where
For

or

or

components to

structure

2 versions to be chosen at operators discretion

use

according

requirements.

1 sealants are necessary they will be applied


inside fuel tanks refer to (Ref. 20-10-1001, 201).

Group

use

or

20-1 0-5016

as

follows:

sealant

to

(Item 314,

application

and

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

For all other

(3) Group

applications refer

For removable installations

use

sealant

(Item 312). In areas likely to be contaminated by hydraulic


lacquer (Item 414A). Let the lacquer cure between coats.

two brushed coats of

3 sealant:

Sealant

(5) Group

(Ref. 20-10-1002, 201).

2 sealant:

fluid, overcoat with

(4) Group

to

AIRFRAME

(not

for fuel tank

interior) (Item 340).

4 sealant:

Silicone

compound (Item 008).

5. INSPECTION/CHECK
A. Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

bonding

parts for electrical bonding have been correctly prepared and have

that the

(2)

Make

sure

that the electrical

(3)

Make

sure

that the sealant has been

Make

sure

(4)

that

Make

sure

bonding

and earth

points

have been

correctly applied.

Paragraph 6.6.,

that the fasteners

are

permissible

Table 201.

correctly tightened.

6. RESISTANCE TEST
A.

Equipment/Materials
EquipmentlMaterial
10

Amp Measurements

ItemlPart No.

Raytheon

test tool TK 2146/935

(or equivalent)
Low power measurements

Milliohmeter

Keithly

model 580A

(or equivalent)

Megohm

dry clean

correctly protected.

resistance test has been done in accordance with the

values contained in

(5)

surface.

measurements

Hewlett-Packard model 1862-C

Megger

model BM403

(or equivalent)

20-10-5016

resistance

Raytheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

B. Maximum Permissible Resistance Values

Table 201
Table of Maximum Permissible Resistance Values

Item(s)

to be

Electrically Bonded

Resistance in Ohms

Method Description

Class

Antennas, grounded type

I Faying

0.0025

Arrestor, lightning

Faying

0.0005

Bearings,

I Faying

roller and ball

Cables and Rods,

flight

Faying

HIR

Cabinets, electrical/electronic

or

0.0025

Jumper

0.01

Jumper

(HF only)

I Faying

0.0025

(e.g., airplane cargo)

IFaying

0.01

Faying

or

Jumper

0.01

C/R

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Cables, coaxial
Tiedowns

or

Attachment Hardware

controls

0.01

Parts, conductive (i.e., any conductive


part greater than 3 in. (76.2 mm) on a
side that is fixed and

exposed

to the

airstream)

Conduit/trays, metal (i.e.,


wiring or cable trays)

conduit for

0.0025

Connectors, metal (i.e., metallic


connectors for wire harnesses)

)Faying

Control Surface Actuators, electrical,

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Faying

or

Jumper

0.01

LIR

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

IJumper

(e.g., servos)
Control Surface Actuators, non-electrical
Control Surface Position Transmitters

(e.g., RVDTs)
Control surfaces, metal

(e.g., ailerons,

0.01

elevators, Flaps, rudder and trim tabs)


NOTE

Control surfaces that


electrical

are

direct driven (e.g.

Dischargers electrostatic (aluminum


mounting base)

Diverters, lightning

bay,

access, avionics

equipment bay,
entrance, landing gear)
rear

metal

(i.e., rigid

without electrical

206Mar.OG

roller/track)

or

piano hinged provide inherent

I Faying

or

Riveted

Fastener

0.1

0.0025

[Jumper

0.01

escape hatch,

Doors, external (e.g., cowling, nacelles)

Ducting,

gear,

bonding.

Doors, external (e.g.,

Page

worm

and

or

flexible

provisions)

20-~ 0-5016

Fastener

Faying

or

0.01

Jumper

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Table 201
Table of Maximum Permissible Resistance Values

Item(s)

to be

Electrically

Bonded

Class

Electrical components for circuits


50 volts, Metal Cased (e.g.,

Method Description

Resistance in Ohms

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Electrical Devices (i.e., electrical devices


attached to enclosures)

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Engine Mounts

I Faying

or

Jumper

0. 0025

Engine Supports

Faying

or

Jumper

0.01

H/R

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

H/R

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

exceeding

switches, circuit breakers potentiometers


and

rheostats)

Equipment Cases, metal (e.g., avionics,


battery, black box, CDU, CRT, electrical,
electronic, radios)

Equipment
seams,

Enclosures

(i.e.,

cabinet

drawers, panels)

(EMI)
0.1

(Safety)

Faying

\Faying

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Fittings, Lines, Pipes, Plumbing and


Tubing, composite (e.g., air, fuel,
hydraulic, oil)

Faying

or

Jumper

Contact

Fittings, Lines, Pipes, Plumbing and


Tubing, metal (e.g., bleed air, fuel,

Faying

or

Jumper

1.0

Fuel Boost Pump, electrical

1Faying

Contact

Raytheon

Fuel Boost Pump,

I Faying

Jumper

Contact

Raytheon

Fuel Flow Transmitter

Faying

Jumper

Contact

Raytheon

Fuel Nozzle Ground

Faying

0.0025

Faying

0.0025

S/L

Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

I Faying

or

Jumper

Contact

Hydraulic Pumps

Faying

or

Jumper

0.01

Indicator

I Faying

Equipment, electrical powergeneration


(e.g., alternators, starter/generators)
Filters, EMI
Fire

Extinguisher Bottles, non-portable

Jumper

or

Contact

Raytheon

0.0025

Raytheon

hydraulic, oil, oxygen, pneumatic


pressure, refrigerant)

engine driven

Receptacle

Fuel Tank Access Door

Fuel

Vents/Scoops,

Exchangers
conditioning)

Heat
air

metal

and Radiators

Heat Exchangers, Fuel

Lights

Inspection

Plates

System

(e.g.,

or
or

Fasteners

Raytheon

1
1

20-10-5016Mar.OG

Aircraft Company
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Table 201

Table of Maximum Permissible Resistance Values

Item(s)

to be

Electrically Bonded

Class

Landing Gear Assembly Components,


(e.g., torque knees, shock absorbers)

Method

I Faying

or

Description
Jumper

Resistance in Ohms
1

NOTE

Landing gear

down and locked.

Lighting Fixtures

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Motors, electrical

I Faying

or

Jumper

Contact

Mounts, metal (e.g., shock, vibration)

I Jumper

Strap

0.0025

Panels, metal (e.g., control, instrument)

Faying, Jumper

RailsTTracks,
seats)

Faying

Faying

H/R

Faying

Structure, aluminum (i.e., external skins)

S/L

Faying

0.0005

Structure, CFC (i.e., external CFC


panels)

S/L

Faying

0.05

Jumper

0.01

Jumper

0.01

IJumper

0.01

Tanks, oxygen

IJumper

0.01

Transformer

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Transformer, Rectifier Units

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

I Faying

or

Jumper

0.0025

Faying

or

Jumper

0.01

metal

(e.g.,

rails and tracks

or

or

or

Jumper

Strap 1

0.0025
0.1

for

Seats, flight

Shelves,

crew

metal

only
shelves for

(i.e.,

electrical/electronic

0.1
or

Jumper

0.0025

equipment)

Tanks, conductive composite (with fuel


filler provisions and no electrical

installations)
Tanks, metal (containing non-flammable
materials

Tanks, metal (with fuel filler provisions


and

no

electrical

installations)

Valves, electrically controlled

or

instrumentation

Valves, non-electrical

NOTE: The class of

Mar.OG~p"

bonding

is defined

as

follows:

CLASS A

Antenna installations

CLASS C

Current return

CLASS H

Shock hazard

CLASS L

Lightning

CLASS R

RF

CLASS S

Static

path

Protection

potential
charge

20-10-5016

Raytheon

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

7. BONDING METHODS
NOTE: Method numbers 18, 20, 25 thru 29 and 32 thru 40

A, Methods

Bridging

1, 13 and

contact

(1) Clean

are

not used.

41

bonding

via

conducting

bolt and nut, oversealed

to bare metal the two faces under the washers

remove

nonconductive materials the

area

(Figure 201).

(paragraph 3.).

Make

extends for 0.04 to 0.12 in.

(1

sure

to 3

that when you


around the

mm)

contacting faces.
(2) Clean

the bared faces and the related fasteners with solvent

(3) Apply

the correct surface treatment

(4)

Install the

(5)

Do

component

resistance test

and

tighten

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

the fasteners.

Torque tighten if necessary.

(paragraph 6.).

NOTE: This method may also be used for a tapped hole in the structure or moulding block, with
either a conducting stud with nut and washer, or a hexagon headed conducting bolt and
washer.

METHOD1
BRIDGING CONTACT BONDING VIA
CONDUCTING BOLT AND NUT

OVERSEALED

;L:
HEXAGON HEADED BOLT

(CONDUCTING

EQUIPMENT
OR
COMPONENT

STRUCTURE

WASHERS STEEL
CADMIUM PLATED
NUT

CONDUCTING

M7612
HA008986470AA

Figure 201
Electrical

Bonding

Methods

-1, 13 and 41

20-10-5016

Ray~heon

AiKraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(6) Apply

(7)

sealant to overseal the head of the bolt and the nut

(a) For

Method 1 in

(b) For

Method 13 in

paragraph4.A.(3j.

(c) For

Method 41 in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

as

AIRFRAME

specified:

paragraph 4.A.(2).

Make sure that the fillet

the washer and the

overlaps

existing protective

treatment to exclude

moisture from the unprotected surfaces.

B. Methods 1A and 41A


Direct contact

(1)

(Figure 202).

oversealed

bonding,

Clean to bare metal the foot of the

(paragraph 3.).

Make

0.04 to 0.12 in.

(1

(2) Clean the


(3) Apply

to 3

sure

mm)

bared faces with solvent

(5)

Install the component and

(6)

Do

resistance test

component

or

and the structure covered

by

the foot

extends for

(paragraph 3.).

under the

tighten

area

(Item 201).

the correct surface treatment

(4) Apply a line of sealant


paragraph 4.A. (2).

equipment

that when you remove nonconductive materials the


around the contacting faces.

heel

of the

the fasteners.

equipment

or

component

as

specified

Torque tighten if necessary.

(paragraph 6.).

METHOD 1A
DIRECT CONTACT BONDING

OVERSEALED

HEXAGON HEADED BOLT

EQUIPMENT
OR
COMPONENT

STRUCTURE~

WASHER STEEL

CADMIUM PLATED

;L
r

IF NUT PLATE IS
USED INSTALL WASHER

UNDER BOLT HEAD


NUT OR NUT PLATE
M7568

HAODB986424AA

Electrical

Mar.

Figure 202
Bonding Methods

20-10-5016

-1A and 41A

in

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

sealant to overseal the head of the bolt and the nut and around the foot

(7) Apply

(8)

AIRFRAME

(a)

For Method 1A in

(b)

For Method 41A in

Make

specified:

paragraph 4.A.(3).
paragraph 4.A.(4).

that the fillet around the foot

sure

moisture from the

as

unprotected

overlaps

the

existing protective

treatment to exclude

surfaces.

C. Method 2

Bridging
(1)

contact

bonding

via

bolt and nut, Silicone

conducting

Clean to bare metal the two faces under the washers


remove

nonconductive materials the

area

compound sealing (Figure 203).

(paragraph 3.).

Make

extends for 0.04 to 0.12 in.

(1

that when you


mm) around the

sure

to 3

contacting faces.

(2)

Clean the bared faces and the related fasteners with solvent

(3) Apply

the correct surface treatment

(4) Apply a
4.A.(5).

thin

layer

of silicone

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

compound (Item 008)

to the bared surface

as

specified

in

paragraph

METHOD 2
BRIDGING CONTACT BONDING VIA CONDUCTING BOLT
AND NUT- SILICONE COMPOUND SEALING

HEXAGON HEADED BOLT

(CONDUCTING

WASHERS STEEL CADMIUM PLATED


EQUIPMENT
OR
STRUCTURE

COMPONENT

SILICONE COMPOUND
APPLIED BEFORE ASSEMBLY
M7613

NUT

Electrical

Figure 203
Bonding Method

CONDUCTING

HAOOB986471AA

20-1 0-5016

"Gf~ZMar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(5)

Install the

component and tighten the fasteners. Torque tighten if necessary.

NOTE: When two


surface
be

(6)

Do

or more

on

applied

3,

Direct contact

thicknesses

the intermediate

are

joint

involved, it is permissible to

faces. A thin

layer

of silicone

the

nonconducting
compound (Item 008) is to
remove

to the bared areas.

resistance test

D. Methods

AIRFRAME

(paragraph 6.).

14 and 42

bonding

bonding leads, oversealed (Figure 204).

with

Table 202

Washer Material for Method 3


Method

Washer Material

Structure Material

Aluminum

Steel, cadmium plated

Alloy

3A

Plated steel, corrosion

38

Magnesium

resisting steel,

Corrosion

titanium

resisting

steel

Steel, cadmium plated

NOTE: When Method 3 is detailed for

plated steel, corrosion resistant

steel

or

titanium structure

use

Method 3A.
NOTE: When Method 3 is detailed for

(1)

For all structure

magnesium

structure

use

Method 38.

except magnesium:

Clean to bare metal at the


nonconductive materials the

point of
area

bond

(paragraph 3.).

Make

extends for 0.04 to 0.12 in.

(1

sure

to 3

that when you remove


around the contacting

mm)

faces.

(2) For magnesium

structure:

Clean the structure and


film the

(3)

area

Clean the bared

(4) Apply the

(6)

Do

area

and the

Bonding leads should


the bonding leads.

(1

bonding tag

to 3

be

as

mm)

sure

that when you remove the chromate


contacting faces.

around the

with solvent

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

Torque tighten

and fasteners.

resistancetest

(7) Apply

the chromate film. Make

correct surface treatment

(5) Assemble tags


NOTE:

remove

extends for 0.04 to 0.12 in.

short and

the fasteners if necessary.

straight

as

possible

but without

straining.

(paragraph 6.).

sealant to overseal the head of the

(a) For

Method 3 in

(b) For

Method 14 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

(c) For

Method 42 in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

paragraph 4.A.(2).

20-1 0-5016

bolt, nut, tags and washers

as

specified:

Do not coil

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(8)

Make

sure

that the sealant

unprotected

overlaps the existing protective

AIRFRAME

treatment to exclude moisture from the

surfaces.

METHOD 3
DIRECT CONTACT BONDING USING
BONDING LEADS

HEXAGON HEADED BOLT

OVERSEALED

WASHER
INSTALL THIS WASHER
WHEN SPECIFIED

STRUCTURE

WASHER

NUT

NOTE: FOR WASHER MATERIAL


M7569

REFER TO TABLE 202

HAOOB98M25AA

Electrical

Figure 204
Bonding Methods

3, 14 and 42

E. Method 4
Direct contact

bonding

This method is the

with

same as

bonding leads.
Method 3

(paragraph

7.D.

(1)

thru

(6))but

without overseal.

F. Method 5

Pipe bonding fixed clamp block single

(1) Pipes

or

multi-storey (Figure 205).

points of bond, clean to bare metal (paragraph 3.). Make sure that the
area(s) for the pipe(s) is the width of the clamp plus 0.04 to 0.08 in. (1 to 2 mm) on either
For the clamp, the area of the foil plus 0.04 to 0.12 in. (1 to 3 mm) all round.
and structure at the

cleaned
side.

(2)

A tinned copper

pulled

down and

bonding strip (Item 640) length as required is put in position with


put under the clamp. The bonding strip is pierced to take the bolt.

NOTE: Where metal

or

metal coated

required. Any nonconducting


the pipe clamp holes.
(3)

Clean the bared faces and all

parts

the free end

clamp blocks are used, the tinned copper bonding strip is not
finish will require removing from the clamp block base and

which will be in

bonding

contact with solvent

20-1 0-5016

(Item 201).

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 5
PIPE BONDING FIXED CLAMP
BLOCK SINGLE OR MULTI

STOREY

Electrical

(4) Apply

the correct surface treatment

(5) Install

the

(6)

Do

pipe(s)

to the

resistance test

(7) Repair

any

damage

Figure 205
Bonding Method

(paragraph 3.).

clamp block(s). Tighten

the fasteners and torque

tighten

if necessary.

(paragraph 6.).
to the

surrounding

area

with local finish.

G Method 6

Pipe bonding floating clamp

(1)

This method is the

(a)

The

block

same as

single

Method 5,

multi-storey (Figure 206).


except

as

follows:

bonding strip (Item 640) is assembled in the clamp as shown,


(with the bonding lead tag) under the head of one of the clamp

attached

Page

or

20-~ 0-5016

but the free end is


attachment bolts.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 6
PIPE BONDING FLOATING CLAMP

BLOCK SINGLE OR MULTI

STOREY

BONDING LEAD

TINNED COPPER STRIP

M7570

HAOOB986426AA

Electrical

Figure 206
Bonding Method

H. Methods 7, 16 and 43

Pipe

to

pipe bonding

(1) Clean

the

pipes

remove

you

contacting

(2)

clamps

(Figure 207).

to bare metal at the

nonconductive materials the

area

point of

(paragraph 3.).
(1

Make
to 4

sure

that when

mm) around

the

alloy clamps apply


as specified:

(Item 201).

bonding lead tags and fasteners

as

shown. If

mating surfaces of

the bolt headl

paragraph 4.A.(2).

For method 7 in

(b)

For method 16 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

(c)

For method 43 in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

unprotected

the

sealant to overseal round the

(a)

sure

contact with solvent

(paragraph 6.).

For aluminum

tag and nut

bonding

(paragraph 3.).

clips to the pipe followed by


torque tighten the fasteners.

resistance test

Make

bond

extends for 0.04 to 0.16 in.

faces.

Assemble the

(5) Do

(7)

and

oversealed

the correct surface treatment

necessary

(6)

clamps,

Clean the bared faces and all parts which will be in

(3) Apply
(4)

with

that the sealant

overlaps

the

existing protective

treatment to exclude moisture from

surfaces.

20-10-5016

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 7
PIPE TO PIPE BONDING
USING CLAMPS

OVERSEALED

HEXAGON HEADED BOLT

CLAMP:
ALUMINUM ALLOY FOR
PLATED STEEL AND

ALUMINUM ALLOY PIPES.

CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL


FOR CORROSION RESISTANT

STEEL AND TITANIUM PIPES

WASHERS STEEL
CADMIUM PLATED

NUT

M7615
HA008986473AA

Electrical

(8)

For corrosion resistant steel

i, Methods

Pipe
(1)

to

pipe bonding

with

bonding lugs,

Clean the

without sealant.

bonding lugs to
(paragraph 3.).

oversealed

(Figure 208).

bare metal and make

sure

Clean the bared faces and all parts which will be in

(3) Apply
(4)

clamps, assemble

7, 16 and 43

8, 17 and 44

removed

(2)

Figure 207
Bonding Methods

the correct surface treatment

Assemble the

bonding

lead

that any nonconductive material has been

bonding

contact with solvent

(paragraph 3.).

tags and fasteners

as

shown.

fasteners.
Do

(6)

Overseal the bolt head,

resistance test

(paragraph 6.).

(5)

tag and

nut with sealant

(a)

For method 8 in

(b)

For method 17 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

(c)

For method 44 in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

paragraph 4.A.(2).

20-1 0-5016

(Item 201).

as

specified:

If necessary

torque tighten the

Raytheon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

METHOD 8
PIPE TO PIPE BONDING

OVERSEALED

USING BONDING LUGS

i-C--

,I

L-

-I

I-

in(76mm)APPROX

in(76mm )APPROX.
M7571
HA008986427AA

Figure

208

Electrical Bonding Methods

(7)

Make

sure

that the sealant

overlaps

the

8, 17 and 44

existing protective

treatment to exclude moisture from

unprotected surfaces.
J. Methods 9 and 45
components direct contact bonding, oversealed (Figure 209).

External aerials and aerial

(1)

mating surface of the airplane structure and the both sides of the sacrificial plate (if
(paragraph 3.). Make sure that when you remove nonconductive materials
extends for 0.08 to 0.16 in. (2 to 4 mm) around the contacting faces.

Clean the

to bared metal

used),
the

area

CAUTION: Do not

peel

remove

off

cadium

protective strip (or other protective device)

(2)

Remove the

(3)

Clean the bared faces and all

(4) Apply

(5)

parts

which will be in

the correct surface treatment

(paragraph 3.).

Assemble the aerial and sacrificial

tighten
(6)

plating.

Do

plate (if used)

bonding

from the aerial base.

contact with solvent

(Item 201).

to structure. Secure with fasteners and

torque

if necessary.

resistance test

(paragraph 6.).

NOTE: Do the check of the resistance with the aerial feeder disconnected to avoid

through

parallel path

the outer braid.

(7) if the bare metal area


(Ref. 20-10-3527, 201).

is

more

than 0.24 in

(6mm) locally

swab the

area

with

20-10-5016

epoxide primer

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CMAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 9
EXTERNAL AERIALS AND AERIAL
COMPONENTS DIRECT CONTACT
BONDING- OVERSEALED

ATTACHMENT BOLTS
AND NUTS

AERIAL

SACRIFICIAL PLATE

(IF SPECIFIED)

M7616

HAOOB966474AA

Electrical

seal all

(8) Edge

(9)

joints

and fasteners with sealant

(a)

For method 9 in

(b)

For method 45 in

Make

Figure 209
Bonding Methods
as

9 and 45

follows:

paragraph 4.A.(2).
paragraph 4.A.(4).

that the sealant overlaps any surface treated in paragraph


finish to exclude moisture from unprotected surfaces.

sure

protective

7.J.(8)

and the

existing

K. Method 10

Bonding by direct contact, oversealed (Figure 210).

(1)

Clean the contact surfaces to be


remove

contacting
(2)

the correct surface treatment

(4) Immediately apply

Mar.

thin

much of the sealant

as

Do

to bare metal

area

(paragraph 3.).

Make

extends for 0.12 to 0.20 in.

(3

sure

to 5

that when you


around the

mm)

faces.

Clean the bared faces with solvent

(3) Apply

(5)

joined

nonconductive materials the

resistance test

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

layer of sealant (Item 314)to both joint faces


possible before the initial cure starts.

as

(paragraph 6.).

20-10-5016

and assemble.

Squeeze

out

Raytheon

nircraff Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 10
BONDING BY DIRECT CONTACT

OVERSEALED

ALTERNATIVE BOLT OR

SEALANT~

RIVET FASTENERS

~JJ
~L

M7572
HAOOB986428AA

Electrical

(6) Apply sealant to the bare edges


specified in paragraph 4.A.(2).
(7)

Make

sure

unprotected

that the sealant

Figure 210
Bonding Method -10
of the cleaned areas, bolt and rivet heads, tails and nuts

the

overlaps

existing protective finish

as

to exclude moisture from

surfaces.

L. Methods 11 and 46

Bonding by solid rivet connections, oversealed (Figure 211).

(1)

Leave undersize the holes for the electrical

bonding

rivets

as

indicated in the

drawing by

the

bonding symbol.
NOTE: All other rivets of the
that the

assembly

(2)

Drill to size the electrical

(3)

Clean the

(4) Set

the

bonding

is

assembly
completed

bonding

are

to standard

rivets and their holes with solvent

bonding rivets

in

requirement

(5)

Doa resistance test

(6)

Overseal the

assembly

rivet holes and make

position, dry

will assist with

sure

riveting procedures.

that the bore is free from sealant.

on

the

as

specified:

use

sealant. If

practicable,

face to those of the normal

opposite
subsequent identification.

(paragraph 6.).

bonding

rivets with sealant

(a)

For method 11 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

(b)

For method 46 in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

It is essential

sealant is still wet.

(Item 201).

assemble. Do not

rivets should be installed with the heads


This latter

subject

whilst the wet

20-1 0-5016

the

bonding

row

of rivets.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(7)

Make

sure

that the sealant

overlaps

the

AIRFRAME

treatment to exclude moisture from

existing protective

unprotected surfaces.

METHOD 11
BONDING BY SOLID RIVET
CONNECTIONS-OVERSEALED

M7617
HAOOB986475AA

Figure 211
Bonding Methods

Electrical

-11 and 46

M. Methods 11A and 46A

Bonding by conducting
(Figure 212).
(1)

screwed

or

Clean to bare metal at the


nonconductive materials the

bolted connections in aluminum

or

magnesium structure,

oversealed

point of bond (paragraph 3.). Make sure that when you remove
extends for 0.04 to 0.12 in. (1 to 3 mm) around the contacting

area

faces.

(2)

Clean the bared faces and the related fasteners with solvent

(3) Apply

(4)

the correct surface treatment

Assemble the structural


fasteners

as

Figure

with

Do

(6)

Overseal the bolt heads and nut

(7)

(paragraph 3.).

interfay

212. If necessary

(5)

resistance test

parts

as

necessary, then assemble the

bonding

(paragraph 6.).
assembly

For method 11A in

paragraph 4.A.~3).

(b)

For method 46A in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

sure

sealant

torque tighten the fasteners.

(a)

Make

(Item 201).

that the sealant

unprotected surfaces.

20-10-5016

overlaps

with sealant

the

as

specified:

existing protective

finish to exclude moisture from

RaytPleon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 11A

BONDING BY CONDUCTING SCREWED OR BOLTED CONNECTIONS


IN ALUMINUM OR MAGNESIUM STRUCTURE

OVERSEALED

CONDUCTING

BOLT)

~L

WASHER STEEL
CADMIUM PLATES

NUT(CONDUCTING)
WASHER STEEL CADMIUM PLATED

BONDING RIVETS

t~J1

2 OFF

ONE PIECE NUT PLATE

SCREW( CONDUCTING

CONDUCTING

NON-ANODISED

Electrical

M7573

nAooes~6429nn

Figure 212
Bonding Methods

11A and 46A

N. Methods 12 and 47

Bonding
(1)

of electrical connectors direct contact, oversealed

Clean to bare metal the

(2) Clean

of structure

or

the bared area, also the face of the

and threads of the

(3) Apply

area

jam

equipment

on

as

shown in

Figure

209

olive drab and nickel

plated

(paragraph 3.).

connector which will form the bond

flanged

nut connector and the related fasteners with solvent

the correct surface treatment to the bare metal

NOTE: The finish

(Figure 213).

or

the nut

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

connectors is conductive. For other finishes refer

to the connector standard. If the finish is not conductive then it is to be removed.

(4)

(5)

Secure the connector to the structure


nut

(jam

Do

nut

or

equipment,

with the fasteners

(flanged connectors)

connectors).

resistance test

(paragraph 6.).

20-1 0-5016

or

the

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 12
BONDING OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS

DIRECT CONTACT

OVERSEALED

;Y

0~

O
O

STRUCTURE OR
EQUIPMENT

CLEANED AREA IS EQUAL TO A

CLEANED AREA IS EQUAL TO

CIRCLE WHOSE DIAMETER IS

THE FLANGE PLUS 3 TO 5mm

EQUAL TO THE DIMENSION

(0.12

TO

0.24in)

ALL ROUND

ACROSS THE CORNER OF THE


JAM NUT PLUS 3 TO 5mm

(0.12

TO

0.24in)
JAM NUT CONNECTORS

FLANGED CONNECTORS

M7618

HAOOB98M76AA

Electrical

(6)

For

flanged

connectors overseal the back

the connector

(7)

Figure 213
Bonding Methods

on

the face

opposite

the

-12 and 47

face, the ends of the fasteners on both faces, and round


all bare metal, with sealant as specified:

flange, including

(a)

For method 12 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

(b)

For method 47 in

paragraph 4.A.(4).

For jam nut connectors overseal the bared metal and the jam nut,
O-ring seal) the back face, with sealant as in paragraph 4.A.(3).

and

(if

there is

no

backface

O. Method 13
Refer to Method 1.

P. Method 14
Refer to Method 3.

Q. Method 15
Direct contact

bonding

with

bonding lead: plated steel, corrosion resisting

steel and titanium structure,

oversealed.

NOTE: This method is similar to Method 3, except for difference in materials for items. Use sealant
specified in paragraph 4.A.(3) to overseal fasteners.

R. Method 16
Refer to Method 7.

20-1 0-5016

as

Raytheon

Airrraft Company
AIRFRAME

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

S. Method 17
Refer to Method 8.

T. Method 19

Bonding
(1)

corrosion resistant steel components to aluminum structure, oversealed

If the component is

plated

over

the surface to be

(Figure 214).

bonded, clean the component

to bare metal if

necessary (paragraph 3). Make sure that when you remove nonconductive materials the
extends for 0.04 to 0.12 in. (1 to 3 mm) around the contacting faces.

(2)

Clean the bared

(3) Apply
(4)

area

of the component with solvent

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

the correct surface treatment

bonding clamp to the component, install


(Figure 207) and fasteners as in Method 1.

Assemble the stainless steel


washers

as

shown in

NOTE: If the component shows signs of collapse under the


clamp, refer to Raytheon Aircraft Company.
Do

(6)

Overseal the bolt head, nut, washers and the heel

resistance test

the cadmium

clamping pressure

plated steel

of the

bonding

(paragraph 6.).

(5)

area

(Figure 207)

with sealant

as

specified

paragraph 4.A.(3).

METHOD 19
BONDING CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL COMPONENTS

TO ALUMINUM STRUCTURE -OVERSEALED

CORROSION RESISTANT
STEEL

HEEL

COMPONENT( TYPICAL)

WASHERS

(2 OFF)

STEEL

CADMIUM PLATED

O
STAINLESS STEEL

ALUMINUM

BONDING CLAMP

STRUCTURE

M7574

HAOOB986430AA

Electrical

Figure 214
Bonding Method -19

20-10-5016

in

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(7)

Make

that the sealant

sure

overlaps

the

AIRFRAME

existing protective finish

to exclude moisture from

unprotected surfaces
U. Methods 21, 48 and 49
Earth

(1)

plates, oversealed (Figure 215).


Clean to bare metal the

of structure to be covered

area

by

that when you remove nonconductive materials the


to 4 mm) around the contacting faces.

sure

(1

(2)

Clean the bared faces and the related fasteners with solvent
the correct surface treatment to the bare metal

(3) Apply
(4)

(6)

area

plate (paragraph 3.).

Do

as

shown in

resistance test

When with

Make

extends for 0.04 to 0.16 in.

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

plate, sacrificial plate (if used), bolts, tag, washers


Torque tighten the fasteners as necessary.
Figure

Assemble the earth terminal

structure,

(5)

the earth

and nuts to the

210.

(paragraph 6.).

examples 1, 2
as specified:

and 3

are

used, overseal the fasteners and edge seal the earth plate

with sealant

(7)

(a)

For method 21 in

paragraph 4.A.(2).

(b)

For method 48 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

When

example

4 is

used, overseal the exposed surface of the earth plate and the bolt heads, bolt

tails and nuts, with sealant,

(8)

as

specified:

(a)

For method 21 in

paragraph 4.A.(2).

(b)

For method 49 in

paragraph 4.A.(3).

Attach the wires to the earth

plate.

(a) Immediately before connection of the tags,


earth plate with solvent (Item 201).

(b)

Install the

clean the~

tags and the mating surfaces of the

tags and fasteners Torque tighten the fasteners if necessary.

NOTE: The nuts

on

all unused studs

20-1 0-5016

are

to be

tightened.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

METHOD 21

~L

EARTH PLATES

OVERSEALED

r-i

STRUCTURE
ALL END OPENINGS TO

EXAMPLE 1

BE COVERED IN SEALANT

EARTH TERMINAL

EARTH TERMINAL

;L\

STRUCTURE

STRUCTURE

ALL END OPENINGS TO

ALLEND OPENINGS TO
EXAMPLE 2

BE COVERED IN SEALANT

EXAMPLE 3

BE COVERED IN SEALANT

EARTH TERMINAL

STRUCTURE

EXAMPLE 4

M7575

HAOOB986431AA

Electrical

Figure 215
Bonding Methods

21, 48 and 49

20-1 0-5016

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

V. Methods 22 and 31

(Figure 216).

Earth lead installation, oversealed

(1)

Clean to bare metal the


remove

contact of the structure


area

(paragraph 3.).

Make

extends for 0.04 to 0.16 in.

(1

sure

that when you


the

mm) around

to 4

faces.

contacting
(2)

point of

nonconductive materials the

plated steel, corrosion resistant steel


remove the cadmium plating.

If the structure is of

only if specified. Do

tag(s)

(3)

Clean the

(4)

Assemble the

or

titanium, the seat washer is installed

not

and the related fasteners with solvent


and fasteners

tag(s)

as

shown in

(Item 201).

Figure

211.

Torque tighten

the fasteners

as

necessary.
Do

(6)

For method 22 overseal the

(7)

Make

resistance test

(paragraph 6.).

(5)

sure

unprotected

(8)

assembly

with sealant

as

specified

in

paragraph 4.A.(2).

overlaps the existing protective finish

that the sealant

to exclude moisture from

surfaces.

For method 31

use

sealant

as

example 2 which is oversealed

specified in paragraph 4.A.(2) except


specified in paragraph 4.A.(3j.

for the rivet earth bolt in

as

NOTE: The maximum number of connections allowed at any

NOTE: The bolt is not intended

as a

one

earth

point

is 4.

conducting path.

METHOD 22
EARTH LEAD INSTALLATION

OVERSEALED

STEEL WASHERS

CADMIUM PLATED
RIVET EARTH BOLT

STRUCTURE
NUT AND WASHER

EXAMPLE 2

EXAMPLE 1

M7619

HAOOB986477AA

Electrical

20-1 0-5016

Figure 216
Bonding Methods

22 and 31

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

W. Method 23
Earth return via

(1)

(2)

Clean to

single pole fitting (Figure 217).


bare

metal

(paragraph 3.).
0.04 to 0.12 in.

(1

Clean the bared

(3) Apply

the

area

of the

areas

and the

lampholder,

Assemble the

(6)

Do

form

the

washer and locknut with solvent

the correct surface treatment to the bare metal

(5)

will

electrical

sure

(4) Apply a thin film of silicone compound (Item 008)


point as specified in paragraph 4.A.(5).

which

structure

that when you remove nonconductive materials the


to 3 mm) around the contacting faces.

Make

lampholder

resistance test

as

shown in

example

earth

point

extends for

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

to the bared

or

area

area

and the

lampholder earthing

2, and tighten the locknut.

(paragraph 6.).

NOTE: When silicone

compound (Item 008)

is used, any cleaned

area

cannot be made

good

local surface finish.

METHOD 23
EARTH RETURN VIA SINGLE POLE FITTING

LAMPHOLDER
LAMPHOLDER

STRUCTURE

;L\

POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY
EXAMPLE 1

EXAMPLE 2
M7576
HAOOB986432AA

Electrical

Figure 217
Bonding Method -23

20-1 0-5016

with

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

X. Method 24
Earth return via

(1)

mating structure, oversealed (Figure 218).

Clean to bare metal at the


you

points of

contact of the structure

conductive materials the

remove non

area

(paragraph 3.). Make sure that when


(1 to 4 mm) around the

extends for 0.04 to 0.16 in.

contacting faces.
(2)

Clean the bared faces and the related fasteners with solvent

(3) Apply
(4) Dry
(5)

Do

the correct surface treatment to the bare metal

assemble the
a

component

resistance test

(6) Overseal

all

(Item 201).

(paragraph 3.).

to the structure, and attach with the correct fasteners.

(paragraph 6.).

joints, edges and

(7) Make sure that the


unprotected surfaces

sealant

the fasteners with sealant to

overlaps

the

paragraph 4.A.(2).

existing protective

finish to exclude moisture from

METHOD 24
EARTH RETURN VIA MATING STRUCTURE

OVERSEALED

STRUCTURE RECEIVING
EARTH RETURN LOAD

BRACKET CARRYING
EARTH RETURN LOAD

M7577

HAOOB986433AA

Figure 218
Bonding- 24

Electrical

Y. Method 30
Refer to Method 3A.

Z. Method 31
Refer to Method 22.

20-10-5016

Raytheon

niruaft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

AA. Method 41
Refer to Method 1.

AB. Method 41A


Refer to Method 1A.

AC. Method 42
Refer to Method 3.

AD. Method 42A


Refer to Method 3A.

AE. Method 43
Refer to Method 7.

AF. Method 44
Refer to Method 8.

AG. Method 45
Refer to Method 9.

AH. Method 46
Refer to Method 11.

Al. Method 46A


Refer to Method 11A.

AJ. Method 47
Refer to Method 12.

AK. Methods 48 and 49


Refer to Method 21.

20-1 0-5016

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


DEGREASING OF METALLIC MATERIALS
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this Maintenance Practice make sure the warning and caution in
GENERAL DESCRIPTION are read and understood (Ref. 20-00-00, 001).
WARNING: Do not let the skin
this includes

(item 634)

on

topic

on protective clothes (Item 682),


(Item
679) and mask. Use barrier cream
gloves (Item 675), safety glasses
areas of exposed skin.
come

into contact with solvents. Put

WARNING: When you use cleaner solvents, make sure that there is sufficient airflow in the work area.
If you breathe fumes, rest in a warm area with a sufficient airflow. Get immediate medical
aid.

If skin contamination occurs,

WARNING:

gently

and

thoroughly

clean with

running water,

and

non-abrasive soap. Get immediate medical aid.


WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses. Flush with plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes, occasionally lift the upper and lower eyelids. Get
immediate medical aid.
WARNING: Do not eat, drink

or

smoke

during

work. If

ingestion

occurs

rinse the mouth with water.

Get immediate medical attention.

EquipmentlMaterials

Partlltem No.

Cleaner, solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

219

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Paraffin

267

(Chapter 20-95-201)

287

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Solvent, thixotropic gel

289

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

292

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Cleaner, solvent

294

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

673

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20;95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Fabric

(Kerosene)

wipe,

moist

non woven

cream

White cotton
Protective

gloves

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective

shield

clothing

Vapor degreasing

tank

Local

supply

20-1 0-9053

Ral~heMI

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

A. Introduction

practice gives the procedure for the cleaning of metal surfaces and the removal of
applied to them for protection. Cleaning is to be done by vapor
any, oil,
cold
both.
degreasing,
swabbing or
Vapor degreasing produces a clean, dry surface free of organic
contamination that is suitable without further treatment for chemical film, anodizing etc.
This maintenance

grease, etc, which has been

2. STORAGE
Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

storage instructions.

3. VAPOR DEGREASING
A.

Preparation
(1)

Parts with too much

to be washed in

cleaner solvent

cloth

heavy greases, oils or forming materials on the surface are


(Item 219) or paraffin (Item 267) or alternatively swabbed with
(Item 621) soaked with solvent (Item 201). Do again if necessary.

NOTE: Certain thick greases or contaminates that


easily removed if wiped with a clean cloth.

(2) Completely dry


moisture

(3)

Make

the

parts

with

condensation

or

are

clean cloth, make

sure

resistant to the

that any

complex

cleaning, may

areas

be

more

which could trap

also dried.

sure

that there is

sure

that the cleaner solvent

no

are

clean lint free

swarf etc.

on

the

parts and if any is found

remove

with

compressed

air

jet.
(4)

Make
as

(5)

specified by

Make

sure

supplier

the

(Item 294)

in the vapor

degreasing

tank is to the correct level

of the tank.

that the cleaner solvent in the tank is heated to its

boiling point

of 160" F

(70" C).

B. Procedure

(1)

Place the

weight)

in

parts

for

handling

suitable basket
in such

way

or

as

attach to wires
to minimize the

(which must be sufficiently strong to carry the


entrapment of liquid solvent in hollows in the

parts.
NOTE: Mild steel baskets

(2)

Immerse the

(3)

Parts

are

parts

to be

or

wires that

are

visibly

rusted

are

not to be used.

into the vapor with the minimum disturbance of the vapor level.

kept

in the bath until vapor stops condensing on the surface. The process time
parts. The parts are then to be removed slowly from the bath as the

increases with the size of the

process will be

(4) If

the

part is

complete.

not clean after removal from the

the process. Lance

spraying

with the hot

bath, allow it to cool to

liquid

room

temperature and repeat


deposits that are not

solvent will assist with grease

easily removed.
NOTE: For titanium and titanium

20-10-9053

alloys, the total immersion

time must not exceed 10 minutes.

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(5)

Parts shall not be handled with bare hands after

be

degreasing.

AIRFRAME

White cotton

gloves (item 673) shall

worn.

parts shall be kept clean and dry prior to further processing which should
be conducted without delay and before the onset of surface oxidation (once surface oils are
removed the metal will rust quite quickly).

(6) Following degreasing

4. COLD

SOLVENT

the

DEGREASING

NOTE: This procedure may be used where it is not

A,

practical

to clean

components by vapor degreasing.

Preparation
(1)

Do

B, Swab

paragraph

3.A.

(I)thru (3)

must be contained in

(Item 292)

(1) Completely degrease


292).
NOTE:
Parts

(Item 287)

are

to be

or

the

parts with

(Item 289)

dispenser to prevent

clean cloth

(Item 621)

may also be used for

contamination of the solvent.

moistened with cleaner solvent

NOTE: Cloths must not be

and

placed against

contaminated surfaces between

degreased area shall be dried before the solvent evaporates using


prevent re- depositing grease or loose contaminates.

The
to

NOTE: Do not allow air

evaporation,

(Item

cleaning.

progressively degreased over small areas at a time with a


solvent. Replace the cloth as necessary when it becomes dirty.

thoroughly

free cloth moistened with

(3)

parts.

Degreasing

NOTE: Solvent

(2)

to prepare the

because this will

re-deposit

new

lint

degreasing operations.

dry,

lint free cloth in order

dissolved materials

on

the

surface.

(4)

Parts shall not be handled with bare hands after

be

(5)

degreasing.

White cotton

gloves (Item 673) shall

worn.

degreasing the parts must be kept clean and dry prior to further processing which should be
delay and before the onset of surface oxidation (once surface oils are removed the
metal will rust quickly).

After

done without

5. INSPECTIONICHECK

A, Procedure
(1)

Make

sure

that

parts

are

thoroughly degreased.

20-1 0-9053

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


PREPARATION OF RUBBER SURFACES FOR BONDING
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. INFORMATION
WARNING: Before you do this Maintenance Practice make sure that the warning and caution in
GENERAL DESCRIPTION are read and understood (Ref. 20-00-00, 001).

topic

into contact with sulfuric acid

(Item 502) which causes severe


on protective clothing (Item 682),
gloves (Item 675), safety
glasses (Item 679) and mask. Use barrier cream (Item 634) on areas of exposed skin.

WARNING: Do not let the skin

come

this includes

burns. Put

WARNING: When you use cleaner solvents or sulfuric acid make sure that there is sufficient airflow in
the work area. If you breath the fumes, rest in a warm area with a sufficient airflow. Get
immediate medical aid.
WARNING: If skin contamination occurs, gently and thoroughly clean with
non-abrasive soap. get medical aid if irritation persists.

warm

running water,

and

WARNING: If eye contamination occurs, check for and remove any contact lenses. Flush with plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes, holding the upper and lower eyelids apart. Get immediate
medical aid.
WARNING: Do not eat, drink

or

smoke

during

work. Should

ingestion

occur

rinse mouth with water.

Get immediate medical aid.


CAUTION: When metal containers which contain sulfuric acid
the

possibility

of hydrogen gas

CAUTION: Sulfuric acid is

are

opened use non-sparking tools,

being present.

highly reactive. Prevent accidental

contact with water.

EquipmentlMaterial

ParVltem No.

Cleaner, solvent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Aerosil

328

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Treatment Solution

Halogen Wipe

350A

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Sulfuric acid

502

(Chapter 20-95-501)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Distilled water

622

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Abrasive paper, silicone carbide

627

(Chapter 20-95-601)

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

676

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

cream

Protective

Brush

gloves

Soft

No Metallic Parts

Safety glasses/face
Protective

clothing

Tape, vinyl

electric

Shallow
Small

plastic

shield

bath

polythene,

ceramic

or

glass

container

604A

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Local

supply

Local

supply

20-1 0-9070

because of

Ray~heon

niriraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

A. Introduction

performance) of a bonded joint depends on the properties of both the adhesive


joined together as well as other media influences such as water, heat, etc. This
maintenance practice gives the procedure for the preparation of natural rubber, neoprene, nitrile, butyl,
ethylene-propylene and styrene-butadiene rubber surfaces prior to their bonding, to give good affinity
with high strength adhesives. It is not be used on cellular rubber materials.
The

durability (long

term

and materials to be

Two

procedures

are

given,

the choice of which to

use

is to be decided after reference to Table 201.

(1) Cyclizing
(2) Satreat

Process

NOTE: The satreat process is less hazardous than the Cyclizing process,

prepared

with

halogen wipe

solution

as

the surface is

(Item 350A).

Table 201
Relative Effectiveness of Pretreatment Processes
Sulfuric Acid

Rubber

Satreat Solution
Effectiveness of solvent

or

solution

Butyl

Ethylene propylene

Natural

Neoprene

Nitral

Styrene-butadiene

Key:

Effective,

Recommended, E

Not Effective

2.STORAGE
Refer to

data sheets for

Manufacturers/Suppliers

storage instructions.

3. PREPARATION
A. Procedure for

Cyclizing

(1) Thoroughly clean the surface of the rubber part


(Item 621) dampened with solvent (Item 230).
(2) Allow

(3)

to air

dry

at

room

temperature for

are

NOTE: Make

that the

edges

of the

elements when the rubber is

(4)

Make

sure

are

to be

20-~0-9070

with

clean lint free cloth

protective tape
cyclized.

protected with acid proof tape (Item 604A).


is

adhering

the bath contains sufficient concentrated sulfuric acid

rubber surface to be bonded.

Jun.04~n"o4"

by wiping

minimum of 5 minutes.

to be not to be bonded

All surfaces which


sure

to be bonded

to

prevent ingress of corrosive

(Item 502)

for immersion of the

ReYIfNeee

Aircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

NOTE: A thixotropic form of acid paste can be made up by adding approximately 5% Aerosil (Item
328) to sulfuric acid (Item 502). This is the suitable for direct application to the surface of
the rubber to be bonded without the

use

of

masking tape.

B. Procedure for Satreat Process

(1)

Do

paragraph 3.A. (i)and (2).

4. MIXING
Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

mixing

instructions.

5. APPLICATION
A. Procedure for

(1)

Cyclizing

exposed face of the masked rubber is immersed in the bath containing sulfuric acid
alternatively treated with the thixotropic acid paste las the NOTE in paragraph 3.A. (4)) which is
be brushed on (Item 676).

The

NOTE: A

sample

or

to

of rubber to be etched may be immersed in the etchant bath as a control, to


required to give a satisfactory etch. Generally this will be within the time

establish the time

range of 2 to 5 minutes. Table 202 below is


the different types of rubber.

(2)

Remove the rubber from the bath,


minutes.

(3)

Do

Dry

or remove

the rubber surface with

general guide

depth

of the

crazing

to the times that

can

the Aerosil acid and rinse in cold

clean lint free cloth

check of the rubber surface to make


the

guide

sure

should

be necessary for

running

water for 15

(Item 621).

that it has been

uniformly

and

finely

crazed. As

approximate 10% of the rubber thickness.

Table 202

Typical Etching

Temperature

Rubber

Hardness

Dwell Time

(Polymer)

(IRHD)

(Minutes)

Natural

up to 50

50 to 70

1.5

70 and above

Polychloroprene

up to 70

(Neoprene)

70 and. above

Acrylonitrile

up to 70

(Nitriles)

70 and above

NOTE: Excessive

(4)

Times at Room

crazing is

NOT

acceptable

If the surface condition has not been achieved


unsuitable for

or

the surface condition of the rubber is still

it may be roughened with a rotary file, or similar tool until the skin of the
rubber is broken. As an alternative for thin rubber (up to 0.06 in (1.5 mm)) abrasive paper (Item

627) grade

bonding,

150/180 may be used.

20-~ 0-9070

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(5)

Remove the masking tape if used and any traces of


(Item 621) dampened with solvent cleaner (Item 230).

AIRFRAME

adhesives etc.

using

clean lint free cloth

B. Procedure for Satreat Process

(1)

Pour

enough mix of Halogen wipe solution (Item 350A) for immediate


or glass container and keep the bi~lk container sealed.

use

into

small

polythene,

ceramic

(2) Apply halogen wipe


bonded. Allow to dry
(3) Clean

(4)

treatment solution with

for 30 minutes at

the brush with solvent

(Item 230)

room

temperature.

Do

water break test, wash

room

soft clean brush

and wash with

small test

area

over

warm

the

area

soapy water. Allow brush to air

of the surface with distilled water

clean lint free cloth. If water does not break into

been carried out

(Item 676)

to be

temperature.

droplets

(Item 622)

dry

at

and

this will confirm that the treatment has

sufficiently.

NOTE: After the halogen wipe treatment has been


adhesive may be applied directly to it.

performed

and the surface allowed to

dry,

the

6. INSPECTION
A. Procedure

(1)

Make

sure

that the

bonding

bond.

20-10-9070

surface has

suitable appearance which is conductive to

good

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

VERY HIGH TEMPERATURE


1.

AIRFRAME

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

SEALANi~

General
WARNING:

BEFORE YOU DO THIS MAINTENANCE PRACTICE MAKE SURE THAT THE WARNING
AND CAUTION IN TOPIC GENERAL

DESCRIPTION, OF THIS MANUAL, ARE READ

AND UNDERSTOOD.

WARNING:

PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING


SAFETY GLASSES

(ITEM 679)

(ITEM 682),

THIS INCLUDES GLOVES

AND MASK. USE BARRIER CREAM

(ITEM 675),
(ITEM 634) ON

AREAS OF EXPOSED SKIN.

WARNING:

WHEN YOU USE CLEANER SOLVENTS MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW
IN THE WORK AREA. IF YOU BREATH THE FUMES, REST IN A WARM AREA WITH A

SUFFICIENT AIRFLOW. GET MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

IF SKIN CONTAMINATION OCCURS, GENTLY AND THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITH

RUNNING WATER, AND NON-ABRASIVE SOAP. GET MEDICAL AID IF IRRITATION


PERSISTS.

WARNING:

IF EYE CONTAMINATION

OCCURS, CHECK FOR AND REMOVE ANY CONTACT

LENSES. FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES, HOLDING


THE UPPER AND LOWER EYELIDS APART. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

WARNING:

DO NOT

EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE DURING WORK. SHOULD INGESTION OCCUR RINSE

MOUTH WITH WATER. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

A.

Introduction
This maintenance

practice gives the method

compartments,

to

prevent flash fires

part Silicone

synthetic

or

spreading beyond

rubber based sealants and

the passage of air, fluids and vapors. The


withstand

The

temperature of 2000 "F

sealing compounds

used in this

Raytheon

the firewalls. The materials

are

designed

sealing compounds

(1093"C)

as

are

engine

primerless,

to seal firewall structures

in this maintenance

practice

two

against

will

for 15 minutes.

procedure will seal

wide. No attempt should be made to seal

Customer

to be used to seal gaps in areas such

larger

gaps. If

gaps of not

larger

more

than 0.25 in.

(6.35 mm.)

gaps exist refer to:

Aircraft

Company
Support Department

10511 East Central

Wichita
KS 67206
U.S.A.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000
Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-11-1040
.Page

201

Jun.Oe

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES
B.

Equipmem/Materials

Equipment/Material

Part/item No.

Cleaner, Solvent

201

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Degreasing, agent

230

(Chapter 20-95-201)

Compound, sealing

364

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Compound, sealing

366

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Compound, sealing

367

(Chapter 20-95-301)

Lint free cloth

621

(Chapter 20-95-601)

Barrier

634

(Chapter 20-95-601)

645

(Chapter 20-95-601)

675

(Chapter 20-95-601)

679

(Chapter 20-95-601)

682

(Chapter 20-95-601)

cream

Spatula
Protective

gloves

Safety glasses/face
Protective

Putty

shield

clothing

knife

Pressure gun

2.

Local

supply

Local

supply

Storage
Refer to

(1)
3.

AIRFRAME

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for storage instructions.

Preparation
(1)

The relevant

thoroughly de-greased with a clean cloth (Item 621) soaked with


(Item 201), degreasing agent (Item 230) or other approved cleaner. Always pour
cloth to avoid contaminating the solvent supply.

areas

must be

cleaner solvent
solvent

(2)

Use

on

to

second clean cloth to

redeposition
4.

of contaminates

on

the cleaned surface before the solvent evaporates to prevent


the substrate.

Mixing
(1)

5.

dry

Refer to

Manufacturers/Suppliers

data sheets for

mixing

instructions.

Application
A.

Procedure

(1)

Fill gaps with


knife.

(2)

Make
of the

sealing compound (Items 364,

366

or

367)

sealing compound is pushed through


assembly which is being sealed, to form a key.

sure

that the

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

with either

spatula (Item 645)

or

putty

the gap and adheres to the other side

20-11-1040
Page 202
Jun.02

Raytheon Aircraft
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(3)

To make

fillet

along

the

edges

and

AIRFRAME

seams:of components a pressure gun with

1/8 to 3/16 in.

diameter nozzle may be used.


B.

Sealing compound (Item 364)


(1)

The mixed

(2)

The

sealing compound will

application

time of the mixed

cure

in 48 hours at

sealing compound

temperature of 25"C (77"F) and 50% RH.

is up to 4 hours, with

tack free time of 20

minutes.
C.

Sealing compound (Item


(1)

The mixed
Allow to

(2)

The

366 and

367)

sealing compounds

cure

cure

in 48 hours at

for at least 72 hours before

exposing

temperature of 25"C (77"6) and 50% RH.

to heat.

application time of-the mixed sealing compound is

2 hours with

tack free time not greater

than 4 hours.

6.

Inspection
(1)

Make

sure

that all gaps have been filled.

EFFECTIVITY:
125 Series 1-1000

Hawker 800, 1000, 800XP

20-11-1040
Page

203

Jun.02

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

PRECIPITATION STATIC

(P-STATIC)

TEST

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
i. INFORMATION
WARNING:

Very high voltages

will be

present

on

both the

airplane

and test

equipment during

this

test.

WARNING:

Keep

WARNING: The

the test site and

airplane

high voltage supply

under test

Isopropyl

dry

as

possible during testing.


prevent electrocution.

Partlltem No.

diagnostic

Dayton-Granger

test set

ion flood wand


Electrostatic

clean and

current level must be limited in order to

EquipmentlMaterial
Electrostatic

as

Model 17650

DG P/N 17624

charge

Sweeney

meter

Item 206

alcohol

Model 1127E

(Ref. 20-95-201)

A. Introduction
Thismaintenance
as

P-Static)

test

practice gives

on

the

procedure for
airplanes.

general Precipitation Static (sometimes referred

to

all Hawker Series

P-Static refers to the electrostatic

charging of

an

airplane

in

flight, leading

to electrostatic noise in the

from DC up through 1 GHz. Radio frequency interference (RFI) typically occurs


between 10 KHz and 1 GHz. The electrostatic noise can disrupt not only communication and navigation

frequency spectrum
systems, but also

undesirable effects

on other airplane systems. Three types of electrostatic


generated by an isolated area situated on the airplane where, as the
airplane charges, it will reach a potential at which the spark jumps the gap from the isolated area to the
airplane structure. Corona noise occurs around wing tips, vertical and horizontal stabilizers, and other
protrusions. It occurs when the airplane accumulates sufficient charge that it will bleed current and
discharge off the trailing edge of a protrusion. Streamering noise is generated over dielectric surfaces
such as radomes, fiberglass winglets, and other composite panels positioned on frontal impact areas of
the airplane. As particles strike, they deposit an electron on the dielectric surface. As more particles
impact on this isolated pool, the voltage rises until it reaches a flash-over point. When the pool of charge
flashes over the surface of the dielectric material, it generates broadband radio frequency (RF) noise.
The location of a charged area on an airplane which causes this unwanted RF noise can be pinpointed
using an electrostatic test set. Once the source of P-Static has been identified, corrective action can be
taken to eliminate andlor quietly bleed off the electrostatic charges in flight, thereby, eliminating the

noise may

occur.

cause

Arcing

noise is

unwanted RF noise.

2. P-STATIC TEST
NOTE: The

procedure that follows applies to the Dayton-Granger Model 17650 electrostatic diagnostic test
acceptable to use other makes and models however, when an alternate test set is used,
follow the manufacturers safety precautions, guidelines and instructions provided with the
equipment.
set. it is

Rayfheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

A.

Safety

AIRFRAME

Precautions

It is very important that extreme caution be used when working on, or in the immediate
P-Static test in progress, all personnel must know the safety precautions that follow:

Obey

the

warnings given

in

vicinity of

paragraph 1.

a potential for injury if any part of the body comes


equipment, the airplane, or other equipment that is at a high voltage
level. Injury can result from involuntary muscle reactions to the shock produced by the test
equipment during the completion of this test.

Even with

current limited test set, there is

in contact with the test

The test
of the
Test

area

shall be

airplane

personnel

The

free of unnecessary

in the close

equipment, especially

must have free and unobstructed movement to and from the

need to watch for

electrostatic

kept

proximity

under test.

trip

and become

charge

voltages used

hazards.

Equipment

in these tests

near

the test

airplane

area

can

with the

collect

an

shock hazard.

can

force

current to flow

This

insulator at lower

stored

item that would be

over an

an

current flow

can actually occur across the


voltages.
unexpected
surface of an insulating material that is contaminated with dust, dirt, oil or some other foreign
substances. All test equipment and other items which will be handled near the charged
airplane or test equipment must be kept free of surface contaminants at all times. Isopropyl
alcohol (Item 206) may be used to clean surfaces. Isopropyl alcohol is flammable, therefore

the test

Do not exit

supply

shall be clear of all containers, residues

area

enter the

or

airplane after testing

is in the safe condition. Make

drained before

Safety ground

entering
for the

or

sure

has

that the

or

vapors before the test initiation.

begun, unless the high voltage power


airplane charge has been sufficiently

exiting the airplane.

airplane

and test set shall be

present and ready

To protect test personnel from shock hazards, the airplane shall


earth ground when not under high voltage charge conditions.
"HIGH VOLTAGE"
Additional
means

safety

warning signs shall be posted in the test area


by roping off the test area or isolating
available to limit access to only test personnel.

that may be

times, these

especially

test methods will

flammable

liquids

cause arcs

and

in

quality

at all times.

use

always

shall be assured

Personnel not participating in the test activity, or acting


safety representative shall be kept out of the test area.
At

to

be connected to

to

alert

the test

assurance

sparks. Materials which

and gases shall be removed from the test

area

are

personnel.
by any

area

capacity,

or

flammable,

for the duration

of the test.

The

airplane

under test must have its fuel system


test activities.

completely filled

with fuel in all tanks

topped off during all

A Ground Power Unit

battery

(GPU)

shall be available to

supply charging current for the airplane


airplane during P-Static test.
maintain the airplane battery charge to its

between tests. Do not leave the GPU connected to the

only in between
possible capacity.

Use the GPU


maximum

Jun.OS20-11-1041

test activities to

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

NOTE: In

AIRFRAME

(applicable only to P-Static test sets that utilize a charged wand to sweep the
the airplane as the test set return) where the PS busses must be energized in
order to evaluate P-Static effects on PS bus powered equipment, it is acceptable to leave the
GPU connected and powered up. In these cases the GPU must be kept as clean and dry as the
airplane under test.
some cases

airplane,

and

use

B. Procedure

(1)

Set up the electrostatic diagnostic test set (Dayton-Granger Model 17650) as directed
operators manual, and connect the ion flood wand (DG P/N 17624) to the test set.

(2)

Station

by

the

observer inside the airplane to monitor the system which has been reported to be
by P-Static. This may include but is not limited to the monitoring of any one or all of the
following systems.
an

affected

VHF COMM
HFCOMM
VHF NAV
EADI and EHSI

Audio

System

Compass System
Master

Warning System

(3)

In order to conserve battery power, engage only the required circuit breakers
operation of the system(s) being monitored.

(4)

If VHF NAV is

strength
signal.

to

just pull

(5) Fully charge


NOTE: In

one

the

of the

to establish proper

systems being monitored generate a VOR test signal of appropriate


flags and set the cockpit up to properly display the received VOR

in the NAV

airplane batteries and disconnect the GPU from the airplane

if not

required.

(applicable only to P-Static test sets that utilize a charged wand to sweep
use the airplane as the test set return) where the PS busses must be
airplane,
in
order
to evaluate P-Static effects on PS bus powered equipment, it is
energized
the
to
GPU connected and powered up. In these cases the GPU must be
leave
acceptable
and
clean
the airplane under test.
as
as
kept
dry
some cases

the

(6)

If connected,

(7) Set
(8)

and

any earth

ground

diagnostic

test set

remove

the electrostatic

and test set

ground

output from 50 KV

rod from the

airplane.

to 100 KV.

While the observer inside the

airplane monitors the appropriate system(s), sweep the skin of the


airplane with the ion flood wand at a distance of approximately 6 in. (152 mm) from the wand to the
skin. Heavily flood all areas of the airplane paying particular attention to areas or panels made of
composite materials, i.e. windows, antennas, radomel landing gear doors, access panels,
aerodynamic fairings, flap hinge covers, static wicks, etc.
NOTE: Do not touch the skin of the

airplane

with ion flood wand.

20-11-1041

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

(9)

Monitor the necessary system(s) for any evidence that the


with the ion flood wand.

AIRFRAME

system

has been affected

by

the

charge being applied


(10)

If any anomalies are observed, investigate to find the location of, and the reason for the
disturbance. (i.e. improper electrical bonding, missing conductive coating, normal noise coupled
onto

an

antenna.)

(11) While sweeping the airplane exterior with the ion flood wand, note any area that exhibits corona or
streamering. Make note of any and all observations and anomalies, investigate, and address as
necessary.

(12)

If

available,

use a

Sweeney

that remains

charge
has stopped.

Model 1127E electrostatic

individual

charge

meter

or

equivalent

to evaluate the

surfaces after ion bombardment from the ion flood wand

airplane
high level electrostatic charges are not stored on any airplane
surface. If any anomalies are observed, investigate to find the reason for the lingering charge. (i.e.
improper electrical bonding, missing conductive coating, normal noise coupled onto an antenna.)

C. Close

(1)

Jun.05~05""

Make

on

sure

that

Up

Make

sure

that the work

area

20-11-1041

is clean and clear of tools and other

equipment.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
APPROVED SUPPLIERS
i. INFORMATION

topic gives the names and addresses of the suppliers (where known) for the consumable materials
to complete tasks given in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual. Each listed supplier is given a suppliers
code, for example:

This

required

The

NA.# for North American

suppliers

UK.# for United

and

suppliers

code is

Kingdom

cross

referenced

Internationalsuppliers

against

the related material in the consumable materials subsection.

supplier listed is in the Federal Manufacturers


Catalogue H4-3, refer to the relevant website for details.

Where the

The consumable materials which

following

subsections of this

are

listed in the relevant

Code

Catalogue H4-1, H4-2

topics throughout

the manual

and NATO Code

are

given

in the

Chapter:

20-95-11 Greases and lubricants

(less

oils and

hydraulic fluids)

20-95-101 Fluids and oils


20-95-201

Cleaning agents, paint strippers

20-95-301 Adhesives,
20-95-401 Enamels,

jointing

and

and release

sealing compounds

lacquers, paints, primers

20-95-501 Surface finishes

agents

and varnishes

chemical and electrochemical

20-95-601 Miscellaneous materials


are listed within brackets. Additional specifications and references under the
approved equivalents or acceptable alternatives in relation only to the specific
application. Approval is given through the Raytheon Aircraft Process and Environmental Laboratory (Dept.
037, nonmetallic section) Wichita, Kansas, USA. Seech Specifications and Process Specifications are
internal documents and are not available for general distribution.

Specifications
same

and references

item number

are

The column headed "Remarks" has been


observe

expanded to provide additional reference information. Please


approved usage. Federal codes have been removed and

which have been removed from

products
operators should refer

to the relevant website for details.

For the consumable materials necessary for the maintenance,


AMM.

servicing

and

repair of

the APU refer to

Chapter 49, SERVICING MATERIALS of the


The consumable materials for the main

engines

are

given

in the related Overhaul Manual for the

engines

concerned.

Commercially

available materials

can

be obtained from

Any Reputable Supplier (ARS).

20-95-00

M"a"ro~

Raytheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

2. ADDRESSES

AIRFRAME

NORTH AMERICAN SUPPLIERS

Suppliers

Suppliers

Code

Address

NA.1

Replaced by

NA.8

NA.2

Replaced by

NA.5

NA.3

Formerly: Allube Division Far Best


Corporation 6807 McKinley Avenue
Angeles CA 90001-1525 USA

Obsolete

NA.4

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

HellermannTyton
7930 North Faulkner Rd PO Box 245017

Los

Formerly: Wiring Accessories Corporation Ltd


Ajar Ontario L1S 3CX Canada

PO Box 220

Milwaukee WI 53224 USA


www. htamericas. com

+1
NA.5

Dow

(414)

355 7341

Coming Corporation
2200 West

Salzburg

Rd

PO Box 997

Formerly: Midland MI 48686


Alpha-Molykote Corporation

and

Auburn MI 48611-0997 USA

www.dowcorning.com
+1

(517)

496 4586

ChevronTexaco

NA.6

1111

Corporation

Bagby

Formerly:

Street Houston TX 77002

USA

Texaco Worldwide Lubricants 780

Clinton Drive PO Box 626 Galena Park TX


77547 USA

www.texaco.com
+1

(713)

Exxon Mobil

NA.7

5959

666 8000

Formerly:

Corporation
Las

Colinas

Blvd

Irving

TX

75039-2298 USA

exxonmobil.com

+1(972)444
NA.8

Shell Oil

1138

Company

1 Shell Plaza PO Box 2463 Houston TX


77002 USA
www.countonshell.com
Shell Chemical

Company

PO Box 2463 15th Floor OSP


Houston TX 77252-2463 USA
www.shellchemicals.com

Mar.OG~e,G

20-95-00

Resins

Exxon

Company

USA PO Box 2180

Houston TX 77252-2180 USA

Raytheon

nircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.9

Remarks

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)


Sunbeam

Corporation

5975

Falbourne

Street

Mississauga

Ontario L5R 3V8 Canada

Formerly: Sunbeam Corporation (Canada) Ltd


1040 Islington Avenue South Toronto Ontario
M8Z 4R5 Canada

www.sunbeam.com

+1(905)501
NA.10

0145

Formerly:

Replaced by NA.59

Marine Colloids Inc 2 Edison Place

PO Box 70
NA.11

Bostik

Findley

211

Formerly:

Inc

Street

Boston

Middleton

Springfield

NJ 07081-0070 USA

BE Chemical Co

MA

01949-2128 USA
www. bosti kfi n d

+1

NA.12

Bostik

(978)

ley- u s .com

750 7293

Canada Ltd

Findley

4565 Blvd

Metropolitain

East Montreal

Formerly: USM Canada


Anjou Quebec

Maritime

Ltd 7700 Rue de la


H1J 2A8 Canada

Quebec H1R 124 Canada


www.

+1

NA.13

bostikfindley-us. com

(514)

593 0413

ATOFINA Chemicals Inc


2000

Market

Street

Formerly:
Philadelphia

PA

Turco Products Inc 7300 Bolsa

Avenue Westminster CA 92684-3600 USA

19103-3222 USA
www.atofinachemicals.com
+1

NA.14

(215)419

7591

Chemetall Oakite Products Inc


50

Valley

Rd

Formerly:

Berkeley Heights

NJ 07922

Chemetall Oakite 16961 Knott

Avenue La Miranda CA 90638-6015 USA

USA

www.aerospace.chemetall.com
+1

NA.15

(908)

464 4658

GE Plastics
1

Plastics

Avenue

Pittsfield

MA

01201-3630 USA

www.geplastics.com
+1

(413)

448 7731

20-95-00

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.16

Suppliers

Address

PRC-DeSoto International

Formerly: Courtaulds Aerospace Inc,

5454 San Fernando Rd PO Box 1800


Glendale CA 91209 USA

(818)

Box

Prospect

DeSoto

Rd Des Plaines IL

60018 USA and Research 8 Chemical

Corporation

21800 Burbank Blvd PO Box

549 7627

PPG Aircraft Products


PO

Inc 1700 S M1

4226 Woodland Hills CA 91365 USA

www.ppg.com
+1

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

040004

Formerly:

NA.74

Formerly:

NA.75 Aircraft Paints and

Huntsville AL 35804

USA

www.ppg.com
+1

(256)

851 8822

PPG Industries Inc


1 PPG Place 35 N

Pittsburgh

PA 15272

PRC-DeSoto Intl

USA
www.ppg.com
+1

NA.17

3M

(412) 434 2810

Company
Product

Information

Center

Bldg

304-01-01 St Paul MN 55144-1000 USA


www.3m.com
+1

NA.18

(651)

Henkel Loctite
1001

737 7117

Formerly: 705

Corporation

Trout Brook

Crossing Rocky

Hill

CT 06067 USA

North Mountain Rd

Newington

CT 06111 USA and American Sealants

Corporation

www.loctite.com

+1(860)571
NA.19

5465
Obsolete

Formerly: Kingley 8

Keith Ltd 4444 St

Catherine Street West Montreal Canada


NA.20

Obsolete

Formerly: Roger B Coleman 24 Borden Place


Little Silver NJ 07739-1727 USA

NA.21

Exxon Mobil Corporation


3225 Gallows Rd Fairfax VA 22037 USA

Formerly: Mobil Chemical Company Chemical


Coatings Division Route 27 Vineyard Rd
Edison NJ 08818 USA

www.exxonmobil.com
+1
NA.22

(703) 849

6065

Obsolete

Formerly:

Henkel

Corporation

Business Center Suite 1


Horsham PA 19044 USA

20-95-00

Bldg

Horsham
2 300 Welsh Rd

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

NA.23

Obsolete

Remarks

Formerly:

Lake Chemical

Company Chicago

IL USA
NA.24

Obsolete

Formerly:

DuBois Chemicals Inc Industrial

Division 225 East 5th Street Suite 1200


Cincinnati OH 45202-4799 USA
NA.25

D W Davis

Company

Inc

Phillips Avenue PO

3200

Box

1497

Formerly: Canyon Industries


Tempe AZ 85282 USA

PO Box 26342

Racine WI 53401 USA


www.dwdavies.com
+1

NA.26

(262)

637 3933

Parker-Hannifin Corporation
Seal

Group

11751

Ring

2360 Palumbo

Division PO Box
Drive

Lexington

KY 40509-1048 USA
www.

+1

parker.com

(859)

335 5128

NA.27

Formerly: Indosil Company PO Box 951


19547 Victory Rd Reseda CA 91335 USA

Obsolete

NA.28

Replaced by

NA.51

Formerly:

Akzo Nobel

Coatings

Inc

Aerospace

Finishes Division 434 W Meats Avenue

NA.29

E I

Dupont

De Nemours 8

Company

Orange

CA 92665 USA, www.akzonobel.com,

Fax +1

(714)

637 5174

Inc

Performance Lubricants Chemical and

Pigments Dept
Wilmington DE

1007 North Market Street


19898 USA

www.dupont.com
NA.30

Obsolete

Formerly:

Freed Transformers

Company
Corporation

Division of Electronic Transformer

460 Totowa Avenue PO Box 487 Paterson NJ


07544 USA
NA.31

Obsolete

Formerly: Simpson Electric Company Dundee


Elgin IL 60120 USA

Avenue

NA.32

Dukane Corporation
Seacom Division 2900 Dukane Drive St
Charles IL 60174-3395 USA
www.dukane.com
+1

(630) 584

5154

20-95-00

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)

NA.33

Remarks

Formerly: Rectorseal Corporation 2601


Spenwick Drive PO Box 297839 Houston

Obsolete

TX

77055 USA
NA.34

Formerly: National Colloid Corporation PO

Obsolete

Box 293 Garden Grove CA 92642 USA

NA.35

Obsolete

Formerly: Essex Chemical Corporation


Pro-Seal Division 19451 Susanna Coast Rd

Compton CA
NA.36

90221 USA

Formerly: Micro Circuits Corporation New

Obsolete

Buffalo MI USA
NA.37

US Borax Inc
26877

Tourney Drive Valencia CA 91355

Formerly: 3075 Wilshire Blvd PO


Angeles CA 90010 USA

Box 2781

Los

USA
www.borax.com
+1

NA.38

(661) 287 9182

Monogram Systems
800 West Artesia

Compton

Blvd

PO Box 9057

CA 90224-9057 USA

www.monogramsystems.com
+1

NA.39

638 8458

(310)

WD-40 Company
1061

Formerly: PO Box

Cudahy

San

Place

Diego

CA

80607

Zip Code

92138-9021

92110-3929 USA
www.wd40.com
+1

(619)

275 5823

NA.40
NA.41

Formerly: Plexiform

Obsolete

Henkel Surface

Formerly:

Technologies

32100

Stephenson

Heights

MI 48071 USA

Highway

Elmonte CA

Parker and Amchem Ltd

Madison

www.hstna.com
+1
NA.42

(248)

589 4804

Parker Hannifin
Chomerics

Formerly: Chomerics

Corporation
Division

77

Dragon

Woburn MA 01888-4014 USA


www.chomerics.com
+1

(781)

933 4318

20-95-00

Court

Inc

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers

Address

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Formerly: First Brands Corporation 83


Heights Rd Bldg 301 Danbury

Obsolete

NA.43

Remarks

Wooster

CT

06813-1911 USA
NA.44

Enviro

Systems

Inc

PO Box 1260 Seminole OK 74868-1260


USA
www.enviro-ok.com
+1

(405)

NA.45
NA.46

382 0737

Replaced by
Winter

NA.16

Formerly:

Corporation

10560

Markinson

Rd

Dallas TX75238

Dinol US Inc 14826 NE 95th Street

Redmond WA 98052 USA

USA
+1

(214)

NA.47

NA.48

348 6961

Replaced by

NA.16

Fer-Pro Chemical Products


7450

North

McCormick Blvd

PO

Box

1205 Skokie IL 60076-8205 USA

www.federal-mogul.com

+1(847)
NA.49

674 1442

Replaced by

Formerly: Never-Seez Compound Corporation

NA.11 and UK.19

2910 South 18th Avenue Broadview IL 60153


USA
NA.50

Permabond International Corporation


480 South Dean Street

Englewood

NJ

07631-4931 USA

www.permabond.com
+1

NA.51

(201) 567 3747

Akzo Nobel Aerospace

Coatings

East Water Street

Inc

Waukegan IL 60085

Formerly:

US Paint

Corporation

Street St Louis MO 63103 USA

USA
www. a kzo

+1

NA.52

(847)

nobelaerospace .com

625 3200

Replaced by

NA.16

20-95-00

831 S 21st

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.53

Remarks

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Formerly: Dexter/Crown

Corporation

Dexter

1 East Water Street

Waukegan IL 60085

USA

Metro

Aerospace

315

Echelon Rd Donaldson Center PO Box 5695


Greenville SC 29606 USA

www.dexteraero.com

+1
Dexter

(847)

623 8753
Materials Division

Aerospace

Coating Systems(Hysol
Division) 2850 Willow Pass Rd PO Box
312 Bay Point CA 94565-0031

Adhesive

Formerly: NA.69 US Adhesive 8 Coating


Systems Division for UK.99 Aero Consultants
Ltd

www.dexteraero.com
+1

NA.54

(925)

458 8030

Sherwin Williams

Formerly: Pratt and Lambert 16116 East 13th

Company

630 East 13th Street Andover KS 67002

Street PO Box 2153 Wichita KS 67201 USA

USA
www.sherwin-williams.com
+1

(316)

733 4420

NA.55

Formerly:

Obsolete

Chem-Tech 6380

Randolph

San Antonio TX USA

NA.56

Tem-Tex, Solvents Corporation


4208 South General Bruce Drive Temple
TX 76502 (PO. Box 3693, 76505) USA
www.temtexsolvents.com

+1

NA.57

(254)

Raytheon

778 3422

Aircraft

Company

PO Box 85 Wichita KS 67201-0085 USA

www.raytheonaircraft.com
+1

NA.58

(316)

676 8808

Vantico

4917

Dawn

Avenue

48823-5691 USA
www.vantico.com
+1

Page

8Mar.OG

(517)315

9003

20-95-00

East

Lansing

MI

Formerly: Ciba Speciality Chemicals


Polymers Division

Performance

Blvd

Ral~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.59

Suppliers

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

Remarks

Fisher Scientific
2000 Park

Lane

Pittsburgh

PA

15275

USA
www.fishersci.com

+1(800)926
NA.60

1166

Obsolete

Formerly: Levings Marketing

1302 E State

Street PO Box 39 Marshalltown IA 50158 USA


NA.61

Formerly: Dam

Obsolete

Review Avenue

NA.62

Met-All Industries Inc 2900

Long Island City

NY USA

Devcon
30 Endicott Street Danvers MA 01923
USA
www.devcon.com
+1

NA.63

(978)

774 0516

Cadillac Plastics
143 Indusco Court

Troy

MI 48007- 7035

USA
+1
NA.64

(810)

583 9275

Castrol Industrial North American Inc

Speciality
31st

Formerly: 5331

Products Division 1001 West

Street Downers

Grove

IL

E Slauson Avenue Commerce

CA 90040 USA

60515

USA
www.castrolindustriaI

+1(630)
NA.65

Novagard
5109

.com

2414140

Inc

Hamilton

Avenue

Cleveland

OH

44114 USA

www.foamseal-novagard.com

+1(216)881
NA.66

6977

Perrnatex Inc

10 Columbus Blvd Harfford CT 06106

Formerly: Permatex Industrial 705


Newington CT 06111

Mountain Rd

USA

www.permatex.com
+1

(860)

543 6998

20-95-00

North
USA

Raytheon

Aircraft

tompany

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

NA.67

Suppliers

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

D Aircraft Products Inc

Hawk Circle Anaheim CA 92807

1191
USA

www.d-aircraft.com

(714)

+1

NA.68

632 7164

Octagon Process

Inc

596 River Rd

Edgewater

NJ 07020-1192

USA

www.octagonprocess.com

+1(201)945 1203
Replaced by

NA.69
NA.70

Magnolia

NA.53

Plastics Inc

5547 Peachtree Ind Blvd Chamblee GA


30341 USA

www.magnapoxy.com

+1(770)451
NA.71

5376

Click Bond Inc


2151

Way Carson City

Lockheed

NV

89706-0713 USA
www.clickbond.com
1
NA.72

Gage

883 0191

(775)

Products
821 Wanda Avenue Ferndale MI 84220
USA

www.gageproduts.com

+1(248)
NA.73

541 3824

Sterling Lacquer Manufacturing Company


3150

Brannon

Avenue

St

Louis

MO

63139 USA

+1(314)7711858
NA.74

Replaced by

NA.16

NA.75

Replaced by

NA.16
Andrew Brown Paint

Company

NA.76

Obsolete

Formerly:

NA.77

Obsolete

Formerly: Detroit Jewel Tack Cloth

NA.78

Obsolete

Formerly:

NA.79

Obsolete

Formerly: Greider Company

20-95-00

Kamen

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers

Address

NA.80

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Replaced by

NA.81

Remarks

NA.8

Obsolete

Formerly: Smooth-On Incorporated 2000 St


John Street Easton PA 18042

USA,
www.smooth-on.com, Fax +1 (610) 252 6200
NA.82

Barton Solvents Inc

1970 NE Broadway PO Box 221

Des

Moines IA 50301 USA


www.barsol .com
+1
NA.83

(515)

265 8251

Air Products and Chemicals Inc

7201

Hamilton

Blvd

Allentown

PA

18195-1501 USA

www.airproducts.com
+1(610)481 5900
NA.84

Clariant

Corp

4000 Monroe Rd Charlotte NC 28205


USA
www.clariant.com

+1(704)
NA.85

331 7718

Lyondeil Chemical Worldwide


One

Houston

Center

Inc
1221

McKinney

Street Houston TX 77101 USA

www.lyondell.com
+1

NA.86

(713)

Union Carbide

Dow Chemical
39

652 4159

Corporation
Company

Old

Ridgebury

subsidiary of

Rd

Danbury

CT

06817-0001 USA
www.dow.com/ucc/
NA.87

HOC Industries
3511 North Ohio Wichita KS 67201-2609
USA
www.hocindustries.com
+1

(316)

838 5862

20-95-00Mar.OG

Ral~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.88

Suppliers
Inland

Address

Technologies

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Formerly: 660 Albert de Niverville Dorval

Inc

9 Commercial Street PO Box 253 Truro


Nova Scotia B2N 5C1 Canada

Quebec H4Y 1G6 Canada, Fax: +1

(514)

9990

www.inlandgroup.ca
+1

NA.89

(902)

895 6349

Uniroyal Adhesives and Sealants


Uniroyal Technology Corporation
2001

West

Division of

Street

Washington

South

Bend IN 46628 USA

www.uniroyal.com
+1

NA.90

(219)

246 5425

Mid-West Industrial Chemical


1509-11

Company

Sublette Avenue St Louis MO

63110-1978 USA

+1(314)781
NA.91

7603

Kimberly-Clark Corporation
1400 Holcomb

Bridge

Rd

Roswell GA

30076 USA

www.kimberlyclark.com
+1
NA.92

(800)

654 8270

Barton Solvents Inc


1920 NE

Broadway PO

Box 221

Des

Moines IA 50301 USA

www.barsol.com
+1

(515)

265 0259

NA.93

NA.94

Formerly: Sugar Beet Products Company


Saginaw MI 48605 USA

Obsolete

Stockhausen Inc
2401

Doyle

Street

Greensboro

NC

27406 USA
www.stockhausen.com
NA.95

Aeropia

US distributor for Elixair

Inc

8586 NW 72 Street Miami FL 33166 USA

www.aeropia.com
+1

(305)717

6578

20-95-00

422

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 2~ STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.96

Suppliers

Address

Winton Products

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Company

Remarks

Inc

PO Box 36332 2500 West Blvd Charlotte


NC 28236 USA

www.wintonproducts .com
+1

NA.97

(704)

Advanced

392 5389

Chemistry &Technology

7341 Anaconda Avenue Garden Grove


CA 92841 USA
www.actechaero.com

+1(714)373
NA.98

Cabot

Corporation

1095

200

Windward

Alpharetta

www.

Ridge Parkway Suite

GA 30005 USA

cabot-corp.com

+1(678)
NA.99

1913

297 1245

Met-All Industries

Locust Street PO Box 459 Canal

231

Fulton Ohio 44614 USA

www.met-all.com

+1(330)854
NA.100

Richwood Industries Inc


PO

Box

Huntingdon
www.

+1

NA.101

1133

E/M

1298

707

7th

Street

relyon richwood.com

(304)

525 8018

Engineered Coating
100

WV 25714 USA

Cooper

Solutions

Circle Peachtree

City

GA

30269-7969 USA

www.em-coatings.com
+1

NA.102

(770)

261 4805

Motorcars Ltd
8101

Hempstead

Rd Houston TX 77008

USA
www. motorca rsltd.com

+1

(713)

863 8238

20-95-00Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.103

Suppliers

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

Remarks

Purac
111

Barclay

Blvd Lincolnshire IL 60069

USA
www.purac.com

+1(847) 634 1992


NA.104

Enviro Tech
2525 W Le

Moyne

Avenue Melrose Park

IL 60160 USA
www.envirotech .com
+1

(708)

NA.105

NA.106

343 6641

Replaced by

Formerly: Albemarie Corporation 451 Florida


Street Baton Rouge LA70801 USA,
www.albemarle.com, Fax +1 (225) 388 7848

UK.115

LPS Laboratories

PO Box 105052 4647

Hugh

Howell Rd

Tucker GA 30085-5052 USA

www.lpslabs.com

+1(800)
NA.107

543-1563

Lear Chemical Research

PO

Box

1040

Corporation

Station

Mississauga

Ontario L4Y 3W3 Canada


www.learchem.com
+1

NA.108

(905)

564 7077

Chem-Trend Inc
1445 McPherson Park Drive Howell MI

48843 USA
www.chemtrend.com
+1

NA.109

(517)

548 6710

Rohm and Haas


100

Company

Independence

Mall W

PA 19106-2399 USA

www.rhcis.com

+1(215)592-3377

20-95-00

Philadelphia

Raytheon
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20

Aircraft Company

STAN~ARD

PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
NA.110

Suppliers

Address

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Remarks

Formerly: Royal

Anderol Inc
215

Merry

Lane

PO

Box

518

Lubricants Inc

East

Hanover NJ 07936 USA

www.anderol.com
+1
NA.111

(973)

887 6930

Air BP Lubricants
Division of BP Products North America

Parsippany NJ 07054-4406 USA

Inc

www.airbp.com

+1(973)
NA.112

401 4355

Cryotech Deicing Technology


6103

Fort Madison, IA 52627

Orthoway

USA

www.cryotech.com
+1

NA.113

(319) 372 2662

Armite Laboratories
1560

Superior

Avenue Suite A-4 Costa

Mesa CA 92627 USA

(By email) armite@pacbeil.net


+1
NA.114

(949)

646 8319

Aviation Laboratories

5401

Mitchelldale

#B6

Houston

Tx

77092
www.avlab.com

+1(713)864-6677
+1

NA.115

(713)

Japan Sun

Oil

864 6990

(Fax)

Company

wwwsunoco.co.jp
NA.116

BVA Oils

PO 930301 Wixcom Mi. 48393


www.bvaoils.com
+1

(248)

348 4920

20-95-00

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

NA.117

Suppliers

Address

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Lektro-Tech
4556 South Manhattan Avenue
Suite L

Tampa
Florida 33611

NA.118

CRC Industries Inc.


885 Louis Drive

Warminster PA
18974

NA.119

Dayton-Granger
3299 SW 9th Avenue
PO Box 350550
Fort Lauderdale, FL

33315

Page

16Mar.OG

20-95-00

Remarks

Ra~heon Aircraft Company


125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

3. ADDRESSES

AIRFRAME

UK AND INTERNATIONAL SUPPLIERS

Suppliers
Code
UK.1

Remarks

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)


Shell UK Ltd

Shell Center London SE1

7NA United

Kingdom
www.shell.com/ukl
+44

(0)20

7934 8060

Shell Oils

Formerly:

Manufacturing

8 Distribution

Delta House Wavell

Lubricants

Cobden House Station Rd Cheadle

Hulme Cheadle SK8 5AD United

Kingdom

Wythenshawe
Kingdom

Rd

Manchester M22 5SB United


www.aeroshell.com
+44

(0)161

499 4793

Shell Aviation Ltd

Formerly:

Shell Center London SE1

7NA United

Shell Mex House Strand London

WC2R ODX United

Kingdom

Kingdom
www.aeroshell.com
Fax: +44

(0)20 7257 3939

Formerly: Heronbridge

Shell Chemicals UK Ltd

Kessler

Place

Bldg

301

Cheshire

Innovation Park PO Box 1 Chester CH1


3SH United

Kingdom

House Chester

Business Park Wrexham Rd Chester Cheshire


CH4 9QA United

Kingdom

and

Carrington

Works Urmston Manchester M60 4EB United

Kingdom

www.shellchemicals.com
+44

UK.2

UK.3

(0)1244 685010
Replaced by

UK.7

ITW Rocol Ltd

Swillington
Kingdom

Leeds

LS26

8BS

United

www.rocol.com
+44
UK.4

(0)1132 322740

Fuchs Lubricants

Silkolene

(UK)

Oil

Belper Derby
Kingdom

PLC

Refinery
DE56

Derby
1WF

Road
United

Formerly: Dalton and Company Silkolene Oil


Refinery Belper Derby DE5 1WF United
Kingdom

www.fuchslubricants .com
+44

(0)1773

823659

20-95-00Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.5

Suppliers

Address

(UK)

Fuchs Lubrication

Rd

fley

United

Formerly: K.S.

Ltd

Est

fley
Kingdom

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

London

N18

Paul Products Ltd

3DB

www.kspaul.com
+44

UK.6

8884 3255

(0)20

Formerly:

HellermannTyton
Pennycress Close Pennycress Plymouth
Devon PL2 3NX United Kingdom

Hellernan Ltd Gatwick Rd

Sussex United

Crawley

Kingdom

www.hellermanntyton .co.uk

UK.7

Dow

790058

(0)1752

+44

Coming

Ltd

Buisness

Park

Copse Drive

Allesley Coventry
Kingdom

CV5

9RG

Meriden

United

Formerly: Dow Coming Ltd Kings Court


Kings Road Reading RG1 4EX United
Kingdom

185

www.dowcorning.com
+44

UK.8

(0)1676 528001

I Formerly:

TexacoLtd

Circus

Westferry

London E14 4HA United

Canary

Wharf

Knightsbridge Green
Kingdom

London

SW1X 7QT United

Kingdom

www.texaco.com
+44

UK.9

195175

(0)2077

Esso Petroleum
Exxon

Company

Mobil

Leatherhead

House

Surrey

Formerly:

Ltd

Ermyn

Way

Esso House 90 Victoria Street

London, SW1E 5JW United Kingdom

KT22 8UX United

Kingdom
www.esso.com

+44

UK.10

222556

(0)1372

PRC-DeSoto

Europe

Darlington

Ltd

Rd Shildon Co Durham DL4

2QP United

Formerly: Courtaulds Aerospace


(ICI)

and

Imperial

Chemical Industries

Kingdom

www.ppg .com
44

UK.11

(0)1388

774373
Obsolete

Formerly:
Yorkshire

UK.12

Replaced by

NA.9.

Kearsley 8 Co
United Kingdom

Ripen

Formerly: Sunbeam Anti-Corrosives Ltd


Molesey Surrey United
Kingdom

Central Avenue West

20-95-00

Ltd York Rd

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)

UK.13

Obsolete

Remarks

Formerly:

UK.14

UK.16

Replaced by

Kingdom

Formerly: United Indigo Chemical Co Ltd 22


Lord Street Manchester United Kingdom

Obsolete

UK.15

Sons Nelson Street

J Goddards

Leicester United

UK.1

Unilever PLC

Formerly:

PO Box 68 Unilever House 100 Victoria

Domestos Ltd 24 Homecraft Rd

London N22 United

Kingdom

Embankment London EC4P 4BQ United

Kingdom
www.unilever.com
+44

(0)20 78225898

UK.17

Replaced by

Formerly: Alginate

UK.94

Industries Ltd Waiter

House Bedford Street Strand London WC2


United

UK.18

UK.19

Replaced by
Bostik

Formerly: BE Chemicals

Findley Ltd

Ulverscroft
United

Kingdom

UI(.10

Rd

Leicester

LE4

Ltd

6BW

Kingdom

www.bostik.com
+44

UK.20

(0)1785

241818

Formerly: Turco Chemical Products

Turco Products Ltd

Brunel

Rd

Earlstrees

Ind

Northants NN17 2JW United

Corby Berks SL6


Kingdom
Est

Ltd

Clivemont Rd Cordwallis Ind Est Maidenhead


7BZ United

Kingdom

www.tu rcoproducts.com

+44

UK.21

(0)1536

263890

Chemetall PLC

65

Formerly:

Denbigh Rd Bletchley Milton Keynes


Kingdom

Ardrox Ltd Brent Chemical Products

Ltd and Brent Interhational

MK1 1PB United

www.aerospace.chemetall.com
+44

UK.22
UK.23

UK.24

(0)1908

373939

Replaced by
Replaced by

UK.10

NA.13 and UK.20

Obsolete

Formerly: Kearsley Aero Chemicals Ltd


Frampton Rd Hounslow Middlesex United
Kingdom
Formerly: Cleenol Products Ltd 82 Fazeley
Birmingham United Kingdom

Street

20-95-00

~arCMar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppl iers
Code

Suppliers

Address

Obsolete

UK.25

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Formerly: Imperial

Chemical Industries PLC

Mend Division Northern Sales Office PO Box


14 The Heath Runcorn Cheshire WA7 4QF
United

UK.26

Replaced by

NA.13 and UK.10

Kingdom

Formerly:

R J Richardson

Commercial Street

Sons Ltd

Birmingham United

Kingdom
UK.27

Hammerite Products Ltd


Works

Eltringham

Prudhoe

NE42

Northumberland

6LP

United

Formerly: Hermetite Products Ltd Tavistock


Road W Drayton Middlesex UB7 7RA United
Kingdom

Kingdom
www.hammerite.com
+44

(0)1661

UK.28
UK.29

835760

Replaced by
Dunlop

UK.10

Formerly: Berger

Chemicals

Aviation Ltd

Aviation

Division

Coventry

Holbrook

CV6 4AA United

Lane

Kingdom

www.dunlopaviation.com
+44

UK.30

(0)24

7666 2294

3M PLC
3M

House

Bracknell

Marketplace

Berkshire RG12 1JU United

Kingdom

www.3m.com
+44
UK.31

(0)1344

858278

Formerly: Douglas Kane

Henkel Loctite Adhesives Ltd


Watchmead

Welwyn

Garden

Hertfordshire AL7 1JB United

Ltd

Carlyon

Road

Atherstone Warwickshire CV9 ?LQ United

City
Kingdom
Kingdom

www. loctite. com

+44

(0)1707

UK.32

358900

Replaced by

Formerly: Marston Bentley Ltd 9 Naylor


Liverpool L3 6DS United Kingdom

NA.66

Obsolete

UK.33

Formerly:

Racasan Ltd Ellesmere Port

Cheshire United
UK.34

J. Hall 8 Sons Ltd


Petherton
United

UK.35

Kingdom

Rd

Hengrove

Bristol

BS14

Kingdom
Replaced by

20-95-00

UK.10

Formerly:

Docker Brothers

Street

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers

Address

UK;36

Replaced by

Remarks

Formerly: Bakelite Ltd Consumer Products


Division Highams Park London E4 9BA United
Kingdom

Obsolete

UK.37

UK.38

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

UK.10

Atlas Products and Services Ltd


Frazer Rd Erith Kent DA8 1PN United

Kingdom
UK.39

Red Hand

Compositions

Clifford

Street

Ltd
W1

London

United

Kingdom
UK.40

Kilfrost Ltd
Albion

Haltwhistle

Works

Northumberland

NE49

OHJ

United

Kingdom
(By email)
+44

UK.41

Kilfrost.haltwhistle@virgin.net

(0)1434 321463

Formerly:

Mobile Oil Co Ltd

Wallasey Bridge Rd Birkenhead


Merseyside Cheshire CH41 1EF United
Kingdom

Mobile Oil Co Ltd Mobil International

Aviation and Marine Sales Bank House 171

Midsummer Blvd Central Milton


1EB United

Keynes

MK9

Kingdom

www.exxonmobil.com
44

UK.42

(0)151

6531239

Elsan Ltd
Bellbrook Business Park Uckfield

Sussex TN22 1QF United


+44

UK.43

(0)1825

East

Kingdom

761212

Vantico Ltd

Duxford

Cambridge Cambridgeshire
Kingdom

Formerly: Ciba Speciality Chemicals


Performance Polymers Division

CB2 4QA United

www.vantico.com
+44

UK.44
UK.45

(0)1223

493002

Replaced by

NA.57

Obsolete

Formerly: Canning Materials Ltd Great


Hampton Street Birmingham B18 6AS United
Kingdom

20-95-00

Raytheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

Suppliers

Address

Equip (Midlands)

UK.46

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Ltd

Byron Street Burton Derbyshire


Kingdom

SK17

6NT United

www.equipmidlands.co.uk
+44
UK.47

(0)1298 72097

Evode Ltd
Common Rd Stafford ST16 3EH United

Kingdom
www.evode.co.uk
+44

UK.48

(0)1785

Levermore

257236

Workshop

World

24 Endeavor
United

Way
Kingdom

London SW19 8UH

www.levermore.co.uk
+44

(0)20

8946 6259

Replaced by

UK.49

Formerly: Dubois Chemicals Ltd


House Sunleigh Road Wembley
HRO 4PT United Kingdom

NA.24

Dubois
Middlesex

Acheson Colloids Ltd

UK.50

Catterwater Road Prince Rock


Devon PL4 OSP United

Plymouth
Kingdom

www.achesonindustries.com
+44

UK.51

(0)1752 207133

Formerly:

Obsolete

Craft Chemical Products Ltd Alma

Park Ind Est Grantham Lincolnshire United

Kingdom
UK.106

UK.52

Replaced by

UK.53

Replaced by NA.102

UK.54

Bridge of Weir Leather Co

Clydesdale

Ltd

Bridge

Works

Renfrewshire PA11 3LF United

of

Weir

Kingdom

www.bowleather.co.uk
+44

UK.55

(0)1505

614964

Replaced by

UK.30

Formerly: Punch
Drayton

UK.56

Replaced by

UK.87

and Co

(Sales) Ltd
Kingdom

Formerly: Olympic

Plastics Ltd 4th

Way

Wembly Middlesex United Kingdom

20-95-00

West

Middlesex United

Ral~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.57

Suppliers

Address

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Ceetak Ltd
1

Napier
Kingdom

Rd Bedford MK41 OQR United

www.ceetak.com
+44

(0)1234

341133
Obsolete

UK.58

Formerly:

Ferro

Chirk Wrexham

(GB) Ltd Holyhead Road


Clwyd LL14 5HH United

Kingdom

UK.60

Formerly: PW Products Ltd 289-293 Ballards


Lane Finchley London N12 8NP United
Kingdom

Obsolete

UK.59

Du Pont

(UK)

Du

Ltd

Pont

House

Stevenage
United

Wedgwood

Way

SG1

4QN

Hants

SO51

Herffordshire

Formerly: Instar
Derby DE4 4EN

Ltd 3 Greenhill Wirksworth

United

Kingdom

Kingdom

www.dupont.com
+44

UK.61

(0)1438

734382

Dasic International Ltd

Winchester
7YD United

Hill

Romsey
Kingdom

www.dasic.co.uk
+44

UK.62

(0)1794

Henkel Surface

522346

Formerly:

Technologies

Featherstone
Wolverton

House

Featherstone

South

Mill

Milton

MK12

Buckinghamshire
Kingdom

Rd

Keynes

5TH

Henkel Metal Chemistries Henkel

House 292-308

Southbury Rd Enfield
Kingdom

Middlesex EN1 1TS United

United

www.henkel.co.uk
+44

UK.63

McGean

(0)1908
Rohco

Qualcast

313312

(UK)

Rd

Ltd

Lower

Wolverhampton West
2QP United Kingdom

Horseley
Midlands

Fields
WV1

I Formerly: Cee Bee Products 1 Bailey Street


Wolverhampton West Midlands WV10 ODE
United

Kingdom

www.mcgean-rohco.co.uk
+44

UK.64

(0)1902

457443

Obsolete

Formerly:

Bestobell Aviation 127-135

Slough SL1 4UY United


Kingdom, www.bestobell.com, Fax: +44
(0)1753 539126
Farnham Rd

20-95-00Mar.OG

Ray~heon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.65

Remarks

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)


Formerly:

Arrow Chemicals Ltd

Road Swadlincote

Rawden

DE12 6DA United

Derbyshire

Kingdom

Arrow Chemicals Ltd

Stanhope

Rd

Swadlincote Burton-on-Trent Staffs DE11 9BE


United

Kingdom

www.arrowchem.com
+44

(0)1283

225731

Formerly:

Obsolete

UK.66

John Gosheron and Co Ltd Grove

House 551 London Road Isleworth Middlesex


TW7 4DS United

UK.68

Formerly:
Ind Est Bramley Road Bletchley Milton
Keynes Buckinghamshire MK1 1PT United
Kingdom

Formerly:

GE Silicones
5 Cranfield Rd Lostock Ind Est Lostock
Bolton

BL6

Lancashire

Kingdom

RW Greef and Co Ltd Mount Farm

Obsolete

UK.67

GE Silicones Old Hall Rd Sale

Cheshire M33 2HG United Kingdom

United

4QD

Kingdom
www.gebayersilicones.com
+44

UK.69

Borax

(0)1204 691494
Formerly:

Europe Ltd

1A

Surrey

Park Guildford

Buisness

Guildford

GU2 8XG United

Kingdom

Borax

Holdings

Ltd Borax House

Carlisie Place London SW1P 1HT United

Kingdom

www.borax.com
+44

UK.70

WD-40

(0)1483

242001

Brick Close

Farm

Kiln

Milton

Keynes

3LJ

United

MK11

Buckinghamshire
Kingdom
www.wd40.co.uk
+44

UK.71

(0)1908

266900

Sterling Technology
Fraser

Rd

Ltd

Trafford

M17 1DU United


www. ste rl i n

+44

UK.72

(0)161

Company PO
Keynes MK11 3LF
Buckinghamshire United Kingdom

Alternative address: WD-40

Company

Park

Kingdom

g-tech .com
8480966

Replaced by UK.62

20-95-00

Manchester

440 Kiln Farm Milton

Box

RayZheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.73

Suppliers

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

Chomerics (Europe) Ltd


Unit

Safron

Elizabeth

Way

Remarks

Formerly:
Center

Bussiness
Waldon

Saffron

Essex

Chomerics

(UK)

Ltd Park

Way

Globe Park Marlow Bucks SL7 1YB United

Kingdom

CB10 2BL United Kingdom


www.chromerics.com
+44

(0)1799

521191
Obsolete

UK.74

Formerly:

STP

(Europe) Ltd Hardie House 46


Wokingham Berkshire United

Denmark Street

Kingdom
UK.75

United

Refrigeration (UK)

16 Avonside Ind Park Feeder Rd Bristol

BS2 OUQ United Kingdom

Formerly: Nationwide Refrigerant Supplies


Unit 1 Spindus Rd Speke Hall Ind Est Speke
Hall Avenue

Liverpool

L24 1YA United

Kingdom

www.refrigerants.com
+44

(0)1179 773616

UK.76

Replaced by

UK.70

Formerly:

Cussons

(International) Ltd
Stockport
Cheshire SK3 OXN United Kingdom, Fax: +44
(0)161 4918191 and PC Products (1001) Ltd
Cussons House Bird Hall Lane

Kersal Vale Manchester N7 OGL United

Kingdom
UK.77

BDH

Formerly:

Laboratory Supplies
Poole Dorset BH15 1TD United

Kingdom

BDH

Laboratory Supplies Broom Rd


Kingdom

Poole Dorset BH12 4NN United

www.bdh.com
+44

UK.78

(0)1202

Akzo Nobel

666856

Aerospace Coatings VOF


31

Rijksstraatweg

PB

2171

Formerly:
AJ

Sassenheim Netherlands

Akzo

Aerospace Finishes Coatings

Division PO Box 3 2170BA Sassenheim


Netherlands

www.akzonobel.com
+31

(0)71 3082056

UK.79

UK.80

Replaced by

Ut<.68

Pennsalt Ltd
Chemical Division Doman Rd

Surrey
UK.81

DGB

United

Sterling
13

Camberley

Kingdom
Worldwide

Ltd

Napier

Court Barton Lane

Oxon OX14 5DH United

Abingdon
Kingdom

Headquarters address:

Dinol

International AB Box 149 SE-281 22

Haessleholm Sweden, www.dinol.com, Fax:


+46 451 880 88

www.dinol.com
+44

(0)1235

530688

20-95-00Mar.OG

Raytheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.82

Remarks

Suppliers Address (Mail-lnternet-Fax)

I Formerly:

BP Amoco PLC

Finsbury Circus
EC2M 7BA United Kingdom

Britannic
London

House

1-6

BP Oil Ltd BP House Victoria Street

London SW1E 5NJ United

Kingdom

www.bplubricants.com
+44

UK.83

Applied

(0)20

7496 5656

Chemicals Ltd

Applied

House

CV6 6JA United

Wilson

Lane

Kingdom

Formerly: Applied Chemicals Ltd


Salisbury Road Ind Est Uxbridge
Coventry
United Kingdom

PO Box 43
UB8 2SW

www.appliedchemicals.com
+44

UK.84

(0)24 76363210

Akzo Nobel
Unit

Meridian

West

Formerly:

Ltd

Aerospace Coatings

Meridian

Leicester LE3 2WX United

Park

Akzo

Coatings

99 Station Road

Didcot Oxon OX11 7NQ United

Kingdom

Kingdom

www.akzonobel.com
+44

(0)116

UK.85
UK.86

2234139

Replaced by UK.87

I Formerly: Pampus

Fluorocarbon Co Ltd

Carton Hill Herfford Herffordshire SG 13


7NH United

Fluorpast

Loomer Rd Newcastle United

Ltd Chesterton

Kingdom

Kingdom

www.fluorocarbon.co.uk
+44

UK.87

(0)1992 504550

PPG Industries Ltd


PO

Box

Birmingham

359

Rotten

Park

B16 OAD United

Street

Kingdom

www.ppg.com
44

UK.88

(0)121 4540848

Akzo Nobel Chemicals Ltd

Queens

1-5

Walton-on-Thames
United

Rd

Surrey

Formerly:

Akzo Chemie

Formerly:

Adhesive Solutions Ltd Batchworth

(UK)

Ltd

Hersham
KT12

5NL

Kingdom

www.akzonobel.com
+44

UK.89

(0)1932 231204
Obsolete

Island Rickmansworth Herts, WD3 1JQ United

Kingdom

Mar.OG20-95-00

RaytPleon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

UK.90

Suppliers

Address

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Permabond Adhesives Ltd


Woodside
United

4EX

S050

Eastleigh

Rd

Kingdom

www.permabond.com
+44

(0)2380

629629

UK.91

Replaced by UK.19

Formerly: LAPS Ltd Unit 3 International House


Springhill Rd Burnley Lanes, BB11 2LQ United
Kingdom

UK.92

Obsolete

Formerly. Product Research Chemical (UK)


Ltd Portland Rd Newcastle-upon-Tyne NE2
1BL United Kingdom

UK.93

Formerly: Teepol Products Blenheim Rd Long


Epsom Surrey KT19 9A4 United
Kingdom

UK.1

Replaced by

Mead Ind Est

UK.94

Fisher Scientific UK Ltd

Bishop

Rd

Meadow

LE11

Leicestershire

Loughborough
5RG

United

Kingdom
www.fishersci.com
+44

(0)1509

UK.95

UK.96

231893

Replaced by

Formerly: Dexter Packaging Parkway Deeside


Ind Park Deeside United Kingdom

NA.53

ITW Devcon
Brunet

Wellingborough
United Kingdom

Est

Farm

Park

Close

Northants

NN8

6QX

www.itw-devcon .co.uk
+44

UK.97

(0)1933 675765

Cadillac Plastics Ltd

Rivermead

Drive

Westlea

Wiltshire SN5 7EX United

Swindon

Kingdom

www.cadillac.co.uk
+44

UK.98

(0)1793

648501

Replaced by UK.10

Formerly:DeSoto Titanine
Kingdom

and NA.16

Shildon

County

DL4

2QP United
UK.99

Aero Consultants

13114

(UK)

Clifton

Rd

PE29 7EJ United

UK.100

NA.53 US Adhesive

Ltd

Huntingdon
Kingdom

Cambs

Dexter

Corp

Systems Division for


Coating Systems

Adhesive

Replaced by UK.1

20-95-00

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code

UK.101

Suppliers

Remarks

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

Clariant International Ltd


61

Rothausstrasse

CH-4132

Muttenz

Switzerland
www.clariant.com
+41

UK.102

(61)469

6511

SPCA
9 Voie de Seine F-94290 Villeneuve Le
Roi France

+33
UK.103

(1)49 61 08

70
UK Distributor

Elixair International Ltd


Roman Hill Business Park

Dorchester DT2 8LY United

Broadmayne
Kingdom

www.elixair.co.uk

(0)1305

44

852060

European Distributor

Aero Consultants Ltd


PO Box 35 Grabenstrasse 8 CH-8606
Nanikon Switzerland
www. aeroconsultants. com

41

UK.104

Aeropia

(0) 941 3137

Formerly:

Ltd

Aeropia

House

Newton

Rd

West Sussex RH1 02Y United

Crawley
Kingdom

www.aeropia.com
+44

UK.105

Cabot

(0)1293

459600

Corporation

Lees

Lane

Ellesmere

CVH65 4HT United

Port

Cheshire

Kingdom

www.cabot-corp.com
+44

UK.106

(0)151

350 1462

Ambersil Ltd

Wylds Rd Castlefield Ind Est Bridgwater


Somerset TA6 4DD United Kingdom
www.siliconia.co.uk
+44

(0)1278

425644

20-95-00

Ciba

Geigy (UK)

Structures Division

Ltd Bonded

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.107

Suppliers

Address

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Remarks

Gibson Chemicals Ltd


350

Cheltenham

Rd

Reserve

3192

Australia
+61
UK.108

Graphite

(03)

9584 3958

Services

Unit

19/20 Stations Lane Ind Est Old


Chesterfield S41 9PX United

Whittington
Kingdom

www.em-coatings.com
+44
UK.109

260367

(0)1246

Gramos Surface Treatment Ltd

Spring

Rd

Smethwick

8166 1PT United

West

Midlands

Kingdom

www.gramos.co.uk
+44
UK.110

241303

(0)1215

Purac Biochem

Square Birmingham
Kingdom

50-54 St. Pauls

1QS United

83

www.purac.com
+44

UK.1?1

Castrol

(0)121 2361401

(UK)

Ltd

Burmah

Castrol

House

Swindon SN3 1RE United

PipersWay
Kingdom

www.castrol.com
+44

UK.112

(0)1793

513506

Dow Chemical Co Ltd


2

Heathrow

Drayton
Kingdom

Blvd

284

Middlesex

Bath

UB7

Rd

ODQ

West
United

www.dowchemical.com
+44

UK.113

(0)20 8917

5400

Croftshaw Solvents
Oldstead Rd

Bromley

BR1 5RX United

Kingdom
44

(0)20

8508 5559

20-95-00Mar.OG

Ra~heon Aircraft Company


125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Code
UK.114

Suppliers

(Mail-lnternet-Fax)

Address

Chem-Trend Ltd
Street

Bromley

West
Stourbridge
Kingdom

Midlands DY9 8HY United


www.chemtrend.com
+44

UK.115

(0)1384

423823

Med-Lab Ltd

Copeland
Kingdom

Street

Derby

DE1 2PU United

www.med-lab.demon.co.uk
+44

UK.116

(0)1332

371237

Anderol BV
PO Box 1489 6201 BL Maastricht The
Netherlands

www.anderol.nl
+31

(43)

352 4199

Mar.OG20-95-00

Remarks

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
GREASES AND LUBRICANTS
1. INFORMATION
The materials listed

below must

only

be used

in

conjunction

with

Raytheon approved manuals

and

docu mentation.

2. GREASES AND LUBRICANTS

Suppliers
Item No.
001

002

Material

Compound,
(graphited)

anti-seize

Compound, anti-seize
(molybdenum
disulphide)

Specification

or

Reference

[Def Stan 80-80]


[MIL-T-5544]
AeroShell Compound 08 (Steel
to steel only)

Code

Remarks

Formerly [DTD.392A]
NA.8

Anti-seize thread lube.

UK.1

Refer to Item No. 002.


Anti-seize thread

[MIL-PRF-83483]
Royco 1MS Anti-seize

NA.110

Lubricant

UK.116

compound (petrolatum
molybdenum disulphide)
RECOMMENDED by
RAC Process Lab.

Alternatives:
Loctite

Moly 50 Anti-seize
NA.18

Lubricant

UK.31
AASC-M-1 MIL-PRF-83483
Anti-seize Lubricant

NA.113

[DTD.5617]

[DefStan80-81]
Shell Aviation Grease S.4768

NA.8
UK.1

Rocol MT-LM
UK.3

Molypaul

GP 109
UK.5

003

Compound,
lubricant

electrical

Formerly [DTD.900/4388]

[DTD.900AA/4877Aj
Hellerine Grade M

UK.4

Hellerine Grade M

UK.6

replaces Grade

209511

C.

Ray~heon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

Material

004

Specification

or

Reference

Grease, Advanced,

[MIL-G-81322]

general purpose

AeroShell Grease 22CF

Code

Remarks

Formerly
NA.8
UK.1

[MIL-G-81382]
[DTD.5601]
[Def Stan 91-52]
AeroShell Grease 22A
and 22C.

Advanced, general
purpose grease, wide

temperature range.
NOTE
While

MIL-G-81322

supersedes MIL-G-3545, AeroShell Grease

(Item

No.

044)

does

not

meet

MIL-G-81322
005

Formerly

[MIL-G-81 322]
Mobilgrease 28

Grease

NA.21
U1(.41

[MIL-G-7711]
[MIL-G25760]
[MIL-G-3545]
[DTD 5601]
Manufactured from

synthesized hydrocarbon
fluid and

a nonsoap
thickener. It has very
good resistance to water

washing.
NOTE
While

MIL-G-81322

supersedes MIL-G-3545, AeroShell

Grease

(Item

No.

044)

does

not

meet

MIL-G-81322
006

Obsolete:

Replaced by

Item No. 054

007

Preservative

Lanolin

ARS

008

Compound, silicone
paste

[Def Stan 68-69]


[MIL-S-8660]

NA.5

Formerly
[DTD.900/4298]

MS.4

UK.7

[MIL-I-8660]

DC 4

and

Compound
Electrical insulating
compound, moisture
barrier lube, commonly
used in O-ring
applications.
DC 4 does not contain
corrosion

inhibiting

additives, for this usage


refer to Item No. 086.

Page

2Mar.OG

20-95-11

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

009

Material

Specification

or

Reference

[Def Stan 2331/1\3


[MIL-C-16173, Grade 2]
AeroShell Compound 02

Compound,
preservative

Code

Remarks

Formerly [DTD.121D]
NA.8
UK.1

Corrosion

preventative
compound. Solvent
based, soft film. Used for

temporary protection.
010 to

Not used.

033
034

Grease, extreme low


temperature

(molybdenum
disulphate)

[DTD.900AA/4630A]

Rocol MX-33

UK.3

[Def Stan 91-56/1]


[MIL-G-46886]
Dow Coming 33 Grease,
Type II (medium)

035

Obsolete:

036

Antifret Primer. Moved to Item No. 476

037

Not used.

038

Dry

Replaced by

film lubricant

Formerly
[DTD.897B]
Molykote 33
MS 33 and DC 33.

NA.5
UK.7

Item No. 078

(Ref. 20-95-401, 001)

[MIL-L-46010, Type I]
Everlube 620C

NA.101

(Old alternatives)
Molykote X106
Molykote 3400

Formerly
[Def Stan 91-19/1]
Used for corrosion

protection, anti-wear,
fluid resistance and all
metal

039

Obsolete:

040

Grease, antifret

Replaced by

applications.

Item No. 040

[MIL-G-25537]
[Def Stan 91-51]
AeroShell Grease 14

Formerly [DTD.5609]
NA.8
UK.1

Outstanding

anti-fret and

anti-moisture corrosion

properties.
NOTE

AeroShell Grease 14

compatible with

(Item

No.

most rubber

040) is composed of a mineral oil thickened with a calcium soap. It is


compounds. It will not cause softening and swelling of rubber seals.
NOTE

AeroShell Grease 14

(Item

No.

Inner and Outer

040) is recommended to lubricate the Mollart Joint Rubber Grease Cover for
Torque Tube Assembly per RAC Process Lab Report 49564.

20-95-~1

PMaaSPO~Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAVVKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
041

Material

Grease, graphited

Specification

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

[DefStan 91-54]
AeroShell Grease 8

UK.1

Formerly [DTD.806Bj
Approved British
specification only.

NA.6

Graphited grease for


airplane general use.

NA.8

Airplane Starter Grease

UK.8
042

Not used.

043

Notused.

044

Grease thigh
temperature)

AeroShell Grease 5

NA.8
UK.1

045

Replaced by

Item No. 004.

046

Replaced by

Item No. 034.

047 to

Not used.

lFormerly
[DTD.878]
[MIL-G-3545]

053
054

Grease, synthetic

[MIL-G-21164j
AeroShell Grease 17

Formerly
[DTD.5527]
/Def Stan 91-57]
[DTD. 900AA/4439]

NA.8
UK.1

Molybdenum disulphide
give

filler added to

extreme pressure,
anti-wear properties.

Used for steel-to-steel


contact

055 to

protection.

Not used.

074

075

Grease

Dow

Coming Compound

NA.5
UK. 7

076

Notused.

077

Compound, anti-seize

[MIL-G-27617, Type 3]
Krytox 240AC

Release agent for formed

in

The

place

seal.

military specification

NA.29

[MIL-G-27617, Type 3]

UK.60

correct and
for

use on

acceptable

oxygen

components despite
G designation.

20-95-11

its

is

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
078

Specification

Material

Reference

Royco

NA.110
UK.116

27A

Remarks

Code

[MIL-G-23827]

Grease, extreme
pressure (low

temperature)

or

Formerly
[DTD 5598]
I [DTD 866]
[Def Stan 91-53/1]

NA.8

Alternatives:

AeroShell Grease 7

(Type 2)

UK.1
NA.6

Texaco Low

079

Corrosion

preventative

Temp

[AMS 3077]
[MIL-C-16173,

EP

UK.8

Formerly
Grade

Ardrox 3302

4]

DINITROL AV 30 Aerosol

NA.46

(Worldwide availability)

UK.81

For protection of all,


commonly used

aerospace metals and

alloys, including

control

cables.
080

Preservative

Ardrox 3107

NA.14
UK.21

Dukane 810-346

081

Lubricant

082

Cancelled.

083

Lubricant

Plastilube No. 3

084

Compound, anti-seize
thigh temperature)

[MIL-A-907]
Never-seez-Reg. Grade
(Copper)
Never-seez-Pure (Nickel)
Special

Replaced by

item No. 077

Fel-Pro C5A
085

Silicone Lubricant

NA.32

Dow

Coming 111

ARS
NA.49 deleted.

RIA.11
UK.?9

NA.48
NA.5

Formerly Molycote 111.

UK.7
Valve

lubricant, moisture

barrier and sealant.

For

vacuum

and

pressure systems,
lubricating rubber and

plastic products.
Used for

lubricating
bearings.

control rod end

Heavy grease
consistency.

20-95-11

Raytheon

Aircraft

company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

086

Specification

Material

Silicone Lubricant

or

Code

Reference

Remarks

NA.65

Novagard Versilube G-322L

Contains ZINC
CHROMATE.
Silicone lubricant for
corrosion

protection,

bimetallic corrosion

barrier, water repellent.

Pigmented Silicone

Alternate:

Grease

[DTD900AA14766A]

UK.98

Anti-corrosion

jointing
compound. U.K. product.

LR4871
Zinc Chromate

Pigmented

Silicone Grease
087

Dry Lubricant. Moved

088

Metal

Assembly

to Item No. 476

(Ref. 20-95-401, 001)

G-n

Paste

NA.5

Multi-purpose,
heavy-duty lubricating

UK.7

paste containing a blend


molybdenum disulfide

of

8 white solid lubricants in


a

mineral oil.

Alternate:

[Def Stan 80-81]


089

Corrosion Preventive

Compound

MT-LM

UK.3

Assembly and
Running-in Paste.

LPS 3

NA.106

This material is suitable

for corrosion control for

approximately

2 years. It

works well

as a general
preventative on
non-working surfaces.

corrosion

Since it forms

soft waxy

film which will make

working surfaces harder


application

to move, its

must be controlled where

"sticky"

surfaces

undesirable.

Mar.OG~e,G"

20-95-1~

are

R;rytheon

Aircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

090

Material
Corrosion Preventive

Specification

or

Reference

ACF 50

Code
NA.107

Remarks
This material is suitable
for corrosion control for

Compound

approximately 2 years. It
as a general
corrosion preventative on
non-working surfaces.

works well

Since it forms

soft waxy

film which will make

working surfaces harder


to move, its application
must be controlled where

"sticky"

surfaces

undesirable.
091

Petrolatum, Lubricant

W-P-236

ARS

Vaseline

092

Corrosion Preventative

Lektro-Tech Super Corr B


(MIL-L-87177,Type 1 Grade B)

NA. 117

Preferred

Lubricant

LPS 2

CRC 3-36
ROYCO 308CA

(MIL-PRF-32033)

NA 106
NA. 118
NA. 110

20-95-~1

are

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
FLUIDS AND OILS
i. INFORMATION
NOTE: The materials listed below must

only

be used in

conjunction

with

Raytheon approved

manuals and

documentation.

2. FLUIDS AND OILS

Suppliers
Item No.

101

Material

Fluid, de-icing

Specification
[DTD

4068

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

grade AL-5]

TKSFLUID

NA.25

For Airframe

Systems.

Alternatives:

Kilfrost R.328

UK.40

TKS80

102

103(a)

Fluid, deicing
Fluid, ground de-icing/

anti-icing

AVL-TKS

NA.114

[BS 506]
Methyl alcohol

ARS

[SAE AMS 1424, Type I]


[ISO ii 075, Type I]
[MIL-A-8243]
Safewing DG 1 1937 (241266)
Safewing MP 1 1938 (available
outside the NAFTA region)

Anti-icing protection for


parked airplane, and for
the de-frosting of
NA.84

turn-around

UK.101

considered suitable for


use

in

airplane de-icing

systems.

SafeTemp

DuraGly

I-PG100

NA.87

NA.88

Kilfrost DF PLUS

UK.40

Kilfrost DF

IARCOPLUS

NA.85

ARCOPLUS DILUTE

(same as
ARCOPLUS Canadian Dilute)
Octaflo/Aerex 99
Octaflo Concentrate

airplane. Not

NA.68

SPCA DE-910
UK.102

20-95-101

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

103(a)
Cent.

Material

Specificationor Reference
UCAR ADF Concentrate

Fluid, ground de-icing/


anti-icing

(PM

Remarks

NA.86

6600)
UCAR ADF 50150
UCAR ADF XL 54

103(b)

Code

(PM 6650)
(PM 6571)

[SAE AMS 1428 Type II]


[ISO 11078, Type II]
Safewing MP 11 1951 (241267)

Fluid, ground de-icing/


anti-icing

Anti-icing protection for


parked airplane, and for
the de-frosting of
turn-around airplane. Not

NA.84

UK.IO1

considered suitable for

Kilfrost ABC-II PLUS

UK.40

in airplane de-icing
systems.
use

Kilfrost ABC-3

I Ut(.102

SPCA AD-104/N

103(c)

Fluid, ground de-icing/


anti-icing

[SAE Type IV]


Safewing MP IV
(600757)
Safewing MP IV
(241224)

Formerly Type II,


1957

Hoechst 1704 and LTV

UK.101

88. Both

products are
They are
replaced by Safewing MP
1951 (241267).

2001

obsolete.

Kilfrost ABC-S

Max

NA.84

UK.40

Flight

Anti-icing protection for


parked airplane, and for
the de-frosting of
turn-around airplane. Not

NA.68

SPCA AD-480

I UK.102

considered suitable for


use

UCAR ADF/AAF ULTRA+,

in

airplane de-icing

NA.86

systems.

UK.40

fluid. In aerosol form.

ULTRA+
104

105

Replaced by

Item 107.

Formerly [MIL-H-83282]

Fluid, windshield

[DTD.900AA/4939A]

washing

Killfrost WWFIMod2

Windscreen

washing

Killfrost H63A
106

Replaced by

Item 619

107

Fluid, hydraulic

(Ref. 20-95-601,001)
[MIL-H-5606]
[Def Stan 91-48]

Grade

Superclean is a
hydraulic fluid

mineral

Aeroshell Fluid 41

(Grade Superclean

I
NA.8

or

Normal)

!.UK.1

manufactured to

high

a very
level of cleanliness.

Alternatives:

[MIL-H-5606]
[NATO Code H515]
Brayco Micronic 756

NA.8

Formerly Hydraulic Oil

UK.1

AA Univis J-43

[MIL-H-5606]
(Normal)
[NATO H-515]
Mobil (Aero) HF (Superclean)
Mobil Aero HFA

Jun.05~a,ge,s

20-95-101

NA.21
UK.41

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

108

Material

Oil, engine

Specification

or

Reference

AeroShell Turbine Oil 273

Code

Remarks

NA.8
UI(.1

109

Oil, engine

BP Aero Turbine Oil 35

110

Fluid, inhibiting (for


storage purposes)

[Def Stan 91-44]


[OM-13]

UK.82

Formerly [DEF 2001A]

AeroShell Fluid 1

NA.8
UK.1

111

Obsolete:

112

Oil, engine

Formerly

Caltex Sate 35
Castrol 98

NA.64
UK.111

113

Oil, turbine

[Def

Stan

91-98]

[DERD 2487]
Exxon Turbo Oil 274

(ETO

NA.6

274)

UK.8

Alternative:

114

Obsolete:

115

Oil, turbine

Formerly

AeroShell 750

NA.7

Military alternative:
[OX-38]

UK.9

Enco Turbo Oil 35

Esso extra turbo Oil 273

NA.7
Ut(.9

116

Replaced by

117

Obsolete:

Formerly

118

Obsolete:

Formerly Regent Sate 35

119

Obsolete:

Formerly

Sinclair Turbo Oil 35

120

Obsolete:

Formerly

Texaco Sate 35

121

Obsolete:

Formerly AeroShell Fluid 9

122

Oil, engine

123

124

Item No. 113.

Formerly

PWA 521

(Model

Esso Turbine Oil 35


code

Al)

Aeroshell Turbine Oil 750

Oil, engine

Synthetic

UK.1

centistokes

turbine oil

7.5

viscosity.

[MIL-PRF-7808]

Oil, engine

Exxon Turbo Oil 2389

NA.7

ESSO Turbo Oil 2389

UK.9

[MIL-PRF-7808]
i Exxon Turbo Oil 2391

125

Replaced by

126

Oil,

mineral

NA.8

Item No. 137.

light

NA.7

Formerly [MIL-PRF-23699] Castrol

[MIL-L-7870C]
Brayco 363

5050

NA.8
UK.1

Formerly
[Def Stan 91-47]

[DTD.5578]
AeroShell Fluid 3

general

purpose lubricating oil,


low freezing point.
127

Oil, engine

Enco extra turbo oil 273

20-95-101

Raytheon

Aircrafe Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

128

Material

Oil, engine

Specification

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

[MIL-PRF-7808]
AeroShell Turbine Oil 303

NA.8
UK.1

129

Oil, engine

[MIL-PRF-7808]
Castrol 399

NA.64

Formerly Brayco

880

UK.111
130

Oil, engine

[MIL-PRF-7808]
Delta Jet Lube

131

Replaced by

Item No. 137.

Formerly [MIL-PRF-23699] Delta

132

Replaced by

Item No. 113.

Formerly [Esso

133

Duplicate

134

Oil

Item.

Replaced by

(pressure testing
pipelines)

Item No. 222

Aviation Turbo Oil

Replaced by

136

Oil, lubricating

35]

(Ref. 20-95-201, 001)

Shell Donax C

NA.8

rubber

135

Jet Lube

UK.1

Item No. 113.

Formerly [OX-38]

Parker SLUBE 884-"

NA.26
UK.57

O-ring Seals
NOTE: The" represents
the container size.

137

Oil, engine

[MIL-PRF-

23699

HTS]

Mobil Jet Oil 254

NA.21

(43030 international code)


(43030-6 U.S. code)

UK.41

May

(ETO)
(217597 product code)

2197

899

be used to lubricate

cold air units, if

or

Exxon Turbo Oil

Formerly Brayco

required.

NA.7

UK.9

May

be used to lubricate

oil lubricated CAU


turbines.

[MIL-PRF- 23699 STD, 0-1]


Mobil Jet Oil II

NA.21

(43020 international code)


(43020-7 U.S. code)

U1<.41

Alternatives:

ExxonlEsso 2380 Turbo oil

NA.21
U1(.41

Castrol 5000

NA.64

Castrol 5050
Aeroshell turbine oil 500

NA.8

Aeroshell turbine oil 560

UK.1

any [MIL-PRF-23699]
approved oil.
or

138

Oil

[DEF.STAN.S1-41]
[MIL-L-6085A]
AeroShell Fluid 12

NA.8
UK.1

20-95-101

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

139

140

Material

Specification

Reference

Code
INA.44

R-12

Fluid, refrigerant

Oil, refrigerant

or

Remarks
Can be mixed with Item

Ui(.75

140.

Suniso 5GS

I\JA.115

Can be mixed with Item

BVM 100N

NA.116

[MIL-PRF-7808]

NA.21

Mobil RM.248A

UK.41

[MIL-PRF-7808]

NA.21

Mobil RM.272A

UK.41

[MIL-PRF-7808]
Royco 808

R1A.8

139.

141

142

143

Oil, engine
Oil, engine
Oil, engine

144

Replaced by

145

Oil, engine

146

Replaced by Item No.

147

Fuel, engine

Item No. 137.

U1<.1

Formerly [MIL-PRF-23699] Royco

ARS

[MIL-PRF-7808]
Turbonycoil 160
137.

899

Formerly [MIL-PRF-23699] Turbo-nycoil

[ASTM D1655]
[Def Stan 91-91]

ARS

600
AVTUR
For additional national

Jet Al

specifications

refer to

relevant AMM

Chapter

12 FUEL SYSTEM

SERVICING.
148

Fuel, engine

ARS

[ASTM D1655]
[Def Stan 91-88]

AVTAG
For additional national

Jet B

specifications

refer to

relevant AMM

Chapter

12 FUEL SYSTEMSERVICING.
149

Oil,

motor

Quaker State 30W-SAE

or

ARS

Pennzoil 30W-SAE

May be used for in-line


reaming of landing gear
bushes.

150

Oil, engine

BP Turbo Oil 2197

NA.111

May

be mixed with Exxon

2197

or

Item No.

151

Oil, general purpose

AeroShell Fluid 18

Mobil 254

(Refer

137).

NA.8
UK.1

light lubricating
Alternative:

Royco

308A

NA.110
UK.116

152

Fuel, engine

[ASTM-D-1655]
Jet A

ARS

For additional national

specifications

refer to

relevant AMM

Chapter

12 FUEL SYSTEM
SERVICING.

20-95-101

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
CLEANING AGENTS, PAINT STRIPPERS AND RELEASE AGENTS
i, INFORMATION
The

materials listed

below must

only

be used

in

conjunction

with

Raytheon approved

manuals

documentation.

2, CLEANING

AGENTS,

PAINT STRIPPERS AND RELEASE AGENTS

Suppliers
Item No.

201

Material

Cleaner, solvent

(Hand wipe solvent)

Specification

or

Code

Reference

Methyl-propyi-ketone (MPK)
(Commercial Grade)

ARS

Formerly:
Trichlorethylene
Refer to

Alternatives:

Item No. 230 for

[A-A-59281]
BarsolA-2904

Remarks

(ENVIRO-CLEAN)

[TT-N-95]
Naptha-Alphatic
Type I intended for use in the
manufacture of organic coatings
Type II intended for use in
cleaning acrylic plastics

NA.92

degreasing

NA.92

lor
ARS

[A-A-59281]
[TT-N-97]
Naptha, Aromatic
Type I, Grade B
202

Cleaner

203

Thinner

Evostik 253

UK.47

[BS.805]
(Toluene)

Toluoi

204

Replaced by

Item No. 201

205

Detergent, liquid
(water soluble)

206

Cleaner, solvent

207

Obsolete:

or

Formerly:
Methyl-ethylketone (MEK)

Item No. 287

ARS

[BS-1 595]
[TT-I-735]
[MIL-F-5566]
Isopropyl alcohol

IARS

Formerly:
Xylene

20-95-201

and

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRAGTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
208

Specification

Material

Item No.

Cleaner,

or

CN 44

solvent

Remarks

Code

Reference

NA.16

Especially

UK.10

formulated to meet
the

particular

requirements of
airplane painting.
Can be used

as a

gun wash.
209

NA.16

T112

Cleaner

UK.10
210

NA.16

850-564

Cleaner

UK.10
211

Replaced by

Formerly:

Item No. 201

Cleaner, solvent
212

Replaced by

Formerly:

Item No. 201

Solvent, degreasing
213

Aluminum brightener

Aloclene 290

214

Polish for plastic

Goddards

panels

P-P-560

NA.9

plastic polish

ARS

Formerly:
UK.13

Alternative:
Permatex 4030

Plastic, cleaner

ARS
ARS

215

Ammonia

216

Replaced by

Formerly:

Item No. 201

Solvent
217

Detergent

cleaner

Teepol TS610

NA.8
UK.93

218

Detergent

cleaner

UK.16

Stergene

or

219

Cleaner,

solvent

(Type
220

Solution, cleaning

221

Hydrogen peroxide

222

Release agent fluid

NA.82

P-D-680
II

or

ARS

III)

Formerly:
White spirit

NA.9

Aloclene 100

ARS

Ethylene glycol

NA.SS
UK.94
or

223

Alginic Acid,
(powder)

Release agent

Sodium Salt

ARS

NA.59

Avoid contact with

UK.94

skin and eyes.

or

ARS

Formerly:
Manucol SSILH
Manucol DH
Manutex RF
224

Solution, cleaning

(oxygen

masks

etc.)

Jun.0420-45-201

Nonidet 32G

NA.8
UK.?

UK.1

was

UK.93

Ral~heMI

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

Specification

Material

225

Duplicate

226

Soap

227

Methylated spirits

228

Cleaner, carpet

Reference

or

Code

Item. Reference Item 245

flakes

Lux

ARS

Methylated spirits

ARS

1001 carpet

shampoo

with

UK.76

fibreshield.
229

Remarks

Bostik T

Cleaner

or

(6104)

Suppliers

ARS

NA.11

or

NA.12

or

code

was

UK.78

UK.19
230

Desoclean 110

Degreasing agent

NA.16

Formerly:

UK.10

Genklene

Alternatives:

Methyl-propyl-ketone (M.P.K.)
(Commercial Grade)

ARS

Solvents

approved
cleaning before
bonding.

for

or

TT-N-95

Replaced by

Naptha

No.201

Item

or

Envirosolv

(Item

No.

290)

UK.107

NOTE

Desoclean 110

replaces

Genklene

only

as a

degreasing agent.

IT WILL NOT WORK FOR PRC

SEALANT REMOVAL. Refer to Item Nos 287, 288 and 289.

231

Replaced by

Item No. 230

Formerly:
degreasing

Metal

fluid
232

Cleaning liquid

233

Petroleum, ether

I-

IARS

234

Denatured alcohol

I-

IARS

235

Paint

remover

Synperonic

UK.77

Turco 6776-LO

NA.13

Environmentally

Alternative:

UK.20

friendly and

approved by

Turco 6813E

the

RAC Process Lab.


or

Stingray
Stingray
236

Replaced by

Item No. 235

237

Replaced by

Item No. 208

853

NA.72

847B

Formerly:

Stripper,
paint
238

Replaced by

Formerly:
Stripper, epoxy resin

Item No. 235

enamel
239

Methanol

BS.506

cellulose

ARS

20-95-201

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

240

Material

Specification

Parting fluid

or

Code

Reference

Remarks

NA.15

SF96/50

UK.68
241

Replced by

Item No. 224

Formerly:
Solvent, cleaner

242

Release

Releasil No. 7

agent

(silicone compound)
243

Replaced by

244

Release

245

Emulsion cleaner

MS.7

NA.5

DC.7

UK.7

Item No. 235

DB

agent

Formerly:
Stripper, paint
UK.27

Relag

[DTD 5507]

NA.14

Ardor 6025

UK.21

Primarily intended
cleaning the

for

exterior surfaces of
Alternative:
UK.61

Areoleen C

airplanes
foaming.

without

or

Gramos Hi-Kleen i

Bupiclene

UK.109

(Ref. 4779)
246

Refer to

247

Cleaner

248

Foam cleaner

Chapter 20-95-601,

Item No. 604

I-

IARS

UK.106

Amberclens

Use any car liquid


interior cleaner.

Suppliers

code

was

code

was

UK.52
249

Leather finisher

NA.102

Hide Food

Leafood
250

Leather finisher

(Item

Suppliers
UK.53

Alternative:
No.

Leafood

250)
UK.54

Alternative material
for Item No. 249

251

Fabric protector

Scotchguard

RIA.17

UK.30
or

252

Replaced by

ARS

Formerly:

Item No. 285

Anti-static

plastic

cleaner

253

Acrylic
polish

windscreen

Novus No. 2

ARS

Formerly:
MGH 10

Psi-lite IV

MGH 17
MicroMesh

Glastercote

254

Duplicate

255

Cleaner, solvent

material. Refer to Item No. 208

C28/15

UK.84

Suppliers
UK.90

256

Cleaning

solution

20-95-201

F273-842

1 UK.10

code

was

Ralkheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

257

Specification

Material
Solvent

or

Reference

3M Solvent No. 2

Code

Remarks

NA.17

UK.30

258

Acetone

259

Obsolete:

lsS 509]

UK.10

Formerly:
NRG

260

Penetrating

fluid

261

Duplicate

262

Replaced by Item

No. 678

ARS

material. Reference Item No. 206


No. 230

Formerly:
T5 thinner

263

Replaced by

Item No. 201

Formerly:
Inhibsol

264

Scotchbrite BAER 0302

Cleaner

NA.17

Use with

pads

UK.30

265

Detergent cleaner

266

Cleaning

267

Paraffin

268

Benzol

269

Fluid

DP57D MK18

UK.65

Aerokleen CD1 TS 10281

UK.61

(Kerosene)

Replaced by

ARS
ARS

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Titanine Cleaner VV

270

Replaced by Item

No. 235

Formerly:
Turco 5092

271

Replaced by

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Ardrox 664

272

Replaced by Item

No. 235

Formerly:
Cee Fee A214

273

Replaced by

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Pennsalt EZ19A

274

Replaced by Item

No. 235

Formerly:
Dubois R2134

275

Replaced by

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Turco 5469

276

Replaced by Item No. 235

Formerly:
Ardrox 2475

278

Replaced by

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Ardrox 2468

279

Replaced by

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Ardrox 2526 HV

280

Replaced by

Item No. 235

Formerly:
Ardrox 2526 HV

281

Replaced by Item No. 235

Formerly:
Ardrox 29

20-95-201

Ral~heon

Aircraft

tompany

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
282

283

Specification

Material

Item No.

Polish, abrasive

or

Reference

Code

[M I L-P-6888]

NA.30

Turco 1495

UK.20

Remarks

I Formerly:

Obsolete:

Thinners CT-66

I AH F-l 00

284

Solvent

285

Cleaner, anti-static

Prist

Acrylic,

NA.56
Plastic

Glass

Cleaner

flight

NA.16

Used to clean

UK.87

deck and cabin

windows.
286

Cleaning agent (Soap) I Turco 4215 NC-LT

NA.13

Alkaline Cleaner

UK.20
287

Fabric

Wipe,

NA.95

SkyWipes

moist

non-woven

1 UK.103

(Safe

alternate for MEK,

refer to item No.

204)

"Wipe" product
containing SkyWash
(with or without
lanolin).
Used for the
removal of wet/tacky

polysulfides. Use for


cleaning or
hand cleaning.

tool

288

Cleaner/Degreaser,

SkyWash

NA.95
UK.103

wash

Liquid agent used


SkyWipes minus
lanolin.

in

non

flammable and
solvent free.

Used

as a

neutralizing agent
for SkyRestore.
289

Solvent, thixotropic gel I SkyRestore 2000

NA.95

Used for the

UK.103

removal of

quick
fully

cured sealant.
290

Cleaner, solvent

Envirosolv

UK.107

Removal of

hydraulic

residue

and grease from


wheelwells and

hydraulic system
rear fuselage.
Not to be used

in

on

airplane windows.
291

292

Cleaner, solvent
Cleaner, solvent

Ardrox 9 PR 70

Purasolv EL

NA.14

general
cleaning.

NA.103

Use for

UK.110
293

Cleaner, solvent

20-95-201

Akzo 98066

Use for

UK.21

UK.84

general
cleaning

RayCheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

294

295

Material

Cleaner, solvent

Mold, Release, Spray

Specification
Ensolv

Monocoat E-300

or

Reference

Code
NA.104

Use for vapor

UK.113

degreasing
cleaning.

or

cold

NA.108

Use

UK.114

agent for various


molding

NA.18

applications.

Alternatives:
Frekote 770-NC

Remarks

as a

release

UK.31
or

Rocol MRS

UK.3

20-95-201Jun.04

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company
AIRFRAME

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

ADHESIVES, JOINTING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS


i, INFORMATION
NOTE: The materials listed below must

only

be used in

with

conjunction

Raytheon approved

manuals and

documentation

2,

ADHESIVES, JOINTING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS

Suppliers
Material

Item No.

301

Compound, filling

Specification

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

Fairing and smoothing


compound used to fill

[BS 201]
UK.27

HYSOL EA 960F
Hermetite Kwikfil

dents, gaps, and voids


for exterior airplane

(European availability)

surfaces.

Alternatives:

[MIL-A-23941]
[BS 201]
Scotchweld DP-460

(Duo-Pack Adhesive)
Long worklife adhesive

3M Scotch-Weld

I
NA.17

IUK.30

cartridges

are

especially
packaged

formulated and
for

use

in the EPX

applicator (20-95-601,
Item 686).

Scotchweld DP-110
Due-Pack

adhesives in Duo-Pak

Adhesive)

Fast Cure adhesive

Scotchweld 9323-2 B/A

(Longer pot time.)


(European availability

302

Adhesive, Dunlop

Araldite 2013

NA.58

Formerly:

(gray)

UK.43

Araldite AV144-2/HV997

PS-14

U1(.29

Bostik, clear

NA.11

Used to bond

NA.12

ABS type materials to


themselves and to each

solution

303

Vinyl

Adhesive

UK.19

vinyl and

other and to aluminum

painted

[BS 201]
EC-2262

(3M)

NA.17
UK.30

20-95-301

surfaces.

or

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

304

Specification

Material

Adhesive, Contact

[MIL-A-1154]

(Brush, roller)

MMM-A-121

or

Reference

(or)

Remarks

Brushable with
NA.17

10 Neutral, Fastbond Contact


Adhesive

Code

higher

coverage.

UK.30

Fastbond 10

In 1984 3M

reassigned

"10 Neutral, Fastbond


Contact Adhesive"

Alternative:
EC 1300L

(EC1403) (Item 339)

(Fastbond 10)as the new


product designator for
2210 SG Contact

Cement.
same

305

Compound, sealing

For pressure

[DTD.900AA/4058]
Bostik 1752

They
product.

are

the

sealing

NA.11

cabins, cockpits and

NA.12

integral

of

tanks.

U1<.19

306

Adhesive, perspex

bonding

[MIL-A-8576, Type III]


[BS 201]
[88-208043

Used to bond
to other

plexiglas

itself,

UK.97

acrylic and
plastics.

f\lA.16

Formerly.
[DTD.900AA14488A]
JC-5A (U.K. product)

PS-30

to

types of

NA.63

to other

[DTD.900AA141 42]
Tensol Cement No.3

(European availability)
307

Compound, jointing

CA 1000

UK.10

one-part, nonchromate

corrosion inhibitive

compound. Can be
applied to removable
fasteners

assemblies

prevent the ingress of


moisture
to provide
from
galvanic
protection

to

corrosion

308

Duplicate

309(a)
309(b)
309(c)

Item

Item. Reference Item 374.

superseded.

Reference Item 372.

Mar.OG20-95-301

Ralfheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

310

Material

Compound, jointing
(gasket material)

Specification

or

Reference

Code

[BS 201]

Remarks

Formerly:

Permatex Sealer No.2

NA.66

(Form-A-Gasket #2 Sealant,
Part No. 2C, Item
80003)

[DTD.900AA14586B]
Hylomar SQ-32M
Used as a soft pliable
gasket material, resistant
and leakproof to
gasoline, oil and water.

311

312

For

[DTD.900AA14344]
Silkolene 762

U1(.4

[MIL-S-4383]
(Red)
PR 1005CH (Yellow)

NA.16

overcoating

UK.10

in fuel tanks. Material

[MIL-S-4383]

NA.17

may be applied by brush,


spray, or fill and drain
method.

EC-776SR

U~.30

Compound, sealing

PR 1005L

Polysulfide Sealant

gases at

Good material for

Alternative:

313

prevention of leaks of
high
temperatures on Rolls
Royce turbine engines.

Compound, high
temperature jointing

I [MIL-S-8784]

and

sealing

Formerly:

PR 1428 A 1/2

NA.16

[DTD.900AA14523]

UK.10

PR-1301
Low adhesion sealant
which is suitable for
brush

application and to
place gaskets.

form in

314

Polysulfide Sealant
grade (adhesive)

fillet

Formerly:

[DTD.900/4590]
NA.16

PR 1422 B 2

UK.10
Alternative:
Class

[MIL-S-8802

This material is used

as a

faying surface fillet seal


for integral fuel tanks
cabin pressurization.

Bj

PR 1440 B 2
or

AC-236 B-2

PR.1422-2

NA.97

or

AC-238 B-2

315

Polysulfide Sealant
brush grade (adhesive)

(Item 343A)
Formerly:

[DTD.900/4590]
PR 1422 A 2

NA.16

PR 1422-BT2

UK.10
Alternative:

[MIL-S-8802 Class A]
PR 1440 A 2
or

NA.97

AC-236A-2
or

AC-238 A-2

(Item 341A)

20-95-301

PMaaSreg~Mar.OG

Ray~heon

AiKraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
316

Specification

Material

Polysulfide Sealant
rapid cure (adhesive)

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

Formerly:

[DTD.900/4590]
[MIL-S-8802 Class A]
PR 1422 A 1/2

PR 1422-BT1/2

1 NA.16

Alternative
PR 1440 A 1/2
or

NA.97

AC-236 A-1/2
or

AC-238 A-1/2
317

Polysulfide Sealant
interfay (adhesive)

(Item 340A)

[DTD.SO 0/46 1 1 i
[MIL-S-8802 Class C]
PR 1431 Typel

For U.S. alternative refer


to Item 380.

NA.16
UK.10

Alternative:

PR 1440 C 20
or

PR 1770C-12

318

Polysulfide

Sealant

constant thickness

(adhesive)

(Item 345A)

[DTD.900/4611]
[MIL-S-8802 Class C]
PR 1431 Type 1

NA.16
UK.10

item 328

Alternative:
PR 1440 C 20

Item 328
or

PR 1770-C12

(Item 345A)

Item 328
319

Polysulfide
(Brush)

Sealant

[MIL-S-8802]
PR 1440 A

NA.16
UK.10

Formerly:
[DTD.900AA/4506]
PR-5401 8 PR-1221
removed due to lead
dioxide content.

Dual purpose sealant of

brushing consistency.
Used with an approved
top sealing coat.
320

Compound, jointing
(plastic Hermetite)

[DTD.900AA141348]
Hermetite 1310

UK.27

Sealing compound
resistant to petrol
(gasoline), mineral

oil

and ester lubricant.


321

Item

superseded. Reference

Item 313

(313)
322

Item

superseded.

Reference Item 313

(313)

Mar.OG20-95-301

Formerly:
Boscoprene

2100-10

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
323

Material

Reference Item 462

Specification

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

(Chapter 20-95-401).

(462)
324

Compound, sealing

Formerly:
[DTD.900AA14574]

[MIL-S-83430]
[BS-20804]
NA.17

PR-1 750B

EC-1 605B

UK.30
A

two-part polysulfide

sealant that has excellent


adhesion to most

airplane metals.

It has

excellent resistance to

fuels, oils, alcohol, water


hydraulic fluids.
325

Compound, sealing

[MIL-S-8802]
Type II: Manganese

INACTIVE:
cured

Class B: Suitable for

NA.17

[DTD.90014486]

UK.30

EC-801 Class B

application by extrusion-gun
and spatula
326

Compound, sealing

[DTD.900/4572]
Hermetal double bond

(putty or

UK.27

cream)
Alternative:
NA.62

Devcon F

UK.96

or

Hysol

EA960F

(Item 301)

or

Metalset A-4

327

Paste anti-oxident

(Item 345)
Mix

[DTD.5503]
50% zinc oxide

as

needed.

ARS

[BS 254]
petroleum jelly

white

328

Aerosil

DT-075

NA.95

Used

U1<.104

agent

as a

Alternative:

Cab-O-Sil M-5

NA.98

(Cabot Corporation)
329

Adhesive

Bostik 1787

NA.11

NA.12
UK.19

20-95-301

thickening

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
330

Specification

Material

Item No.

Polysulfide Sealant

or

Reference

Remarks

Code

For

[FMS 3065]
PR 1425 81/2

sealing airplane

NA.16

windshields, side

UK.10

windows and

applications where
acrylic to aluminum

are

used and for weather

sealing.
be used

Also

can

spot

weld

and

as an

as a

through

sealer

adhesive

replacement

for Item 381

331

Repair Compound

Bowes Seal Fast

UK.29

NA.23 deleted.

332

Leak stopper

Oyltite-stik

UK.48

UK Product
-Fuel tank leaks

333

Item

superseded.

Formerly:

Reference Item 332.

R4540 Mk-ll

(332)
334

Adhesive

Evostik 5007/3

UK.47

UK Product

335

Adhesive

Evostik SH 105

UK.47

UK Product

336

Adhesive,

[MMM-A-121]

(Spray/Brush)

1300-L

Scotch-Grip

Gasket Adhesive

Formerly:
Rubber 8

NA.17

[DTD.900AA/4564]

UK.30

Evostik 528
Lower

viscosity version

of 1300 Adhesive for

spray application.
Used primarily for

bonding Neoprene, SBR


and other types of rubber
to themselves, to metal,

wood and most other

surfaces, especially

adaptable

to installation

ofdeicerboots.
337

Page

6Mar.OG

Adhesive

20-95-301

Evostik 253

UK.47

UK Product

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

338

Material

Specification

Code

Reference

or

For

[DTD.900/4679A]

Adhesive

Remarks

Bostik 2402

UK.19

Curing agent Bostikure


with Primer(ltem 462)

use

in the

manufacture and

repair

of aircrew and survival

clothing and infiatable


equipment

Alternative:
Bostik 1009A

(Adhesive)

NA.11
NA.12

with

Bostik 1008B

(Hardener)

or

Combi-Bond Cold

Bonding

NA.100

Adhesive
with

Combi Bond Hardener

339

NA.17

EC1300L

Adhesive

(EC1403)

UK.30

Impact adhesive.Suitable
bonding decorative

for

laminates to metal wood,


rubber and most other

materials.
340

Jointing compound,

[DTD.900AA14549A]
[MIL-S-8660C]

Sealant

as a

Celloseal QH

used

substitute for DTD

NA.16

369B where resistance to

UK.10

ester

lubricants,

kerosene and heat

are

required.
341

(368)

Adhesive, silicone

Silpak

A-400

NA.15

J(two-part)

UK.68

Alternative materials for


Item 368.

Alternative:

Primer for Item 341

Dapcotac 3300 (Item 323A)

Reference Item 401A

(368)

(Chapter 20-95-401)
342

Duplicate

Item. Reference Item 338.

(338)
343

Adhesive, epoxy, paste

Araldite 2011

(Viscosity thick)

(Two part

NA.58

mix 2011

A/B)

UK.43

Formerly Araldite AV 100


by supplier in

withdrawn

October 1994.

Alternative:
EA 9309 NA

(Item 306A)

Suitable for

bonding

wide

variety of metals,
ceramics, glass, rubber,
rigid plastics

and most

other materials in
common use.

20-95-301

.06

Ra~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers

Specification

Material

Item No.

Adhesive, epoxy, liquid

344

(Viscosity -thin)

or

Remarks

Code

Reference

Araldite

1VA.58

Suitable for bonding

AY 103

Ut(.43

of materials,

HY 991

(Resin) with
(Hardener)

variety
including metal, ceramic,
wood, glass, rubber, rigid
plastic and most other

Alternative:

or

EPON Resin 828

Adhesive,

345

epoxy(Filled

I
NA.58

Metal Set A4

use.

to

(Item 308A)
UK.43

paste)

(382)
(392)

materials in

(Item 305A)

EC2216

Alternative:
Araldite

It is

apply

common

particularly easy
over

Suitable for

Item

346

superseded.

(Resin) with
(Hardener)

Formerly:

[DTD.900/45901
NA.16

PR 1422 B 1/2

UK.10
Alternative:

PR 1440 B 1/2
NA.97

AC-236 8-1/2

(Item 342A)

AC238 B-112

Polysulfide Sealant

348

[DTD.900/4611]
PR 1431

RIA.16

Type 2

UK.10
Item

349

superseded.

Reference Item 317.

(317)
Polysulfide

350

Sealant

[MIL-S-8802]
NA.26

PR 7442 112

UK.10
Alternative:
AC-238 A-2

Polysulfide Sealant

351

(Item 340A)

[MIL-S-8802]
NA.16

PR 7442 2

UK.?O
Alternative:
AC-238 A-2
Items

352 to

superseded.

356

(317)
(380)

(Item 341A)

Reference Item 317

or

Mar.OG20-95-301

or

380.

variety
including metal, ceramic,
wood, glass and rubber.

Reference Item 315.

Polysulfide Sealant

areas.

bonding

(315)
347

large

of materials,

AV 12?N
HY 951

PR.1422-1/2

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
357

Material

Polysulfide Sealant
inhibiting

corrosion

-Specification

Reference

or

Code

[MIL-S-81733]

Remarks

Formerly:

PS 870 A-1/2

NA.16

PR 1422 GA 1/2

UK.10
358

Polysulfide Sealant
corrosion inhibiting

[MIL-S-81733]

Formerly:

PS 870 A-2

NA.16

PR 1422 GA 2

UK.10
359

Polysulfide Sealant

[MIL-A-8784]

PR1428 A 2

I Formerly:
NA.16
UI<.10

PR.1301-2
Low adhesion sealant
which is suitable for

brush

application and to
place gaskets.

form in
360

Item

superseded. Reference

Item 359

Formerly:

(359)
361

PR.1301-4
Sealant

RTV 731

Ut<.7

Alternative:
Rn/ 732 (Item 371

(a))

or

Rn/ 3145
362

High Performance
Contact Adhesive

(Item 331A)

[MIL-A-21366]
Scotch-Grip 1357

Formerly:
1VA.17

1357-L (sprayable version)


1357 Neutral (neutral color)

Ut(.30

High strength

materials to themselves

reference Item 315A.


Adhesive

I Dunlop upholstery

solution

adhesives

used to bond many


rubber and gasket

Alternative for 1357 Neutral,

363

52-100-900

and to other substrates.


UK.29

L107
364

Compound, sealing
(Very high temperature)

Dapco 2100

NA.67

Formerly:
Coming 2 Part

Dow

Alternative:

93-004

P/S 700

93-004

(Item 366)

(Base)
(Catalyst)

or

PR 812

(Item 367)

Primerless Firewall
Sealant.

365

Primer, sealing
compound

[AFS 1234]
1200 Rn/ (Red)

NA.5

1200 Rn/

UK.7

(Clear)

Alternative:
Silcoset OP

(Item 369)

20-95-301

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

366

Material

Specification

Part B

(Curing agent)
(Base)

Compound, sealing
[MIL-S-38249, Type I]
(Very high temperature) I PR-812
Part A (Curing agent)
Part B

368

Reference

[MIL-S-38249, Type I]
Compound, sealing
(Very high temperature) P/S 700
Part A

367

or

Alternative material for


NA.16

Item 364.

UK.10

Alternative material for


r\lA.16

Item 364.

UI<.10

(Base)

SR 529

Adhesive, silicone

SRC18

(391)

Remarks

Code

(Adhesive)
(Catalyst)

NA.15

Reference Item 341 for

UK.68

alternative materials.
Primer for Item 368
reference Item 401A

(Chapter20-95-401).
Used to bond silicone
rubber to itself and

variety of other materials


including glass and
metal.

369

Primer, adhesive

[AFS 1127]
Silcoset OP

(403A)
370(a)/
(b)

Reference Item 402A

371(a)

Silicone Adhesive

[MIL-A-46106]

RTV 732

371(b)

371(c)

part cold

UK.106

(Chapter 20-95-401).

cure

Multi-purpose sealant,
NA.5

available in white, black,

UK.7

clear, bronze, colors.

Silicone Adhesive

[M IL-A-46146A]

Electrical sealant

RTV 738

(Equivalent product RTV


162 may also be used)

part cold

cure

Silicon Adhesive

[AFS 1235]

Silcoset 153

part cold

cure

Can be used for gap


UK.106

filling.
Primer for Item

371(a)(b)(c)
Reference Item 401A

(Chapter 20-95-401).

20-95-301

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

372

Material

Specification

Adhesive

or

Grade

[DTD.5633

Reference

Code

Remarks
Suitable to prevent

3]

Loctite 270

NA.18

or

Ut(.31

loosening through
vibration and leakage

of

threaded fasteners.

Loctite 271

Suitable for

locking
bushings and sleeves
into housings and on
shafts.
PRIMER:

Reference Item 317A

or

318A
373

Superseded

374

Adhesive

Item. Reference 366 and 367.

[DTD.5633

(308)

Grade

1]
NA.18

Loctite 290

UK.31

Penetrating adhesive for


locking pre-assembled
parts/sealing porous
castings and welds.
PRIMER:
Reference Item 317A

or

318A.

375

Duplicate item. Reference

376

Adhesive

Item 361.
NA.11

Bostik 1768

NA.12
UK.19
377

or

Items

superseded. Reference

Item 372.

378
379

380

PR-1764 8-2

Sealant, conductive

Polysulfide Sealant
interfay (adhesive

NA.16

Electrically conductive

UK.10

sealant
U.S. alternative to Item

[MIL-S-81733]
NA.?6

PS-870C

(cure
381

Reference Item 330

or

times

317. Joint

edge must be
a layer of

covered with

Available in class C-12/24/48

fuel

vary)

337A

proof

sealant

Formerly:
Adhesive EP601

(330 or
337A)

Adhesive EP711

382

Duplicate item.

383

Adhesive

Reference Item 345.

Bostik Axiom 100

NA.12

Formerly:

(SA)

UK.19

AS100B

Activator L

Alternative:

NA.17

Scotch Seal 2084

UK.30

20-95-301

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
384

Specification

Material

or

Reference

Code

Formerly:

[BS-20804]

Adhesive perspex

Remarks

NA.16

PS-30

Tersol 50

UK.10
Used to bond

itself,

acrylic and
plastics.
385

Adhesive,

[MMM-A-189]
Scotch-Grip

(Spray/Brush)

847-L

Gasket Adhesive

types of

to other

In 1984 3M

Rubber 8

plexiglas to

to other

reassigned

NA.17

"847-L"

UK.30

product designator for

as

the

new

1022 SG Industrial

same

They
product.

Lower

viscosity

Adhesive.

are

the

version

of the 847 Adhesive for


spray

386

Formerly:

[S27-8009]

Adhesive

application.

HYSOL EA 9330.1
Part A

Cream

Part B

Blue

Epoxy paste
liquid curing

NA.53

NA 69 and UK.44

Ut<.99

agent
Scotch-Weld 2216 BIA

Reference Item 305A.

EA 9309 NA

Reference Item 306A.

or

EA 9320 NA

Reference Item 307A.

EA 934 NA, EA 9394


or

Magnobond 6398
387

Sealant

Dow

Coming

93-006

NA.70
NA.5

UK.7
388

Reference Item 462

389

Sealant, Fluorosilicone

(Chapter 20-95-401).
NA.16

RTV 730
+PrimerP1200

390

Sealant, quick repair

Duplicate

392

Duplicate material.

393

Filler

Alternative for Item 336A.

[M IL-S-83318]
P/S 860

391

UK.10

NA.16

Use with adhesion

UK.10

promoter (Item 335A).

material. Reference Item 368.


Reference Item 345.

Stag

DB

putty

UK.62

Filler

Stag

DB

cream

UK.62

395

Filler

Polystop

396

Smoothing Sealant

[MIL-S-38228]

394

L.P

PIS 895 B 1/2

Mar.OG20-95-301

ARS

Formerly:
NA.16

PR 340 B 1/2

UK.10

(Discontinued Product).

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

Material

397

Smoothing

Sealant

Specification

or

Reference

Remarks

I [MIL-S-38228]

Formerly:

P/S 895 B 2

398

Code

NA.16

PR 340 B 2

UK.10

(Discontinued Product)

I Reference Item 396.

Formerly:

(396)

PR 1436 GB 1/2

(Discontinued Product)
399

(397)

Reference Item 397.

Formerly:

PR 1436 GB 2

(Discontinued Product)
301A

I Formerly:

Obsolete.

PR 1436 GB 4

302A

Obsolete.

Formerly:
PR 1400

303A

Sealant

Loctite 29

NA.18
UK.31

304A

Adhesive

Permabond 910

NA.50
UK.90

305A

Epoxy Adhesive
(Viscosity thin)

Scotch-Weld EC 2216 B/A

NA.17

Uf<.30
Alternative:

Epon 828 (Item 308A)


Araldite AY 103
306A

Epoxy Adhesive
(Viscosity- thick)

NA.8
UI<.1

or

(Item 344)

EA 9309 NA

Suitable for bonding a


variety of materials
including, metal, wood,
most plastics and
fiberglass

UK.43
NA.53

Formerly: NA.69

U1<.99
Alternative:

Used to bond aluminum,

EA 9320 NA

steel, wood, most

or

Araldite 201 (Item

343)

UK.43

plastics, fiberglass and


glass to themselves and
each other where
resistance to

moisture,

salt spray and most


common fluids is needed
307A

Adhesive, epoxy resin

EA 934 NA

NA.53

Formerly:

NA.69

Ut(.99

Alternative:

Used to bond

EA 9394 NA
or

Magnobond 6398

aluminum,
plastics,
rubber (except silicone),
fiberglass and wood to
steel,

NA.70

most

themselves and each


other where resistance to

moisture, JP-4 and other

hydrocarbon fluids
required.

are

20-95-301Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125IHAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

308A

Specification

Material

Adhesive, epoxy resin

or

Reference

Code

EPON Resin 828 with

NA.58

(EPI-CURE 9552)

UK.43

Alternative:
Araldite AY 105

materials in

HY 953 F

Adhesive, epoxy

Suitable for bonding a


variety of materials,
including glass, ceramic,
rigid plastic, rubber,
metal and most other

(Resin)

with

309A

Remarks

(Hardener)

Araldite 2012 A/B

common

use.

NA.58

UK.43

Multi-purpose viscous
liquid with a fast work life.
Pale yellow in color.
NOTE WORK LIFE.

310A

Adhesive, epoxy

Araldite 2014

heat/

NA.58

It is

UK.43

chemical-resistant
with

Gray

paste

medium work life.

in color. NOTE

WORK LIFE.

311A

Quick Repair,
Windscreen Sealant

IMIL-S-83430]
PR-1829 (Class B)

Reference also: B-1/2


NA.16
UK.10

(Item 346A), B-2 (Item


347A) and PR 187 (Item
348A).
Item 311A

346A

or

347A and 348A

or

are

used

together per
manufacturers

instructions
312A

Acrylic

adhesives

NA.17

DP-805

UK.30
Alternative:

DP-820
313A

Adhesive

Super

74 Foam Fast

ARS

For

bonding

urethane

314A

Adhesive, polyurethane

NA.89

Silaprene M6587

Plastic

or

flexible
latex foam.

fabricating

adhesive.

Does not adhere well to


bare metals and

fiberglass
315A

I Contact Adhesive,

NA.90

14-31 Adhesive

High Performance

Exceptionally high
strength adhesives.

Alternative:

Used to bond

Scotch-Grip 1357 Neutral

light-colored

(Reference

Item

362).

leathers to

metal and to leather


where

quick setting

adhesives

20-95-301

laminates.

are

necessary.

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

316A

317A

Material
Plastic Adhesive

Specification

or

Reference

Scotch-Grip 1099
1099L sprayable version

NA.17

1099L

UK.30

EC1359.

formerly

known

as

Alternative:

Excellent resistance to

Reference Item 362.

migratory plasticizers in
vinyls and nitrile rubbers.

Loctite 7649 N

Primer N

Remarks

Code

NA.18

A solvent based

UK.31

speeds

cure

primer

of all Loctite

anaerobic adhesives and


sealants
318A

Loctite 7471 T

Primer T

NA.18

A solvent based

UK.31

speeds

cure

primer

of all Loctite

anaerobic adhesives and


sealants
319A

Retaining Compound

NSF/ANSIG1
680

Retaining Compound

NA.18

Ut<.31

High strength/high
viscosity.
A retaining compound for
joining fitted cylindrical
parts. Cures in 10
minutes and provides a
shear strength of 4,000
psi on steel after 24
hours. Fills diametral gap
distances up to 0.015
inch. (green).
PRIMER:

Reference Item 318A


320A

321A

322A

Sealant, electrically

MMS-327

NA.16

conductive

PR-2200B-1

UK.10

Electrically conductive
rapid cure sealant.

Adhesion Promoter

PR-182

NA.16

Available

UK.10

or

Sealant, sprayable

as

either

pink

clear

[MIL-S-81733 Type III]


PR1436 GS

NA.16
UK.10

323A

Adhesive

324A

Polysulfide

Dapcotac 3300
Sealant

Polysulfide

Sealant

Alternative for Item 341.

NA.16

which is suitable for

UK.10

application by extrusion
gun or spatula.

NA.16

which is suitable for

UK.10

application by extrusion
gun or spatula.

Low adhesion sealant

[MIL-S-8784]
PR 1428 8-1/2

325A

NA.67

Low adhesion sealant

[MIL-S-8784]
PR 1428 B-2

20-95-301Mar.OG

RaylheM1

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
326A

Material

Specification

Adhesive Sealant

or

Reference

Code

[AFS 1980]

Remarks
A

Silcoset 101 RTV

UK.106

pourable

two

can

be used in

temperature
327A

Adhesive Sealant
1

328A

part cold

cure

[AFS 1540]
(Si(cosef 152 Rn/

Thixotropic compound.

[MIL-S-46106]

GE Silicones RTV 108

cure

high

areas.

UK. 106

Silicane Adhesive

part cold

part

silicone mix rubber which

Alternative material for


NA.15

Item

371(a).

UK.68
329A

Silicone Adhesive

[MIL-S-46106]

GE Silicones RTV 109

part cold

cure

Alternative material for

NA.15

Item

371(a).

UK.68

330A

Silicone Adhesive

part cold

[M\L-A-46146A]

Alternative material for

GE Si\icones RTV 162

cure

\NA.?5

Item

371(b).

UK.68
331A

Siricone Adhesive
1

part cold

[MIL-A-46146]
Corning 3145

Dow

cure

Alternative material for


RTV

NA.5

Item

371(b).

UK.7
Alternative:
R~V 732

332A

IAdhesive

Sealant

Dow

(\tem 371(a))

Coming 93-076 Rn/

INA.5
UK.7

I Two component silicone


material with

high

strength bond. It can


used as a high
temperature sealant.
333A

Primer

Dow

Coming 1204

INA.5
UK.7

j Improves

be

adhesion of

silicone rubbers to
various substrates.

334A

Phenolic Microballoons

BJ00930

NA.95

Filler used for

U1(.104

sealant for

thickening
filling of gaps

and cavities.

335A

Adhesion Promoter

PR-148

NA.16

UK.?O

Used to

improve the
bonding characteristics
of polysulfide compounds
to a wide variety of
substrates.

336A

Sealant, quick repair

I[MIL-S-83318]
PR 1435

Use with adhesion

NA.16

promoter (Item 335A).

UK.10
Alternative:
P/S 860

337A

Polysulfide Sealant

(Item 390)

[FMS 30651
PR 1425 B 2

Can be used

INA.16
UK.10

Page

16Mar;OG

20-95301

as an

adhesive replacement for


Item 381.

Raytheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
338A

Material

Polysulfide

Sealant

Specification

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

Corrosion inhibitive

[MIL-S-81733]
P/S 870 B-112

NA.16

UK.10

sealant. The uncured


material is low sag,

thixotropic paste suitable


for application by
extrusion gun or spatula.
339A

Polysulfide

Sealant

Corrosion inhibitive

[MIL-S81733]
P/S 870 B-2

NA.16
UK.10

sealant. The uncured


material is low sag,

thixotropic paste suitable


for application by
extrusion gun or spatula.
340A

Polysulfide

Sealant

This material

[MIL-S-8802]
Naftoseal AC-238 A-1/2

gives

NA.14

excellent fuel tank and

Ut<.21

fuselage

seals.

Alternative material for


Items 316 and 350.

341A

Polysulfide Sealant

This material

[MIL-S-8802]
Naftoseal AC-238 A-2

gives

NA.14

excellent fuel tank and

Ut(.21

fuselage seals.
Alternative material for

Items 315 and 351.


342A

Polysulfide

Sealant

This material

IMIL-S-8802]
Naftoseal AC-238 B-1/2

gives

NA.14

excellent fuel tank and

UK.21

fuselage

seals.

Alternative material for


Item 347.

343A

Polysulfide

Sealant

This material

[MIL-S-8802]
Naftoseal AC-238 B-2

gives

NA.14

excellent fuel tank and

U1(.21

fuselage

seals.

Alternative material for


Item 314.

344A

Adhesion Promoter

Naftoseal AC-110
NA.14
UK.21

Used to improve the


bonding characteristics
of polysulfide compounds
to a wide variety of
su bstrates.

Use with Items 340A,


341A, 342A and 343A.
345A

Polysulfide

Sealant

[MIL-S-8802

Class

PR 1770 C-l 2

High temperature

C]
NA.16

resistant

UK.10

sealant. Suitable for

faying

application by

surface

brush

or

roller.
Alternative material for
Item 317.

20-95-301Mar.OG

I~ytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

346A

Specification

Material

Quick Repair,
Windscreen Sealant

or

Reference

Remarks

Code

Item 346A and Item 348A

[MIL-S-83430
PR 1829 8-1/2

used

together

NA.16

are

UK.10

manufacturers

as

per

instructions.
347A

Quick Repair,

[MIL-S-83430]

Windscreen Sealant

PR 1829 8-2

Item 347A and Item 348A

used

together

NA.16

are

UK.10

manufacturers

as

per

instructions.
348A

Adhesion Promoter

PR 187

NA.16

Used with Items 311A,

UK.10

346A

or

347A

as

per

manufacturers

instructions.
349A

350A

Dow

Sealant

Coming 736

RN

(Red)

High temperature sealant

UK.7

up to 600"F

NA.11

300 Primer

Halogen Wipe

Thinner E

Treatment Solution

NA.5

(6316)

UK.19

(315"C).

be used to

augment
May
or replace abrading of
rubber surfaces prior to
their

351A

Hi-Tack 76

Adhesive

Spray Adhesive

30026

NA.17
UK.30

bonding
be used to bond

May
winglet light

352A

Silver Loaded

Epoxy

610-1016

NA.119

part epoxy filled with


particles, used for
bonds that require
electrical continuity.

Two

silver

Part No. 16307

Mar.

20-95-301

gasket
flange.

lens

to attachment

Raytheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

ENAMELS, LACQUERS, PAINTS, PRIMERS AND VARNISHES


i. INFORMATION
NOTE: The materials listed below must

only

be used in

conjunction

with

Raytheon approved

manuals and

documentation

2.

ENAMELS, LACQUERS, PAINTS, PRIMERS AND VARNISHES

Specification

Material

Item No.

401

Enamel, grey, touch-up

402

Replaced by

403

Lacquer
Epoxy primer

Suppliers

Remarks

Code
UK.34

J22/255 Def Stan 80-129

UK.61

Item 466

515

910
405

Reference

Hall No. 559/273

Type
404

or

350

Catalyst

solution

UK.10

(CAt-A-LAC)

R1A.53

Curing

Base 463-12-8

Epoxy primer

NA.16

333 Base coat

Grumman

Spec.

GM5002

CA-116

Reduce TL-52
406

Epoxy primer

NA.53

Base 454-4-1

Boeing

Mat.

Spec.

EMS 10-20C

Catalyst CA-109
Reduce TL-102
407

Epoxy primer

NA.54

Base 483-660

Curing Agent 120-880


Thinner 110-665
408

Epoxy primer

Base 463-6-3

NA.53

Boeing

Mat.

EMS 10-11

Catalyst CA-306

Spec.
Type 1

Class A

Reduce TL-52
409

Epoxy primer

Base 10 P4-2
Cure EC-117

NA.53

Boeing

Mat.

EMS 10-11

Spec.
Type 1

Class A

Reduce TR-19
410

Not used

420

20-95-401

M"a~"o:Mar.OG

RByfheOn

Aircraft Company
PRACTICES

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD

Item No.
421

Material

Lacquer, epoxy finish (slate

color)

Specification

or

Suppliers

activator 65, 66, 67, 68

or

UK.10

Requires color
number and finish

applicable

Lacquer, sealing
edges
fiberglass

010-1302

UK.71

Lacquer, clear

F.190-127

NA.16

raw

Remarks

Code
NA.16

EC.75

69 whichever is

422

Reference

AIRFRAME

of Bakelite and

423

UK.10

424

Lacquer, pigmented

F153

NA.16

UK.10

Suppliers
was

Suppliers
was

code

Ut(.22

code

UK.22

Requires

color

number and finish

425

Thinners

851-732

NA.16

UK.10

426

Strip lacquer

Blue

F152-142

NA.16
UK.10

427

Suppliers
was

Suppliers
was

code

UK.22
code

UK.22

Not used

430
431

Paint, acid resistant

(Polyamide cured, air drying


epoxide, white finish)

EC.75/802
activator ACT143

NA.16
UK.10

thinners T17

432

Paint, aluminum

F.S.E.66 OR 66/2
accelerator AC.1

433

EC.75

Paint, epoxy

activator 65

NA.16
UK.10
RIA.16
UK.10

Requires color
number.

Requires color
number.

thinners 17

434

Paint, epoxy finish

EC.75
activator 65

NA.?6

UK.10

Requires color
number.

thinners 17

435

Paint, epoxy finish

EC.751627
activator 65

NA.16
UK.10

thinners 17

436

Replaced by

JFormerly:

Item 465

[DTD.5555]
PR.213

437

Paint, finish aluminum

TT1OB to spec. BS2X27

NA.16

UI<.10

20195-401

Requires color
number.

Ray~heOR

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Item No.

438

439

Specification

Material

Paint, grey green

or

light

grey

Paint, red(coatingforsealing

or

AIRFRAME

Suppliers

Reference

NA.16

EC.75
activator 69

UK.10

[DTD.900/4493]

NA. 1 6

compound
440

441

Remarks

Code

Requires

color

number.

UK.10

Paint, black (torque loaded

Fed-std-595, color

bolts)

no.27038

NA.16
UK.10

Formerly: Paint,
signal red.
Formerly:

Paint, aluminum (heat resistant)

DTD.900/41 24
No.2845

(nonexistent
product number)
442

Not used

460

Formerly: PR-94
(nonexistent PRC
product number).

461

OBSOLETE

462

Primer, sealing

NA.11

[DTD900AA/4254]
Bostik Primer 9252
Adhesive

use

with

NA.12

(Item 338)

UK.19

Formerly:
20-95-301, Item
323.
Primer for

use on

external surfaces

of radomes

specified

as

in

DTD926B.
463

Primer, chrometch

464

Replaced by

465

Primer, epoxy

PP59B

(base)

NA.16

PP59C

(catalyst)

UK.10

Item 497

[BS

33A]

Base PR-213

NA.16
UK.10

activator ACT213
thinners T17

Formerly:

thinners

702

20-95-401

PMBaSreg~Mar.OG

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Item No.

466

Material

Primer, epoxy

Specification

or

Reference

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
NA.16

[BSX33B]

UK.10

Base PR-143

Remarks

Code

Primer

replaces

9169-P-3000

+activator 143
thinners T187
or

[BSX33B]
Base PR 205
Act 205

NOTE
It is recommended that

completed

primer (Item 466)

be

applied

as soon as

possible

after chemical

pretreatment is

to reduce risk of contamination.

NOTE
Where chemical

pretreatment cannot be used, apply PR-30B (Item 497) as a pretreatment primer before
applying (Item 466). Allow PR-30B to air-dry minimum 1 hour before overcoating. The use of PR-30B will
increase chemical resistance, e.g. resistance to Skydrol.

467

NA.16

F273-5076

Activator

UK.10
468

Replaced by

469

OBSOLETE

Item 497

Formerly:

Base

463-07-0048
470

Finish, paint semi matt

NA.28

Base 67273

U1(.84

activator S66122R
thinners C25/90S
471

Finish, paint semi

matt

NA.16

Base GB FE122/627

UK.10

activator GB ACT12?

thinners GB T74
472

Primer, epoxy

1 NA.28

Base 37035A

UK.84

activator 92140

thinners C25/90S, 98064

Air

or

airless

spraying

or

96184
473

OBSOLETE

Formerly: Base
37068

Mar.OGt~e,6"

20-951401

RaytheMI

Aircraft

Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Item No.

474

Material

Specification

Primer, epoxy

(low volatile organic


compound)

or

AIRFRAME

Suppliers

Reference

Remarks

Code

[DTD 5599A3

NA.16

Base F580-2080

UK.10

Apply primer by
spraying

activator F275-160
thinners T701
or

Primer, epoxy, polyamide

Apply primer by

Base F580-2080

Grace blue box.


activator F275-176

Base F 580-2080

Apply primer by
activator F275-175

thinners 850-1241

I brush.

or

850-1264
475

Finish, gloss

Base FE93
activator No.93

476

Antifret primer

(087)

NA.~6

Requires

UK.?O

[MIL-L-23398]

NA.101

[MIL-L-46147]

UK. 708

color

number.

Formerly:
20-95-11, (Item

036)

Perma-Silk G

Molybdenum

disulphide LR
Used

on

8723

800XP

Dee Howard

Dry Lubricant

Thrust Reverser,
Engine- Exhaust
Link Arm

Assembly.
All other models,
refer to specific
vendor information.

477

Epoxy primer

Base 463-6-27

UK.84

hardener X-337

or

thinner TL52-66

UK.78
NA.28

478

Paint, finish aluminum

Formerly:
BS-X-29

(nonexistent
product number)
479

Not used

20-95-401

~Mar.OG

Ral~heon
125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20

Material

Item No.
480

Aircraft Company

STANDARb PRACTICES

Specification

or

Reference

ACT 143

Activator

(466)

AIRFRAME

Suppliers

Remarks

Code
NA.16

Formerly:

UK.10

Activator

3000-7-0160
481

NA.28

Aerodur 42228

Sealer

UK.84
482

Polyurethane topcoat

NA.28

C211100

UK.84
483

Polyurethane

C21/67

UK.84

484

Hardener

S66/22R

NA.28

UK.84
485

use

with Filler

Item 411A

NA.16

Titanine No.85

Activator

For

UI<.10
486

Formerly:

Thinners

Titanine TH.188

(nonexistent
product number)
487

RIA.16

ICI 851-808

Thinners

Formerly: UK.22

UK.?O
488

NA.16

ICI 850-928

Thinners

Formerly: UK.22

UK.10
489

Finish, matt base

490/

Not used

9147-COLOR-3

UK.87

[DTD.900/4053]

UK.39

491
492

Varnish, restoration of
cadmium

493

plating

Conductive

coating (3 part)

(AFS 275)

Anaco B

PR-934

NA.16

Alternative:

UK.10

Resin solution,
graphite and
hardener

EBAEP 3537]
Base 528

306

activator 910
494

OBSOLETE

464

Formerly:
Anti-static additive
RA 2

495

OBSOLETE

Formerly:
Base TT.16

Page

6Mar.OG

20-95-401

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

496

Specification

Material

Item No.

Base SL 5459

Paint, finish epoxide

or

AIRFRAME

Suppliers

Reference

(Color

Remarks

Code
NA.16

as

required)

UK.10

Requires

color

number and finish.

activator CSH 5538


thinners TSL 5373

497

[BS2

Primer, etch

NA.16

32]

UK.10

[DTD.90016064]

pack,
waterproof
chromate

containing etching
primer for general

PR30B

catalyst thinner

Two

TH34B

Contains zinc

use.

chromate.

anti-chill thinner T105

Formerly: PR-105
498

Paint, stove enamel (Low

NA.16

[DTD.332]

temperature)
499

Chromeric

Ut<.lO
NA.42

Cho-shield 2001

paint

UK.73

401A

Primer, silicone adhesive

S-2260

NA.5

(Dow Coming)

UK.7

Used
on

as a

primer

metal to

facilitate
when

bonding
bonding with

silicone adhesives

Duplicate

material. Refer to 20-95-301 Items 370

403A

Duplicate

material. Refer to 20-95-301 Item 369.

404A

Primer

402A

~a)

(bj.

NA.11

Bostik 1007 M

NA.12

Used when
metal

bonding
surfaces

U1(.19
405A

NA.5

[AFS 1234]

Primer, sealing

(365)

U1<.7

P1200

(Red)

P1200

(Clear)

Improves adhesion
of 1

part

part

Rn/ silicone
rubbers

especially

to metal

substrates; air dry,

wipe
406A

(Regular
407A

MA.54

Jet Glo

Polyurethane, exterior

and

High Solid)

Application

per
manufacturers
instructions.

NA.54

Jet Glo Retarder

Retarder

on.

110-830
408A

Polyurethane,
Solid)

exterior

(High

Sterling Paint,

96

or

97 series

NA.73

Application per
manufacturers
instructions.

20-95-401

PRaSreO~Mar.OG

RayZheon

Aircraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

Item No.
409A

IVlaterial
Urethane Enamel, exterior

Sp.cification

or

Rekrence

Suppliers

Application per
manufacturers

Solids)

AA-92-G series

Remarks

Code

INA.51

Alumigrip
Kseries (High

AIRFRAME

instructions.

(Regular

Solids)
410A

Primer, epoxy polyamide

[MIL-P-233771

NA.16

Base513X390

UK.10

Suitable forinternal
and external

protection

Activator 910>(942
Thinner 010X311
411A

Filler

Aerodur

brushing

filler

Hardener S 66/22 R (Item

NA.28
UK.84

484)

Brushing filler.
to fill pin holes

Use
in

fibre reinforced

plastics.

or

Hardener S 66114 (Item

412A)
412A

Hardener

S66/14

RIA.28
UK.14

413A

Primer

Carbozinc 858

For

use

with Filler

Item 411A

UK.?13

Alternative
Carbozine 859

414A

Lacquer, polyurethane

Zinc clad IV B69A8

NA.54

CV 117

NA.16
U1<.10

415A

Polyurethane, coating

FE50/6HV
activator 34

NA.16
UK.10

thinners T127
416A

Polyurethane, coating

FV50 54 HV
activator 34

NA.16

UK.10

thinners T127

417A

High Solid Chromate Primer

S4800

catalyst S3800

Mar.OG~"06"

20-95-401

NA.51

For

with

paint
give
protection against
hydraulic fluid.
use

and sealant to

For

use over

fillet

sealants coated
with

polyurethane.
(color gray)
For

use over

fillet

sealants coated
with epoxide
primer. (color
yellow)

Anti-Corrosive

Coating

Ral~heon

Aircraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME


CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO/CHEMICAL SURFACE FINISHES


i. INFORMATION
The materials listed below must

only be

in

used

conjunction

Raytheon approved manuals

with

and

docu mentation.

2. CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO/CHEMICAL SURFACE FINISHES

Suppliers
Item No.

Material

Specification

501

Nitric acid

HNO,

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

ARS

Commercial

or

Technical Grade

502

Sulfuric acid

H2S04

NA.59

Commercial

UK.94

Technical Grade

or

503

or

ARS

Formerly:

Obsolete

Strontium chromate

(SrCr04)
Agent,
anti-corrosion

fuselage
504

Alocrom film treatment

I [MiI-C-81706]

NA.44

Alocrom 1200

UK.62

keel

Formerly:
[DTD.900/4413]

Alodine 600/1200511200

Repair of anodized
surfaces.

505

Anodic treatment

[MIL-M-3171)
Magnesium (Mg)

ARS

Formerly:
[DTD.S1OC]

ARS

Protection of

for

[MIL-A-8625]
for aluminum
506

Selenious acid

(Al)

H2Se03

magnesium alloy
castings.

(Crystals)
507

508

Chromic acid

[MIL-M-3171]

(brush on)

Dow 19

Chromate treatment

[DTD.S11]
[MIL-M-3171]

(Type VI)

NA.5

Formerly:
anhydride
(Cr03)

UK.7

Chromic

ARS

Note

Dunlop

equipment
509

or

Normalair

Refer to Item No. 508

20-95-501

installed.

RayMheon

AiKraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

Material

Specification

510

Boric acid

H3B03

or

Code

Reference

NA.59
or

511

NA.59

Oleic acid

or

512

Sodium

ARS

ARS

NA.59

hypochlorite

or

ARS

Remarks

Commercial

or

Technical Grade

Commercial

or

Technical Grade

Commercial

or

Technical Grade

Light

sensitive

store below 4" C

(39" Fl.
513

NA.59

Oxalic acid

or

514

Hydrochloric

NA.59

acid

or

515

Bleaching powder

Chloride of lime

(Ajax)

Jun.04~4""

20-95-501

ARS

ARS

ARS

Recommend the
use

of non-chlorine.

Ray~heon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
i. INFORMATION
The materials listed

below must

only

be used

in

conjunction

with

Raytheon approved

manuals and

documentation.

2. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Suppliers
Item No.

Material

601

Chalk, French

602

Desiccantand

Specification

Code

Reference

I-

ARS

Desiccantand

[BS6-22]

ARS

indicator for

Sorbsil

humidity
safety and

Remarks

IARS

[BS 3523]
Silica gel

humidity

indicator for windows


603

or

inward relief valve


604

NA.96

Fluid, leak testing and

[MIL-L-25567, Type 1]

fuel tank

Sherlock Leak detector,

Item No. 246

Type 1,

20-95-201, 001)

cleaning

Formerly:

(Ref.

or

U.S. Alternative:
Neodol 91-6

(38194)

NA.8

Formerly:
Nonidet LE

or

Dobanol

91-6

European Alternative:
Neodol 91-6E
605

Toilet fluid

UK.1

(V2278)

UK.42

Elsanol

(Chemical toilet)
606

Toilet fluid

(Flushing toilet)
607

Metal cleaner and

ARS

Racasan

I
ARS

Phase I

Formerly:

UK.33

Formerly:
Lustre, buffing

polish

composition
For Aluminum and

Magnesium.
ARS

Alternative:

Met-Al I
608
609

610

Finishing composition
Desiccant for storage

Learock Britelea 312

UK.46

[BS 2540]
gel.

ARS

purposes

Silica

Tire

Dunlop Vulcafix

patch

VP3

UK.29

20-95-601

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers

Specification

Material

Item No.

patch

material

611

Tire

612

Bleaching powder for


drinking water tanks

Dunlop

or

Reference

UK.29

Vulcafix VPS/1

Calcium

Remarks

Code

ARS

hypochlorite

or

613

Sterlizing solution

Domestos industrial

Fuel tank cleaner

Biobor JF

grade

U1<.16
NA.37
UK.69

614

ARS

I [QQ-S-571]

Solder

SB5
or

[BSS 2191
Multicore solder

grade

95A

615

Flux

Kestor 1544

ARS

616

Deodorant, germicidal

Monogram DG-19

NA.38

Alternative:

NA.?4

Toilet

sanitizing powder.

toilet
Ardrox 1809
or

any

[AMS-1476A] approved

material
617

Fluid, water dispersal

NA.39

WD-40

UK.70

618

Aluminum foil

reinforced tape

(glass

[FAR 25.853 tall

NA.17

3M 363

UK.30

Highest temperature
metal tape

cloth/silicone)
Formerly:
Flexifirm EZ-25

(adhesivelnon-adhesive).
619

Prestone advanced formula

Fluid, anti-icing toilets

ARS

Ethylene glycol

base.

anti-freezelcoolant
Kilfrost TAF-2

UK.40

Monopropylene glycol
base.

620(a)

Tape

ARS

PTFE
0.5 X 0.005 in.

(12.7

X 0.13

mm)

PTFE

620(b)

0.625 X 0.005 in.

(15.9

Page

2Mar.OG

20-95-601

X 0.13

mm)

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

621

Specification

Material

or

Reference

[AMS 3819, Type I or II Grade


A]
[CCC-C-440]
Type I: Virgin cloth, composed

Lint-free cloth

Code

Remarks
in

NA.91

Grade A: For

ARS

cleaning operations

use

where low residual

surface contamination

of 100% cotton fibers

levels

are

exceptionally

critical.
II:

Virgin cloth, composed


synthetic or blended
synthetic/natural fibers
Type

of 100%

Mutton cloth, cheese cloth,


cotton

Kimwipes Steel

Blue

I-

IARS

622

Distilled water

623

Cleaner

624

Liquid detergent
(household)

I-

IARS

625

De-ionized water

I-

IARS

626

Activated charcoal

I-

IARS

627

Abrasivepaper,

4-42

silicone

carbide

Grade100

UK.83

ARS

Grade 200

Abrasive

grade

as

necessary for the task.

Grade 240

Grade 320
Grade 360

Grade 400
Grade 600A
628

Aluminum foil

tape
(aluminum/acrylic)

[MIL-T-23397B II], [UL 723,


Class L, File R 7311], [FAR
25.853(a)1

NA.17

Most versatile aluminum

UK.30

tape.

ARS

Also refer to Item

425

[FAR 25.853(a)1
438
629

PVC

masking tape

Transoseal to DEF-1313
thickness 0.0025in.

No. 630

(0.0635mm)

20-95-601

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

630

Specification

Material

Masking tape

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

[BS 4J-11]

NA.?7

(Formerly:

215

UK.30

BSJ-10

2309M

2310M

Consideration should be

2364

given

2367

needed. Tapes vary in


both temperature and

2394

to the

performance

(adhesion.

2396
2836
7120

I [A-A-883, Type i)

(Paper tape)

3M 231
3M 5425 UHMW-PE

(Polyethylene plastic
tape)

Refer to manufacturer

information.

631

Replaced by

Item No. 627

632

Replaced by

Item No. 627

633

General adhesive tape

3M 810

NA.17

(Scotch Brand Magic Tape)

UK.30

SBS-46 protective hand cream

ARS

634

Barrier

635

Aluminum wool

636

Abrasive paper,
aluminum oxide

Grade 80

ARS

637

Abrasive pad

Scotch-Brite, Type A, Very

NA.17

Abrasive used for surface

Fine

UK.30

cleaning.

cream

I-

IARS

3M offers many products


under the "Scotch-Brite"
line. Refer to the

application

and

manufacturers
recommendations before

selecting specific
product.
638

Hypodermic syringe

639

Replaced by

640

Tinned copper
strip (BS 2870

I-

IARS

Item No. 627

bonding
C101)

641

Wadding,

642

Tissue, soft paper

0.004

0.5 in.

(0.1x12.7 mm)

soft cellulose

ARS

Part No. for item is:

NA.42

CCK-18-101-0050

IARS

)ARS

643

Wire, copper

0.028 in.

644

Waxed thread

No. 18

(0.71 mm)

dia.

ARS

(22 swg)

Page

4Mar.OG

20-95-601

ARS

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

Specification

Material

645

Wooden/plastic spatula

646

Abrasivepaper, Garnet

or

Reference

Code

Remarks

IARS
ARS

Grade0108
Gradel80
Grade 320

647

Penetration fluid

648

Dye penetrant

649

kit

Dumbell tape

I-

IARS

I-

IARS

I-

IARS

650

Steel wool

Grade 00

ARS

651

Wire, corrosion

[NASM20995]

ARS

resistant 0.032 in.

C32

(0.8 mm)
652

(21 swg)

Sheet, adhesive PVC


0.007 in.

653

dia.

NA.17

No. 471

UK.30

(0.17 mm)

Fablon, clear, adhesive J-

JARS

paper backed

654

Duplicated

655

Soft cloth duster

656

Tape, adhesive double

Item

(sodium hypochlorite). Replaced by

Item No. 512

I-

(Ref. 20-95-501, 001)

JARS

Lassotape No. 60

ARS

[BS 131855]

NA.57

SJ-2053, Type 1005

NA.17

sided

657

Constrained

layer

damper tape

UK.30

Sound dampener tape.


Optimum damping temp.

range
to

-40 to 68 OF

200C)

15 mils

(-40

(0.38

mm)
Aluminum
blend

foillacrylic

NA.17

3M 435

UK.30

tape
NOTE: The difference between
these two

products are:
(l)temperature range
(2)thickness

658

Polish, abrasive

659

Replaced by Item

660

Fluoroglide

661

Preservative, base

13.5 mils
NA.17

Turco 1495

UK.30

I
DINITROL AV 5

UK.86
NA.46
UK.81

Preservative, base

DINITROL AV 50

NA.46
UK.81

metal

663

Glass fiber cloth

664

Compound,

antiseize

I-

(-60

to

200C)

(0.34 mm)

[MIL-P-6888 Type II]

(Ref. 20-95-11, 001)

metal

662

-76 to 680F

[MIL-P-6888],
No. 008

Low temp. vibration


damping. Optimum
damping temp, range

JARS

(MIL-L-25681]

20-95-601

Ral~heon

Aireraft Company

1251HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

665

666

Specification

Material

Fluid, inhibiting fuel

[MIL-L-6081C]

tanks

Grade 1010

Tape, PTfE
glass cloth/silicone

5451/Brown

or

Code

Reference

Amendment 2

Remarks

ARS

Heat seal

Ut<.30

4000F (-73 to

Tape, PTfE
glass cloth/silicone

5453/Brown

NA.17

Heat seal tape, -100 to

U1(.30

4000F (-73 to
8.3 mil

668

Dry ice

(CNS)K1022

669

Liquid Nitrogen (N2)

[BB-N411, Type II]


[AMS 3015]
[DSTAN 68-94]
(GOST) 9293-74

670

2040C),

(0.21 mm)

ARS
NA.83
or

ARS

May

be used for

installation of

landing

gear bushes in torque


links.
NA.71

Click-Patch

to

2040C),

(0.134 mm)

5.3 mil

667

tape, -100

NA.17

May be used for


temporary repair of fuel
leaks on the lower wing
su rface.

671

Milk filter

ARS

672

Cone strainer

ARS

673

White cotton

ARS

674

Rubber

675

Protective

gloves

ARS

gloves

ARS

gloves

Loose

fitting

insulated
or

676

ARS

Brush

or

thermal

leather

chemical resistant.

Refer to manufacturer
recommendations for
correct

677

Sandpaper

Grade 240

type and usage.

ARS

Reinstated.

ARS

Insulated container for

Grade 320
Grade 400

678

Insulated container

handling of liquid
nitrogen.
679

Safety glasses/face

ARS

shield
680

Full face shield

ARS

681

Safety

ARS

682

Protective

683

Electric mantle

shoes

clothing

Mar.OG20-95-601

ARS

Long sleeve shirt and


pants without cuffs.

ARS

Means of

heating
components to a required
temperature.

Raytheon

Aircraft Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES

AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.
684

Specification

Material

or

Reference

Code

ARS

Hot oil bath

Remarks
Means of

heating
a required

components to
temperature.
685

686

Refrigerator

ARS

Means of cooling
components to a required
temperature.

3M Scotch-Weld EPX

NA.17

Applicator

UK.30

Applicators
simultaneously meter,
mix
apply 3M
Scotch-Weld Duo-Pak
adhesive

687

Duplicated

688

Polyester/Silicone tape

material

(isopropyl alcohol). Replaced by

Item 206

(Ref. 20-95-201, 001)

NA.17

3M 8901

cartridges.

UK.30

Single-coated,
coating.

Powder

Alternative:
3M 8902
689

Squeeze

690

Duplicated

691

Hand Cleaner

bottle

material.

Polyethylene
(20 ounce).
Replaced by

squeeze bottle

Item No. 627

ARS

May be used for


degreasing fluid.

NA.94

grade 320

Cupran Special

special hand cleaner


extremely stubborn
dirt caused by oil, paints,
lacquers, resins,

for

adhesives,
692

Obsolete:

693

Aluminum/stainless

Formerly Impact stripping tape (Rubber/acrylic

polish

etc.

paper).
NA.99

[MIL-P6888C, Type II]


[AMS 1650]
Met-All

694

Seam roller.

I-

IARS

Refer to manufacturer
recommendations for
correct

695

Chamois leather

I-

IARS

type and usage.

May

be used for

and

drying

cleaning

transparencies.
698

Fabric refresher

I-

IARS

May

be used to

remove

unpleasant smells on
furnishing materials.
697

Polish, hardwood

I-

IARS

698

Sponge

I-

IARS

699

Abrasive

pad (fine

Scotch-Brite, Non-woven

nylon

NA.17

UK.30

grade)
601A

Litmus paper

I-

IARS

602A

Sodium carbonate

I-

IARS

solution

20-95-601

Raytheon

AiKraft

Company

125/HAWKER CHAPTER 20 STANDARD PRACTICES -AIRFRAME

Suppliers
Item No.

603A

Material

Specification

or

Clamca Wax

Reference

Remarks

Code

UK.??5

May

be used to

surfaces which
be bonded

protect
are not

to

during

cyclising (etching in

sulphuric acid).
604A

Vinyl

electrical

tape

Scotch

Super 33+

RJA.17
UK.30

605A

Biocide for fuel tank

Kathon FP 1.5

606A

Silver

31-1194-1

Masking of wing
lamps.

strobe

607A

Safety

MS20995 C41

0.041 in. dia. for

use on

masking tape
lock wire

NA.109

Primary Turnbuckles and


large fasteners.

Page

8Mar.OG

20-951601